of office building at regent road, hill station, …
TRANSCRIPT
1
REHABILITATION/COMPLETION AND OUTFITTING WORKS
OF
OFFICE BUILDING
AT
REGENT ROAD, HILL STATION, FREETOWN
FOR
SIERRA LEONE FIELD OFFICE
OF
THE AFRICAN DEVELOPMENT BANK (ADB)
VOLUME 2: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DECEMBER, 2016
2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 General ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.0 Excavation and Earthworks ---------------------------------------------------
3.0 Concrete works -----------------------------------------------------------------
4.0 Blockwork -----------------------------------------------------------------------
5.0 Roofing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.0 Woodwork and Ironmongery --------------------------------------------------
7.0 Steel work ------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.0 Metal work -----------------------------------------------------------------------
9.0 Floor, Walls and Ceiling Finishing’s -----------------------------------------
10.0 Glazing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
11.0 Painting and Decorating -------------------------------------------------------
12.0
Electro-Mechanical And Information & Communications Technology
(ICT) System
3
ARCHITECTURAL AND CIVIL WORKS SPECIFICATIONS
4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION OF MATERIALS, GOODS, WORKMANSHIP AND PRICING NOTES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Responsibility
No approval by the Consultants shall in any way relieve the Contractor of his contractual responsibility
for the quality of materials and the standard of workmanship in the finished works.
1.2 Variations
No variations to these Technical Specifications may be made unless approved by the Consultants in
writing.
1.3 Standard Specification
In all instances in which articles and materials specified by reference to a British Standard (BS)
Specification in these Bills, articles and materials complying with an alternative standard specification
may be substituted provided they are:-
a. In no respect lower in standard, grade or quality than those specified.
b. Similar in size and shape to those described.
c. Equally suitable for the purpose for which they are required.
d. Approved in writing by the Consultants prior to their incorporation into the Works.
Description of materials, goods and workmanship given in any one-work section shall apply equally to
all work sections.
All materials, goods and workmanship shall comply with the requirements and recommendations of
the relevant BS or CP where applicable, unless otherwise stated. Any reference in these Bills which is
at variance with any provision in a BS or CP shall be deemed to take precedence over and to over-ride
same.
Notwithstanding any of the foregoing the whole of the materials, goods and workmanship shall be
subject to the approval of the Consultants.
1.4 Proprietary Articles of Materials
In all instances in which articles and materials of a proprietary manufacture are described in these Bills,
articles and materials of a different manufacture may be substituted provided they are: -
a. Similar in design and details, size, shape and quality to those described
b. Equally suitable for the purpose for which they are required.
c. Approved in writing by the Consultants prior to their incorporation into the Works.
5
1.5 Defective Materials or Goods
Any materials and goods that have been damaged, contaminated or deteriorated or have not been
approved or have been condemned shall be rejected and removed from the site within 24 hours and
replaced at the Contractor’s expenses.
1.6 Defective Work
Any crack or otherwise defective work, including deviation from the working details in respect of
setting out, correct lines and levels, size or thickness of members, shall be removed and reconstructed
or otherwise rectified to the approval of the Consultants and the Contractor shall be responsible for all
additional cost incurred, all such remedial work shall be executed without undue delay.
The Consultants reserve the right to check the work executed by the Contractor and his setting out in
such cases and at such times as he may deem fit, there is, however, no duty on his part to make such
checks and any failure by him to observe errors shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities
in these respects.
2.0 EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORKS, ETC
2.1 Site Clearance and Felling of Trees
The Contractor shall include in his prices for clearing the site of all unwanted trees, shrubs, roots, old
foundations and materials arising from the site clearances, etc., that may be deemed necessary by the
Consultants (unless otherwise described).
All the works are to be executed in such manner as to cause the least possible disturbance and in the
most careful manner so as to cause the minimum or annoyance and inconvenience to the owners and
occupiers of the lower floors and adjacent premises and to the public. The Contractor must provide for
properly watering and all other necessary precautions to minimise dust. Where necessary, the
Contractor will be required to provide and erect all necessary dustsheets, tarpaulins, etc.
2.2 Nature of the Ground
The Contractor is deemed to have visited the site and ascertained the nature of the ground to be
excavated and works to be done and must accept all responsibility for the cost of excavation.
The Contractor shall allow for breaking up and removing all obstructions met with in the course of the
excavations, including old foundations, drains, etc., and disinfecting wells, septic tanks and cesspits,
etc., and filling with dry hard-core well consolidated.
Where rocks or similar hard natural materials is encountered during the course of excavations the
Consultant must be notified immediately so that approval or agreement as to its extent and method of
removal is determined before the rock is actually excavated.
2.3 Site Levels
Before commencing any excavation, the Contractor shall satisfy himself that any site levels, whether
spot or contours shown on the drawings are correct. If he is not satisfied with the accuracy of these
levels, he shall at once give written notice to the Consultants; otherwise no claim will be entertained in
respect of the inaccuracy of these levels.
6
2.4 Excavation Measured Net
The quantities of excavation and filling have been ascertained by taking the net dimensions of the void
to the lines and levels shown on the drawing, no allowance has been made for increase in bulk after
excavation or for sloping sides or timbering.
2.5 Excavation Beyond True Line
No more ground shall be removed than is absolutely necessary and if loose, soft or hard ground is met,
the matter shall be reported at once to the Consultant.
Should the Contractor excavate to a greater depth or width than shown on the drawings or as instructed
by the Consultants at his own expenses he shall fill in such greater depth or width of excavation with
concrete as described for foundation.
2.6 Excavation in Rock
Quantities for excavation in rock have been shown as “extra over” the excavation in which rock occurs.
Excavations which in the opinion of the Consultants are best carried out by wedges, levers, compressed
air or other similar plants, has been described as such.
2.7 Support of Sides of Excavations
The sides of excavations shall be supported using any methods the Contractor elects in such a way as
may be sufficient to secure them from falling in and the supports shall be maintained for as long as
necessary.
The Contractor will be held responsible for upholding the sides of all excavations and earthworks and
no claim for additional excavations, concrete or other materials will be considered in this report.
2.8 Disposal of Spoil
The whole of the spoil arising from the excavation (where not required to be returned for infilling at
once) shall be moved to spoil heaps where required on the site for infilling around foundations or to
make up levels under floors and outside lines of building and any surplus is to be removed from the
site, filling has been measured separately
Selected and approved materials from excavation suitable for fill materials shall be kept separate for
re-use as directed.
2.9 Protection of Excavations
The Contractor shall provide all necessary boards or coverings and lay same to protect trenches or
excavations from the effect of inclement weather, if so required by the Consultants.
The Contractor shall allow for keeping the excavations free from water by pumping or bailing.
2.10 Termite Treatment Solution
Not applicable
7
2.11 Approval of Excavations and Concreting Foundations
The Contractor shall report to the Architect when excavations are ready to receive concrete foundation
and shall not proceed with concreting until the excavations have been approved by the Architect. Any
concrete or other work put in before this has been done shall be removed, if so required, by the
Architect. The Contractor shall not fill in over any work until it has been approved by the Architect.
2.12 Filling
Selected materials arising from excavation shall be brought back from the place where it was
temporarily deposited, and the trenches or other excavations to be filled, levelled with spoil in layers
of not more than 6” (150mm) thickness. Each layer shall be carefully rammed and further consolidated
by the addition of water.
All filling to raise the level of the site shall be done in similar layers, carefully rammed and consolidated
to the satisfaction of the Architect.
2.13 Hard-core
Sub-Base
The sub-base shall consist of selected approved laterite materials, spread to the full width of the
formation including verges, compacted as described to the finished level shown on the drawings. The
compacted thickness of the sub-base shall be 6” (150mm).
Base
The base shall consist of selected approved crushed rock spread to the fill width of the sub-base, blinded
with fine materials and compacted as described to the finished level shown on the drawings. The
compacted thickness shall be 6” (150mm).
2.14 Compaction
Compaction of sub-base shall be by means of a 3-wheel rolled weighting not less than 10 tons and
providing a compressing under the rear wheels of not less than 375lbs per roller; the number of passes
of the roller shall be determined from rolling trails and rolling shall commence at the centre line of the
road. Where necessary the materials shall be watered during connection to maintain the moisture
content at the correct level.
Inter locking paving blocks shall be pre-stressed 100mm thick laid to slight slopes to drain off rain
water into surface water drains.
Allow for making Parking Area with approved road paint of approved colour and quality to indicate
number of parking spaces.
3.0 CONCRETE WORK
3.1 General
The following terms whenever used hereafter, shall be taken to have that meanings assigned to them
below.
“Structural props” shall mean those components of the strutting to formwork, which carry the weight
of the concrete and will be retained in position when the shuttering is removed from concrete faces.
8
“Approved or Approval” shall mean, approved by or approval of the Consultants in writing.
“Required” shall mean required by the terms of this Specification or other Contract Documents.
“Satisfaction” shall mean to the satisfaction of the Consultants.
“Testing Authority” shall mean an organisation, approved by the Consultants, fully equipped to carry
out all tests and checks required by this specification. It shall be an independent firm or a laboratory.
Reinforced Concrete Design
The reinforced concrete works has been designed generally in accordance with the recommendations
contained in the Code of Practice 114, 1957, and the Contractor shall comply with the recommendations
made in section2.5 and 2.6 of the Code of Practice, unless specifically excluded or modified hereafter.
A copy of the Code of Practice 114 shall be kept permanently on the site.
Precast and unreinforced Concrete
Precast and unreinforced concrete shall comply with all relevant requirements of this specification.
Rates
The Contractor’s rates for all items relating to the concrete works and tests shall include for carrying
out the work in accordance with all the terms and requirements listed hereafter. The Contractor is to
take full responsibility for providing an adequate key for plastering etc. on the concrete, wire brushing
of timber formwork will be permitted and when metal formwork is used hacking of concrete will be
allowed. The use of a retarder on the formwork will not be permitted in any circumstances.
The Contractor should note that all reinforcement and formwork has been measured separately, except
that for precast work, the rates shall include for formwork and reinforcement as specified.
Defective Work
Where in the opinion of the Consultants any of the finished works or materials or workmanship in any
part of the works do not comply with all relevant requirements of these Preambles, that part of the
Works shall be classed as defective work.
All work classed as defective work, shall be cut and removed from the Work and replaced to the
satisfaction of the Consultant. The extent of the work to be removed and the methods to be used in the
removal and replacement of this work shall be in accordance with the Consultants’ instructions.
3.2 Materials
All materials used in the Works shall comply in all respects with the relevant BS except for any
deviations specifically authorised in subsequent clauses of these preambles.
Concrete shall be made with Portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and water. No other
agent or ingredient shall be added to the concrete.
3.2.1 Cement
The cement shall be Portland cement complying with BS12 and shall be delivered to the site in sealed
bags. The cement shall be protected from damaged by the weather or any other causes at all times
before use. It shall be stored in weather tight and ventilated shed of adequate capacity fitted with a
boarded floor suitably raised clear off the ground. Cement shall be used in rotation in order of its
delivery to site. Any cement, which has become caked or otherwise adversely affected, shall not be
used in any part of the works and is to be removed from the site.
9
3.2.2 Aggregate
Fine aggregate shall be river or pit sand thoroughly washed with clean water until all salts and other
impurities are removed and complying with BS 882.
Coarse aggregate shall be broken synite, washed clean and free from impurities and complying with
BS 882.
Aggregate shall be stored in hard paved self-draining areas with adequate dividing walls to prevent
mixing of different types of aggregates.
For structural concrete trades the minimum size of fine aggregate shall be able to pass a Nr 7 sieve and
the coarse aggregate shall be as listed in Table 1.
The grading of coarse aggregate shall be in accordance with Table 1 BS 882, 1965. The percentage of
broken stone and sand shall be in accordance therewith, subject however, to possible modifications to
be approved by the Consultants.
If the grading of any aggregate changes, the Consultants shall approve the mix content.
All sampling and testing of aggregates shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant
recommendations of BS 882.
At the commencement of the contract, the Contractor shall deliver to the Testing Authority for
inspection and analysis three separate and sufficient samples of each type of aggregate to be used in
the structural concrete grades. For each type of aggregate, the samples shall be taken at the proposed
source of supply at intervals of not less than one day
The quality of water contained in the aggregate shall be determined by approved methods at least once
a day when concrete mixing is in progress.
3.2.3 Water
The water to be used in the works shall be clean and free from impurities.
3.2.4 Reinforcement
Bars for reinforcement shall be mild steel and or high tensile bars complying with BS 4449.
Mesh for reinforcement shall comply with BS 4483. All mesh shall be delivered as flat sheets.
Reinforcement shall be stored clear off the ground.
3.3 Test
3.3.1 Test
All test and checks carried on site shall be in the presence of, or as directed by the Consultants.
The Contractor shall send copies of all test results to the Consultants.
An item is included elsewhere in these Bills for the cost of testing.
No claims will be entertained for any tests called for by the Consultants in consequence of any failure
by the Contractor to comply with these specifications.
3.3.2 Concrete Tests
All concrete test cubes shall be made, cured and tested and the result recorded in accordance with the
recommendation of BS 1881, 1970, unless specifically modified in subsequent clauses of these
Preambles. The testing shall be carried out by the Testing Authority.
10
The test specimen shall be 150mm cubes, made in steel moulds of approved design. The test cubes
shall be taken from typical batches of concrete as directed by and in the presence of the Consultants’
representative without prior notice.
Slump tests of the mixed concrete shall be carried out at regular intervals to be directed by the
Consultant and the results recorded and kept on site.
3.3.3 Load Test
Load tests of complete parts of the structure may be called for by the Consultants whenever a dispute
arises as to the sufficiency of the work done by the Contractor.
The standard of acceptance for structure load test, as stipulated in Clause 6.05 of the BS Code of
Practice 144, is specifically excluded from these Preambles. The test procedure and the standard of
acceptance will be specified by the Consultant. Where the results of such tests indicate that any member
or part of the structure does not comply with these specifications, that part of the structure shall be
classed as defective work.
3.4 Design and Control of Concrete and Mortar Mixes
For structural concrete mixes, made with ordinary Portland Cement, the average 7 and 28 days strength
for each mix shall not be less than that specified in Table 1.
3.4.1 Preliminary Strength
For each structural concrete mix, the twenty-eight days preliminary strength shall be calculated as the
average of all the cubes tested at twenty-eight days and seven days preliminary strength shall be
calculated as the average of all the cubes tested at seven days.
If, for any mix in Table 1, the test results of one set of three cubes, tested at twenty-eight days, fall
below these requirements, the mix shall be rejected, the proportions revised by the Contractor and the
testing procedure repeated.
Results of all preliminary tests shall be sent to the Consultants as soon as they are available.
3.4.2 Work Strength
Work strength cube tests shall be carried out during the contract period.
A sample of the concrete shall be taken on each of the first four days the mix is used on the site. Six
cubes shall be made for each sample, three for tests at seven days and three for tests at twenty-eight
days, and shall be accepted as satisfactory if the crushing strength of all three cubes is greater than
specified for that mix.
Subsequently, a sample of the concrete shall be taken and six cubes made from the sample for every
day of casting of structural concrete or as directed by the Consultants and these cubes shall be tested at
seven and twenty-eight days to provide a record.
The Contractor shall maintain on the site a complete record of the date, time, grade and location in the
works of the mix from which the sample was taken and shall submit this information with the test
results to the Consultants as soon as they are available.
3.4.3 Works Test Failure
If any set of seven days tests results indicates a low twenty-eight days strength to be expected, the
Consultants shall be notified immediately and no props shall be removed from the affected part of the
structure until the cause is determined.
11
If any of twenty-eight days cube test results fall below the specified strength, the Consultants shall be
notified immediately and the cause of the failure investigated.
The extent of the area of the structure affected shall be as defined by the Consultants.
Table 1
Nominal Description
Quantity of Dry Materials
Min. Cube
Strght. 28
days
Max
Size of
agg.
Kg m3 m3 Mn/M2 mm
A. Mass Concrete 1:3:6 213 0.59 0.9
1
16 40
B. Mass Concrete 1:21/2:5 261 0.58 0.8
9
21 18
C. Reinforced and Precast
Concrete 1:2:4
317 0.56 0.8
6
25 18
D. Concrete below water
level mix 1:11/2:3
380 0.52 0.8
0
30 18
Mortar
1:2
1:3
1:4
1:6
224
224
224
224
5
71/2
10
15
3.4.4 Preliminary Strength
Preliminary strength cube tests shall be carried out to check the calculated proportions for each
structural concrete mix.
Preliminary cubes shall be made for each mix from three samples of aggregate and the samples of
cement sent to the approved Testing Authority. From each sample of aggregate six cubes shall be
made, three for test at seven days and three for test at twenty-eight days.
Each set of three cubes tested at twenty-eight days shall be accepted as satisfactory if either or all three
cubes have a crushing strength greater than the preliminary strength or the average strength of the three
cubes is greater than the preliminary strength, and the difference between the greater and the least is
not more than 10% of that average.
All costs and all charges in consequence of the courses of action, the Contractor is directed to follow,
shall be borne by the Contractor.
3.5 Formwork
3.5.1 General
Before construction commences, the Contractor shall notify the Consultants of the general method and
system of formwork he proposes to use.
All joints in the formwork and joints between the formwork and previous work shall be sufficiently
tight to prevent loss of liquid from the concrete through these joints.
Concrete tolerance as described in the general concrete specification shall be adhered to.
No metal part of any device for maintaining formwork in the correct location shall remain permanently
within the specified concrete cover to the main reinforcement.
12
Any bolt holes must be grouted with an approved mix of cement mortar slightly recessed from the
surface of the surrounding concrete.
The position and design of all spacer bolts agreed with the Consultants but under no circumstances will
wire ties passing through the finished concrete be allowed.
The use of concrete retarders or similar preparation on the formwork surfaces will not be permitted.
Shutters shall be lightly oiled immediately after manufacture and just before pouring with approved
mould oil.
The mould oil used shall not come into contact with the reinforcement.
Spacer blocks in reinforcement shall be plastic or cement mortar blocks and to a design approved by
the Consultants.
All fair surfaces and arises shall be adequately protected against damage and surface staining during
the execution of subsequent works.
Formwork shall be removed without risk of shake or vibration to the finished work.
Any finished work, which is subject to the subsequent damage or surface staining, shall be treated as
defective work.
Immediately after striking, the shuttering shall be carefully wire-brushed so as not to destroy the grain
pattern and then lightly oiled.
When not in use, all shuttering, soldiers, walling’s and shorting’s shall be stored flat and thoroughly
protected from the weather.
After removal of the shuttering, the concrete shall be cured by being kept in a wet condition for at least
seven days, in accordance with curing clause.
3.5.2 Mortises, Holes, Chases in Concrete
Fixing blocks and ends of brackets and bars and bolts etc., shall be cast in the concrete at the time of
placing and together with all mortises, holes, apertures, chases and grooves, etc., shall be accurately set
out in the formwork before the concrete is placed. No part of the concrete works shall be cut away for
any such item or for any other reason without the Consultants approval.
The Contractor shall obtain from all Public Utility Authorities complete information of their
requirements regarding conduit pipes, fixing bolts, chases, holes and any other items to be cast or
formed in concrete members subject to the conditions that failure or a sub-contractor to supply such
information shall not be allowed to delay the progress of the contract.
The Contractor shall ensure that all Public Utilities Authorities are informed of his programme for the
structural works at the commencement of the contract.
3.5.3 Propping
The vertical propping to all formwork shall be carried down sufficiently far to provide the necessary
support without damage or overstress or displacement of any part of the construction.
Structural props shall be retained in position until the new construction is sufficiently complete and
strong to support its own weight and any loads to be placed on it during the concrete period.
13
All formwork to soffits shall be constructed so that it can be removed without disturbing the structural
props.
3.5.4 Cambers
Unless otherwise detailed on the drawings, the formwork of all beams and slabs shall be constructed
with appropriate upward camber.
3.5.5 Final Preparation
The internal faces of the formwork may be coated with an approved preparation to prevent adhesion of
the concrete to the forms provided that the use of this preparation will not stain the surface of the
finished concrete.
None of this preparation shall be allowed to touch the reinforcement.
Immediately before the concrete is placed in any of the formwork, the interior of that section shall be
completely cleaned of all extraneous materials including water.
Each section of the formwork to structural members shall be inspected and passed by the Consultants
immediately before concrete is placed in that section.
3.6 Construction and Expansion Joints
3.6.1 Position of Construction Joints
The Contractor shall ensure that all construction joints are arranged to minimise the effect of shrinkage
of the concrete. Generally, the distance
The position of all joints shall be agreed with the Consultants before work is commended and all joints
shall be straight and true.
Concrete placing shall be carried out continuously between consecutive construction joints.
Immediately before the next pour, all joints must be thoroughly cleared and wetted with clean water.
To ensure uniformity of appearance, the following precautions should be taken:
1. Extreme care in uniformity of mix
2. All concrete must be properly compacted to the maximum.
Construction joints between different grades of concrete shall be made and positioned as the
Consultants will direct.
3.6.2 Treatment of Construction Joints
All horizontal joints at the exposed face shall be formed against a straight batten at least 12mm thick.
All construction joints other than horizontal joints shall be formed with proper stop boards and the stop
boards shall be fixed vertically unless otherwise directed.
All construction joints shall be hacked and laitance and honey combed concrete moved from the contact
face before adjacent section is concreted. Hacking shall be terminated 12mm away from the face to be
exposed. Air and water jetting may be used instead of hacking subject to the prior approval of the
Consultants. All loose materials shall be removed from the contact face immediately after hacking or
jetting has been completed.
When work is to be resumed at a construction joint, it shall be swept clean and dressed with neat cement
slurry immediately prior to the pour.
14
All concrete at construction joints is to be shaded from the direct rays of the sun for a period of one day
before casting adjacent concrete.
3.6.3 Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall be positioned and formed in accordance with the details shown on the drawings.
3.7 Reinforcement
3.7.1 General
Reinforcement bending schedules will be provided if requested by the Contractor listing the cut length
and diameter or size and bending dimensions and location of each bar in the work.
Before the bars are cut to length, the Contractor must check that:-
1. Reinforcement schedules are provided for each part of the structure sufficiently in advance of his
concreting programme;
2. Each schedule includes the correct quantities of reinforcement as detailed on the drawing to which
it relates;
3. The grades of reinforcement given in each schedule correspond to those shown on the relevant
drawing.
The Consultant shall be notified of any errors disclosed by these checks.
3.7.2 Bending
All reinforcement bars shall be accurately shaped and bent in a manner that will not injure the material.
Bars shall not be bent hot.
3.7.3 Cleaning
All reinforcement shall be free of all loose mill scale and thoroughly cleaned to remove all loose rust,
oil and grease or other harmful matter immediately prior to being placed in position in the works.
3.7.4 Placing
All reinforcement shall be accurately placed with the correct cover and securely fixed in the positions
shown on the drawings by an approved method and inspected by the Consultants.
The Contractor shall supply and fix all necessary concrete spacers required to maintain the
reinforcement in the correct position. The cost of chairs shall be included in the rates for reinforcement
in these bills.
No metal part of any device used for connecting bars or for maintaining reinforcement in the correct
position against faces exposed to the elements shall remain permanently within the specified minimum
concrete cover to the reinforcement.
3.8 Concreting
3.8.1 General
The Contractor shall ensure that each stage in the contract of the reinforced concrete work including
the making and testing of cubes and the maintenance and calibration of mixing and measuring plant is
supervised and finally inspected by competent and responsible members of his site staff.
15
3.8.2 Proportions
The proportions of materials for concrete shall be accurately measured.
The cement, including bagged cement, and all aggregate shall be measured in weighing batches
approved by the Consultant.
Where aggregates are gauged by volume, accurate gauge boxes shall be constructed to the approval of
the Consultants. The boxes shall be completely filled and the top struck off level.
In measuring the water for each batch, due allowance shall be made for the water content of the
aggregates.
The water content of the aggregates shall be measured before each day’s concreting begins and when
they are to be used immediately after delivery.
3.8.3 Mixing
Concrete shall be mixed in an approved mechanical type concrete mixer. Mixing shall be continued
until there is a uniform distribution of the materials in the mixer and the mass is uniform in colour.
The mixing time for each batch shall not be less than the minimum period recommended by the mixer
manufacturer, checked by an approved timing device, and shall be continued until concrete is uniform
in colour and consistency.
The volume of mixed materials in each batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. Each
batch of concrete shall be discharged completely before the mixer drum is recharged.
The mixer drum shall be thoroughly washed out whenever mixing ceases.
3.8.4 Transport
Concrete shall be transported as quickly as possible from the mixer to its final position without
segregation or loss of any of the ingredients.
All plant and equipment used for transporting concrete shall be kept clean. All containers used for
transporting concrete shall be thoroughly washed out whenever mixing ceases.
Runs or gangways for concrete transporting and main runs for foot traffic shall not be supported by or
allowed to bear on the fixed reinforcement.
3.8.5 Placing
Concrete shall be placed while still sufficiently plastic for adequate compaction.
At all times whenever reinforced concrete is being placed, a competent steel fixer shall be in continuous
attendance on the concrete to adjust and correct the position of any reinforcement which may be
displaced.
The Consultants shall be given due notice that concrete is to be placed in a particular part of the works
when he so directs.
The Contractor shall keep on site a complete record of the works, showing the time and date when
concrete is placed in each part of the works. The records shall be available at all times for inspection
by the Consultants.
16
Once concreting has commenced, it shall proceed continuously without a break until the forms are
filled or a designed joint is reached.
Vigilance will be necessary during pours of lift to ensure that any grout leaks or spillages are thoroughly
brushed off with clean water immediately.
Reinforcement left exposed, projecting from poured concrete, must be protected to avoid danger of rust
staining the completed work.
Subject to the Consultant’s approval, the use of foam rubber or plastic gaskets to ensure no lose of grout
at the foot of lifts will be permitted, provided they do not materially affect the appearance of the finished
work.
3.8.6 Compacting
Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted during placing and shall be carefully worked around all
reinforcement, embedded fixtures and into the sides and corners of the formwork.
All structural concrete shall be compacted by the use of approved mechanical vibrators, preferably the
internal type.
3.8.7 Curing
All surfaces of freshly placed structural concrete shall be covered with an approved material and cured
by being kept continuously moist for seven days.
Soffit and side forms left in position will be regarded as effective in keeping those surfaces moist.
The Contractor shall notify the Consultants of the system and methods of curing he proposes to use for
all structural concrete members before work is commenced.
3.9 Striking of Formwork
3.9.1 General
The structure shall not be distorted, damage or overloaded in any way by the removal of the formwork
from concrete members.
The responsibility for the safe removal of any part of the formwork shall rest with the Contractor.
3.9.2 Minimum Striking Times
The minimum time from completion of placing concrete to the removal of formwork from structural
members shall be determined from the following table or as the Consultants may direct.
LOCATION MINIMUM
STRIKING TIMES
FOR CONCRETE
IN DAYS
Beam and wall sides 1
Columns 1
Beams soffits (structural props left in) 7
Beam structural props 14
Slabs (structural props left in) 3
Slab structural props 10
17
3.10 Finished Work to Concrete Faces
3.10.1 General
After removal of the formwork, no treatment of any kind other than the application of specified finishes
and such treatment as is required for curing the concrete, shall be applied to the concrete faces.
Where rubbed down, plain smooth of fair face finish is specified, the concrete shall be brought to a
perfectly true, smooth, and even surface by rubbing with carborundum stone dipped in cement grout.
Alternatively, the Contractor is permitted at his own expense to provide smooth linings to the form,
which will achieve the required finish without rubbing down. Rubbed down surfaces shall be true to
form and free from all board marks, joint marks, honeycombing, pitting, etc.
3.10.2 Fair Face Finish
Unless otherwise specified, all concrete faces to be exposed in the finished works shall be left as struck
with a plain smooth face true to line and level within the specified tolerance for the work.
These clauses in no way vary the Preambles clause for reinforced concrete. It is essential that in both
the preparation of the formwork and in the casting of the concrete, considerable care should be taken
to achieve a first class uniform appearance. This appearance is of such importance that special effort
will be necessary to avoid staining and to achieve uniformity in colour. No repair or patching up
whatsoever will, be allowed.
After inspection of superfluous fines and similar projections shall be carefully removed. No render or
other applied finish shall be used to obtain a fair face to the concrete.
All concrete face to be exposed in the finished works shall be adequately protected against damage or
surface staining during the execution of subsequent works.
Any finished work, which the Consultant’s shall judge inferior in any respect to the standard of the
relevant, approved sample, or which is subjected to subsequent damage or surface staining shall be
rejected and treated as defective work.
3.10.3 Tolerances
Unless otherwise indicated in the drawings, the setting out dimensions, levels of the finished works,
and sizes of structural elements, shall be within the maximum tolerance given below:
Description Max. Tolerance
1. All dimensions of 3m and over 6mm (¼”)
2. All dimensions less than 3m 3mm (1/8”)
3. Slab to surface levels (all points in
surface) 6mm (¼”)
Surfaces exposed in the finished work shall not depart by more than 5mm for 1500mm straight edge
placed anywhere on the surface.
Columns and walls shall not be more than 6mm out of plumb in any one storey height and not more
than 18mm out of plump in the total height.
Unless otherwise indicated in the drawings, that tolerance to which units are to be cast shall be within
the following:-
18
Description Max. Tolerance
1. All dimensions shall be within 3mm (1/8”)
2. Maximum permissible bow 3mm (1/8”)
3. Maximum permissible twist from any
plain surface as defined by any three
exterior corners
3mm (1/8”)
3.11 Precast Concrete Work
3.11.1 General
These clauses are only intended to cover items of precast concrete work annotated as “fair finish” and
not lintels and the work, which may either be precast or cast in-situ at the contractor’s opinion.
3.11.2 Formwork
The prices of all precast work shall include formwork. Where so described, the finish achieved shall
be fair face and free from joint and board marks. The type of construction of the formwork shall be
approved by the Consultant before any prefabrication commences.
3.11.3 Approval
All panels shall be made available for checking of dimensions and surface finishes and shall be
approved by the Consultant before erection.
3.11.4 Erection
The Contractor shall submit details of the method of erection and supports for the Consultant’s approval
before manufacture of panels commence.
3.11.5 Finish
Considerable care must be taken to obtain a high quality finish.
4.0 BLOCKWORK
4.1 Materials
4.1.1 Cement
The cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement to BS 12 as before described.
4.1.2 Sand
The sand shall be river or pit sand and as before described.
4.1.3 Water
The water shall be clean and free from impurities.
4.1.4 Precast Sandcrete/Concrete Blocks
Concrete blocks shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 2028; 1364’ 1968.
All types of blocks to be made in approved concrete blocks making machine with pallets true to shape
and square edges to all sides.
The external dimensions of the blocks within the tolerance specified shall be as follows: -
Description Max. Tolerance
1. Length 450mm (18”) 3mm (1/8”)
2. Height 200mm(8”) 3mm (1/8”)
3. Thickness of solid
blocks
225/150/100mm
(9”/6”4”) 3mm (1/8”)
19
Sandcrete blocks shall be composed of one part cement to six parts sand by volume and shall have a
minimum compressive strength of 2.8N/mm2 and an average of 3.5N/mm2” in twenty-eight days.
The cement and sand shall be mixed and unless otherwise specified or directed by the Consultants,
turned three times dry until an even colour and consistency is achieved.
Water shall then be added gently through a rose; the quantity of water added being just sufficient to
secure adhesion.
After removal from the machine, the blocks on pallets shall be matured under shade in separate rows,
one block high, with a space between each block for at least 24 hours.
They shall then be removed from pallets but shall not be stacked up or be removed from shade for at
least a further seven days, and then stacked not more than five blocks high in the shade for minimum
of fourteen days and kept well-watered at all times.
No blocks shall be built into any part of the building until they have matured for at least twenty-eight
days. The face of blocks, except where otherwise described shall be left rough for plastering or
rendering.
Blocks of special size and shape shall be cast true to shape, even in size, square and free from flaws or
blowholes with clean and sharp arrises and equal to samples approved by the Consultants. All blocks
shall be carefully handled. Blocks with broken arrises shall not be used.
4.1.5 Samples to be Submitted
At least two weeks before block laying is to commence twelve samples of each type of precast sandcrete
blocks to be used in the Works shall be submitted to the approved Testing Authority. Should the test
be unsatisfactory further samples will be required.
4.1.6 Mortar
The cement and sand mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement and six part of sand by
volume. An approved plastercizer additive may be used in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instruction.
The mortar shall be used within one hour of mixing. Such mortar shall not be used or mixed with any
other mortar after it has begun to set nor shall any other mortar of any kind of previous day’s mixing
be used.
A proper stage shall be provided to receive the mortar when made.
4.1.7 Block Laying
The whole of the blockwork shall be constructed as shown on the drawings. All blocks shall be well
soaked before being laid. Blockwork shall, unless otherwise described, be built in stretcher bond.
All blocks shall be levelled carefully through every second course. All corners, junctions and reveals
shall be properly bonded. All walls, perpends, quions and the like shall be left strictly true, square and
plumb.
Blockwork shall be carried out in uniform manner and no other portion shall be raised more than 1
metre above another at any one time.
Mortar joints shall not exceed 12mm thickness. Special care shall be taken that all vertical joints are
filled with mortar.
20
All faces to be rendered shall have joints raked out to a depth of 12mm.
The Contractor shall properly execute all rough cutting, bonding, weighting and trimming up to soffits,
plumbing angles, building in or cutting and pinning in ends of lintels, sills, joints and the like.
Any defective blocks found in the works shall be cut out and replaced by sound ones at the Contractor’s
expenses.
5.0 ROOFING
5.1 Roofing
Corrugated Aluminum roof sheeting shall be 0.70 thick long span aluminium of approved profile with
10/3” corrugation and to comply with the relevant BS laid and fixed with aluminum J-bolts, felt washers
in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions and or the drawings and instructions.
5.2 Protection
The Contractor is to case up, cover and adequately protect all roofing work from abrasion, impact, the
action of acid, alkalis, oils or solvents, and is to leave the roof in a sound and clean condition.
Walking on the sheet will not be permitted. Ladders or crawl board shall be used.
6.0 WOODWORK AND IRONMONGERY
6.1 General
All timber for carpenter and joiner’s work shall be approved timber properly seasoned, straight cut, free from
sap, twists, large loose or dead knots etc. and shall conform to BS 1186 Part I. Sawn timber shall hold the full
scantlings specified after being sawn.
Wrought timber shall be finished even, clean and smooth. An allowance of 1.5mm will be made for each
wrought face off the size specified unless otherwise stated.
6.2 Workmanship
All workmanship shall be of the best quality. Carpentry and joinery shall be executed in a workmanlike
manner and where not fully detailed on the Drawings, to details prepared by the Contractor but with
the approval of the Consultants, and shall conform to BS 1186 Part II.
All joinery shall be framed up and stacked in a dry place but it is not to be glued, wedged up or delivered
to site until required in the building. Any joinery, which warps or develops shakes or other defect, shall
be replaced by new one before being wedged up.
Frames shall be properly jointed at corners and mortised, tenoned and wedged in the best manner.
The Contractor shall provide all nails, brads, screws, glass paper and tools etc. for the proper execution
of the works. The heads of all nails, brads, etc. shall be punched below the surface.
The Contractor shall properly execute all fitted ends, mitres, housing, returned ends, junctions of
circular ends and straight end as may be necessary. All skirting’s, architraves and other joinery shall
be accurately scribed to any irregular surface to which they abut.
21
Hardwood fixing plugs 100 x 75mm minimum size or approved metal holdfast shall be built into the
joints of blockwork or cast into concrete for fixing door frames or other joinery at the rate of one 800mm
of height. Minimum of 3 fasteners for each side of each doorframe.
The term plugging includes the provision of hardwood plugs of adequate dimension built, or cut and
pinned, or cast into the wall surface and planted on.
Unless otherwise described on the Drawings, all joinery is to be fixed by screwing.
6.3 Preservative Treatment
All timber and joinery work not to be painted shall be treated with two coats of coloured wood
preservative, or other approved preservative before erection. This includes hidden as well as exposed
roof construction.
6.4 Protect Joinery
All fixed joinery, which, in the opinion of the Consultants, is liable to become bruised or damaged in
any way shall be completely, cased and protected by the Contractor until the completion of the works.
6.5 Cleaning Up
The Contractor is to clear out and destroy or remove all cut ends, shavings, and other wood waste from
all parts of the building and the site generally, as the work progresses and at the conclusion of the work.
6.6 Door and Window Frames
Frames shall be to the sizes and details shown on the Drawings. Frames shall be properly fixed with
iron cramps or fixing slips as detailed above under workmanship.
6.7 Plywood
The Plywood to cupboards, etc. shall be a Grade A W.B.P faced with close grained timber free from
furry patches.
6.8 Carcasing (wall plates, roof framing, etc.)
Wall plates shall be fixed with ½” (12mm) diameter mild steel rag bolts firmly grouted into the block
work beam at (2000mm) centres. All joinery shall be halved. See details Drawings.
All edges, rafters, hips, purlins and other structural woodwork shall be formed from the longest length
of timber obtainable.
Where joints are unavoidable they shall be properly scarfed and wedged, the length of the joint being
twice the depth of the member and shall be secured with 12mm diameter mild steel bolt and knots.
6.9 Defective Work
Where defects occur to joints or members generally, including framed and stored joinery, the work
shall be taken down and repaired or renewed including any necessary making good and redecoration at
the Contractor’s expense and to the satisfaction of the Consultants.
22
6.10 Iron Mongery
Ironmongery shall be supplied from an approved supplier. The ironmongery shall be fixed with
matching undamaged screws.
All joinery shall be properly morticed or worked as necessary for fixing the ironmongery.
6.11 Samples
The Contractor shall, if requested, submit samples of all ironmongery for approval before fixing.
6.12 Door signs
Door Signs shall be as specified by the Client or Consultant samples of materials shall be provided by
the Contractor for approval before use. The materials shall be as specified by Client.
6.13 Protection
All ironmongery shall be protected until completion of the works. Any damaged ironmongery shall be
repaired or renewed at the Contractor’s expense and to the satisfaction of the Consultants.
6.14 Completion
On completion all locks shall be fitted with two keys. The keys shall be properly labelled, paired
together and handed to the Consultants.
All ironmongery is to be oiled and adjusted and left in perfect working order.
7.0 STEEL WORK
7.1 Materials
7.1.1 Steel
The steel generally shall comply with BS4360 weldable structural steels. Rolled mild steel section
shall comply with BS 4848 Part 4: Equal and unequal angles. Hollow sections shall comply with
BS4848 Part 2: hollow sections.
7.2 Sundries
Black bolts, screws and knots shall comply with BS 4190
Close tolerance precision bolts, screws and plain washers shall comply with BS 3692.
Black taper washers shall comply with BS 3410.
High strength friction grip bolts shall comply with BS 4395.
Electrodes shall be grade ‘A’ best heavy coated quality and comply with BS 5639.
7.3 Workmanship
7.3.1 Fabrication
Work off-site shall conform with the appropriate Clauses of BS 449: The use of Structural Steel in
Building.
23
All surfaces in contact and all surfaces inaccessible after assembly shall be treated according to these
specifications before assembly.
7.3.2 Welding
Welding procedure shall comply with BS 1856, BS 938 and BS 2642 as appropriate.
The equipment to be used shall be of a type, which produces proper current so that the welder can
produce satisfactory welds.
Welding in shop and on site shall be carried out by experienced and well qualified welders.
Surface preparation and assembly shall be carried out strictly in accordance with BS 1856 and BS 449
and BS 2642 as appropriate.
7.4 Work on Site
All handling of Works during transport and on the site shall be planned and carried out by the Contractor
to proceed in a manner designed to protect the painted surfaces from damage.
All members stored on site shall be laid out on timber sleepers, kept clean and free from construction
dirt. Markings on individual members shall be visible when members have been stacked together.
The position of all points of support for structural steelworks shall be set so that the distances between
any two points joined by a shop fabricated component of structural steel are within ½” (12mm) of the
required dimension. Individual fabricated members shall conform to a degree of accuracy compatible
with the tolerances laid down by this clause.
The position of any column or support wall shall be set out with a tolerance of 1”(25mm) in
100ft.(30m), but no point shall be more than 1”(25mm) away from the position shown on the Drawings.
The Contractor shall erect temporary bracing as necessary to maintain all structural steelworks in the
correct position until the structure is complete.
7.5 Site Connections
The site bolting of permanent connections shall conform to BS 449.
Washers shall be provided under all knots and all bolts shall show after tightening at least two clear
threads beyond the knot. During the tightening operation, the bolt head shall be prevented from
rotating.
Welding on site will not be permitted without the Consultant’s written approval.
7.6 Protection Against Corrosion
All mill scale and rust is to be removed by hand in accordance with Clause 505f CP 2008: 1966. Two
coats red lead primer are to be applied to all structural steelworks before delivery to site. Any damaged
plain surfaces must be made good on site prior to application of a succeeding coat of paint.
Any surfaces, which will be inaccessible after erection, are to be painted before erection.
24
8.0 METALWORK
8.1 Materials
8.1.1 Steel
Steel shall be as described for structural steel works.
Stainless steel shall be of the best quality and fixing shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions
8.1.2 Aluminium
Aluminium extruded sections shall be mill finish with surfaces free from blemishes blur or other defects
and shall comply with BS 1474.
8.1.3 Sundries
All sundry items shall be as described for structural steelworks.
8.1.4 Windows and Doors
The windows and doors are to be generally to the approval of the Consultant. The Contractor shall
submit samples of windows, doors and all ironmongery for approval and once approval has been given
the quality of the sample must be strictly adhered to.
8.2 Workmanship
8.2.1 Fixing the Windows
The Contractor shall be responsible for the testing of the windows and shall ensure that sashes when
opened are perfectly horizontal and line through with corresponding blades on the façade of the
building.
On completion of the works, the Contractor shall leave the window carriers in a clean and perfect
working condition to the satisfaction of the Consultants.
Provide all necessary supports and fixing such as screws, strips, lugs and dowels.
8.2.2 Grounds for built-in Metalwork
Where metalwork is specified to be “built-in” or inserted in the position they are to occupy after the
surrounding or enclosing carcass has been constructed, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor
to ensure that the necessary fixing are incorporated in the carcass.
8.2.3 Alternatively
Construct such ground works as are required to provide a suitable base for the metalwork. Secure built-
in metalwork so that they are plump and true to the shape and dimensions shown on the drawings and
details. Metalwork shall not be fixed in position until after all floor, wall and ceiling surfaces have
been formed or constructed unless otherwise detailed.
8.2.4 Delivery and Fixing
Manufacture, deliver to the site and fix in the buildings all metalwork described in the Bills of
Quantities and as shown on the drawings including the supply and fixing of:-
1. All metal straps, lugs, plugs and dowels
2. All on-site and off-site priming.
3. All furniture specified or shown on the drawings.
25
8.2.5 Protective Coating
All steel that does not have any other form of protective coating, shall be given one coat of red lead
oxide for internal work and two coats of red lead oxide for external work, prior to delivery on site and
the application of the decorative finish specified.
9.0 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING FINISHES
9.1 Materials
Cement shall be ordinary Portland cement to BS 12.
Coloured cement shall also be of BS 12 and shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer.
Sand shall be sea or pit sand to BS 1199.
Water shall be clean and free from impurities.
Glazed wall tiles and fittings shall be to BS 1281.
Ceramic floor tiles and fittings shall be to BS 1286: 1974.
PVC (vinyl) asbestos floor tiles shall be to BS 3260.
Terrazzo floor tiles shall be to BS 4131.
Soft board for ceilings shall be to BS 1142: Part 3.
Adhesive shall be of approved types.
9.1.1 Storage
All cement and aggregates shall be stored in accordance with the provisions set out in Concrete Work.
If the materials become damaged or are contaminated or have deteriorated, they shall be rejected and
shall be removed from the site immediately at the Contractor’s expense.
9.1.2 Samples
Samples of all tiles and other materials shall be submitted to the Consultants for approval before
ordering.
A sample panel of any finishing shall be prepared for approval, if directed. The applied finish shall not
vary in quality or colour form the approved sample.
9.2 Workmanship
9.2.1 Rendering
Adequate drying time shall be allowed for block walls and concrete surfaces to thoroughly dry before
rendering and no rendering shall commence until the walling and concrete is thoroughly matured and
completely dried out surfaces to be rendered shall have the wall joints raked out to a depth of 10mm
and concrete surfaces shall be hacked to form a key. All surfaces should then be thoroughly brushed
down with a wire brush to remove any efflorescence and all loss and flaky particles, grease or oil
patches and then well soaked with water.
The Contractor shall allow for and perform any necessary dubbing out of surfaces in the same materials
as the render specified and leave the surface ready for rendering.
26
Rendering shall consist of one part cement to six parts of sand by volume mixed dry with sufficient
water added to make a workable consistency for immediate use; each batch shall be used within twenty
minutes of mixing or such shorter period as may be directed.
Rendering shall not be less than 12mm thick overall, unless otherwise directed, generally executed in
the best workmanlike manner and shall be finished fair, true and plump and smooth with a wood float.
Before decoration commences, the Consultant shall approve all plasterwork and any hollow areas,
crack, blisters or other defects shall be cut out and made good at the Contractor’s expense.
All making good shall be cut out to a rectangular shape with undercut edges to form a dovetail key, and
shall be finished flush with surrounding rendering.
All arises and internal angles shall be true level or plump. Angles and arrises shall be pencil round
only. Covered angles and rounded edges will only be permitted when specifically required.
Finishing’s around pipes, brackets, fittings and up to frames, skirting and the like shall be made good
as required and all fittings etc., left clean, tidy and in good perfect order on completion.
9.2.2 Wall Tiles
The walls shall be prepared for tiling in accordance with the recommendation of BS 5385: Part 1:
1976.
Glazed ceramic tiles shall be fixed to rendered surfaces with an approved adhesive in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions and finished true and plump. External angles and exposed top courses
shall be provided with round top edge titles.
9.2.3 Cement and Sand Beds and Backings
The cement and sand shall be mixed in the proportions specified. Immediately before laying, the
surface shall be finished over with a grout of one part of cement to one part of fine sand by volume.
The paving shall be placed, levelled with a float and thoroughly compacted with screeding board.
Surfaces shall be finished as described appropriate for the finishing materials to be laid or fixed.
Beds shall be kept damp for at least seven days after laying to allow for proper curing.
9.2.4 Vitrified Colour Ceramic Floor Tiles
Lay tiles strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction and to the satisfaction of the
Consultants using adhesive specified by the manufacturer.
On completion, run over tiles with a white cement grout, wipe off all surplus and leave clean.
9.2.5 PVC Vinyl Asbestos Floor Tiles
The cement and sand trowelled bed to receive PVC tiles must be absolutely level and to the satisfaction
of the Consultants before tiling may commence.
Lay the tiles strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions using adhesive specified by the
manufacturer. All tiles must be laid to the complete satisfaction of the Consultants.
9.2.6 Softboard Ceiling
Softboard to ceiling shall be as specified and fixed as shown on the drawings to the complete
satisfaction of the Consultants.
27
10.0 GLAZING
10.1 Materials
10.1.1 Glass
The glass shall be to BS 952; 1964 and free from all defects. Deliver glass to site in proper containers
with maker’s name, guarantee, type of glass and thickness or weight marked on the outside of the
containers. Samples of glass are to be supplied for approval.
10.1.2 Putty
The putty to be metal casement putty by an approved manufacturer. Deliver putty (and glazing
compounds) in original sealed tins, bearing the manufacturer’s labels.
10.1.3 Mirrors
Mirrors shall be 6mm silvering quality polished plate or float glass with damp-proof coating to back
and with polished edges.
10.2 Workmanship
10.2.1 Glazing
Execute all glazing in accordance with the best practices of the trade, generally as laid out in CP 152:
1966.
Timber rebates to be cleaned, primed and painted one coat lacquer. Metal rebates to be cleaned and
primed. Glass to be cut to size with a small clearance and to be back puttied, pegged for metal rebates
and neatly front puttied. Take care to ensure putty does not appear beyond sight lines.
Glass to internal doors and screens and other places where vibration may occur shall be bedded in wash
leather with beds, fixed with brass and sups and screws.
Glaze all windows except toilet windows with float sheet tinted/shatter proof glass as specified. Glaze
toilet windows generally with obscured glass as specified.
10.2.2 Louvre Blades
Carefully cut louvre blades to exact lengths, all edges and corners ground smooth and rounded and set
blades in louvre clips, which shall then be carefully adjusted to hold blades without rattling.
10.2.3 Clearing
Clean the glass inside and outside on completion to the satisfaction of the Consultants. Replace with
new, all cracked, scratched, damaged or defective glass.
10.2.4 Replacement
Provide 1 box per floor of each type of louvre blades specified and hand over to employer on
completion.
11.0 PAINTING AND DECORATING
11.1 Generally
11.1.1 Climate
Advise the manufacturers that the paint is to be used in a coastal tropical climate and obtain their
guarantee of the suitability of materials supplied.
28
11.1.2 Workmen
None other than skilled workmen are to be employed, except apprentices and labourers. A properly
trained foreman is to be constantly on the job whilst the work is proceeding.
11.1.3 Scaffolding
Provide all the necessary scaffolding, tools, appliances and everything else required for the execution
of the work.
11.1.4 Dust Sheets
Provide ample supply of clean dust sheets for the adequate protection of floors, fixtures and surfaces
not to be painted.
11.1.5 Fittings
All metal fittings and fastenings not to be painted are to be removed before the preparatory processes
are commenced, cleaned and refixed in position on completion. Switches and similar items, which
cannot conveniently be removed, shall be completely masked during the painting operations.
11.2 Materials
All paints and paint materials shall be obtained from approved supplier and be of approved brands
suitable for a coastal tropical area.
Primer for concrete, blockwork and rendered surfaces shall be alkali resisting pigmented primer (non-
saponifiable) applied in one coat.
Primer for ungalvanised, unprimed metalwork shall be leadbased priming paint to BS 2523; Type B or
Type C.
Primer for galvanised and sheradised metalwork shall be calcium plumbate primer to BS 3698 Type A.
Primer for woodwork shall be lead free primer to suite the gloss paint.
Linseed oil to be BS 242; 1969.
Stopping to be composed of nine parts putty in accordance with BS 544 to one part of stiff white lead
in accordance with BS 238; 1967.
Knotting to be to BS 1366; 1971.
Woodfiller to be paste type as approved to matching stain colour. Do not mix filler with stain.
Turpentine to be to BS 244; 1962.
Emulsion paint shall be any one of the following types; acrylic polymer, ethylene/vinyl acetate
polymer, versatate co-polymer and shall not be diluted with water except in strict accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. The mist coat shall be mixed with a recommended petrifying liquid instead
of water.
Gloss paint shall be ready mixed to the type approved and having a high gloss or enamel finish. The
quality used shall be either exterior or interior quality according to the position of the work. The
manufacturer’s recommended undercoating shall be used.
Proprietary types of paint such as “Sandtex” shall be from approved manufacturers.
29
Deliver paint to the site in the manufacturer’s sealed containers bearing the manufacturer’s names,
guarantees, and type of paint and quality market on the outside.
11.3 Workmanship
11.3.1 Painting Schedule
A painting schedule will be provided prior to the execution of the work to enable work to proceed at
the appropriate time. The schedule will give all the necessary information on colour, type of paint,
surfaces to be coated and method of application.
11.3.2 Combination Coats
Paints and finishes, applied in any one combination of coats for any one surface, shall be provided by
one manufacturer and be guaranteed by him to be satisfactory when used in successive coats, except
for red lead and other metal primer.
11.3.3 Mixing
All paints shall be thoroughly mixed before use, unless there is a specified instruction to the contrary
on the container e.g. does not stir. They shall be so stored as to avoid exposure to extremes of
temperature.
All paints are to be mixed, used and applied strictly in accordance with their manufacturers’
recommendations. For non-specified paints, work shall be executed in accordance with the best
practices of the trade, generally as laid out in CP 231; 1966.
11.3.4 Thinning
Paints shall not be thinned without specified approval but, when necessary, thinning shall be carried
out with the type of thinner and in the proportion recommended by the manufacturers of the paint.
Gloss paints and varnishes shall not be thinned under any circumstances.
11.3.5 Moulds and Mildew
All moulds or mildew must be thoroughly removed from surfaces to receive paint work by the
application of approved fungicidal solution.
11.3.6 Application
Primers shall be applied by brush, subsequent coats by brush, spray or roller as has been previously
agreed. Surfaces must be free from condensation and dusted or wiped with a rag to ensure freedom
from dust or dirt.
Surfaces shall be evenly coated and free from runs, skins, dirt and bristles. Remove all drips, splashes
and overpainting to edges, touch up and make good. Remove all finger marks and leave clean.
11.3.7 Dried and Rubbed Down
All coats of paint shall be thoroughly dry before the subsequent coat is applied. Each coat shall be
rubbed down with fine sand paper.
11.3.8 Weather
No painting is to be done on exterior work when atmosphere is laden with dust, during rainy or misty
weather or on surfaces not thoroughly dry.
11.3.9 Protection
Protect adjacent surfaces from damage, stain and paint splatter. Paint shall be removed from all such
surfaces where not required.
30
11.3.10 Rendered Surfaces (Concrete)
New rendered surfaces shall be allowed the maximum time possible for drying out, no paint shall be
applied until they are thoroughly dry. Efflorescence present on the surface shall be wiped down using
a dry coarse rag, followed by a rag dampened with clean water and allowed to dry off. Surface so
treated shall be inspected after four to seven days to ensure that they are fit for decoration. Each
undercoat shall be rubbed down lightly with glass paper and cleaned down before application of the
following coats. Each coat shall be hard, dry and free from condensation before the next is applied.
11.3.11 Woodwork
Shall not be painted when wet or during or immediately before rains. Joints, tongues, grooves and
inaccessible ends shall be primed before assembly. Door and window frames, etc., shall be back primed
before erection and given two coats on exposed end grains. Woodwork to be painted shall be knotted,
primed and stopped in workshop before delivery to the site or as soon as possible on site and stored.
All top, bottom and side of joinery shall be given the full number of coats specified where accessible.
Large knots to be removed and replaced with sound wood; small knots to be treated with two coats of
knotting. Fill all holes and irregularities and rub down with sandpaper to a smooth even finish. Touch
up priming where damages occur during the works before commencing painting.
Hardwood not required to be painted, clean and rub down with wire wool, apply one coat of
polyurethane and allow to dry. Rub down with wire wool again and apply a further coat of
polyurethane; allow to dry and repeat the process once more.
11.3.12 Metalwork
All unprimed metalwork which is to be painted shall be cleaned down by wire brushing and scrapping,
to remove all possible scale, dirt or grease and shall be primed immediately afterwards.
Prime interior of metalwork with one coat red lead.
Prime exterior metalwork (including stair rails and balustrades) with two coats “approved primer”,
strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction.
Where galvanised surfaces have become damaged, the Contractor shall touch up the damaged areas
with an approved cold galvanising solution before painting.
31
12.0 ELECTRO-MECHANICAL AND INFORMATION & COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY
(ICT) SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND
COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRO-MECHANICAL AND INFORMATION & COMMUNICATIONS
TECHNOLOGY (ICT) SYSTEM INSTALLATION FOR OFFICE BUILDING AT REGENT ROAD,
HILL STATION, FREETOWN FOR SIERRA LEONE FIELD OFFICE OF THE AFRICAN
DEVELOPMENT BANK (ADB)
32
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING SERVICE INSTALLATION
CONTENTS
1.0 TENDER CONDITIONS
2.0 DESIGN CRITERIA TENDER SPECIFICATIONS
3.0 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING SERVICE INSTALLATION
4.0 SCHEDULE OF APPENDICES
33
1.0 TENDER CONDITIONS:
1.1 Introduction
The purpose of this document and supporting drawings/data is to illustrate and describe the Contract
Works associated with the Electrical Engineering Services (EES) Systems + Applications.
The information contained in the Technical Specification and depicted on the Drawings is for the
purpose of obtaining a competitive Tender for the EES Contract Works
The Contractor must allow for liaising with other trades to ensure that the EES Installation is properly
coordinated / integrated into the Contract Works / Building Complex as a whole.
It is recommended that the Contractor visits the site in order to acquaint himself with the existing site
conditions, (access, existing site infrastructure services etc.), that might affect his Tender.
No claim arising out of any misunderstanding or neglect shall be considered.
1.2 Extent of the Contract Works
The EES Contract Works shall include all the necessary labour and materials and all
construction/building works, together with such tests, adjustments and commissioning of the electrical
engineering services systems and applications as are required to form a “complete installation”.
The BES Contract Works “Complete Installation” shall mean not only the major items of plant and
equipment detailed in this Document, but all of the incidentals/sundry components required for the
complete execution of the Contract Works.
1.3 Contract Works: Design Development
The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out the design development work in connection with
the EES Contract Works; this is in addition to that of the fundamental design of the electrical
engineering services systems and applications specified within this Document and supporting
drawings/data.
The Contractor shall allow, within his Tender, for the following particular design development
calculations:
(i) Lighting
To determine the required number of circuits, protection devices and cable sizes, based upon the
completed lighting installation drawings developed.
(ii) Small Power Requirement
To determine the required number of circuits, protection devices and cable sizes, based the
completed small power installation drawings developed.
(iii) Distribution Boards
To determine the required rating of protection devices, cable sizes and appropriate load balancing
illustration, based upon the completed lighting and small power installation drawings developed.
(iv) Incoming Electrical Power Supply (Panel board)
To determine the required rating and size of MCCB’s and associated protection devices/cable sizes
based upon completed installation drawings and electrical schematic diagram.
The Contractor shall provide the M+E Engineer with the design development drawings / data for
his consideration, prior to the ordering of any capital plant.
The accuracy of such information, as submitted, shall remain the responsibility of the Contractor.
34
1.4 Contract Works: Named Plant, Equipment+ Materials
The fundamental design of the EES Systems + Applications has been based upon the named
manufacturers/suppliers of the plant, equipment and materials, as recorded within this
Document.
The operating characteristics, performance and overall quality of the named plant, equipment and
materials have been validated against the design criteria, setting the minimum standard to be achieved.
The overall space planning of the building complex has taken into account the physical weight
dimensions of the named plant and equipment, together with the space required around the plant and
equipment for maintenance and the future replacement of the individual components and /or their
complete renewal.
Items of plant and equipment, as named, have been sourced from a number of international
manufacturers/suppliers, acknowledged as having had experience in providing equipment suitable for
the intended use/application, with proven longevity under operation in harsh climatic conditions.
The Contractor shall be at liberty to consider alternative manufacturers / suppliers; in doing so, the
Contractor is required to complete the Tender Declaration Form – Plant + Equipment and to submit the
latter with his Tender.
In submitting alternative names, the Tenderer shall be expected to have checked that his proposed
manufacturers / suppliers’ plant and equipment satisfies the overall performance, quality and
dimensional requirements when compared to the manufacturer / supplier as named within this
Document.
The Contractor shall be required to provide, at the time of submitting his Tender, full technical details
of any proposed alternative manufacturer / supplier of the following:
(i). Main Electrical LV Panel board, Fused Switch Disconnectors + Distribution Boards
(ii). Lighting Fittings and Switches
(iii). Small Power Requirement
1.5 Contract Works : Regulations and Standards
The EES Installation shall comply with the Technical Specification (s) set out within this Document
with all relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice and with all other relevant Statutory
Instruments and Regulations current at the time of Tender.
1.6 Contract Works: Materials and Workmanship
All materials must be suitable for their intended use/application and must comply with the relevant
Standards and be installed in accordance with the Codes of Practice and Manufacturer’s
recommendations.
All site operatives must be suitable qualified and experienced for the work that they are assigned to
carry out. All workmanship must be of a good standard.
The Project Architect and the M+E Engineer shall reject poor materials and workmanship and it shall
be the contractor’s responsibility to put right such rejected Contract Works at his own expense.
1.7 Contract Works: Programme
The Contractor shall allow adequate time within his overall Contract Works Programme for presenting
and receiving comments to / from the Project Architect / M+E Engineer with respect to:
i. Design Development Information
ii. Installation Drawings
iii. Testing and Commissioning Procedures
35
1.8 Supervision of the Contract Works
The Contractor shall employ a competent, qualified and experienced Principal Resident Site Engineer,
who shall be in charge of the Contract Works during all working hours and in attendance until the
whole of the Contract Works has been completed and accepted on behalf of the Employer/User.
The Contractor’s appointed representative shall attend meetings on site and be empowered to answer
on behalf of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall appoint a Deputy Site Engineer to cover for periods of absence of the Principal
Residence Site Engineer.
1.9 Coordination of the Contract Works
The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of the all Electrical Engineering Services
Systems, such that each may be installed in a manner which ensures the correct performance of the
system and avoids conflict in the positioning of the various Building Engineering Services (BES)
elements.
The Contractor shall include within his Tender for the detailed development of his Installation
Drawings to contribute to a fully coordinated and integrated BES Installation.
1.10 Contract Works: Installation Drawings
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Project Architect/ M+E Engineer, Installation Drawings
for all of the EES systems to be installed under the Contract Works, together with such schedules, data,
calculations, systems schematics and other supplementary details necessary to execute the Contract
Works.
The Installation Drawings shall be fully detailed, depicting the positions and physical dimensions of all
of the BES Systems Components.
The minimum scale for the production of the coordinated Installation Drawings shall be:-
LV Panelboard Switch room: 1: 20
Floor Plans 1: 50
Site Services 1: 200
The Contractor shall make due allowance for the preparation of the EES Installation Drawings within
his Tender and within his Overall Contract Works Programme
1.11 Contract Works: Fixing of the Services Installation
The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for the sizing, supply and installation of all supports/fixings
for the electrical engineering services.
1.12 Contract Works: Builders Work Builders Work in connection with (BWIC) the EES Contract Works, such as duct, holes, basses, chasses
etc. shall be detailed by the Contractor as separated drawings.
The Contractor shall inform the Project Architect/M+E Engineer of any BWIC that may affect the
building structure and/or envelope.
The Contractor shall make due allowance for the detailing of the BWIC requirements within his Tender
and within his overall Contract Works Programme
36
1.13 Contract Works: Testing and Commissioning
The Contractor shall ensure that suitably qualified and experienced personnel, together with the
necessary instrumentation, are available at the time required to set to work, test and commission the
mechanical and electrical engineering services systems.
The format of the testing and commissioning procedure, together with the details to be entered on the
test sheets, shall be agreed with the M+E Engineer.
The Contractor shall agree with the Project Architect/M+E Engineer a Programme for the testing and
commissioning of the various EES Systems.
The M+E Engineer shall retain a detailed record of all the testing and commissioning procedures on
site for examination.
The testing and commissioning shall demonstrate, amongst other things, that:
(i) All electrical circuits are properly electrically and physically protected and earthed.
(ii) All electrical switchgears are neatly positioned, leveled and secured.
1.14 Contract Works: Record Documentation
The Contractor shall supply to the Project Architect/M+E Engineer, as a prerequisite to the Practical
Completion of the Contract Works, a comprehensive record of the completed mechanical and electrical
engineering services installation. This shall take the form of:-
i. AutoCAD based disk detailing all INSTALLATION DRAWINGS.
ii. 4 No. Dyeline prints of all INSTALLATION DRAWINGS.
iii. 4 No. Bound A4 copies of the OPERATING + MAINTENANCE MANUALS, to include:-
a) Copies of all testing and commissioning certificates.
b) Manufacturers/Suppliers technical data for the maintenance and operation of all plant and
equipment, together with a schedule of spares provided.
c) Schedule recording all installation drawings.
The Contractor shall maintain accurate records of all testing and commissioning procedures throughout
the course of the Contract Works for incorporation into the O + M Manuals.
The Contractor shall have available a DRAFT COPY of the Record Documentation for inspection by
the Project Architect/M+E Engineer prior to Practical Completion of the Contract Works.
1.15 Contract Works: Instruction of Employer’s Staff
The Contractor shall include within his tender, under the heading “Record Documentation”, from the
instruction of the Employer’s Appointed Maintenance Staff on the operation of the EES Systems, to
include emergency/breakdown procedures.
The instruction shall take place following the testing and setting to work of the EES Systems.
A “Draft” copy of the Operating + Maintenance Manual shall be made available for review by the
Employer’s representative during this period.
1.16 Contract Works: Variations
All instructions, variations, additions to the Contract Works are only valid when agreed to/signed for
by the Project Architect (Manager).
Should the Contractor receive, during the progress of the Contract Works, any instruction for additional
work, Which he considers may affect the completion of the Contract Works within the prescribed
Contract Period, he shall be required to formally notify the Project Architect in writing within seven
days of the receipt of such and instruction.
37
1.17 Contract Works: Practical Completion
The Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting the EES Installation and shall have prepared his own
defects inspection list and shall duly attend to the same, prior to offering the completed EES Installation
to the Project Architect (Manager) for inspection and acceptance on behalf of the Employer.
The Project Architect/M+E Engineers’ inspection shall be one of formality and should not be
considered as an inspection for the purposes of forming the Contractor’s final list scheduling the
Outstanding Works.
The Contractor shall agree with the Project Architect/M+E Engineer, a suitable date for the FINAL
INSPECTION.
1.18 Maintenance of Services
Any works necessitating interruption or termination of any services required to be maintained or
serving areas outside of the designated works area shall be thoroughly coordinated and not be initiated
until a Programme of works indicating disruption time scales and/or temporary arrangements has been
submitted and agreed fully by all concerned.
1.19 Contract Works: Defects Liability Period
The Contractor shall be responsible under the Contractor for addressing/correcting all of the EES
Contract Works defects occurring within a period of SIX MONTHS, commencing from the date of the
PRACTICAL COMPLETION CERTIFICATION.
During the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall provide prompt and effective “call back”
service to attend to any urgent faults which may develop and which would affect the day-to-day
function of the building complex and facilities.
The Contractor shall retain a written log on site recording the details of the defect – i e, date notified/date
attended, fault identified, action taken, together with any ongoing investigations/remedial work.
1.20 Contract Works: Provisional Sums
Provisional Sums have been entered on the Electrical Engineering Services Installation – Tender
Breakdown – Form of Tender Document.
These Provisional Sums provide for Works of Costs, which cannot be foreseen, defined or detailed at
the time of preparing the EES Contract Works Tender Documentation.
The Provisional Sums include for the Contractor’s overheads and profit and therefore are to be included
in the Tender Breakdown as net sums without any further additions.
Instructions as to the deduction of expenditure in whole or in part of the Provisional Sums shall be
instructed by the Project Architect (Manager) during the course of the Contract Works, as found
necessary.
1.21 Contract Works: Schedule of Rates The Contractor shall submit within his Tender, a priced copy of the Schedule Rates.
Each of the elemental rates shall include for all necessary labour and materials, together with overheads
and profit.
The declared Tender rates shall be used to evaluate all Works added, deleted and/ or amended against
the Contract Works Tender.
The Project Architect (Manager) reserves the right to reject any tender which does not include the
completed Schedule of Rates, returned with the Tender Submission.
38
1.22 Contract Works: Tender Breakdown
The Contractor shall, when submitting his Tender for the Contract Works, enter on the Tender
Breakdown – Form of Tender Document, Lump Sum Costs for each of the Electrical Engineering
Services elements as prescribed.
The Project Architect reserves the right to reject any Tender, which does not include the completed
Tender Breakdown.
39
2.0 TENDER SPECIFICATIONS:
2.1 Introduction:
2.2 General:
The Power Distribution System (PDS) for the Office Building at Regent Road, Hill Station, Freetown for
Sierra Leone Field Office at the African Development Bank (ADB) is to be supplied from a 250A, 12-
way MCCB LV Panelboard located in the LV Panelboard Switchroom. The entire electrical system shall
be based on a 230/400V, 3 phase and neutral, 50 Hz, Terra Neutral- Separate (TN-S) system.
2.3 Regulations and standards
The complete installation shall comply with all relevant British Standard and, where indicated, with other
standards and specifications and all amendments thereto. A Certificate of compliance shall be provided
for the Project Architect, to be included in the handover.
2.4 Design parameters
Division of installations:
The installation shall be divided into circuits as necessary to:
a. Avoid danger and minimize inconvenience in the event of a fault
b. Facilitate safe inspection, testing and maintenance
c. Take account of hazards that may arise from the failure of a single circuit such as a lighting circuit
d. Reduce the possibility of unwanted tripping of Residual Current Devices (RCD) due to excessive
protective conductor current not due to fault
e. Mitigate the effect of electro-magnetic disturbances
f. Prevent the indirect energizing of a circuit intended to be isolated
3.0 Prospective fault current (Pfc)
If a protective device is to operate safety, its rated short-circuit capacity must be not less than the
prospective fault current at the point where it is installed.
The distributor needs to be consulted as to the prospective fault current at the origin of the installation.
4.0 Earth loop impedance external (Ze)
The Ze is to comply with British Standards.
5.0 Voltage droop
The voltage drop between the origin of the installation and a lighting point should not exceed 3% of the
nominal voltage and for other current using equipment or socket outlets should not exceed 5%
6.0 Electrical installation:
6.1 General.
The contractor shall procure, install, inspect, test and commission the entire electrical system within the
proposed building as stated within this Specification and associated drawings.
6.2 Main supply.
The main supply should comprise of a TN-S system at 400V, 50 Hz. The incoming supply cable from
the Dedicated Power Transformer located within the Generator House should be run and terminated to a
250A TP&S Fused Switch Disconnector located in the Transformer Room and cable run underground
via a service duct system as shown on the drawing.
The contractor is to liaise with the Electrical Distribution Service Authority (EDSA) to arrange for a
Permit to Work for the connection of the main supply cable to and from the Power Transformer.
40
The HT cable is to have the following characteristics complete with indoor termination kits as required
and in accordance with Local Regulations:
a. Be a minimum 120mm2, 3 core, XLPE/PVC/PVC cable with wire shield rated for 0.6/11kV
b. Have a current carrying capacity of 285 Amps at 320C ambient temperature
The LV supply from the Transformer should be terminated to the ATS-2 through a TP&N Fuse
Disconnector Switch located within the Transformer Room. The LV supply cable from the ATS should
then enter the building through a uPVC pipe or similar.
The LV cable is to have the following characteristics complete with cable lug termination as required and
in accordance with International/Local Regulations:
a. Be a minimum 95mm2, 4 core, XLPE/PVC/SWA/PVC cable rated for 0.6/1kV
b. Have a current carrying capacity of 250 Amps at 320C ambient temperature
7.0 Electrical service ducts
7.1 Service duct detail.
The supply cable is to be laid or drawn through a combine services duct.
7.2 Trenching:
No work shall commence until the Contractor has taken all reasonable steps to ensure that the area is free
of all cable, drains and other services. A cable Avoidance Tool (CAT0 and Signal Generator (Genny) or
any other equivalent cable detector tool is to be used to detect services. Unless otherwise indicate the
following is required:
a. Excavations within 600mm of existing services shall be by handing digging. Any damage to
services shall be reported immediately to the Project Architect/M&E Engineer. No repairs or
replacement shall be done unless the Project Architect/M&E Engineer gives approval. All works
will be at the Contractors expense.
b. Cables shall be buried at a sufficient depth to avoid being damaged by any disturbance of the ground
reasonably likely to occur. Trenches shall be excavated to the depth specified by the Project
Engineer.
c. All cable enclosed within trenches are to be installed in accordance with the recognized
specification. The Contractor shall ensure an accurate record of the location is made and passed to
the Project Architect/M&E Engineer
d. Warning tapes and covers. A traceable warning tape shall be placed above the cable duct.
The following will be required:
e. The tape shall be laid at a depth of 300mm below the finished surface level except where the depth
of paved area exceeds 300mm in which case the tape shall be laid immediately below the base.
f. Warming tapes shall be traceable and be not less than 150mm wide and 0.1mm thick.
They shall be yellow in colour and bear continuously repeated legend ‘CAUTION ELECTRIC
CABLE BELOW’’, or similar, in black letters.
g. Service entry:
Cable entry to the building shall be installed in a cable duct. The cable duct is to be sized and located
in a suitable location. The cable duct is to be sealed with appropriate material to prevent the ingress
of moisture or vermin. The bore shall be smooth and entirely free from rough spots and sharp edges.
41
Correct size of duct shall be sized for the cable to be drawn in and the bending radius of the cable
shall comply with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8.0 LV electrical equipment
8.1 General:
All intake equipment is to be installed indoors. The main supply is to be installed via a lockable isolator
before entering the distribution board.
8.2 Main intake isolator:
The main intake isolator will be installed directly below the distribution board. The isolator is to have the
ability to be locked off in the OFF position.
8.3 Distribution board:
The distribution board shall comply with the relevant British Standards as well as the follow:
A It shall be suitable for surface mounting or concealed in blockworks, have lockable doors (supplier
with two keys) and be controlled by an on-load integral disconnector.
Keys shall be labelled and handed to the Project Architect/M&E Engineer at practical completion.
B Where spare ways are provided they shall be fitted with blanking pieces
C All neutral and earth connections shall be made to bars within the distribution board each
connection having an individual terminal. The neutral shall have a removable link to facilitate
testing.
D The connections to the neutral and earth bar shall be made to correspond with the order of the phase
connection.
E All conductors terminated at the board shall be appropriately marked with cable ring markers
indicating the circuit number and phase connection.
F All covers, doors and access plates into the distribution board shall be gasketed to achieve a
minimum protection of IP 32.
G Access for cabling shall be from the front only. Shrouding to IP2X shall be fitted to prevent
accidental contact with live parts. Warning labels shall be provided and fixed.
H There shall be a circuit schedule identifying each circuit giving reference, description, rating of
protective device and connected load located inside the distribution board
I The circuit schedule shall be typed on an A4 sheet laminated and securely fixed to the inside of the
distribution board door.
8.4 Protection. Protection against electric shock for the electrical installation will be by means of automatic
disconnection of supply. Each protective device is to be identified. Identification on neutral bus bar and
protective conductor bar shall clearly relate each terminal to its respective device. Overload protection
will be provided by the use of the following devices.
A. Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs) MCB shall comply with BSEN61008-1:2012 and have the
following characteristic:
(i) Doors shall have a locking system or shall require a special tool for the opening and have a
minimum rated short circuit capacity (1cn) of 10kA unless otherwise specified.
(ii) MCBs shall be capable of withstanding calculated operational and fault currents as well as
calculated power frequency stress voltages.
(iii) Three phase MCB shall trip all phases on any fault condition.
(iv) Provision shall be made to enable the operating mechanism to be padlocked in the OFF position.
42
B. Residual Current Breaker with Overload Protection (RCBO’s).
All 13A socket outlets within the Office Building at Regent Road, Hill Station, Freetown for Sierra
Leone Field Office at the African Development Bank (ADB) shall be connected through Residual
Current Breaker with Overload Protection (RCBO’s).
All RCBO’s shall comply with BS EN 61009-1:2004+14:2012 and have the following
characteristics:
(i) RCBOs shall be capable of withstanding calculated operational and fault currents as well as
calculated power frequency stress voltages.
(ii) The units shall be double or triple pole as required and mounted enclosed within the
distribution board.
(iii) The RCBO shall automatically open the protected circuit on an earth leakage fault between
phase and earth equal to or greater than the fault current sensitivity rating of the device.
(iv) The operating mechanism shall be independent trip- free and shall not be able to be held closed
against an earth fault. The units shall be complete with a test button and trip re- set device.
(v) The RCBO shall have position contact indication whereby the opening of the device is clearly
indicated by a mechanical indicator. This indicator shall be linked to the device main contacts
to show the positive opening of poles.
8.5 The ratings and type of protective devices can be found in the Electrical Distribution Board schedules.
8.6 Labelling:
The Contractor shall ensure they label the following:
a. Lighting and Emergency Exit lighting.
All emergency test key switches shall be labelled EMERGENCY LIGHT.
b. Switches and outlets.
All switches, socket outlets and isolators are to be labelled with their associated circuit numbers i.e.
DB1/1/L1.
8.9. Circuit diagram:
On completion of the electrical system installation, as built drawings of the circuit layouts are to be
produced and be included in the Health and Safety File and issued to the Authorities at the Sierra Leone
Field Office at the African Development Bank (ADB) during the handover.
9.0 Final circuits
9.1. General:
All fixtures and fittings shall be securely fixed and checked before and after Installation for defects and
damage. All defective fittings shall be replaced. All socket outlets shall be run as ring final circuit.
9.2 Sockets:
Socket outlets shall comply with the relevant British Standard for the type of outlet indicated. Socket
outlets shall be of the type and rating as indicated. PVC and metal sockets are to be selected dependent
on the room function. All other areas are to be fitted with PVC and store areas are to be fitted with metal
outlets (PVC conduit, back box and faceplate).
9.3 Mounting heights:
Socket outlets shall be mounted at a height of 400mm above FFL and located in positions shown on the
associated drawings.
43
9.4 Fixed power circuits:
All fixed power shall be supplied by redials. The split Air Conditioning Units ACU’s are to be supplied
via individual radial circuits dedicated to each ACU. The split Unit ACU’s are to have lockable rotary
isolator switches for the external condenser.
9.5 General. Lux levels are to be achieved as specified. The light fittings are to be of a sufficient IP rating to
protect against dust and insect ingress. The lights to be used are detailed in the lighting drawings, capable
of achieving the light levels as design.
9.6 Emergency lighting:
Emergency lighting systems and equipment shall comply with BS 5266-1:2011. The emergency lighting
should be integral to the entire lighting system. The emergency lighting shall have the following:
a) Emergency escape lighting:
Emergency escape lighting shall provide illumination for the safety of personnel leaving a location
or attempting to terminate a potentially dangerous process before doing so. In the event of power
failure a minimum of 1 LUX level is to be maintained at floor level for duration of 3 hours. The
emergency escape lighting is to be provided by maintained emergency luminaires that shall have
their lamps energized during normal use or in the event of power failure. The battery backup shall
be permanently connected to a circuit supply via a temper proof test switch, without interruption by
local functional switching.
b) Emergency escape route lighting:
The emergency escape route lighting shall ensure that the means of escape can be effectively
identified and safety used when the premises are occupied. The emergency escape route lighting is
to be provided by non-maintained emergency luminaires with pictogram and shall energize their
lamps during the event of a power failure. The battery backup shall be permanently connected to a
circuit supply, via a tamper proof test switch, without any functional switching. Fluorescent
Emergency Exit signs are to be located over each external access doors. The area immediately
external of the door is to be illuminated to a distance of 10m at a level of 1 Lux.
9.7 Switches:
Switches shall comply with the relevant British Standard for the type of switch indicated. Switches
shall be single pole for single phase circuits and the current rating shall be the room. All other areas are
to be in PVC and store in metal clad fittings. Switches are to be mounted at 1400mm above FFL.
10.0 Cable containment
10.1 General:
The size of the containment shall be calculated in accordance with BS 7671+A2:2013. Conduit,
including flexible and pliable conduits shall be non-metallic and comply with the relevant British
Standards. When circuits are run in containment the following shall apply:
a. Trucking shall comply with BS 4678-4; 1982 and be 50 x50mm in size
b. PVC Conduit shall comply with BS EN 50086-2-1:1996 and BS 4568-1; 1970 and be 20mm and
50mm in diameter.
10.2 Trunking general:
Where trunking is required to pass through wall fabrics it shall be fitted with suitable and approved
flame proof fire barriers.
44
10.3 Supports and joints:
The trunking shall be installed in the ceiling void and secured to the trusses and in vertical service ducts
and secured to the wall surface. Expansion couplings shall be protective where trunking crosses any
expansion joints within the building fabric.
10.4 Bonding:
The metallic trunking must be bonded to earth and tested for continuity but must not be used as a means
of providing the protective conductor
10.5 Access and covers:
Trunking and fittings shall have removable lids along its entire length. The lids shall be of the same
material, thickness and finish as that of the trunking.
10.6 Conduit general:
Metallic conduit shall have screw threads for jointing length to length and for the attachment of
accessories, PVC conduit shall use female couplers. Conduit and fittings shall be screwed to the
building fabric unless indicated and approved by the Project Architect/M&E Engineer. High impact
areas shall have galvanized steel conduit and all other areas shall be PVC. Adequate protection against
corrosion shall be provided to steel conduit.
a Supports, Junction boxes and back boxes installed in conduit runs needs to be separately fixed to
underlying surface and not rely on the efficient saddling of conduit for their support. A spacer bar
saddle shall be fixed 150mm adjacent to any junction or back box. Fixing saddles shall be positioned
at a maximum of 1200mm apart or 300mm from conduit outlet boxes or changes in direction.
b Bends. Steel conduit shall be bent on site to the required shape to allow the conduit to run around
obstacles and corners. All conduit bends shall be achieved without distorting the diameter of the
conduit. Conduit bending shall be by means of a good quality conduit bending machine, in good
condition and any poor or damaged conduit bends shall be rejected.
c Couplers, bushes ad glands. Bushes and glands used in conjunction with conduits and conduit
accessories shall be appropriate to the type used. Conduit connected to galvanize steel trunking,
back boxes and fluorescent fittings shall utilize a coupler and male brass bush. The male bush is to
be fitted by the appropriate methods.
d Saddles, Spacer bar saddles shall be used for fixing conduits to surface walls and ceilings. In all
cases the conduit is to be run parallel to the building lines and shall be fixed in position at intervals
of not more than 120mm by means of spacer bar saddles and these saddles shall be fixed by the
appropriate methods.
e Access and covers. Covers for conduit boxes shall be appropriate to the type used.
11.0 Cable
11.1 General:
All cable types shall be certified and marked in accordance with the British Approvals Services for
Electrical Cables (BASEC) or equivalent. Cables shall be segregated from other services and shall
comply with IEE Specification 034.
11.3 Cable routes:
Cables installed on the surface shall be parallel with the lines of the building construction and properly
aligned. Cables buried below ground shall, as far as is practicable, follow the features of the site such
as building lines.
45
11.4 Cable segregation:
A minimum clearance in accordance with IEE Specification 034 shall be allowed from any equipment,
pipework or ductwork. In the event of difficulty in achieving these requirements the M& Engineer shall
be consulted. Adequate space shall be left between cable runs building fabric and other services to
allow for the future removal or installation of cables.
11.5 Cable Cleats:
Cable cleats shall be made from materials that are resistant to corrosion without the need for treatment
or special finish. Plastic materials shall be non-brittle. Cable cleats shall be of a suitable size such that
they can be tightened down to grip the cables without exerting undue pressure. The spacing of cable
cleats shall comply with BS7671+A2:2013. On each side of a bend, cable cleats shall be used to secure
the cable.
12.0 Protective conductors and bonding
12.1 General:
Automatic disconnection of the supply is the method of protection utilized for basic and fault
protection. Therefore, all protective conductors and supplementary bonding is to ensure that, in the
event of a fault, sufficient current flows to operate the protective devices i.e. MCBs or RCD/RCBOs
12.2 Earth conductor:
In accordance with BS 7671+A2:2013, the minimum cross sectional area of the protective conductor
shall be half the cross sectional area of the line conductors.
12.3 Supplementary bonding:
Supplementary bonding conductors shall be installed to all exposed metal conductive parts. In any part
of the installation where the earthed metalwork of the electrical system comes into contact with the
metalwork of any other services, structure or equipment a permanent earth bond shall be formed as
close as is practicable to the point of contact.
13.0 Inspection testing and commissioning
13.1 General:
During erection, on completion and before being put into services the electrical installation shall be
inspected, tested and verified, so far as is reasonable practicable that the requirement of BS 7671 + A2
:2013 have been met. The verification shall be made by a competent person and shall include
comparison of the results with the relevant criteria and regulations. On completion of the verification
all relevant documentation shall be prepared.
13.2 Inspection:
The inspection shall precede any testing of the installation and shall be carried out by a competent
person with that part of the installation being disconnected from the electrical supply
13.3 Live testing:
Live testing shall only be undertaken once suitable precautions have been put in place. Calibrated
equipment and suitable personnel protective equipment must be used.
Although live testing is a recognized method, under no circumstances is any rectification to be carried
out live.
13.4 Safety:
It is the responsibility of the test engineer to ensure their own safety and the safety of others whilst
working through the test procedure. Prior to testing the installation the test engineer is to ensure the
following precaution, are taken:
46
a. Equipment.
The tester must have knowledge and experience of the correct application and use of the test
instrumentation, leads, probes and accessories.
b. Standards.
All test equipment must meet the safety measures and procedures laid out in Health and Safety
Executive Guidance Note GS 38 for all instruments, leads, probes and accessories.
13.5 Inspection and test procedure.
The inspection and testing of the new installation shall include the following:
a. Prior to energizing. Before energizing the following procedure is to be followed:
(1) Visual inspection as laid down within the current edition of BS 7671 +A2:2013
(2) Continuity of protective conductors, including main and supplementary bonding
(3) Continuity of ring final circuit conductors, including protective conductors
(4) Insulation resistance
(5) Polarity (by continuity method)
b. During energizing. With the supply connected and energized the following procedure is to take
place:
(1) Check polarity of the supply, using an approved voltage indicator
(2) Earth fault impedance
(3) Prospective fault current measurement
14.0 Certification and forms of completion
14.1 General:
The Contractor is to prepare all forms of completion. Current editions of forms are to be used from BS
7671+A2:2013
14.2 Commissioning:
The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out all inspection and testing of the installation in
accordance with BS 7671+A2:2013. The Contractor is to complete their requirement sections of the
commission forms and present them to the Project Architect/Engineer for submission to the Bank.
14.3 Results.
All results obtained during the test procedure are to be recorded on the Schedule of Test Results for the
distribution board for future reference and checked for acceptability against the prescribed criteria. All
failed measurements are to be highlighted to the Engineer/Bank at the earliest prepared to accompany
the Schedule of Test Results. All documents are to be included in the Health and Safety File and issued
to the Bank during the handover board.
14.4 Emergency lighting.
All emergency lighting is to be tested and certified in accordance with BS 5266-1:2011. All test results
are to be presented as part of the H&S File. The emergency lighting system is to have the following
certificates completed and presented as part of the Health &Safety File:
a. Emergency lighting completion certificate:
To BS 5266-1:2011 Annex C emergency lighting completion certificated by the Contractor’s
Engineer
b. Design declaration of conformity:
To BS5266-1:2011 Annex C declaration of conformity to be completed by the Contractor’s
Engineer
47
c. Installation declaration of conformity:
To BS 5266-1:2011 Annex C installation declaration of conformity to be completed by
Contractor’s Engineer
d. Verification- declaration of conformity:
To BS 5266-1:2011 Annex C verification of conformity to be completed by the Contractor’s
Engineer
e. Periodic inspection and test certificate:
To BS 5266-1:2011 Annex D periodic inspection and test certificate to be completed by the
Contractor’s Engineer with assistance from the Bank Facility Manager.
48
3.0 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING SERVICE INSTALLATION
3.1 Incoming Electrical Power supply
3.2 Low Voltage Panelboard
3.3 Low Voltage Distribution Boards
3.4 Lightning Protection System
3.5 Earthing + Bonding
3.6 Structured Cable Management System (SCMS)
49
3.1 Incoming Electrical Power Supply
System Description
System Drawings + Data
SL/ADB/E-1: Block Schematic Layout Power Supply & Distribution Network
SL/ADB/E-2: Line Schematic Layout Primary / Secondary LV Distribution Network
Appendix 1: Schedule of Incoming Electrical Power Supply from the LV Panelboard located in
Panelboard Switch Room (MCCB-1, MCCB-2, MCCB-3, MCCB-4, MCCB-5, MCCB-6, MCCB-7,
MCCB-8, MCCB-9, MCCB-10, MCCB-11, MCCB-12)
MCCB-1 Raw Power Distribution Board 1 – Basement Floor
MCCB-2 Raw Power Distribution Board 2 – Basement Floor
MCCB-3 UPS 63A, TP&N Fuse Switch Disconnector (UPS Distribution Board 1 & 2 for
all UPS Socket outlets + UPS Consumer Unit 1 – Basement Floor (Security
equipment’s)
MCCB-4 Raw Power Distribution Board 3 – Ground Floor
MCCB-5 Raw Power Distribution Board 4 – Ground Floor
MCCB-6 Raw Power Distribution Board 5 – First Floor
MCCB-7 Raw Power Distribution Board 6 – First Floor
MCCB-8 Roof Top VRV Outdoor Unit 1
MCCB-9 Roof Top VRV Outdoor Unit 2
MCCB-10 Roof Top VRV Outdoor Unit 3
MCCB-11 63A, TP&N Fuse Disconnector Switch – Lift – LV Switchroom
MCCB-12 SPARE
System Plant, Equipment + Materials
3.2 Low Voltage Panelboard:
The Low Voltage Panelboard shall be located in the LV Panelboard room at the Main Office Building.
The Panelboard shall be arranged for bottom entry of supply cable. Include for all necessary cable
termination glands required to support the cable and shall incorporate all the MCCB switches, meters,
time switches and instruments as indicated on the drawings.
The 12 Way 250A Triple Pole and Neutral MCCB Panel board Complete with 250A Four Pole MCCB
Incomer Fitted shall be designed to operate on 400 Volt, 50Hz, three phase, 4 wire TN-C or TN-C-S
systems
3.2.1 General Characteristics
Cable Entry Top and Bottom Endplates Removable For Ease of Cutting
Current Rating 250A
Depth 170 mm
Height 1450 mm
Width 900 mm
Incoming Terminal Capacity M8 Bolts 120mm Square Cable and Earth M10 Bolt
Mounting Wall Mounted
Number of Outgoing Ways 12 Way
Product Range MC Range MCCB Panelboard
Standards BS EN 61439 pt 1&2
Switchgear Fitted Four Pole MCCB Incomer 250A
Equipment Type Fixed Stationary
50
Covers/Door Screw fixed covers. Side hinged door (removable) c/w plastic
turn catches.
Enclosure 1.6mm Cold rolled steel with an epoxy paint finish to RAL7035
matt grey. Bolted construction giving Form2B type 2 and
Form3B type 2 group mounted segregation to BS EN 61439:Pt1
and 2:2011
Frequency 50HZ
Breaking Capacity 36kA Icc.
Rated Operating Voltage 230/400V ac.
Protection Class IP Rating IP3X
Operating Ambient Temperature -5 to +40 C
Terminal Tightening Torque M8 Bolt 20Nm max, M10 Bolt 40Nm max.
Short Circuit Making Capacity 36kA Icc.
Number Of Ways 12 Way
Number Of Poles Triple Pole And Neutral
3.2.2 Fault Rating
The Panelboard shall be constructed and type tested to withstand a fault level of 50KA for 1 second in
accordance with BSEN 60439-1
3.2.3 Construction General
The Panelboard shall be modular sheet steel, minimum 2mm thickness, cubicle built on a rigid,
self-supporting framework with compartments separated by barriers of a minimum 1.6mm thickness
Overall external Ingress Protection (IP) rating for the Panelboard shall not be less than IP31 as defined
in BSEN60529.
All internal live parts shall be protected to IP2X.
All parts of the Panelboard both internal and external shall be free of sharp edges and sharp corners.
3.2.4 Construction Form Type
The Panelboard shall be Form 4, Type 2 as defined in BS 60439.
Busbars shall be separated from functional units.
Terminations to functional units shall be separated from each other.
Busbar separation shall be achieved by metallic or non-metallic rigid barriers or partitions.
3.2.5 Busbars and Cabling
The busbar system shall comply with BS 159 and shall be:-
1. HDHC copper bar.
2. Fully rated allowing for any reduction in CSA where bars are drilled.
3 Inaccessible from equipment compartments and protected by sheet steel barriers or shutters.
4. Clearly and indelibly colour identified as red, yellow, blue and black respectively.
5. Tested in accordance with BS 7767
Connections between the busbars and the connected components shall have a current rating not less
than the nominal rating of the component and shall be of adequate cross section for the specified fault
level. Connections to functional units from the main busbars shall be suitably rated copper busbars to
a minimum of 250 Amps and below this rating shall be in appropriately sized single core black PVC
insulated, tri rated, copper stranded cable.
All connections shall be marked with the requisite colour identification.
51
All connections from busbars to control and instrumentation equipment shall be protected by fuses.
The fuses shall be mounted on or as close as possible to the busbars. Further fusing within the
equipment’s compartment shall be provided if necessary to ensure adequate discrimination.
Neutrals shall be full size for all busbars and cabling.
3.2.6 Earth Bar
A continuous, horizontally mounted earth bar shall be provided throughout the length of the Panelboard
of minimum size 50mm x 6mm, suitable for extension and with provision for bonding all metalwork
with bolted connections. A minimum of two connections shall be provided to the Panelboard
framework.
A minimum of two earth connections shall be provided for connection to the external main earth ring.
Earthing shall comply with BS 7430, Code of Practice for Earthing.
Vertical earth bars shall be provided in each of the wiring chambers linked to the main earth bar drilled
out and fitted with suitable fixings for the appropriate number of functional unit earth connections.
All earth bars shall be clearly identified within each wiring chamber.
Bolted copper links shall be provided to enable the switchboard earth system to be isolated from the
main earth ring for testing.
3.2.7 Wiring and Cabling
All internal wiring and cabling shall be:-
1 Terminated with suitable copper tube lugs, insulated end sleeves or PVC insulated crimp
terminals.
2. Fully insulated, PVC tri-rated grade cable to BS 6231.
3. Protected by grommets, bushes or glands where it passes through metal enclosures.
4. Protected against heat and mechanical damage.
5. Labeled at both terminations. These reference numbers shall appear on the wiring diagrams.
All power cabling shall be securely clamped to remain in place under the worst fault conditions, and
they shall not be supported by their terminations.
Small wiring shall be enclosed in trunking or other cable management system and shall be numbered
at both ends with the terminal number and wire number shown on circuit drawings.
Cable terminations at 230VAC shall be fitted with a suitable removable shroud or barrier to IP2X.
Panelboard to comply with BS 5486: Part 1, Form 4 with IP 54 degree of protection, cable mounted.
Circuit details as indicated in Appendices-1
52
System Plant, Equipment + Materials
3.3 Distribution Boards
Distribution Boards to be of totally enclosed type (IP 31) to provide protection in compliance with BS
5420 IEC 144. The location of distribution boards to be as recorded within Appendices 1a &b, 2a & b,
3a & b, 4a &b, 5a &b, and 6a & b
A multi-terminal Earthing bar shall be provided for circuit protective conductors of the insulated metal
cased boards, with one terminal for each outgoing circuit. These will be connected directly to Earthing
terminal without dependence on exposed conductive parts of enclosure.
Distribution Boards and Panelboard shall be labelled showing the area and services which are to be fed
from them, and where not otherwise immediately obvious, their source of supply. The engraving to be
in white 10mm high letters on red plastic sheet or equal and fixed external to the lids of apparatus by
screw or rivets.
Low voltage Switchgear:
(i) Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB’s)
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker ratings shall be as stated within Appendix -1. They are to be of
the 500V totally enclosed metal clad type, complying with BS 4752 (IEC 157-1) ASTA
Certified P1 or P2 rating (50/35KV, 415V).
(ii) Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB’s)
Miniature circuit breakers for incorporation in distribution boards to comply with the
requirements of BS 3871 (IEC 898)
(iii) Switch Fuses and Isolators
Switch fuses to be of the 500V totally enclosed metal clad type, complying with BS 5414 (IEC
408) AC22 and AC23 rating. All switch fuses to be fitted with HRC fuse cartridges and to be
SP + N / TP + N, as required and as rated in Appendix 12.
(iv) Residual Current-Operated Circuit Breakers
Residual current-operated circuit breakers to comply with BS 4293 (IEC 755)
(v) Isolators
Local isolator shall be supplied and installed for the control of each power consuming fixed
appliance which is solidly connected. It is necessary to ensure that the means of isolation and
the appliance are in the same room and in direct line of vision and not more than 6 meters apart.
(vi) PVC Insulated Armoured Cables
These cables shall be of 600/1000V grade in compliance with BS 6346. The conductors to be
insulated with PVC or XLPE insulated, PVC bedded, armoured with a single layer of galvanized
steel wire or tape, and sheathed overall with PVC.
Unless specifically indicated otherwise, all cables shall have copper conductors.
Where cables enter switchgear and other apparatus, they are to be made off with suitable brass
glands which shall incorporate both a cone grip armour clamp with positive armour locking and
a resilient compression gland to firmly grip the outer PVC Sheath of the cable. A brass earth
tag to be fitted between the gland and the apparatus. A secure earthing connection to be made
between the earth tag and the main earthing terminal of the apparatus, using a suitable copper
conductor
53
(vii) PVC Insulated Single Core Cables
These cable to be of 600/1000V grade to BS 6004 and, unless specifically indicated otherwise,
to have copper conductors. Cable for all services shall be in accordance with the Appendix 11
and the latest IEE Regulations. Cables to be coloured in accordance with Table: 52A of the IEE
Regulations.
(viii) Wiring Installation
PVC Conduit (Concealed)
PVC conduit and fittings to be high impact type, heavy gauge, BS 4607 Compliant, AH grade.
No conduit to be less than 20mm dia.
PVC conduit to be concealed within walls
(ix) Flexible Metallic Conduit (Plant)
Flexible metallic conduit to be of the overlapping helically wound flexible steel type, with a
PVC outer cover in accordance with BS 731. The conduit to be fitted with heavy duty couplers
and connections and to include a bush to protect cables when drawn-in
Flexible metallic conduits on Plant and Equipment final connections
(x) Cable Trunking
Cable Trunking to be installed in floor ducts and plant rooms on routes as shown on drawings.
(xi) Cable Trunking Plastics
The cable Trunking to be constructed of heavy gauge extruded high impact PVC.
(xii) Cable trays
Cable trays to be galvanized punched metal.
Cable trays to be installed in ground floor ducts, service risers, plant room and switch rooms.
3.4 Lightning Protection System
System description
BS 6651, CP 1013 compliant Lightning Protection System, comprising air terminals to be located at
apex of roof above Bank Building, with copper, PVC covered down tapes to be installed on the outer
walls of the building and linked to the Bank Lightning Protection System Earth Point.
3.5 Earthing + Bonding
System Description
Earthing and Bonding to be undertaken in compliance with IEE Wiring Regulations and BS 7430.
Equipotential bonding to be applied to all exposed metal parts and in particular:-
Metal cable trunking and trays
3.6 Structured Cable Management System (SCMS)
System Description
A fully integrated / coordinated SCMS to be supplied / installed, arranged to accommodate cabling
system in the vertical service ducts
54
System Plant, Equipment + Materials
(i) Vertical Service Ducts
400mm wide x 25mm deep, galvanized, punched metal cable trays, fixed to the building
structure with support brackets.
(ii) Ceiling Voids (Basement Floor, Ground Floor and First Floor
Type A – 400mm wide x 50mm deep,
Type B – 300mm wide x 50mm deep,
Type C – 2mm wide x 50mm deep, high strength, electro-plated zinc, galvanized
Steel rod wire basket cable tray, fixed to ceiling with support brackets.
Wire baskets and fittings to be as manufactured / supplied by Wiremould
Cables to be secured within cable trays / baskets employing “VELCRO” type quick release
fasteners.
Dado/Skirting Trunking (Conference Room, Server Room, UPS Room, Meeting Room, and
Offices.
Type D – 135mm x 50mm deep, white finished chamfered high impact PVC manufactured in
accordance with BS 4678. Part 4 (1982)
Floor Boxes (Conference Room only)
3 module (multiple outlet) recessed floor boxes, fitted with 2Nr. twin 13 Amp switched socket
outlets, 2 x 4 Nr. RJ45 Data / Telecom outlet points, incorporating quick release reversible lid,
cable retainers.
Floor Box Type ‘Cablelink Rapide’, as manufactured by Ackermann.
55
Tender Drawings/Figure Nos
Drawing
Number
System Drawing Type Detail
SL/ADB/E-1 Low Voltage
Distribution
Block Schematic
Layout
Incoming Power Supply and Low Voltage
Distribution
SL/ADB/E-2 Low Voltage
Distribution
Line Schematic
Diagram
Panelboard locations, Incoming/Outgoing LV
Cable Routing, Fire Alarm, Door Access Control
and CCTV Camera Locations
Structured Cable
Management System
Cabling Systems in vertical service duct
TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING
DRAWINGS
Contract Works: Named Plant, Equipment + Materials.
The Contractor shall enter below the names of the Manufacturers / Suppliers of the Plant, Equipment and
Materials included within his Tender Price, either by confirming his use of the ‘As Named’
Manufacturer/Supplier or by defining his proposed alternative.
Plant, Equipment, Materials As Named Manufacturer/Supplier
in this Document
Proposed Alternative
Manufacturer/Supplier
(Country of Origin)
1. Panelboard PROTEUS
2. Distribution Boards PROTEUS
3. Fused Switch Disconnectors PROTEUS
4. Luminaries Thorn Lighting Ltd +
DESIGNPLAN
5. Small Power Accessories MK Ltd Legrand
9. Structured Cable Management
System
Wiremould Ackermann Centaur
56
4.0 SCHEDULE OF APPENDICES:
Appendix DETAIL
1 Incoming Electrical Power Supply: Schedule of LV Panelboard
2a Low Voltage Power Distribution: Schedule – Raw Power Distribution Board 1 – Basement Floor
2b Low Voltage Power Distribution: Schedule – Raw Power Distribution Board 2 – Basement Floor
3a Low Voltage Power Distribution: Schedule – UPS Distribution Board 1 – Basement Floor (ICT)
3b Low Voltage Power Distribution: Schedule – UPS Distribution Board 2 – Basement Floor (ICT)
3c Low Voltage Power Distribution: Schedule – UPS Distribution Board 3 – Basement Floor (Security)
4a Low Voltage Power Distribution: Schedule – Raw Power Distribution Board 3 – Ground Floor
4b Low Voltage Power Distribution: Schedule – Raw Power Distribution Board 4 – Ground Floor
5a Low Voltage Power Distribution: Schedule – Raw Power Distribution Board 5 – First Floor
5b Low Voltage Power Distribution: Schedule – Raw Power Distribution Board 6 – First Floor
6 Low Voltage Power Distribution: Schedule – MCCB – 9 Roof Top VRV Outdoor Unit 1
7 Low Voltage Power Distribution: Schedule – MCCB – 10 Roof Top VRV Outdoor Unit 2
8 Low Voltage Power Distribution: Schedule – MCCB – 11 Roof Top VRV Outdoor Unit 3
9 63A, Low Voltage TP&N Fuse Disconnector Switch – Lift – LV Switchroom
10 Low Voltage Power Distribution: Schedule – Small Power Requirements
11 Schedule of Light Fittings
12 Incoming Electrical Power Supply: Schedule of Cables
13 Technical Specification - 175kVA, 400/230V, 3-Phase, 50Hz Voltage Regulator
14 Technical Specification - 200kVA Power Transformer
15 Technical Specification - 10KVA, 3-Phase Modular DPA Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS)
16 Technical Specification - 175kVA, 400/230V, 3-Phase, 50Hz Generator Set
17 Technical Specification – 1 x 8 Passenger Electric Elevator
18 Technical Specification – Compound Security Solar Lights
19 Technical Specification – 2 x Fire Hydrant Booster Pumps
20 Technical Specification – Addressable Fire Alarm & FM200 Fire Suppression System
21 Technical Specification – Solar Powered Borehole with Submersible Pump
22 Technical Specification – In-Ceiling Mounted VRV & Wall Mounted Air Conditioning Systems
23 Technical Specification – 30kW Roof Mounted PV Solar System
57
SCHEDULE OF LV MCCB PANELBOARD:
INCOMING ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY
APPENDIX 1 – SCHEDULE OF 12 way TP+N MCCB LV PANELBOARD:
1. MCCB SWITCH - 1: Reference: MCCB - 1
Location: Building LV Panelboard Room
Type: Form 4 Construction
Outgoing: 125A TP + N
Busbar Rating: 250A TP + N
Outgoing Cable: 4C x 16mmsq PVC/SWA/XLPE; 10mmsq cpc
Feed to: Raw Power Distribution Board 1 – Basement Floor
2. MCCB SWITCH - 2: Reference: MCCB - 2
Location: Building LV Panelboard Room
Type: Form 4 Construction
Outgoing: 125A TP + N
Busbar Rating: 250A TP + N
Outgoing Cable: 4C x 25mmsq PVC/SWA/XLPE; 16mmsq cpc
Feed to: Raw Power Distribution Board 2 – Basement Floor
3. MCCB SWITCH - 3: Reference: MCCB - 3
Location: Building LV Panelboard Room
Type: Form 4 Construction
Outgoing: 125A TP + N
Busbar Rating: 250A TP + N
Outgoing Cable: 4C x 25mmsq PVC/SWA/XLPE; 16mmsq cpc
Feed to: UPS Distribution Board 1 – Basement Floor
4. MCCB SWITCH - 4: Reference: MCCB - 4
Location: Building LV Panelboard Room
Type: Form 4 Construction
Outgoing: 63A TP + N
Busbar Rating: 250A TP + N
Outgoing Cable: 4C x 16mmsq PVC/SWA/XLPE; 6mmsq cpc
Feed to: UPS Consumer Unit 1 – Basement Floor (Security equipment’s)
5. MCCB SWITCH - 5: Reference: MCCB – 5
Location: Building LV Panelboard Room
Type: Form 4 Construction
Outgoing: 125A TP + N
Busbar Rating: 250A TP + N
Outgoing Cable: 4C x 16mmsq PVC/SWA/XLPE; 10mmsq cpc
Feed to: Raw Power Distribution Board 3 – Ground Floor
6. MCCB SWITCH - 6: Reference: MCCB – 6
Location: Building LV Panelboard Room
Type: Form 4 Construction
Outgoing: 125A TP + N
Busbar Rating: 250A TP + N
Outgoing Cable: 4C x 25mmsq PVC/SWA/XLPE; 16mmsq cpc
Feed to: Raw Power Distribution Board 4 – Ground Floor
58
7. MCCB SWITCH - 7: Reference: MCCB – 7
Location: Building LV Panelboard Room
Type: Form 4 Construction
Outgoing: 125A TP + N
Busbar Rating: 250A TP + N
Outgoing Cable: 4C x 16mmsq PVC/SWA/XLPE; 10mmsq cpc
Feed to: Raw Power Distribution Board 5 – First Floor
8. MCCB SWITCH - 8: Reference: MCCB – 8
Location: Building LV Panelboard Room
Type: Form 4 Construction
Outgoing: 125A TP + N
Busbar Rating: 250A TP + N
Outgoing Cable: 4C x 25mmsq PVC/SWA/XLPE; 16mmsq cpc
Feed to: Raw Power Distribution Board 6 – First Floor
9. MCCB SWITCH - 9: Reference: MCCB – 9
Location: Building LV Panelboard Room
Type: Form 4 Construction
Outgoing: 100A TP + N
Busbar Rating: 250A TP + N
Outgoing Cable: 4C x 16mmsq PVC/SWA/XLPE; 10mmsq cpc
Feed to: VRV Outdoor Unit 1 – Basement Floor
10. MCCB SWITCH - 10: Reference: MCCB – 10
Location: Building LV Panelboard Room
Type: Form 4 Construction
Outgoing: 100A TP + N
Busbar Rating: 250A TP + N
Outgoing Cable: 4C x 16mmsq PVC/SWA/XLPE; 10mmsq cpc
Feed to: VRV Outdoor Unit 2 – Ground Floor
11. MCCB SWITCH - 11: Reference: MCCB – 11
Location: Building LV Panelboard Room
Type: Form 4 Construction
Outgoing: 100A TP + N
Busbar Rating: 250A TP + N
Outgoing Cable: 4C x 16mmsq PVC/SWA/XLPE; 10mmsq cpc
Feed to: VRV Outdoor Unit 3 – First Floor
12. MCCB SWITCH - 12 Reference: MCCB – 12
Location: Building LV Panelboard Room
Type: Form 4 Construction
Outgoing: 100A TP + N
Busbar Rating: 250A TP + N
Outgoing Cable: 4C x 16mmsq PVC/SWA/XLPE; 10mmsq cpc
Feed to: 8 Passenger Electric Lift
59
APPENDIX 2 – SCHEDULE OF RAW POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS BASEMENT FLOOR
2a Raw Power Distribution Board 1 – Basement Floor
Location: Ground Floor
Reference: DB1
Type: 1 x 6Way 125A TP + N
Fed From: MCCB - 1
Feed Cable: 1 x 4C x 16mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC; 10mmsq cpc
Cct
No
Circuit MCB Cable Size
(mm sq.)
Load in Watts
R Y B
1 Main Entrance Lobby Area Lighting 10A 1.5-2c + E
2 Waiting Room Lighting 10A 1.5-2c + E
3 Public Information Center (PIC) Lighting 10A 1.5-2c + E
4 Corridor Lighting 10A 1.5-2c + E
5 Office Lighting 10A 1.5-2c + E
6 Server Room Lighting 10A 1.5-2c + E
7 UPS Room Lighting 10A 1.5-2c + E
8 Male /Female Toilets Lighting 10A 1.5-2c + E
9 Emergency Exit Lightning 10A 1.5-2c + E
10 Waiting Room - Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
11 Public Information Center (PIC) - Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
12 Main Entrance Lobby Area - Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
13 Office Lighting – Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
14 Server Room – Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
15 UPS Room – Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
16 Corridor + Archive + Tool Store – Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
17 SPARE
18 SPARE
Phase Total (Watts)
Total Load (kVA)
[p.f = 0.85]
Imax (A)
Io = Imax x 0.85
NOTE: All 13A socket outlets within the Basement Floor to the RCBO protected
60
2b Raw Power Distribution Board 2 – Basement Floor
Location: Ground Floor
Reference: DB2
Type: 1 x 6Way 125A TP + N
Fed From: MCCB - 2
Feed Cable: 1 x 4C x 25mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC; 10mmsq cpc
Cct
No
Circuit MCB Cable Size
(mm sq.)
Load in Watts
R Y B
1 Main Entrance Lobby Area Indoor Cooling Unit - Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
2 Waiting Room Indoor Cooling Unit- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
3 Public Information Center (PIC) Indoor Cooling Unit- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
4 Corridor Indoor Cooling Unit - 1- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
5 Corridor Indoor Cooling Unit - 2- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
6 Office Indoor Cooling Unit- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
7 Server Room Indoor Cooling Unit - 1- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
8 Server Room Indoor Cooling Unit - 2- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
9 UPS Room Indoor Cooling Unit - 1- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
10 UPS Room Indoor Cooling Unit - 2- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
11 Hand Dryer Male Toilet - Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
12 Hand Dryer Female Toilet - Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
13 Server Room Condenser for Cooling Unit - 1- Radial 32A 4.0 3C + E
14 Server Room Condenser for Cooling Unit - 2- Radial 32A 4.0 3C + E
15 UPS Room Condenser for Cooling Unit - 1- Radial 32A 4.0 3C + E
16 UPS Room Condenser for Cooling Unit - 2- Radial 32A 4.0 3C + E
17 SPARE
18 SPARE
Phase Total (Watts)
Total Load (KVA)
[p.f = 0.85]
Imax (A)
Io = Imax x 0.85
NOTE: All 13A socket outlets within the Basement Floor to the RCBO protected
61
APPENDIX 3 – SCHEDULE OF UPS POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS BASEMENT FLOOR
3a UPS Power Distribution Board 1 – Basement Floor
Location: Ground Floor
Reference: DB3
Type: 1 x 8Way 125A TP + N
Fed From: MCCB - 2
Feed Cable: 1 x 4C x 25mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC; 10mmsq cpc
Cct
No
Circuit MCB Cable Size
(mm sq.)
Load in Watts
R Y B
1 Entrance Lobby + PIC + Office – Radial 3 Sockets 40A 4.0-2c + E
2 Server Room – Radial(3 Sockets 40A 4.0-2c + E
3 UPS Room – Radial 3 UPS Sockets 40A 4.0-2c + E
4 Conference Room – Radial 3 Sockets 40A 4.0-2c + E
5 Conference Room – Radial 3 Sockets 40A 4.0-2c + E
6 Conference Room – Radial 3 Sockets 40A 4.0-2c + E
7 Conference Room – Radial 3 Sockets 40A 4.0-2c + E
8 Floor Box Conference Room – Radial 2 Floor Boxes 40A 4.0-2c + E
9 Floor Box Conference Room – Radial 2 Floor Boxes 40A 4.0-2c + E
10 Floor Box Conference Room – Radial 2 Floor Boxes 40A 4.0-2c + E
11 Floor Box Conference Room – Radial 2 Floor Boxes 40A 4.0-2c + E
8 Office (1-05) – Radial 3 Sockets 40A 4.0-2c + E
9 Office (1-05) – Radial 3 Sockets 40A 4.0-2c + E
10 Office (1-05) – Radial 3 Sockets 40A 4.0-2c + E
11 Reception + Office + CPO - – Radial 3 Sockets 40A 4.0-2c + E
12 Office (F-04) – Radial 3 Sockets 40A 4.0-2c + E
13 Office (F-04) – Radial 3 Sockets 40A 4.0-2c + E
14 Office (F-04) – Radial 3 Sockets 40A 4.0-2c + E
15 Office (F-07) – Radial 2 Sockets 40A 4.0-2c + E
16 Secretary/Waiting (F-08) – Radial 2 Sockets 40A 4.0-2c + E
17 Resident Representative (F-09) – Radial 3 Sockets 40A 4.0-2c + E
18 Reception/Waiting ) – Radial 2 Sockets 40A 4.0-2c + E
19 Office (F-11) – Radial 2 Sockets 40A 4.0-2c + E
20 Meeting Room (F-12) - Radial 3 Sockets 40A 4.0-2c + E
21 Meeting Room (F-12) - Radial 2 Sockets 40A 4.0-2c + E
22 Meeting Room (F-12) - Radial 2 Sockets 40A 4.0-2c + E
23 SPARE
24 SPARE
Phase Total (Watts)
Total Load (kVA)
[p.f = 0.85]
Imax (A)
Io = Imax x 0.85
NOTE: All 13A socket outlets within the Basement Floor to the RCBO protected
62
3b UPS Power Consumer Unit 1 – Basement Floor
Location: Ground Floor
Reference: SP - 1
Type: 1 x 6Way 63A SP + N
Fed From: MCB - 1
Feed Cable: 1 x 3C x 10mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC; 4mmsq cpc
Cct
No
Circuit MCB Cable Size
(mm sq.)
Load in Watts
L N E
1 CCTV Multiplexer – Radial 10A 2.5-2c + E
2 Addressable Fire Alarm Panel – Radial 10A 2.5-2c + E
3 Door Access Control Panel – Radial 10A 2.5-2c + E
4 SPARE 10A 2.5-2c + E
5 SPARE 10A 2.5-2c + E
6 SPARE 10A 2.5-2c + E
Phase Total (Watts)
Total Load (kVA)
[p.f = 0.85]
Imax (A)
Io = Imax x 0.85
NOTE: All socket outlets within the Basement Floor to the RCBO protected
63
APPENDIX 4 – SCHEDULE OF RAW POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS BASEMENT FLOOR
4a Raw Power Distribution Board 3 – Ground Floor
Location: Ground Floor
Reference: DB3
Type: 1 x 8Way 125A TP + N
Fed From: MCCB - 5
Feed Cable: 1 x 4C x 16mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC; 10mmsq cpc
Cct
No
Circuit MC
B
Cable Size
(mm sq.)
Load in Watts
R Y B
1 Conference Room (1-07) Lighting 10A 1.5-2c + E
2 Conference Room (1-07) Lighting 10A 1.5-2c + E
3 Lobby (1-02)+ Terrace lightning 10A 1.5-2c + E
4 Reception (1-01) Lighting 10A 1.5-2c + E
5 Corridor (1-12) Lightning 10A 1.5-2c + E
6 Corridor Toilet Area + Archive Lightning 10A 1.5-2c + E
7 Office (1-03) Lightning 10A 1.5-2c + E
8 Country Program Officer (1-06) Lightning 10A 1.5-2c + E
9 Office (1-04) + Corridor (G-08) Lightning 10A 1.5-2c + E
10 Office (1-05) + Veranda Lightning 10A 1.5-2c + E
11 Male Toilet (1-09) + Female Toilet (1-10) + Kitchenette Lightning 10A 1.5-2c + E
12 Outdoor Security (5Nr.) Lightning 10A 1.5-2c + E
13 Outdoor Security (5Nr.) Lightning 10A 1.5-2c + E
14 Stair Case + Exit Porch Lightning 10A 1.5-2c + E
15 Conference Room (6Nr. Sockets) - Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
16 Conference Room (6Nr. Sockets) - Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
17 Office (1-04) - Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
18 Office (1-05) - Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
19 Reception + Lobby + Corridor - Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
20 Office (1-03) - Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
21 Country Program Officer (1-06) - Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
22 Kitchenette + Archive + Corridor Toilet Area - Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
23 SPARE
24 SPARE
Note: Circuits to be distributed between DB1 & DB2
Phase Total (Watts)
Total Load (KVA)
[ p.f = 0.85]
Imax (A)
Io = Imax x 0.85
NOTE: All socket outlets within the Basement Floor to the RCBO protected
64
4b Raw Power Distribution Board 4 – Ground Floor
Location: Ground Floor
Reference: DB4
Type: 1 x 8Way 125A TP + N
Fed From: MCCB - 6
Feed Cable: 1 x 4C x 25mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC; 10mmsq cpc
Cct
No
Circuit MC
B
Cable Size
(mm sq.)
Load in Watts
R Y B
1 Conference Room Indoor Cooling Unit- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
2 Conference Room Indoor Cooling Unit- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
3 Lobby Indoor Cooling Unit- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
4 Reception Indoor Cooling Unit- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
5 Corridor (1-12) Indoor Cooling Unit- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
6 Corridor Toilet Area Indoor Cooling Unit- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
7 Office (1-03) Indoor Cooling Unit- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
8 Country Program Officer (1-06) Indoor Cooling Unit- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
9 Office (1-04) Indoor Cooling Unit- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
10 Office (1-05) Indoor Cooling Unit- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
11 Hand Dryer Male Toilet - Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
12 Hand Dryer Female Toilet - Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
13 45A Cooker Unit Outlet 45A 6.0-3c + E
14 SPARE
15 SPARE
16 SPARE
17 SPARE
18 SPARE
Note: Circuits to be distributed between DB1 & DB2
Phase Total (Watts)
Total Load (KVA)
[ p.f = 0.85]
Imax (A)
Io = Imax x 0.85
NOTE: All socket outlets within the Basement Floor to the RCBO protected
65
APPENDIX 5 – SCHEDULE OF RAW POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS FIRST FLOOR
5a Raw Power Distribution Board 5 – First Floor
Location: First Floor
Reference: DB5
Type: 1 x 8Way 125A TP + N
Fed From: MCCB - 7
Feed Cable: 1 x 4C x 16mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC; 10mmsq cpc
Cct
No
Circuit MC
B
Cable Size
(mm sq.)
Load in Watts
R Y B
1 Staircase Lobby + Terrace Lighting 10A 1.5-2c + E
2 Office (F-04) Lighting 10A 1.5-2c + E
3 Office (F-04) Lighting 10A 1.5-2c + E
4 Reception (F-03) + Corridor (F-14) Lighting 10A 1.5-2c + E
5 Corridor (F-05) Lightning 10A 1.5-2c + E
6 Office (F-07) + Filing Storage (F-06) Lightning 10A 1.5-2c + E
7 Secretary/Waiting (F-08) Lightning 10A 1.5-2c + E
8 Secretary/Waiting (F-08) Lightning 10A 1.5-2c + E
9 Resident Representative (F-09) Lightning 10A 1.5-2c + E
10 Resident Representative (F-09) Lightning 10A 1.5-2c + E
11 Office (F-11) Lightning 10A 1.5-2c + E
12 Meeting Room (F-12) Lightning 10A 1.5-2c + E
13 Corridor by Toilet Area + Archive Lightning 10A 1.5-2c + E
14 Male Toilet (F-15) + Female Toilet (F-16) + Kitchenette Lightning 10A 1.5-2c + E
15 Stair Case - Lightning 10A 2.5-2c + E
16 Office (F-04) 4Nr. Sockets - Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
17 Office (F-04) 4Nr. Socket - Ring
18 Staircase Lobby + Corridor 4Nr. Socket - Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
19 Reception (F-03) 4Nr. Socket - Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
20 Office (F-11) 3Nr. Socket – Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
21 Meeting Room (F-12) 4Nr. Socket - Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
22 Meeting Room (F-12) 3Nr. Socket - Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
23 SPARE
24 SPARE
Note: Circuits to be distributed between DB1 & DB2
Phase Total (Watts)
Total Load (KVA)
[ p.f = 0.85]
Imax (A)
Io = Imax x 0.85
NOTE: All socket outlets within the Basement Floor to the RCBO protected
66
5b Raw Power Distribution Board 6 – Ground Floor
Location: First Floor
Reference: DB6
Type: 1 x 8Way 125A TP + N
Fed From: MCCB - 8
Feed Cable: 1 x 4C x 25mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC; 10mmsq cpc
Cct
No
Circuit MC
B
Cable Size
(mm sq.)
Load in Watts
R Y B
1 Kitchenette + Archive + Corridor Toilet Area - Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
2 Secretary/Waiting (F-08) 5Nr. Socket - Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
3 Resident Representative (F-09) 3Nr. Socket - Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
4 Resident Representative (F-09) 3Nr. Socket - Ring 20A 2.5-2c + E
5 Lobby Indoor Cooling Unit- Radial 32A 4.0 3C + E
6 Office (F-04) Indoor Cooling Unit- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
7 Reception/Waiting (F-03) Indoor Cooling Unit- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
8 Corridor (F-05)) Indoor Cooling Unit- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
9 Corridor (F-14)) Indoor Cooling Unit- Radial
10 Corridor Toilet Area Indoor Cooling Unit- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
11 Office (F-07) Indoor Cooling Unit- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
12 Secretary/Waiting (F-08) Indoor Cooling Unit- Radial
13 Resident Representative (F-09) Indoor Cooling Unit- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
14 Office (F-11) Indoor Cooling Unit- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
15 Meeting Room (F-12) Indoor Cooling Unit- Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
16 Hand Dryer Male Toilet - Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
17 Hand Dryer Female Toilet - Radial 20A 4.0 3C + E
18 Hand Dryer Resident Representative (F-09) Toilet - Radial
19 45A Cooker Unit Outlet 45A 6.0-3c + E
20 SPARE
21 SPARE
22 SPARE
23 SPARE
24 SPARE
Note: Circuits to be distributed between DB1 & DB2
Phase Total (Watts)
Total Load (KVA)
[ p.f = 0.85]
Imax (A)
Io = Imax x 0.85
NOTE: All socket outlets within the Basement Floor to the RCBO protected
67
APPENDIX 6 - Raw Power MCCB 9 – LV Panelboard Room
Location: LV Panelboard Room
Reference: VRV Outdoor Unit – 1 (Roof Top)
Type: 100A TP + N
Fed From: MCCB - 9
Feed Cable: 1 x 4C x 16mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC; 10mmsq cpc
APPENDIX 7 - Raw Power MCCB 10 – LV Panelboard Room
Location: LV Panelboard Room
Reference: VRV Outdoor Unit – 2 (Roof Top)
Type: 100A TP + N
Fed From: MCCB - 10
Feed Cable: 1 x 4C x 16mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC; 10mmsq cpc
APPENDIX 8 - Raw Power MCCB 11 – LV Panelboard Room
Location: LV Panelboard Room
Reference: VRV Outdoor Unit – 3 (Roof Top)
Type: 100A TP + N
Fed From: MCCB - 11
Feed Cable: 1 x 4C x 16mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC; 10mmsq cpc
APPENDIX 9 - Raw Power MCCB 11 – LV Panelboard Room
Location: LV Panelboard Room
Reference: 8 Passenger Electric Lift
Type: 63A TP + N
Fed From: MCCB - 11
Feed Cable: 1 x 4C x 16mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC; 10mmsq cpc
68
APPENDIX 10a -BASEMENT FLOOR – SCHEDULE OF SMALL POWER REQUIREMENTS
BASEMENT FLOOR NUMBER OFSMALL
ELECTRICAL
POWER OUTLETS
TYPE / RATING
COMMENTS
TYPE A TYPE B
Main Entrance Lobby Area MK Logic Plus, white
finished 13Amp switch
socket outlets
Power points fitted to 3
compartment high
impact PVC dado
trunking installed at
skirting level
Waiting Room As Above As Above
Archive As Above As Above
Public Information Center As Above As Above
Corridor As Above As Above
Office As Above As Above
Server Room
As Above
Power points fitted to 3
compartment high
impact PVC dado
trunking installed below
benches
UPS Room
As Above
Separate 63A TP + N
Fuse Disconnect Switch
- Electrical Power
Supply to serve UPS
Main UPS
UPS Room
As Above
Power points fitted to 3
compartment high
impact PVC dado
trunking installed below
benches
Tool Store As Above Low level, wall mounted
power points
Notes: TYPE A – Single Switched Socket Outlet TYPE B – Double Switched Socket Outlet
Radial Circuit – 3Nr. Socket Outlets to 1Nr. 40A MCB
69
APPENDIX 10b -GROUND FLOOR – SCHEDULE OF SMALL POWER REQUIREMENTS
GROUND
FLOOR
NUMBER OFSMALL
ELECTRICAL POWER
OUTLETS
TYPE / RATING
COMMENTS
TYPE A TYPE B
Conference Room
MK Logic Plus, white
finished 13Amp switch
socket outlets
Power points fitted to 3
compartment high
impact PVC dado
trunking installed at
skirting level
Lobby As Above As Above
Reception As Above As Above
Office (1-03) As Above As Above
Country Program
Officer
As Above As Above
Office (1-04) As Above
Office (1-05) As Above
Kitchenette
1 As Above Wall mounted power
point fitted above
worktop
Cooker Point 45 Amp Wall mounted power
point fitted above
worktop
Archive MK Metalclad Plus 13
Amp switch socket
outlets
Low level, wall
mounted power points
Notes: TYPE A – Single Switched Socket Outlet TYPE B – Double Switched Socket Outlet
Radial Circuit – 3Nr. Socket Outlets to 1Nr. 40A MCB
70
APPENDIX 10c -FIRST FLOOR – SCHEDULE OF SMALL POWER REQUIREMENTS
FIRST FLOOR NUMBER OFSMALL
ELECTRICAL POWER
OUTLETS
TYPE / RATING
COMMENTS
TYPE A TYPE B
Office (F-04)
MK Logic Plus, white
finished 13Amp switch
socket outlets
Power points fitted to 3
compartment high
impact PVC dado
trunking installed at
skirting level
Lobby Area As Above As Above
Reception As Above As Above
Office (F-07) As Above As Above
Filing Storage
MK Metalclad Plus 13
Amp switch socket
outlets
As Above
Secretary/Waiting
MK Logic Plus, white
finished 13Amp switch
socket outlets
Power points fitted to 3
compartment high
impact PVC dado
trunking installed at
skirting level
Resident
Representative
As Above As Above
Office (F-11) As Above As Above
Meeting Room As Above As Above
Kitchenette 1 As Above Wall mounted power
point fitted above
worktop
Cooker Point 45 Amp As Above
Archive MK Metalclad Plus 13
Amp switch socket
outlets
Low level, wall
mounted power points
Notes: TYPE A – Single Switched Socket Outlet TYPE B – Double Switched Socket Outlet
Radial Circuit – 3Nr. Socket Outlets to 1Nr. 40A MCB
71
APPENDIX 10d: ANCILLIARY AREAS – SCHEDULE OF SMALL POWER REQUIREMENTS
OTHER AREAS NUMBER OF SMALL
ELECTRICAL
POWER OUTLETS
TYPE / RATING COMMENTS
TYPE A TYPE B
Electrical Switch Room
MK 13 Amp switched
fused spur with neon
indicator
Surface, wall mounted, 13 Amp
power supply sockets fitted to
galvanized metal conduit at low
level on side wall
Door Access Control
MK 13 Amp switched
fused spur with neon
indicator
Local power points located on
wall at high level adjacent to
each door under Access Control
Alarm Systems 2 MK Metalclad Plus
13 Amp Outlets
Outlet points fitted to galvanized
metal conduits within Control
room
Lift Installation
1
MK Logic Plus, white
finished, 13 Amp
switch socket outlet
Separate 63 Amp TP + N
electrical power supply
terminating at metal clad, wall
mounted, lockable double pole
isolator, mounted in Electrical
Switch Room
Generator House Plug and Receptacles
for Outdoor Harsh
Environments
Cleaner’s power outlet point
fitted 1m above ground level on
external wall
Notes: TYPE A – Single Switched Socket Outlet TYPE B – Double Switched Socket Outlet
Plug and Receptacles for Outdoor Harsh Environments
Radial Circuit – 2Nr. Socket Outlets to 1Nr. 40A MCB
72
APPENDIX 11: SCHEDULE OF LIGHT FITTINGS - INTERNAL / EXTERNAL AREAS
S/N AREA REF. TYPE OF FITTING/SWITCHING QTY
A Basement Floor:
1 Main Entrance Lobby Area 600 x 600mm 48W LED Ceiling Panel Lighting IP44 6
2 Waiting Room Lighting As Above 4
3 Public Information Center As Above 4
4 Corridor As Above 12
5 Office As Above 4
6 Server Room As Above 4
7 UPS Room As Above 4
8 Male / Female Toilets 18W LED Ceiling Downlight 3
9 Emergency Exit Lightning 8Watts Emergency Illuminated Exit Sign-3Hrs.
Maintain
3
10 Staircase Lighting BEGA Type No. 2743 Impact Resistance Staircase
Light
2
11 Tool Store 18W LED Ceiling Downlight 1
B Ground Floor:
1 Terrace lightning 18W LED Ceiling Downlight 1
2 Lobby (1-02) 600 X 600mm 48W LED Ceiling Panel Lighting IP44 3
3 Conference Room As Above 20
4 Reception (1-01) As Above 6
5 Corridor (1-12) As Above 6
6 Office (1-03) As Above 3
7 Country Program Officer As Above 4
8 Corridor (G-08) As Above 3
9 Office (1-04) As Above 6
10 Office (1-05) As Above 13
11 Veranda Lightning 18W LED Ceiling Downlight 1
12 Corridor Toilet Area As Above 3
13 Kitchenette Lightning As Above 1
14 Male / Female Toilet As Above 4
15 Archive Lightning As Above 1
16 Stair Case Lightning BEGA Type No. 2743 Impact Resistance Staircase
Light
4
17 Emergency Exit Lightning 8Watts Emergency Illuminated Exit Sign-3Hrs.
Maintain
3
18 Outdoor Security
Lightning
1200mm x 36W THORN AQUAFORCE II T26 HF
L840
10
C First Floor:
1 Terrace Lighting 18W LED Ceiling Downlight 1
2 Lobby Lighting 600 X 600mm 48W LED Ceiling Panel Lighting IP44 3
3 Staircase Lighting BEGA Type No. 2743 Impact Resistance Staircase
Light
4
4 Office (F-04) 600 X 600mm 48W LED Ceiling Panel Lighting IP44 12
5 Corridor (F-14) Lighting As Above 6
6 Reception (F-03) As Above 4
7 Corridor (F-05) Lightning As Above 4
8 Office (F-07) As Above 3
9 Filing Storage (F-06) 18W LED Ceiling Downlight 1
10 Secretary/Waiting (F-08) As Above
11 Resident Representative As Above 10
12 Veranda Lightning 18W LED Ceiling Downlight 1
13 Office (F-11) 600 X 600mm 48W LED Ceiling Panel Lighting IP44 3
73
14 Meeting Room (F-12) As Above 4
15 Corridor by Toilet Area As Above 3
16 Kitchenette Lightning 18W LED Ceiling Downlight 1
17 Male / Female Toilet As Above 5
18 Archive Lightning As Above 1
Note: 1. All light fittings to be manually switched.
2. MK Metalclad Plus type switches/switch plates..
3. MK Logic Plus type switches/switch plates.
4 All light fitting wiring to be contained within enclosed PVC conduit pipes and accessories.
APPENDIX 12: SCHEDULE OF CABLE
S/N FROM TO CABLE DESCRIPTION
1 Generator Set - 1 ATS - 1 4C x 95mmsq. XLPE/SWA/PVC
Cable + 35mmsq cpc
2 Generator Set - 2 ATS - 1 4C x 95mmsq. XLPE/SWA/PVC
Cable + 35mmsq cpc
3 ATS - 1 ATS - 2 4C x 95mmsq. XLPE/SWA/PVC
Cable + 35mmsq cpc
4 TRANSFORMER
LV SIDE
ATS - 2 4C x 120mmsq. XLPE/SWA/PVC
Cable + 50mmsq cpc
5 ATS - 2 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 4C x 120mmsq. XLPE/SWA/PVC
Cable + 50mmsq cpc
6 VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
12-WAY LV PANELBOARD 4C x 120mmsq. XLPE/SWA/PVC
Cable + 50mmsq cpc
7 MCCB Switch-1 Raw Power DB1 Basement Floor 4C x 16mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC
Cable + 10mmsq cpc
8 MCCB Switch-2 Raw Power DB1 Basement Floor 4C x 25mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC
Cable + 10mmsq cpc
9 MCCB Switch-3 UPS 125A, 4-way MCCB Panelboard 4C x 25mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC
Cable + 10mmsq cpc
(i) MCCB Panelboard-1 UPS DB1 (ICT) Basement Floor 4C x 16mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC
Cable + 10mmsq cpc
(ii) MCCB Panelboard-2 UPS DB2 (ICT) Basement Floor 4C x 16mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC
Cable + 10mmsq cpc
(iii) MCCB Panelboard-3 UPS DB3 (Security) Basement Floor 4C x 16mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC
Cable + 10mmsq cpc
10 MCCB Switch-4 DB3 4C x 16mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC
Cable + 10mmsq cpc
11 MCCB Switch-5 DB4 4C x 16mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC
Cable + 10mmsq cpc
12 MCCB Switch-6 DB5 4C x 16mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC
Cable + 10mmsq cpc
13 MCCB Switch-7 DB6 4C x 25mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC
Cable + 10mmsq cpc
14 MCCB Switch-8 DB7 4C x 25mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC
Cable + 10mmsq cpc
15 MCCB Switch-9 DB8 4C x 16mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC
Cable + 10mmsq cpc
16 MCCB Switch-10 DB9 4C x 16mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC
Cable + 10mmsq cpc
74
17 MCCB Switch-11 DB10 4C x 16mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC
Cable + 10mmsq cpc
18 MCCB Switch-12 LIFT 4C x 16mmsq XLPE/SWA/PVC
Cable + 10mmsq cpc
75
PROPOSED ELECTRICAL SWITCHGEARS
1. 250Amps, 12way Energy Management Panelboard with increasing emphasis on
energy conservation, we have offers the Proteus Switchgear range of intrinsic
energy management, varying from time switch and relay logic to electronic
microprocessor control*of lighting, heating and ventilation and fire/security
systems.
To meet these changing requirements in commercial and industrial applications,
Proteus Switchgear manufactures custom-designed energy management panels,
typically incorporating the following options:
1. Main incoming isolation / protection up to 800 amps
2. 24 hour essential services distribution•
3. Point of entry / exit key switch controlled services
4. Fire alarm interlocking•
5. Signage control / extended hours manual override
6. Emergency lighting test / battery discharge facility
7. Panels built to specification or in conjunction with Proteus Technical Department.
2. 3 Pole MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS TO IEC/EN 60947-2’ for use
as outgoing devices within and Panelboard.
3. THREE PHASE POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD
TO 10kA, MCB’s up to 63A (17.5mm Module) 10kA MCB’s 10 amps to 125A
(26.3mm Module) Unique busbar arrangement to accept MCB’s up to 125A maximum outgoing*
10kA MCB’s 125 amps (26.3mm Module)
Unique busbar arrangement to accept MCB’s up to 125 amps maximum outgoing
76
4. THREE PHASE SWITCH DISCONNECTORS WITH FUSES
FEATURES
Specification as Switch Disconnectors above, plus:
Internal switching mechanism also padlockable in off position
Maximum rated fuses fitted
Fully rated at AC23A category of duty (inductive load)
Screened terminals
5. OUTDOOR PLUG AND RECEPTACLES FOR HARSH ENVIRONMENTS
6. THREE COMPARTMENT PVC DADO SKIRTING TRUNKING 3 METRE LENGTHS
3 Metre Lengths, Three Compartments 3 Compartment Dado Flat Angle
PVC Dado Trunking
77
3 Compartment Dado Flat Tee 3 Compartment Dado External Angle
The PVC Dado Trunking system has been designed to prevent communication interference, with its 3
compartments designed to separate data communication / telephone and mains 240V cables.
The 2 outer compartments are designated to the data communication and telephone cables; the center
compartment is for use with 240V mains cable.
The product is ideal for re-routing cables from horizontal position to vertical with no visible joints.
78
PV SOLAR ENGINEERING SERVICE INSTALLATION (Optional item)
79
SPECIFICATION FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF
ROOF TOP PV SOLAR PV SERVICES ENGINEERING FOR OFFICE BUILDING AT REGENT
ROAD, HILL STATION, FREETOWN FOR SIERRA LEONE FIELD OFFICE OF THE AFRICAN
DEVELOPMENT BANK (ADB)
80
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PROPOSED SOLAR PV ROOF TOP SYSTEM FOR THE
SIERRA LEONE FIELD OFFICE OF THE AFRICAN DEVELOPMENT BANK (ADB)
TABLE OF CONTENTS:
A. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS:
1.0. Introduction
2.0 Scope
3.0 Standards
4.0 Solar Panels
5.0 Solar Inverters
6.0 Charge Controller
7.0 Batteries
8.0 Equivalency of Standards and Codes:
B. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SOLAR PV SYSTEM COMPONENTS
1. SPECIFICATIONS FOR SOLAR PANELS, INVERTERS & BATTERY BANK
(i) Solar Panels
(ii) Solar Inverter
(iii) Charge Controller
(iii) Batteries
C. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PEOPOSED SOLAR PV ROOFTOP SYSTEM
D. GRID / GENERATOR CONNECT SOLAR POWER GENERATING SYSTEM
81
A. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS:
1. Introduction:
Nowadays many issues appear due to the fact of using fossil fuel as a primary resource in generating
electricity. The solution to such issues can be eliminated or reduced by means of using a renewable
energy such as a solar power system proposed for the Sierra Leone Field Office at the African
Development Bank (ADB).
The first issue that is related to use of fossil fuels is the global warming, where the increase of using
fossil fuels such as oil and natural gas in generating electricity resulted several health and environmental
problems. Natural gas gives off 50% of the carbon dioxide, the principal greenhouse gas, released by
coal and 25% less carbon dioxide than oil, for the same amount of energy produced. Coal contains about
80% more carbon per unit of energy than gas does, and oil contains about 40 percent more. Global
warming has many effects such as earth temperature increase, sea level rise.
Second issue is the air pollution. A lot of pollutants are produced by fossil fuel combustion that is used
to produce electricity such as Sulphur oxides, and hydrocarbons. In addition, suspended particles
contribute to air pollution and combine in the atmosphere to form tropospheric ozone, the major
constituent of smog.
Third issue is the cost of the fossil fuel. The electricity that is produced by the fossil fuel process is more
expensive than the electricity produced by the renewable energy such as solar power.
Another issue that is noticeable nowadays is the water and land pollution. Water spills causes harm to
plants and animals life. Coal mining also contributes to water pollution. Coal contains pyrite that is a
Sulphur compound.
On the other hand, Photovoltaic offers consumers the ability to generate electricity in a clean, quiet and
reliable way. To increase the PV utility, dozens of individual PV cells are interconnected together in a
sealed, weather proof package called a module. Modules are connected either in series or parallel. The
flexibility of the modular PV system allows designers to create solar power systems that can meet a
wide variety of electrical needs.
There are two broad categories of PV system namely:
(i) Grid-tied systems which are connected to the public electricity grid.
The grid-tied PV connected to the power grid at all times and do not require battery storage. A
solar PV system can provide power to a home or business, reducing the amount of power required
from the utility; when the solar PV system power generation exceeds the power needs, then the
surplus power automatically will be pumped back into the grid. A solar PV system will not operate
during a power outage unless it has battery backup.
(ii) Solar Stand-alone systems which are isolated system.
Standalone systems are totally self-sufficient with no connection to the utility grid system. They
generate electricity during daylight hours, and store excess for night time use.
(iii) Solar Hybrid Systems connected to Diesel Generator Set / Public Electricity Grid
In this project proposal, a design of a 24kW Hybrid Solar PV System to the rooftop of the Sierra
Leone Field Office at the African Development Bank (ADB), Freetown is introduced where
necessary components between the PV system and the load for the required design are identified.
82
The proposed system integrates with the standby generator(s) for battery charging when there is
no sun light and for powering the excess load beyond what the Solar PV can power since its
capacity is less than the required capacity of Sierra Leone Field Office at the African Development
Bank (ADB) loads
2.0 Scope:
The scope of the specifications is to cover the requirement of the design, supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of Solar Panels and Inverters/ Charge Controllers and Battery banks with all
components, instruments, fittings and accessories for efficient operation without any trouble.
3.0 Standards:
PV Modules shall be manufactured to any of the International Specifications and shall comply with any
of IEEE1262 (“Recommended Practice for Qualifications of Photovoltaic Modules”), IEC 61215/ IEC
61730 and CE Certification. The Panels shall be tested based on 1000w/s ft. irradiance at site conditions.
Inverters shall comply with IEEE 929-2000 “Recommended Practice for Utility Interface of
Photovoltaic Systems”. The Modules also shall pass Salt Mist corrosion testing as per IEC 61701
4.0 Solar Panels:
The Solar panels shall be of polysilicon type of 250W rating as required. The panels shall employ the
required PV cells and suitable for Grid Connectivity/Off grid applications. The Cells shall lay embedded
in transparent EVA behind tempered glass. The glass is inset deep in an aluminium frame, there by
offering maximum protection. The back of the module shall be sealed with a high quality back sheet.
The Wiring shall be terminated in box backside of panel and shall have no cavities and completely water
tight and is resistant to Temperature and UV radiation. The efficiency of PV panels at standard irradiance
shall be minimum 85%
The broad operational parameters for Solar panels shall be as follows. However the system parameters
with any approved product shall be in the similar lines. The Modules shall be protected against surges
and also provided with Low voltage drop bypass diodes. Module junction boxes shall be weather
protected and made out of FRP/ Thermoplastic The Solar modules shall be guaranteed for 25Years for
performance (First 10years @100%, next 15years @90% and at the end of 25years @80% Efficiency)
through a corporate guarantee and supported by Insurance is preferable
Solar Modules Basic Specs:
(i) Description: 250W
(ii) Panel Peak power: 250W
(iii) Power Tolerance: +/-3%
(iv) Max. Power Voltage: 30.8V
(v) Max. Power Current: 7.8A
(vi) Open Circuit Voltage: 37.69V
(vii) Short Circuit Current: 8.34A
(viii) Module Efficiency: 14-15%
(ix) Approx. Weight: 29Kgs
(x) Operating Conditions: -40-+55deg.C
(xi) Maximum System Voltage: 1000/600V
(xii) Cable suitability: 4sq.mm
(xiii) Junction Box: IP 65 (with Surge protection device)
83
Each PV Module shall be provided with a RFID tag, provided inside Module laminate specifying
following information
a) Name of manufacturer of Solar Module
b) Name of manufacturer of Solar Cell
c) Unique serial number and Model no of Module
d) Month and Year of manufacture
e) Country of Origin
f) I-V Characteristic
g) Peak Wattage, Im, Vm, FF of Module
h) Date and Year of Obtaining PV Module IEC qualification certificate
i) Name of Test lab issued certificate
j) Other information to trace PV module as per ISO9000
Photo Voltaic Input:
(i) Nominal Input Voltage: 700V
(ii) Input Voltage Range: 500-800V
(iii) Max PV Recommended: 80KW
MPPT Charge Controller:
(i) Switching Element: IGMT/MOSFET
(ii) Type of Charger: MPPT
(iii) Input Voltage Range: 500-700V
(iv) MPPT Voltage Range: 550-600V
(v) Efficiency: 95%
(vi)
Input:
(i) Voltage range: 900V, +10%, -15%, 3phase. 4wire
(ii) Nominal Frequency: 50HZ+/-3HZ
(iii) Nominal Power: 20KW
Battery:
(i) Recommenced no of Cells: 72Nr.
(ii) Float Voltage for VRLA: 2.25V
(iii) Boost Voltage: 2.60V
(iv) End cell Voltage: 1.75V
(v) Float Voltage stability: <1%
(vi) DC Ripple: <1%
5.0 Solar Inverters:
Solar Inverter:
The Inverter shall be suitable for indoor application and suitable for Generator/Grid Connectivity with
Input voltage and current to suit the capacity of Inverter as specified below. The Inverters shall be with
MOSFET/ IGBT/ Power transistors and with min. 92% Efficiency. It shall be possible to synchronize
number of modules to get the required output of 80KW net output „full sine wave‟ Inverter(s) having
specified DC input and 415 V, 3-ph, 50 Hz AC output to convert the solar energy in DC form to AC
along with all protection and controlling arrangement as per specification.
84
The efficiency of the Inverter shall be min. of 92%. (Based on availability 80KW or marginally higher
rating inverters shall be acceptable). The Inverter shall be suitable to receive EB supply, DG supply
(Through a changeover) and MPPT Charge Controller suitable to charge 250AH VRLA Batteries to
control charge the batteries and also to use the Battery power in case of non-availability of solar energy
along with all protection and controlling arrangement as per specification.
The Broad Specifications of Inverters are given below:
Inverter
(i) Nominal Output Voltage: 900V 3Phase, 50HZ
(ii) Voltage stability in steady state for input
(AC & DC) variations & step load 0 to nominal load): +/-1%, Based on IEC 62040-3
(iii) Voltage stability in dynamic state for input
(AC & DC) variations & step load (0 to nominal load & Vice Versa): complies with IEC 62040-
3
(iv) Voltage stability in steady state for 00% load imbalance: +/- 3%
(v) Output Frequency: 50HZ+/-3HZ
(vi) Wave Form: Pure Sine wave
(vii) Technology: MOS FET Based/ IGBC Based
(viii) Duty: Continuous
(ix) Efficiency: More than 92%
(x) Protection: IP 55
(xi) Cable entry: Bottom
(xii) Temperature& RH: 50Deg.C, Up to 95% (Non Condensing)
(xiii) Noise Level: Not more than 55dB at 1mtr distance
(xiv) Control: MCB
(xv) Indications: Array ON\ Inverter ON/ Grid ON/ Input Surge/
Input UV/OV, Low/ High Frequency/ Inverter UV/ OV/
any other as required.
6.0 Charge Controller
The proposed Solar Charge Controller MPPT 150/85 (12/24/48V-85A) shall be a current-regulating
device that is placed between the solar array output and the batteries. The device is designed to prevent
the batteries from being overcharged or overly discharged. It unit shall work to slowly reduce the amount
of charge that follow into the battery as the battery approach it’s fully charge stage.
7.0 Solar Batteries
A range of batteries is available. HOPPECKE VR L 1700 (Valve Regulated Lead Acid) batteries that is
completely sealed and do not require topping up with distilled water, spill proof, leak proof and can be
used upside down or on their side and specifically designed for solar & green energy systems and can
be used in confined or poorly ventilated spaces is proposed. Battery installations are installed to comply
with AS4509 and AS5003 and Clean Energy Council requirements.
8.0 Equivalency of Standards and Codes:
Wherever reference is made in the Contract to specific standards and codes to be met by the goods and
materials to be furnished, and work performed or tested, the provisions of the latest current edition or
revision of the relevant standards and codes in effect shall apply, unless otherwise expressly stated in
the Contract document. Where such standards and codes are notional, or relate to a particular country or
region, other authoritative standards that ensure a substantially equal or higher quality than the standards
85
and codes specified will be accepted subject to the Sierra Leone Field Office at the African Development
Bank (ADB) Project Manager’s prior review and written consent. Differences between the standards
specified and the proposed alternative standards shall be fully described in writing by the Vendor and
submitted to the Sierra Leone Field Office at the African Development Bank (ADB) Project Manager at
least 15 days prior to the date when the Vendor desires the Project Manager’s consent.
86
B. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SOLAR PV SYSTEM COMPONENTS
1. SOLAR PANELS, AND OTHER COMPONENTS, TO BE INCLUDE IN THE PROPOSED KITS
a) OVERVIEW:
The solar panel industry has been going through radical changes in the last couple years. The price per
watt for solar panels has decreased more than 60% during this period. Hence, Sierra Leone Field Office
at the African Development Bank (ADB) is looking for best prices for the best panels to be installed at
its premises in Freetown.
The Sierra Leone Field Office at the African Development Bank (ADB) notes that Solar Companies
have significantly raised the standard of module efficiency in the solar industry. They introduced
innovative four busbar cell technology, which demonstrates higher power output and higher system
reliability and Sierra Leone Field Office at the African Development Bank (ADB) have embraced this
next generation of modules for their excellent performance, superior reliability and enhanced.
b) WARRANTIES
Solar panels are a semiconductor product so their reliability and stability are very high. Manufacturing
defects usually show up very quickly and after that point they seldom experience problems. The point
is that if the initial quality is good then you should have a long and trouble-free experience.
The panels provided shall come from tier-1 manufacturers that carry a 25yrs. linear warranty. This means
they are guaranteed to generate 97.5% of rated power in year 1 and 80% in year 25.
1. SOLAR PANEL SPECIFICATION SHEETS:
a) New Technology:
(i) Reduces cell series resistance
(ii) Reduces stress between cell interconnectors
(iii) Improves module conversion efficiency
(iv) Improves product reliability
b) Management System Certificates:
(i) ISO 9001: 2008 / Quality management system
(ii) ISO/TS 16949:2009 / The automotive industry quality management system
(iii) ISO 14001:2004 / Standards for environmental management system
(iv) OHSAS 18001:2007 / International standards for occupational health & safety
c) Product Certificates:
(i) IEC 61215 / IEC 61730: VDE / MCS / CE / JET / SII / CEC AU / INMETRO / CQC
(ii) UL 1703 / IEC 61215 performance: CEC listed (US) / FSEC (US Florida)
(iii) UL 1703: CSA / IEC 61701 ED2: VDE / IEC 62716: TUV / IEC 60068-2-68: SGS
(iv) PV CYCLE (EU) / UNI 9177 Reaction to Fire: Class 1
Note: Vendors shall be committed to providing high quality solar products, solar system solutions and services
d) Key Features:
a) Higher energy yield:
(i) Outstanding performance at low irradiance
(ii) Maximum energy yield at low NOCT
(iii) Improved energy production through reduced cell series resistance
b) Increased system reliability:
87
(i) Long term system reliability with IP67 junction box
(ii) Enhanced system reliability in extreme temperature environment with special cell level stress release
technology
c) Extra value to customers:
(i) Positive power tolerance up to 5W
(ii) Stronger 40mm robust frame to hold wind load up to 2400 Pa
(iii) Anti-glare project evaluation
(iv) Salt mist, ammonia and blowing sand resistance apply to seaside, farm and desert environments
250W Solar Polycrystalline Panels
Solar Polycrystalline 250W (1650 x 992 x 40mm)
• Low voltage-temperature coefficient enhances high-temperature operation.
• Exceptional low-light performance and high sensitivity to light across the entire solar spectrum.
• 25-Year limited warranty on power output and performance.
• 5-Year limited warranty on materials and workmanship.
• Sealed, waterproof, multi-functional junction box gives high level of safety.
• High performance bypass diodes minimize the power drop caused by shade.
• Advanced EVA (Ethylene Vinyl Acetate) encapsulation system with triple-layer back sheet meets the
most stringent safety requirements for high-voltage operation.
• A sturdy, anodized aluminium frame allows modules to be easily roof-mounted with a variety of
standard mounting systems.
• Highest quality, high-transmission tempered glass provides enhanced stiffness and impact resistance.
• High power models with pre wired quick-connect system with MC4 (PV-ST01) connectors.
Solar Polycrystalline Panels
Description
Net
weight
Electrical data under STC (1)
Nomina
l
Power
Max
Power
Voltage
Max
Power
Current
Open-
Circuit
Short-
Circuit
Current
PMPP VMPP IMPP Voc Isc
Kg W V A V A
250W-20V Poly 1650 x 992 x
40mm series 3a
18 250 30 8.33 36.01 9.40
Module SPP (032502400)
Nominal Power (± 3% tolerance): 250W
Cell type: Polycrystalline
Number of cells in series: 60
Maximum system voltage (V) 1000V
Temperature coefficient of PMPP (%): -0.47/°C
Temperature coefficient of Voc (%): -0.34/°C
Temperature coefficient of Isc (%): +0.045/°C
Temperature Range: -40°C to +85°C
88
Surface Maximum Load Capacity: 200 kg/m²
Allowable Hail Load: 23m/s, 7.53 g
Junction Box Type: PV-JB002
Length of Cable / connector: 900mm / MC4
Output tolerance: +/-3%
Frame: Aluminium
Product warranty: 5years
Warranty on electrical performance: 10years 90% + 25years 80% of power output
1) STC (Standard Test Conditions): 1000 W/m2, 25ºC, AM (Air Mass) 1.5
e) Electrical Data / STC*:
Electrical Data CS6P 250P
Nominal Max Power (Pmax) 250W
Opt. Operating Voltage (Vmp) 30.0V
Opt. Operating Current (Imp) 8.33A
Open Circuit Voltage (Voc) 36.01V
Short Circuit Current (Isc) 9.40A
Module Efficiency 15.54 %
Operating Temperature +15°C ~ +45°C
Max. System Voltage 1000 V (IEC) or 1000V (UL) or 600 V (UL)
Module Fire Performance TYPE 1 (UL 1703) or CLASS C (IEC61730)
Max. Series Fuse Rating 15A
Application Classification Class A
Power Tolerance 0 ~ + 5W
*Under Standard Test Conditions (STC) of irradiance of 1000 W/m2, spectrum AM 1.5 and cell temperature of 25°C
f) Electrical Data / NOCT*:
Electrical Data CS6P 250P
Nominal Max Power (Pmax) 181W
Opt. Operating Voltage (Vmp) 27.5V
Opt. Operating Current (Imp) 6.60A
Open Circuit Voltage (Voc) 34.2V
Short Circuit Current (Isc) 7.19A
*Under Nominal Operating Cell Temperature (NOCT), irradiance of 800 W/m2, spectrum AM 1.5, ambient temperature
20°C, wind speed 1 m/s.
g) Performance at Low Irradiance:
Industry leading performance at low irradiation, +96.5% module efficiency from an irradiance of 1000
W/m2 to 200 W/m2 (AM 1.5, 25°C).
h) Module / Mechanical Data:
Specification Data
Cell Type Poly-crystalline, 6 inch
Cell Arrangement 60 (6 ˣ 10)
Dimensions 1650 ˣ 992 ˣ 40mm
Weight 18kg (39.7lbs.)
Front Cover 3.2mm tempered glass
Frame Material Anodized aluminium alloy
89
J-BOX IP67, 3 diodes
Cable 4mm2 (IEC) or 4mm2 & 12 AWG 1000 V (UL 1000 V) or 12
AWG (UL 600 V), 1000 mm (650 mm is optional)
Connectors MC4 or MC4 comparable
Stand. Packaging 24 pcs, 480kg (quantity & weight per pallet)
i) Temperature Characteristics:
Specification Data
Temperature Coefficient (Pmax) -0.43% / °C
Temperature Coefficient (Voc) -0.34 % / °C
Temperature Coefficient (Isc) 0.065 % /
Nominal Operating Cell Temperature 45±2°C
As there are different certification requirements in different markets, please contact your sales
representative for the specific certificates applicable to your products. The specification and key features
described in this Datasheet may deviate slightly and are not guaranteed. Due to on-going innovation,
research and product enhancement, Manufacture’s reserves the right to make any adjustment to the
information described herein at any time without notice. Please always obtain the most recent version
of the datasheet which shall be duly incorporated into the binding contract made by the Sierra Leone
Field Office of the African Development Bank (ADB) and parties governing all transactions related to
the purchase and sale of the products described herein.
j) Shadow Analysis:
The shadow analysis of site has to be carried out by bidder and shall be submitted to Sierra Leone Field
Office of the African Development Bank (ADB), after placement of work order.
2. Quattro 48/10000/140-100/100 Inverter/Charger (Lithium Ion battery compatible):
Quattro 48/10000/140-100/100 Inverter/Charger
90
Quattro 48/10000/140-100/100 Inverter/Charger Unit Description:
1. Two AC inputs with integrated transfer switch
The Quattro can be connected to two independent AC sources, for example the public grid and a
generator, or two generators. The Quattro will automatically connect to the active source.
2. Two AC Outputs
The main output has no-break functionality. The Quattro takes over the supply to the connected loads
in the event of a grid failure or when shore/generator power is disconnected. This happens so fast (less
than 20 milliseconds) that computers and other electronic equipment will continue to operate without
disruption. The second output is live only when AC is available on one of the inputs of the Quattro.
Loads that should not discharge the battery, like a water heater for example can be connected to this
output.
3 Virtually unlimited power thanks to parallel operation
Up to 6 Quattro units can operate in parallel. Six units 48/10000/140, for example, will provide 54kW /
60kVA output power and 840 Amps charging capacity.
4 Three phase capability
Three units can be configured for three phase output. But that’s not all: up to 6 sets of three units can be
parallel connected to provide 162kW / 180kVA inverter power and more than 2500A charging capacity.
5 PowerControl – Dealing with limited generator, shoreside or grid power
The Quattro is a very powerful battery charger. It will therefore draw a lot of current from the generator
or shoreside supply (16A per 5kVA Quattro at 230VAC). A current limit can be set on each AC input.
The Quattro will then take account of other AC loads and use whatever is spare for charging, thus
preventing the generator or mains supply from being overloaded.
6 PowerAssist – Boosting shore or generator power
This feature takes the principle of PowerControl to a further dimension allowing the Quattro to
supplement the capacity of the alternative source. Where peak power is so often required only for a
limited period, the Quattro will make sure that insufficient mains or generator power is immediately
compensated for by power from the battery. When the load reduces, the spare power is used to recharge
the battery.
91
7 Solar energy: AC power available even during a grid failure
The Quattro can be used in off grid as well as grid connected PV and other alternative energy systems.
Loss of mains detection software is available.
8 System configuring
(i) In case of a stand-alone application, if settings have to be changed, this can be done in a matter of
minutes with a DIP switch setting procedure.
(ii) Parallel and three phase applications can be configured with VE.Bus Quick Configure and VE.Bus
System Configurator software.
(iii) Off grid, grid interactive and self-consumption applications, involving grid-tie inverters and/or
MPPT Solar Chargers can be configured with Assistants (dedicated software for specific
applications).
9 On-site Monitoring and control
Several options are available: Battery Monitor, Multi Control Panel, Ve.Net Blue Power panel, Colour
Control panel, smartphone or tablet (Bluetooth Smart), laptop or computer (USB or RS232).
10 Remote Monitoring and control
Victron Ethernet Remote, Victron Global Remote and the Colour Control Panel
Data can be stored and displayed on our VRM (Victron Remote Management) website, free of charge.
11 Remote configuring
When connected to the Ethernet, systems with a Colour Control panel can be accessed and settings can
be changed.
Technical Specifications Quattro 48/10000/140-100/100 Inverter/Charger
Power Control / Power Assist: Yes
Integrated Transfer switch: Yes
AC inputs (2x)
Input voltage range: 187-265VAC
Input frequency: 45 – 65Hz
Power factor: 1
Maximum feed through current (A): 2x100
A. INVERTER
Input voltage range (V DC): 9.5 – 17V, 19 – 33V, 38 – 66V
Output (1):
Output voltage: 230 VAC ± 2%
Frequency: 50 Hz ± 0.1%
Cont. output power at 25°C (VA) (3): 10000
Cont. output power at 25°C (W): 8000
Cont. output power at 40°C (W): 6500
Cont. output power at 65°C (W): 4500
Peak power (W): 20000
92
Maximum efficiency (%): 96
Zero load power (W): 55
Zero load power in AES mode (W): 35
Zero load power in Search mode (W): 20
B. CHARGER
Charge voltage 'absorption' (V DC): 57.6
Charge voltage 'float' (V DC): 55.2
Storage mode (V DC): 52.8
Charge current house battery (A) (4): 140
Charge current starter battery (A) 4: (12V and 24V models only)
Battery temperature sensor: Yes
C. GENERAL
Auxiliary output (A) (5): 50
Programmable relay (6): 3x
Protection (2): a-g
VE.Bus communication port: For parallel and three phase operation, remote monitoring and system
integration
General purpose com. Port: 2x
Remote on-off: Yes
Common Characteristics:
Operating temp.: -40 to +65˚C
Humidity (non-condensing): max. 95%
D. ENCLOSURE
Common Characteristics Material & Colour: Aluminium (blue RAL 5012)
Protection category: IP 21
Battery-connection: Four M8 bolts (2 plus and 2 minus connections)
230 V AC-connection: Bolts M6
Weight (kg): 45
Dimensions (H x W x D in mm): 470 x 350 x 280
E. STANDARDS
Safety: EN-IEC 60335-1, EN-IEC 60335-2-29, IEC 62109-1
Emission, Immunity: EN 55014-1, EN 55014-2, EN 61000-3-3,EN 61000-6-3,
EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-1
Automotive Directive: 2004/104/EC
93
3. Solar Charge Controller MPPT 150/85 (12/24/48V-85A)
Solar Charge Controller MPPT 150/85 (12/24/48V-85A)
Solar Charge Controller MPPT 150/85 (12/24/48V-85A) Unit Description:
1. PV voltage up to 150V
The Solar MPPT 150/70 and 150/85 charge controllers will charge a lower nominal-voltage battery
from a higher nominal voltage PV array.
The controller will automatically adjust to a 12, 24, 36, or 48V nominal battery voltage.
2. Ultra-fast Maximum Power Point Tracking (MPPT)
Especially in case of a clouded sky, when light intensity is changing continuously, an ultra-fast
MPPT controller will improve energy harvest by up to 30% compared to PWM charge controllers
and by up to 10% compared to slower MPPT controllers.
3. Advanced Maximum Power Point Detection in case of partial shading conditions
If partial shading occurs, two or more maximum power points may be present on the power-voltage
curve. Conventional MPPT’s tend to lock to a local MPP, which may not be the optimum MPP.
The innovative BlueSolar algorithm will always maximize energy harvest by locking to the
optimum MPP.
4. Outstanding conversion efficiency
Maximum efficiency exceeds 98%. Full output current up to 40°C (104°F)
5. Flexible charge algorithm
Several preconfigured algorithms. One user programmable algorithm
Manual or automatic equalization
Battery temperature sensor
Battery voltage sense option
6. Programmable auxiliary relay
For alarm or generator start purposes
7. Extensive electronic protection
Over-temperature protection and power derating when temperature is high
PV short circuit and PV reverse polarity protection.
Reverse current protection.
94
8. CAN bus
To parallel up to 25 units, to connect to a ColorControl panel or to connect to a CAN bus network
Technical Specifications Solar Charge Controller MPPT 150/85 (12/24/48V-35A)
Nominal battery voltage: 12 / 24 / 36 / 48V Auto Select
Rated charge current 85A @ 40°C (104°F)
Maximum solar array input power 1): 12V: 1200W / 24V: 2400W / 36V: 3600W / 48V: 4850W
Maximum PV open circuit voltage: 150V absolute maximum coldest conditions
145V start-up and operating maximum
Minimum PV voltage Battery voltage plus 7 Volt to start
Battery voltage plus 2 Volt operating
Standby power consumption: 12V: 0,55W / 24V: 0,75W / 36V: 0,90W / 48V: 1,00W
Efficiency at full load: 12V: 95% / 24V: 96,5% / 36V: 97% / 48V: 97,5%
Absorption charge: 14.4 / 28.8 / 43.2 / 57.6V
Float charge: 13.7 / 27.4 / 41.1 / 54.8V
Equalization charge: 15.0 / 30.0 / 45 / 60V
Remote battery temperature sensor: Yes
Default temperature compensation setting: -2.7 mV/°C per 2V battery cell
Remote on/off: Yes
Programmable relay: DPST AC rating: 240VAC / 4A
DC rating: 4A up to 35VDC, 1A up to 60VDC
Communication port VE.Can: Two paralleled RJ45 connectors, NMEA2000 protocol
Parallel operation: Yes, through VE.Can. Max 25 units in parallel
Operating temperature: -40°C to 60°C with output current derating above 40°C
Cooling: Low noise fan assisted
Humidity (non-condensing): Max. 95%
Terminal size: 35mm² / AWG2
Material & color: Aluminium, blue RAL 5012
Protection class: IP20
Weight: 4,2kg
Dimensions (H x W x D): 350 x 160 x 135mm
Mounting: Vertical wall mount Indoor only
Safety: EN 60335-1
EMC: EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-3
4. Colour Control GX ((Firmware version v1.20)
1. Colour Control GX
The Colour Control (CCGX) provides intuitive control and monitoring for all products connected
to it. The list of Victron products that can be connected is endless.
2. VRM Online Portal
Besides monitoring and controlling products on the CCGX, the information is also forwarded to
remote monitoring systems (VRM Online Portal).
95
3. Future functionality
The CCGX has endless possibilities. There are many features that can be added as a firmware
update. Firmware updates are free of charge, as with all updates of Victron products. Updating the
product is easy: the CCGX will update itself automatically, as long as it is connected to the internet.
Manual updates can be done with a USB stick and microSD cards.
4. Supported products
(i) Multis and Quattros, including split-phase and three-phase systems. Monitoring and control (on/off
and current limiter)
(ii) Solar MPPT 150/70 and the MPPT 150/85. Current solar output is visible on the overview screen,
and all parameters are logged to the VRM online portal. Note that the VRM App has a nice
overview showing data of the Solar MPPT 150/70 as well. When multiple Solar MPPTs with
VE.Can are used in parallel; the Color Control will show all information as one.
(iii) Solar MPPT Solar Chargers with a VE.Direct port (70/15, 75/15, 100/15, 100/30, 75/50, 100/50,
150/35) can be connected to the VE.Direct ports on the CCGX. Connecting multiple at the same
time is possible. They will all appear as a separate Solar Charger in the device list.
(iv) BMV-700 family can be connected directly to the VE.Direct ports on the CCGX. Use the
VE.Direct Cable for this.
(v) BMV-600 family can be connected to the VE.Direct ports on the CCGX. Use the VE.Direct to
BMV60xS cable for that.
(vi) Lynx Ion + Shunt
(vii) Lynx Shunt VE.Can
(viii) Skylla-i
(ix) NMEA2000 tank sensors
(x) A USB GPS can be connected to the USB port. Location and speed will be visible on the display,
and the data is sent to the VRM Portal for tracking purposes. The map on VRM will show the
latest position.
(xi) Wi-Fi USB.
Note that there are more options for products which use the VE.Direct ports, such as BMVs and small
MPPTs. They can also be connected through USB, useful when more than two products need to be
connected. Use an off-the-shelf USB-hub and the VE.Direct to USB interface, ASS030530000.
5. Other highlights
(i) When connected to the internet, the CCGX will update itself automatically when there is a new
software version available.
(ii) Multiple languages: English, Chinese, German, Italian, Spanish, French, Swedish and Dutch.
(iii) Use the CCGX as a Modbus-TCP gateway to all connected Victron products.
Technical Specifications Color Control GX
Power supply voltage range: 9 – 70VDC
Current draw: 12VDC 24VDC 48VDC
Switched off: 0mA, 0mA 0mA
Display off: 140mA 80mA 40mA
Display at minimum intensity: 160mA 90mA 45mA
Display at maximum intensity: 245mA 125mA 65mA
Potential free contact: 3A / 30VDC / 250VAC (Normally open)
96
Communication ports
VE.Direct: 2 separate VE.Direct ports – isolated
VE.Can: 2 paralleled RJ45 sockets – isolated
VE.Bus: 2 paralleled RJ45 sockets – isolated
USB: 2 USB Host ports – not isolated
Ethernet: 10/100/1000MB RJ45 socket – isolated except shield
3rd party interfacing
Modbus-TCP: Use Modbus-TCP to monitor and control all products connected to the Color Control
GX
JSON: Use the VRM JSON API to retrieve data from the VRM Portal
Other
Outer dimensions (H x W x D): 130 x 120 x 28mm
Operating temperature range: -20 to +50°C
5. HOPPECKE VR L 1700 Batteries:
Sun I Power VR L 1700 Valve regulated lead-acid batteries
a) Design Parameters:
(i) Design Life: >20 Years
(ii) Voltage: 2Volts
(iii) Capacity: 100Ah to 1700Ah
b) Typical applications:
(i) Village power supplies
(ii) Hybrid systems
(iii) Peak Shaving/voltage stabilization
(iv) Stations of mobile communications
(v) Sustainable tourism
(vi) Cathodic corrosion protection
97
(vii) Pumping systems
c) Benefits:
(i) Maintenance-free regarding water refilling – due to innovative Gel-technology
(ii) Very high cycle stability during PSoC1 operation – due to tubular plate design with
efficient charge current acceptance
(iii) Maximum compatibility – dimensions according to DIN 40742
(iv) Optimal space utilization – due to possibility of horizontal arrangement
(v) Higher short-circuit safety even during the installation – based on HOPPECKE system
connectors
(vi) Proven long service life
(vii) Spill proof and leak proof with triple seal terminal design
Specifications:
Series OPzV C100/1.85
V
Ah
C50/1.85
V
Ah
C24/1.83
V
Ah
C10/1.80
V
Ah
C5/1.77
V
Ah
Max.
Weigh
t
kg
Max.
Lengt
h
mm
Max.
Widt
h
mm
Max.
Heigh
t
mm
Sun I power
VR L 1700
1955 1870 1785 1545 1372 110.0 215 277 855
d) Certificate of Compliance:
BS 6290: Part 4 & IEC 60896-21/22:2004
This is a British / European standard specification for sealed type valve regulated lead acid
batteries prepared under the direction of the Light Electrical Engineering Standards Committee.
This standard is of a series of standards, specifications and requirements for all types of
stationary Lead Acid Cells or Monobloc Batteries.
e) Accessories:
All equipment required for the correct and safe installation and maintenance of each battery is
provided, and include clear terminal covers, terminal grease, interconnects, cell numbers and
installation and operation manual
f) Guarantee:
All cells are supplied with a full replacement, ex-factory, 60 months warranty, against faulty
manufacturing and workmanship, when installed and operated in accordance with SEC’s
published Installation and Operating Instructions.
ADDITIONAL PARAMETERS REQUIRED:
The electrical safety of the array installation is of the utmost importance. Array electrical configuration
shall be in such a way that, the MPPT shall operate with maximum efficiency, between the low and
high temperature of the site. Maximal Current ripple 5% PP Power Factor 0.95 inductive to 0.95
capacitive ambient room temperature 5 to 55 degree C
Housing Cabinet:
a) PCU is housed in suitable switch cabinet, with min IP 21 degree of Ingress Protection.
b) Weatherproof, rodents & insect proof
98
c) Components and circuit boards mounted inside the enclosures clearly identified with appropriate
permanent designations, which shall also serve to identify the items on the supplied drawings.
d) All doors, covers, panels and cable exists shall be gasketed or otherwise designed to limit the entry
of dust and moisture. All doors shall be equipped with locks. All openings shall be provided with
grills or screens with openings no larger than 0.95 cm (about 3x8 inch).
Other important features Electrical safety Protections:
a) General
b) Over/under voltage The PCU shall include appropriate self-protective and self-diagnostic feature
to protect itself and the PV array from damage in the event of PCU component failure or from
parameters beyond the PCU’s safe operating range due to internal or external causes.
The self-protective features shall not allow signals from the PCU front panel to cause the PCU to
be operated in a manner which may be unsafe or damaging. Faults due to malfunctioning within
the PCU, including commutation failure, shall be cleared by the PCU protective devices and not
by the existing site utility grid service circuit breaker.
a) Generator/Utility (Grid) over-under voltage protection.
b) Frequency protection.
c) Fool Proof Protection
d) Accidental open circuit
e) Internal Faults
f) Galvanic Isolation
c) Over voltage protection against atmospheric lightning
d) Protection against voltage fluctuations in the grid itself and internal faults in the power
conditioner, operational errors and switching transients.
e) Against ISLANDING:
Note: (i) MOV type surge arrestors on AC and DC terminals for over voltage
protection from lightning-induced surges
(ii) Full protection against accidental open circuit and reverse polarity at the
input.
(iii) Inbuilt protection for internal faults including excess temperature, commutation
failure, overload and cooling fan failure is obligatory
(iv) Galvanic isolation shall be provided to avoid any DC component being injected
into the grid and the potential for AC components appearing at the array.
Galvanic isolation shall be provided between the inverter/ PCU and
generator/grid to avoid any DC component being injected into the grid and the
potential for AC components appearing at the array.
The specification of the isolation transformer shall be as follows:
Capacity: 125% of capacity of the PV modules (i.e. a 12.5 kVA
transformer shall be used for a 10kW PV system, and so on)
System: 3-phase, 4-wire
Input voltage range: 320-480 V AC
Output voltage range: 380-435 V AC
99
Output voltage for single phase: 220-240 V AC
Tap change: Manual, V+/-20%, V+/-10%, V+/-0%
Operating frequency: 48-52 Hz
Efficiency; >98.5%
Impedance: 4-10%
Output waveform: Zero distortion
Insulation class: Class F
Leakage current: <20 mA
Cooling: AN
f) Earth Fault Supervision
g) Disconnection & Islanding
Enclosure: IP 21 (if indoors) IP 54 (if outdoors)
Operating Temperature: 0-60°C
Cable entry: Separate input/ output enclosed cable entry
Standard: IS 2026 - Further, it is also observed at various locations throughout the distribution grid
that the grid voltage would consistently be greater or less than the acceptable voltage window of
many inverters and PCUs.
Moreover, this variation may be only for particular days of a week, seasonal, or for a limited time. - In
such a case, the Contractor shall study/ measure the point of interconnection of the PV system
consistently for at least one week to identify the voltage range experienced at the interconnection point
of the distribution grid. Consequently, the Contractor shall adjust the input/ output of the isolation
transformer to appropriate tap settings so that the voltage on the inverter side of the transformer is always
within the acceptable voltage window of the inverter.
The appropriate tap setting shall be conveyed to Sierra Leone Field Office at the African Development
Bank (ADB) by the contractor. An integrated earth fault detection device is provided to detect eventual
earth fault on DC side and shall send message to the supervisory system Disconnection of the PV
generator in the event of loss of the main grid supply is achieved by in built protection within the power
conditioner. This may be achieved through rate of change of current, phase angle, unbalanced voltages,
or reactive load variants. Operation outside the limits of power quality as described in technical data
sheet shall cause the power conditioner to disconnect the grid.
h) Codes & Standards
The quality of equipment supplied shall be controlled to meet the guidelines for engineering design
included in the standards and codes listed in the relevant ISI and other standards, such as:
a) IEEE 928: Recommended Criteria for terrestrial PV power systems.
b) IEEE 929 Recommended practice for utility interface of residential and intermediate PV
systems.
c) IEEE 519 Guide for harmonic control and reactive compensation of Static Power Controllers.
d) National Electrical NFPA 70-1990 (USA) or equipment national standard.
e) National Electrical Safety Code ANSI C2 (USA) or equipment national standard. Inverter /
Array Size ratio
The ratio of the Inverter continuous power rating and the array peak power rating shall be between 80
to 90% or any other value found suitable. This is because better overall annual yield can be obtained by
allowing the Inverter to operate for longer periods closer to optimal efficiency. Inverter efficiency should
100
exceed 90% except when operating at less than 10% of maximum output. MPPT Maximum power point
tracker is integrated in the power conditioner unit to maximize energy drawn from the array. The MPPT
shall be microprocessor based to minimize power losses. The MPPT shall have provision (manual
setting) for constant voltage operation.
i) Metering
(i) PV array energy production: Meter to log the actual amount of AC energy generated / consumed by
the PV system shall have to be provided.
(ii) Solar irradiance:
An integrating pyranometer (Class II or better) to be provided, with the sensor mounted in the plane
of the array. Readout shall be integrated with data logging, Data Logging System
a) All major parameters available on the digital bus and logging facility for energy auditing through
the internal microprocessor and can be read on the digital front panel at any time the current values,
previous values for up to a month and the average values.
The following parameters shall be accessible via the operating interface display:
• AC voltage
• AC output current
• Output power
• DC input voltage
• DC input current
• Time active
• Time disabled
• Time Idle
• Temperatures (C)
• Converter status Protective function limits (VIZ-AC over voltage, AC under voltage, Over
frequency, under frequency, ground fault, PV starting voltage, PV stopping voltage, over
voltage delay, under voltage delay over frequency, ground fault delay, PV starting delay, PV
stopping delay. Remote Monitoring System - A remote monitoring system shall be included
with each photovoltaic system. - Usually such monitoring systems are connected and
synchronized with the inverters. - Such monitoring services are provided by many leading
inverter manufacturers and also third party service providers. - The monitoring system should
transmit the following data in real-time to a central server and store it:
• DC currents, voltages and power
• AC currents, voltages and power
• Irradiation, ambient temperature, module temperature and wind speed.
• Error logs.
This data may be transmitted either using the available LAN or GSM/ GPRS, or any other mode of
connectivity available at the site. - The contractor shall be responsible for data connectivity for
monitoring up to the warranty/ O&M period of the PV system, after which, the Contractor shall
transfer all ownership rights, SIM card, account information, instructions, etc. to Sierra Leone Field
Office at the African Development Bank (ADB). - The contractor shall ensure that the Sierra Leone
Field Office at the African Development Bank (ADB) is aware of the contracts required to maintain
connectivity post-warranty/ O&M period. - This data shall be accessible by Sierra Leone Field
Office at the African Development Bank (ADB) through a secure login account. - The stored data
should be represented through hourly, daily, monthly, etc. graphs and easily downloadable in .csv
or xls format.
101
j) Cables & accessories
For Cables & Accessories following certificates are mandatory: (Copy to be provided with tender)
General Test and Measuring Methods PVC insulated cables for working Voltages up to and
including 1100 and UV resistant for outdoor installation IEC 60189 IS 694/ IS 1554 IS/IEC 69947
All the cables which shall be supplied shall be conforming to IS 1554 / 694 Part 1 of 1988 & shall
be of 650V/ 1.1kV grade as per requirement. Only PVC copper cables shall be used. The size of
the cables between array interconnections, array to junction boxes, junction boxes to PCU etc. shall
be so selected to keep the voltage drop and losses to the minimum. Certification of cables should
be submitted in the tender.
k) Control room
The required control room shall be constructed at additional cost if required. Otherwise, PCU/ Solar
Inverter should be placed/ mounted in suitable housing.
l) Spare parts
One set of essential spares for the PCU shall be provided and made available at the plant.
m) Documentation
The Vendor shall endeavour to supply sufficient information with the systems so the client can get
a comprehensive overview of all the components, their function, interaction and the potential
challenges of an off-grid solution.
All documentations shall comply with AS5033 and Clean Energy Council
Two sets of installation manual / user manual shall be supplied along with the Vendor’s submission.
The manual shall include complete system details such as array lay out, schematic of the system,
inverter details, working principle etc. Step by step maintenance and troubleshooting procedures
shall be given in the manuals. Module layout drawing has to be submitted to the Sierra Leone Field
Office at the African Development Bank (ADB) 2 nos. set of line diagram and licensed electrical
contractors’ certificate has to be submitted to the Sierra Leone Field Office at the African
Development Bank (ADB).
102
SPECIFICATION FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF
COMPOUND SOLAR LIGHTING SERVICES ENGINEERING FOR OFFICE BUILDING AT
REGENT ROAD, HILL STATION, FREETOWN FOR SIERRA LEONE FIELD OFFICE OF THE
AFRICAN DEVELOPMENT BANK (ADB)
103
STANDALONE PV SOLAR COMPOUND SECURITY LIGHTING SYSTEM
1. Definition:
A standalone solar photovoltaic compound lighting system comprises a compact fluorescent lamp, lead
acid battery, PV module(s), control electronics, inter-connecting wires/cables, module mounting
hardware, battery box, operation instruction and maintenance manual.
2. Duty Cycle:
The system should be designed to automatically switch ON at dusk, operate throughout the night and
automatically switch OFF at the dawn, under average daily insolation of 5kWh/sq. m. on a horizontal
surface.
3. Lamp:
The lamp shall have following features:
a) 62W LED
(i) Power: 62W
(ii) Light Intensity: 5,000 lm
(i) Middle Lifespan: 50.000 hr.
(iv) Thread: E-40
(v) Providing quick and save re-lamping!
b) The light output from the lamp should be around 1800 +/- 5% lumens. Also please see (iii) of V
given below.
c) The lamp should be housed in a weather proof assembly suitable for outdoor use, with a reflector
on its back. While fixing the assembly, the lamp should be held in a base up configuration. OR 3
LED fixtures -Specifications for 62W LED Compound Light: (Supporting Documents Required)
1. LED Type: High power of 1W each
2. Power Consumption: 62W ± 10%, maximum 1.35 W per LED with 85% driver efficiency.
3. Luminous flux efficacy ≥ 110 lm/Watt
4. Colour Rendering Index ≥ 75
5. Colour Temperature: 5500 K- 7500K (White)
6. Circuit Efficiency: ≥ 85%
7. Life expectancy/Lumen maintenance: 50000 burning hours at ambient temperature with 70%
Lumen maintenance
8. Construction: IP 65
9. Control Circuit: Compatible with LED
10. Operating temperature: - 40 0 C to 59 0 C. Following testing parameters shall be carried out
at National/NABL accredited laboratory (For luminaries):
1. Marking
2. Luminaire Power
3. Circuit Efficiency
4. Polar Curve
5. Chromaticity co-ordinates and correlated colour temperature
6. Colour Rendering Index
Note: Polar curve is a lux distribution pattern which shows whether the luminaire matches
Pole height and pole span.
104
4. Battery:
Following IEC/IS certificates are mandatory for the battery: (Copy to be provided with tender.) General
Requirements & Methods of Test - IEC 61427 Tubular Lead Acid- IS 1651/IS 13369
(i) Flooded electrolyte type, positive tubular plate, low maintenance lead acid battery.
(ii) The battery will have a minimum rating of 12V, 100 Ah/ 100Ah (at C/10) discharge rate.
iii) 75% of the rated capacity of the battery should be between fully charged and load cut off
conditions.
5. Electronics:
(i) The inverter should be of quasi sine wave/sine wave type, with frequency in the range of
20-35 KHz-Half-wave operation is not acceptable.
(ii) The total electronic efficiency should be at least 85%
(ii) No blackening or reduction in the lumen output by more than 10% should be observed after 1000
ON/OFF cycles (two minutes ON followed by four minutes OFF is one cycle.
(iv) The idle current consumption should not be more than 10mA.
(iii) Electronics should operate at 12 V and should have temperature compensation for proper charging
of the battery throughout the year.
(iv) Necessary lengths of wires/cables and fuses should be provided and wiring of cables should be
through the pole with no open access to cables.
(v) The PV module will be used to sense the ambient light level for switching ON and OFF the lamp.
6. Electronic Protections:
(i) Adequate protection is to be incorporated under no load conditions e.g. when the lamp is removed
and the system is switched ON.
(ii) The system should have protection against battery overcharge and deep discharge conditions.
(iii) Fuses should be provided to protect against short circuit conditions.
(iv) A blocking diode should be provided as part of the electronics, to prevent reverse flow of current
through the PV module (s), in case such a diode is not provided with the solar module (s).
(v) Full protection against open circuit accident, short circuit and reverse polarity should be provided.
7. PV Module (s):
a. The PV module (s) shall contain crystalline silicon solar cells.
b. The PV module bidder should have IEC 61215-2nd Edition and IEC 61730-2 qualification
certification for PV modules. Copy to be provided with tender
c. The power output of the module (s) under STC should be a minimum of 120W.
d. The operating voltage corresponding to the power output mentioned above should be 16.4V
e. The open circuit voltage of the PV modules under STC should be at least 21.0 Volts.
f. The terminal box on the module should have a provision for opening for replacing the cable, if
required.
g. A strip containing the following details should be laminated inside the module as to be clearly
visible from the front side.
1. Name of the Bidder or distinctive Logo
2. Model or Type No.
3. Serial No.
4. Year of make.
105
8. Mechanical Hardware:
(i) Metallic frame structure (with corrosion resistance paint) with 25mm X 25mm X 3mm MS angle
to be fixed on the top of the poll to hold the SPV module (s). The frame structure should have
provision to adjust its angle of inclination to the horizontal between 0 and 45, so that it can be
installed at the specified tilt angle in the desired direction.
(ii) The pole should be made of GI medium class pipe with a height of minimum 7meters & 6mtrs
above the ground level after grouting (details shall be furnished in the offer) and final installation.
The pole, will be consisting of three portions with lower portion (length 4m) of 114.3mm dia. with
wall thickness of 3.65mm, and middle portion (length 1.5m) of 88.9mm diameter with wall
thickness of 3.25mm and top portion (length 1.5m) of 76.1mm dia. with wall thickness of 3.25mm
and base plate of 175mm X 175mm X 6mm. The 1 ½ inch dia. bend pipe for fixing up the lamp
assembly with suitable clamps to mount on the pole should be G.I. medium class pipe and should
be adjustable. The pole should have the provision to hold the weather proof lamp housing. It should
be painted with a corrosion resistant paint.
(iii) The battery box provided should be of a vented metallic with acid proof corrosion resistance paint
(epoxy paint) for housing the storage battery outdoors with locking arrangement. The battery box
should be tightly clamped with the pole. The thickness of MS Sheet of battery box shall be of
minimum 18 SWG. All hardware, nuts, bolts should be cadmium passivated.
(iv) The grouting of the pole should be done by PCC 1:2:3, pit must be 0.3 X 0.3 X 1 m deep below
ground level and a collar of 0.3m above ground level must be of 0.3m diameter.
(vi) Detailed drawings with specifications of each component should be submitted with the Technical
Bid.
9. Other Features:
(i) The system should be provided with 2 LED indicators a green light to indicate charging in progress
and a red LED to indicate deep discharge condition of the battery. The green LED should glow
only when the battery is actually being charged.
(ii) There will be a Name Plate on the system which will give
(a) Name of the Supplier or Distinctive Logo
(b) Serial Number
(iii) Components and parts used in the solar street lighting systems should conform to the latest BIS
specifications, whenever such specifications are available and applicable.
(iv) The PV module (s) will be warranted for a minimum period of 10 years from the date of supply
and the street lighting system (including the battery) will be warranted for a period of two years
from the date of supply.
General Conditions: applicable to all the systems:
PV modules used in solar power plants/systems must be warranted for their output peak watt
capacity, which should not be less than 90% at the end of 12 years and 80% at the end of the 25
years.
106
The BoS items/components of the SPV power plants/systems deployed must confirm to the latest
edition of IEC/equivalent BIS standards as specified below: BoS item/component Applicable
IEC/equivalent BIS Standard Description Standard Number Power Conditioners/Inverters*
Efficiency Measurements Environmental Testing IEC 61683 IEC 60068 2 (6,21,27,30,75,78)
Charge controller/MPPT units*
Design Qualification Environmental Testing IEC 62093 IEC 60068 2 (6, 21, 27, 30, 75, 78)
Storage Batteries General Requirements & Methods of Test Tubular Lead Acid IEC 61427 IS
1651/IS 13369 Cables
General Test and Measuring Methods PVC insulated cables for working Voltages up to and
including 1100 VDo, UV resistant for outdoor installation IEC 60227/IS 694 IEC 60502/ IS
1554(part I & II)
Switches/ Circuit Breakers/Connectors General Requirements Connectors -safety IS/IEC 60947
Part I, II, III EN 50521
Junction Boxes/Enclosures for inverter/ charge controller/ luminaries General Requirements
Enclosures IP 54 (for outdoor)/IP 21 (for indoor) as per IEC 529 * Must additionally conform to
the relevant national/international Electrical Safety Standards.
Proposed FAOSL Compound Solar Light
Foundation:
In this version the Batteries are positioned in a special, waterproof and stable plastic subterranean container.
Advantages:
The Batteries are protected against vandalism and high temperature.
In case we are reaching air temperature of 20-25°C around the Batteries (perfect temperature for the Batteries).
The assembly is very simple, pluggable and any chance of incorrect wiring.
107
The temperatures in the earth will increase hardly more than 25° degrees Celsius; through this the life time of
The batteries will increase by about 100%!
The pole is placed in a concrete pipe of 40cm in diameter and of 1m in length. The storage battery has to be
fitted into a shaft in a distance of abt. 1 meter from the pole
108
SPECIFICATION FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF 1
X 175kVA, 400/230V, 3-PHASE, 50Hz VOLTAGE REGULATOR FOR OFFICE BUILDING AT
REGENT ROAD, HILL STATION, FREETOWN FOR SIERRA LEONE FIELD OFFICE OF THE
AFRICAN DEVELOPMENT BANK (ADB)
109
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF 1 X 175kVA, 400/230V, 3-Phase, 50Hz VOLTAGE
REGULATOR:
Description:
Bad power cost money! Disruptive and often damaging voltage sags and surges can cause unnecessary
downtime, costly equipment repairs, and lost productivity … all of which affect office and business
operations! AC voltage regulators and constant voltage transformers provide clean, stable power, thus
improving your equipment reliability and performance!
Controlled Power Company's line of AC voltage regulators ranges from 500VA to 1MVA, with
regulation tolerances down to 1% of nominal voltage.
To mitigate against disruptive and often damaging voltage sags and surges at Office Building at Regent
Road, Hill Station, Freetown for Sierra Leone Field Office at the African Development Bank (ADB)
The proposed 100kVA, 400/230V, 3-Phase, 50Hz voltage regulation product shall include an integral
shielded isolation transformer, providing high harmonic, line and ground noise attenuation for added
power conditioning and regulation tolerances down to 1% of nominal voltage.
Power Processor Series 700F (175kVA)
Description
The Series 700F is a front access, tap switching, power conditioning voltage regulator which features
a small footprint, high efficiency design, triple-shielded isolation transformer, tight output voltage
regulation to +/- 3%, as well as optional power quality monitoring. Digital processing provides fast,
accurate regulation within 1 cycle, without over- or under-shoot. With a unique front access cabinet
design, left, right, and rear access are not required for system installation, operation or service.
The Series 700F has been shake-table tested and meets seismic standards which satisfy the
CBC 2013, and IBC 2015 standards and been recognized and accepted by most countries.
The seismic-rated Series 700F is the perfect power conditioner to meet the power requirements of the
Office Building at Regent Road, Hill Station, Freetown for Sierra Leone Field Office at the African
Development Bank (ADB) with an input nominal voltage of 400VAC complete floor-mounting
channels.
110
Features & Benefits:
Front access only! All installation, operation, maintenance, and testing can occur from the front of
the unit — no side or rear access required.
7-tap, microprocessor-controlled for tight voltage regulation, accuracy, and stability.
Precisely maintains correct voltage to ± 3% within 1 cycle, and maintains regulation during
extended brownouts.
Extended input regulation range options including +10%, -40%; +15%, -25%; and +20%, -30%
Low output impedance transformer minimizes voltage distortion and sags commonly associated
with high surge currents.
Triple-shielded isolation transformer provides a noise-free ground, attenuates voltage spikes and
transients, and re-establishes the N-G bond.
Internal manual bypass option maintains system isolation, voltage transformation, and power
conditioning.
Superior compatibility with dynamic loads.
Increased surge capability, without the need for automatic bypassing, provides full-time power
conditioning.
High-efficiency design results in lower operating cost.
Technical Specs
Input Operating Voltage Range: +10%, - 20% from nominal (Extended regulation range
options available)
Input Frequency: 60 Hz, ± 3%
Input Power Factor: > .99 PF with resistive load
Reflected Harmonics: Triple harmonics are not reflected to the utility under
non-linear loads
Output Line Voltage Regulation: ± 3% from nominal
Response Time: < 1/2 cycle
Correction Time: 1 cycle
Load Regulation: 2.5% typical, no load to full load
Overload Rating: 200% for 10 seconds; 1000% for 1 cycle
Common Mode Noise Attenuation: 146dB
Transverse Mode: 3 dB down at 1kHz; 40 dB down per decade to below
50 dB with a resistive load
Transient Voltage Suppression: Meets ANSI C62.41 Category B-3
Efficiency: 96% - 97% typical, model and load dependent
UL 1012 Listed, C-UL Listed to CSA C22.2, No. 107.1-01
Applications
Government / Commercial Buildings
Broadcast Communications
Telecommunications
Refineries / Petro-Chemical
Aerospace
Printing Presses
Food Processing Plants
UPS Bypass & Power Distribution
111
SPECIFICATION OF 175kVA SERIES700F VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Power Processor - Series 700F 175KVA Power Conditioning and Regulation for Commercial &
Industrial Equipment General Specifications
1: GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This specification defines the electrical and mechanical characteristics of the 175kVA
Controlled Power Voltage Regular - Series 700F
Front Access Power Processor, an AC power conditioning system with line voltage regulation.
The system specified includes all the components necessary to provide the electrical power
quality needed for the improved operation, performance and reliability of commercial and
industrial electronic equipment. Power conditioning is accomplished through use of an integral
3 phase, copper wound, triple shielded, low output impedance isolation transformer.
Integral transient voltage surge suppression is included to meet and exceed ANSI/IEEE
recommendations for surge voltages in AC power circuits. Line voltage correction is
accomplished within 1 cycle, preventing undesirable over and under voltage conditions. The
regulator incorporates microprocessor control, digital processing, and independent phase
regulation to provide the specified voltage, without any voltage over or under-shoots.
1.2 STANDARDS
The Series 700F Power Processor is designed in accordance with applicable portions of the
following standards:
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
B. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
C. National Electric Code (NEC)
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA Article 70)
E. FCC Article 15, Section J, Class A
F. ANSI C62.41 Category B-3
G. UL Listed to Standard 1012
H. C-UL listed to CSA Standard C22.2, No. 107.1-01 Seismic-rated units with an input
nominal voltage of 240VAC, or 480VAC are designed and tested in accordance with
applicable portions of the following additional standards:
I. OSHPD Special Seismic Certification Preapproval (OSP)
J. ICC - AC156: “Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Certification by Shake-Table Testing
of Non-structural Components and Systems”
K. California Building Code – CBC 2013
L. International Building Code – IBC 2015
2: PRODUCTS
2.1 Input Specifications
A. Nominal AC input voltage ratings: 600VAC, 400VAC, 3 Phase.
B. Nominal operating frequency: 50 hertz, +/- 3 hertz.
2.2 Output Specifications
A. Nominal AC output voltage: 400/230VAC, wye derived.
B. Output impedance: 3-4% typical.
C. The main power conditioning transformer includes seven (7) full capacity taps per
phase, allowing for the tight output voltage regulation specified.
112
D. Continuous duty output power ratings: (175) kVA / kW.
2.3 Performance Specifications
A. Input voltage range: +10, -20% with the output voltage regulated to +/- 3% typical. Extended
input voltage range options of (+10%, -40%) (+15, -25%) or (+20, -30%) are available, with
the output voltage regulated to +5%, -6% typical.
B. Response time: < ½ cycle.
C. Correction time: 1 cycle typical.
D. Output load regulation: 2.5% typical, when stepping from no load to full load.
E. Output voltage THD: < 1% THD added to the output waveform under any dynamic linear
loading conditions.
F. Input power factor: > .99 with a resistive load, and triplen harmonics are not reflected to the
utility under non-linear loads.
G. Overload rating: 200% continuous load rating for 30 seconds, 1,000% for 1 cycle.
H. Common mode noise attenuation: 146 dB minimum.
I. Transverse mode noise attenuation: 3 dB down at 1,000 hertz, 40 dB down per decade below
50 dB with a resistive load.
J. Efficiency: 96-97% typical, excitation losses shall be less than 1.5% of the KVA.
K. MTBF: > 100,000 hours.
2.4 Main Input Circuit Breaker
A main input molded case, thermal magnetic circuit breaker, rated at 125% of the full
continuous load input current at the nominal input voltage, is furnished as an integral part of the
unit.
2.5 Standard Monitoring
A. Alert Light
An indicator light shows if the output has been disabled by one of the following conditions:
1. Transformer over-temperature
2. SCR thermal over-temperature
B. Indicating Lamps
Output ON indicating lamps are provided for each phase.
2.6 Main Transformer Construction
A. The transformer windings are of all copper conductor construction with separate primary and
secondary isolated windings.
B. Fully processed, low carbon, silicon-iron transformer steel is used to minimize losses and
provide maximum efficiency. Flux density does not exceed 14k gauss
C. Class N (200° C) insulation is utilized throughout with a 115° C maximum temperature rise.
D. The transformer has multiple (three) copper shields to minimize inner winding capacitance,
transient and noise coupling between primary and secondary windings. Inner winding
capacitance is limited to .001 pF or less.
113
2.7 Cabinet Construction
A. Design allows for front access to the status lights, input circuit breaker, serviceable parts, and
optional output circuit breaker(s), bypass switch, and metering. No side or rear access is
required for system installation, operation or service.
B. Input and output terminations are front access. Input terminations are made directly to the main
input circuit breaker and the input ground terminal provided. Output terminations are made to
the copper bus connections provided, 3 phase, neutral and ground, or the optional output circuit
breaker(s) and neutral & ground copper bus provided.
C. Conduit landing plates are provided to permit top and/or bottom entry for input and output
power connections.
D. Ventilation originates from the front of the cabinet and exhausts through the top of the cabinet.
E. The electronic control section is isolated from transformer section and power terminations.
F. Transformer section is designed for natural convection cooling.
G. The cabinet is NEMA 1 rated and constructed using a 12 gauge steel frame with 10 gauge steel
floor mounting channels. Optional locking casters, together with mounting brackets to
permanently secure the cabinet to the floor, are available.
H. Exterior panels are pre-treated and powder-coat painted with Controlled Power Company’s
standard colour
2.8 BTU’s / Hour, Weight and Dimensions
Output
kVA
Rating
Full Load
BTU’s / Hour
Weight (lbs) Dimensions
175 11,883 2014 34.5”W x 36”D x 76”H
2.9 Environmental
A. Operating temperature: -20°C to +40°C.
B. Relative humidity: 0-95% non-condensing.
C. Altitude: 5,000 feet above sea level without de-rating.
D. Audible noise: < 50 dba at 1 meter distance.
2.10 Optional Equipment
A. Remote emergency power off options includes:
1. Input breaker provided with a 24VDC or 400VAC under voltage trip relay to interface with an
on-site emergency power off circuit. An external 24VDC or 400VAC power source is supplied
by others and required to energize the breaker.
2. Input breaker provided with a 24VDC or 400VAC shunt trip coil solenoid to interface with an
on-site emergency power off circuit. An external 24VDC or 400VAC power source is supplied
by others and required to shunt trip the breaker.
3. Shunt trip input breaker provided to interface with a Remote Emergency Power Off push button
station, provided on a 50 ft. cable, which terminates within the power conditioner/regulator
enclosure.
114
B. Manually operated rotary switch provided to bypass the regulator portion of the system. The
regulator is either on-line or bypassed with one turn of the switch. The transformer, high
frequency filtering, and electrical noise suppression remain in the circuit when in the bypass
mode.
C. Digital input and/or output meters, flush-mounted on the front of the unit for ease of operation
and viewing. Options include:
1. Shark100V4 digital meter to measure and display voltage, current, kVA, kVAh, kW, kWh,
kVARs, kVARh, power factor, frequency, and % THD. Includes a % load bar, limits exceeded
alarms, and RS485 communication using MODBUS or DNP 3.0 protocols.
2. Shark200V4 digital meter to measure and display voltage, current, kVA, kVAh, kW, kWh,
kVARs, kVARh, power factor, frequency, and % THD. Includes a % load bar, data-logging
with time stamp, programmable limit alarms on all measured parameters, a waveform scope
feature to view the real-time voltage and current waveform, and RS485 communication using
MODBUS or DNP 3.0 protocols.
3. Shark200V6 digital meter to measure and display voltage, current, kVA, kVAh, kW, kWh,
kVARs, kVARh, power factor, frequency, and % THD. Includes a % load bar, data-logging
with time stamp, programmable limit alarms on all measured parameters, a waveform scope
feature to view the real-time voltage and current waveform, and RS485 communication using
MODBUS or DNP 3.0 protocols. The meter provides power quality monitoring with event
logging, advanced harmonic analysis, and a 512 samples per cycle waveform recorder.
D. Shark200V4 or V6 digital meter provided with up to two (2) of the following options:
1. Ethernet TCP and MODBUS TCP web card.
2. Two form C relay contacts to trigger on user-set alarms.
3. Four channel 4-20mA outputs, assignable to any parameter.
E. Up to two (2) output circuit breakers can be selected, ranging from 15 amps, 3-pole, to the
maximum circuit breaker rating listed below. If only one (1) output circuit breaker is selected
at 208VAC on units rated 75kVA and above, a higher amperage rating can be selected as
indicated below. KVA and voltage are output ratings.
KVA 400/415V
175 253A
F. Red LEDs (one per phase) provided to indicate if the source voltage exceeds the specified input
range of the regulator.
G. Output under/over voltage shutoff options included:
1. Output is electronically shut off if the output voltage exceeds adjustable limits. The system is
reset by cycling the input breaker.
2. Input breaker is shunt tripped if the output voltage exceeds adjustable limits, or a loss of power
is detected. A manual resetting of the input breaker is required.
2.11 Warranty
Controlled Power Company guarantees all systems to be free from defects in material and
workmanship for a period of (1) year following shipment from the factory.
115
SPECIFICATION FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
OF 2 X 10kVA, 3-PHASE MODULAR DECENTRALIZED PARALLEL ARCHITECTURE
(DPA) UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES (UPS) FOR OFFICE BUILDING AT
REGENT ROAD, HILL STATION, FREETOWN FOR SIERRA LEONE FIELD OFFICE OF
THE AFRICAN DEVELOPMENT BANK (ADB)
116
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF 20kVA 3-PHASE MODULAR DPA UPS:
Specification for the Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of 2 x 10KVA, 3-Phase
Modular DPA Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS)
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION:
ELECTRICAL:
CONTENTS
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION AND DESCRIPTION OF WORKS
SECTION 2 ELECTRICAL SERVICES INSTALLATION
SECTION 3 SPECIFICATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS OF 10kVA 3Phase Modular DPA UPS
117
SECTION 1: DESCRIPTION OF WORKS
1.01 General
1.02 The Site
1.03 The Building
1.04 Site Working
1.05 Site Visit
1.06 Extent of Works
1.07 Statutory Requirements and Standards
1.08 Maintenance of Services
1.09 As Installed Drawings and Operating and Maintenance Manuals
1.10 Site Clearance
118
SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION AND DESCRIPTION OF WORKS
1.01 General:
This Particular Specification details the requirements for the supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of 2 x 10kVA 3Phase Modular DPA UPS and shall be read in conjunction with
the Conditions of Contract, Tender Forms and Equipment Specifications.
1.02 The Site:
The site is the Office Building at Regent Road, Hill Station, Freetown for Sierra Leone Field
Office at the African Development Bank (ADB).
The building is a 3 story structure located within the secure perimeter fence of the
Establishment.
1.03 Site Working:
The installation works shall be carried out under the control and supervision of the Consultant
Engineer
1.04 Site Visit:
The Contractor shall visit site prior to submitting a Tender to satisfy himself of local conditions
appertaining to this Contract, and the location and extent of existing services.
Arrangements to visit the site shall be made through the Project Architect, 72 Wellington Street,
Freetown.
1.05 Extent of Works:
The Contractor shall supply, install, test and commission 2 x 10kVA 3Phase Modular DPA UPS
Unit at the for Office Building at Regent Road, Hill Station, Freetown for Sierra Leone Field
Office at the African Development Bank (ADB)
The Scope of Works shall comprise the following:
1) Supply and installation of 2 x 10kVA 3Phase Modular DPA UPS Unit complete with
cabinets including cabling and accessories
2) Testing and commissioning of 2 x 10kVA 3Phase Modular DPA UPS
1.06 Statutory Requirements and Standards:
The Works shall include for all costs to complete the installation in accordance with this
Particular Specification as scheduled.
The following Statutory Requirements and Standards shall also be adhered to by the Vendor:
a) The Regulations for Electrical Installations 17th Edition 2000. (BS 7671: 1992 - The
Requirements for Wiring Installations)
b) The relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice where applicable.
c) Health & Safety at Work Act.
d) The Electricity at Work Regulations.
e) Any other special requirements of the Electricity Distribution Supply Authority EDSA)
1.07 Maintenance of Services:
Any works necessitating interruption or termination of any services required to be maintained
or serving areas outside of the designated works area shall be thoroughly co-ordinated and not
be initiated until a Programme of Works indicating disruption time scales and/or temporary
arrangements has been submitted and agreed fully by all concerned.
119
1.09 Working Drawings:
The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation of fully dimensioned installation
drawings of a standard and scale suitable for indicating installation details of all works to the
satisfaction of the Supervising Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for setting out
services to integrate the works within the structure, taking into account all aspects of the Works.
Working Drawings shall be submitted for approval of the Supervising Engineer before the
installation works begin.
The Working Drawings shall set out all services and equipment and take into account the
positions of all building elements.
Particular care shall be taken to prevent obstruction or restriction of service positions and access
positions to engineering services.
1.10 Site Clearance:
At the end of the project, all empty packages, rubbish and unused materials and plant shall be
removed and the site left in a clean and tidy condition.
120
SECTION 2: - ELECTRICAL SERVICES INSTALLATION
2.01 General
2.02 Cable Specification
2.03 Electrical Supplies
2.04 Earthing and Bonding
2.05 Builders Work
2.06 Testing and Commissioning
121
SECTION 2 ELECTRICAL SERVICES INSTALLATION:
2.01 General:
The Electrical Works shall comprise the supply, delivery, installing, putting into operation,
testing and commissioning of the 2 x 10kVA Modular DPA UPS as detailed in this
Specification.
2.02 Cable Specification:
600/1000V cables shall be of circular or shaped stranded plain annealed copper conductors
XLPE/SWA/LSOH to BS 6724.
Power cable size shall be 16mm2 from the Main Electrical Switchroom 250A MCCB 12-way
Panelboard
2.03 Electrical Supplies:
L.V. Cables:
The incoming electrical supply from the 250A MCCB 12-way Panelboard to the 63A TP&N
Fused Switch Disconnector located in the UPS Room shall be provided by the Electrical
Contractor at 400 volts, 50Hz.
The Contractor shall provide new supply power cables from the 63A TP&N Fused Switch
Disconnector located in the UPS Room to the UPS’s.
The L.V. cables shall be laid direct on cable tray, protected and secured by cable tiles.
All builders work duct entries into the UPS Room shall be fully detailed by the Contractor as
part of his production of working drawings for approval procedures.
The Contractor shall be responsible for fully surveying the proposed cable route prior to starting
any installations. The Contractor shall check and verify the area along and surrounding the
proposed cable route, that other services shall not be impeded or disrupted by the placing and
ducting route. Where other services are found to be in close proximity to the route, the
Contractor shall ensure that ducting works are properly conducted. Such areas of risk shall be
confirmed and documented by the Contractor prior to the works commencing.
Cable jointing and final cable terminations shall be carried out by the Contractor strictly in
accordance with the cable manufacturer’s installation recommendations for handling, bending
radii, terminations, glands etc.
It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to check and test the connected cable prior to
‘’switching on’’ to ensure its suitability for operation. Upon completion of these tests the
Contractor shall forward the schedule of results to the Project Architect/M&E Engineer.
Where sub-main cables are to be supported on cable tray prior to termination, the Contractor
shall allow for the necessary cable cleats (cable ties will not be permitted) to fix the cable onto
the cable tray, and for all tray work accessories, risers, uninstructed supports etc., to complete
the installation.
2.04 Earthing and Bonding:
General:
Supply and install an earth system for the installation.
The earth system in in the UPS room shall include an earth bar to which all Low Voltage
Switchgears and UPS cabinet shall be connected.
122
The earth bars shall be 50mm x 6mm high conductivity, hard drawn copper mounted on shock-
resisting stand-off insulators
The neutral earth terminals on the neutral bus bars of the switchgears shall be connected to the
earth bar by means of a 35mm single core, XL-LSF insulated cable.
Each of the switchgears shall have separate earthing cable connections from the earth bar. Each
section of the main Low Voltage Switchboard shall be bonded to its neighbour.
Joints may be made in the copper strips by the thermal process or be bolted, riveted or clamped.
Additionally, it shall be ensured that:
i) Copper jointing surfaces shall be tinned.
ii) All bolts, rivets and clamps shall be of brass, bronze or similar non-ferrous material.
iii) Joints not readily accessible for inspection shall be protected against moisture and
corrosion.
iv) The resistance of any length of conductor containing a joint or tap-off connection shall
not be greater than that of an equal length of similar conductor without a joint.
Earthing leads within the UPS Room shall be secured at intervals not exceeding 0.5 metre.
The earth systems shall have a maximum resistance of 0.5 ohms in dry weather conditions. The
type of electrode installed shall be of the steel cord copper clad type.
The incoming supply cable armoured sheath shall be connected to the common earth point on
the earth bar.
All cable screens, trunking and metal enclosures, switchgears, etc., are to be connected to form
a continuous bonded earth system directly connected to the earth bar.
The Contractor shall test the impedance of the incoming earthing connection and the results
shall be recorded and issued to the Engineer.
2.05 Builders Work
All builders work required in connection with the installation of services specified herein shall
be carried out under this Contract.
The Contractor shall carry out all his builders work requirements necessary for him to complete
his installation.
The builders work items generally comprises work such as mortising and minor builders work
required to existing structures.
2.06 Testing and Commissioning:
The Contractor shall allow for testing the entire UPS installation for performance.
The objectives of the T & C works are:
(i) To verify proper functioning of the equipment/system after installation.
(ii) To verify that the performance of the installed equipment/systems meet with the
specified design intent through a series of tests and adjustments.
(v) To capture and record performance data of the whole installation as the baseline for
future operation and maintenance.
123
Scope of the Testing and Commissioning (T&C) Works:
A. Preliminary Steps for Testing and Commissioning:
Before carrying out T&C, the Contractor shall take the following steps:
(a) Submit draft T&C procedures to the Engineer for approval. The draft T&C procedures
shall include essential procedures mentioned in this procedure plus additional T&C
procedures required for specific installations as well as manufacturer’s
recommendation;
(b) Obtain design drawings and specifications and to be thoroughly acquainted with the
design intent
(c) Obtain copies of approved shop drawings and equipment schedules;
(d) Review approved shop drawings and equipment schedules;
(e) Check manufacturer’s operating instructions and statutory requirements;
(f) Physically inspect the installation and equipment to determine variations from designs
and/or specifications.
(g) Check individual components, e.g. key switches, control equipment, circuit breaker
status, etc. for proper position and settings for completeness of installation.
(h) Check inclusion of manufacturer’s typical equipment testing data or factors before T&C
of particular equipment.
B. Testing and Inspection during Construction:
The purpose of these tests is to ensure that all components and systems are in a
satisfactory and safe condition before start up. Preliminary adjustment and setting of
equipment at this stage shall also be carried out at the same time to pave way for the
coming functional performance tests.
Before carrying out any test, the Contractor shall ensure that the installation complies
with all relevant statutory requirements and regulations. The T&C works shall comply
with all site safety regulatory requirements currently in force, including but not limited
to:
(i) Electricity Ordinance and other subsidiary legislation herein; IEE _TCP 2007
Edition
(ii) The Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations (COP)
(iii) IEC 60364 “Electrical Installations of Building”
(iv) Electricity supply rules of the relevant power supply companies
C. Statutory Test and Inspection
The statutory test and inspection herein stated in this T&C procedure shall refer to the
Regulations Nos. 19, 20, 21 and 22 of the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations under the
Electricity Ordinance Chapter 406E.
D. Functional Performance Tests
The purpose of functional performance tests is to demonstrate that the
equipment/installation can meet the functional and performance requirements as
specified in the General/Particular Specifications. Functional performance test should
proceed from the testing of individual components to the testing of different systems in
the installation.
The Contractor may have to make temporary modifications as the test proceeds. The
specific tests required and the order of tests will vary depending on the type and size of
systems, number of systems, sequence of construction, interface with other installations,
relationship with the building elements and other specific requirements as indicated in
the General/Particular Specifications.
124
The testing of systems may have to be carried out in stages depending on the progress
of work or as proposed by the Contractor.
Any performance deficiencies revealed during the functional performance tests must be
evaluated to determine the cause and whether they are part of the contractual obligations.
After completion of the necessary corrective measures, the Contractor shall repeat the
tests.
If any test cannot be completed because of circumstances that are beyond the control of
the Contractor, it shall be properly documented and reported to the Engineer, who shall
then liaise with the relevant parties to resolve the situation. The Contractor shall resume
his testing work immediately upon the attainment of a suitable testing environment.
125
SECTION 3: - SPECIFICATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS OF 10kVA 3Phase Modular
DPA UPS
3.01 Product Description
3.02 Efficiency up – costs down
3.03 Quality Assurance
3.04 Delivery, Storage and Handling
3.05 Project Conditions
3.06 Warranty
3.07 Maintenance
3.08 Mode of Operation
3.09 Component Description
3.10 System Controls and Indicators
3.11 Mechanical Design and Ventilation
3.12 Battery
3.13 Examination
3.14 Installation
3.15 Field Quality Control
3.16 Demonstration
3.17 Protection
3.18 Typical Modular DPA UPS system
3.19 Proposed Decentralized Parallel Architecture
3.20 Technical specifications
3.21 Material Schedule
126
SECTION 3: SPECIFICATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS OF 10kVA 3Phase Modular DPA
UPS:
3.01 Product Description:
The DPA is a high-power, modular UPS system designed for today’s critical high-density ICT
environments. The UPS is built using true online double conversion technology and delivers
high quality power. When combined with complete network integration software and
communication connectivity, the DPA provides a comprehensive, easy-to-integrate power
protection for data centres and network environments.
The DPA is based on ABB’s unique and proven Decentralized Parallel Architecture DPATM.
DPA means that each UPS module contains all the hardware and software required for full
system operation. They share no common components. The major benefit of a DPA system is
very high power availability. Each UPS module has its own independent static switch, rectifier,
inverter, logic control, control panel and battery charger. Even the batteries can be configured
separately for each module if required. With all of the critical components duplicated and
distributed between individual units, potential single points of failure are eliminated. System
uptime is further maximized by the true safe-swap modularity of the modules (easy replacement
during system operation) which allows the simple addition or removal of modules without the
need to bypass the UPS.
DPA modules can be connected in parallel configuration to provide redundancy or to increase
the system’s total capacity. The DPA shall deliver power protection from 10 to 30 kVA (one to
three modules) in a single cabinet. Cabinets shall operate in parallel configuration to build a
system of up to 30kVA
Further DPA highlights:
• Power density of up to 342kW / m2 saves floor space
• Near-unity input power factor and low input harmonic distortion reduce running costs
• Safe-swap modules maximize availability and minimize upgrade costs
3.02 Efficiency up – costs down:
Lower your total cost of ownership:
The DPA boasts the lowest cost of ownership of any UPS system by offering energy efficiency,
scalable flexibility and ergonomic design to enable easy serviceability.
The DPA allows the infrastructure size to be scaled to align more closely with the prevailing IT
requirements. Scaling the infrastructure to meet present IT needs, with the ability to add on
incrementally as IT needs grow, also means that you only power and cool what you need. The
resulting savings in power usage are substantial over the service life of the UPS.
Simplify installation and service:
Its straightforward and understandable concept simplifies every step of the deployment process,
from planning, through installation and commissioning to full use. Easy set-up and maintenance
involve lower operating and maintenance costs. The DPA allows adding modules in a simple
plug-and-play procedure.
Optimize your energy efficiency:
Class-leading energy efficiency significantly reduces system running costs and site air-
conditioning costs.
127
Advanced scalable architecture:
If additional capacity or redundancy is needed, up to 30 independent modules can operate in
parallel configuration,
DPA – product range:
To ensure the ultimate in flexibility, the Conceptpower DPA is available in various
configurations. The lower power cabinets can accommodate batteries internally. External
battery cabinets are available for all product types.
DPA – safe-swap modularity:
True safe-swap modularity enables the safe removal and / or insertion of UPS modules into a
Conceptpower DPA system without risk to the critical load and without the need to either
transfer the critical load onto raw mains or remove power from the critical load. This unique
feature directly addresses today’s requirement for continuous uptime. The ability to safe swap
modules in a Conceptpower DPA system significantly reduces its mean time to repair (MTTR)
and simplifies system upgrades.
3.03 Quality Assurance:
Qualifications:
Manufacturer Qualifications:
Manufacturer shall be a firm engaged in the manufacture of solid State UPS of types and sizes
required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for a minimum of
20 years. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified and shall be designed to internationally
accepted standards.
Installer Qualifications:
Installer shall be a firm that shall have a minimum of five years of successful installation
experience with projects utilizing solid state UPS similar in type and scope to that required for
this Project.
Regulatory Requirements:
Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations of State
and Local Authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain necessary approvals from such authorities.
The UPS shall meet the requirements of the following standards:
(i) UL listed under UL 1778.
(ii) IEC 1000 4, Level 4.
The UPS shall be designed in accordance with the applicable sections of the documents
published by:
(i) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA); NEC
(ii) International Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
(iii) Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
Factory Testing:
Prior to shipment the manufacturer shall complete a documented test procedure to test functions
of the UPS module and batteries (via a discharge test), when supplied by the UPS manufacturer,
and warrant compliance with this Section. The manufacturer shall provide a copy of the test
report.
128
Source Responsibility:
Materials and parts comprising the UPS shall be new, of current manufacture, and shall not
have been in prior service, except as required during factory testing.
Active electronic devices shall be solid state and shall not exceed the manufacturer’s
recommended tolerances for temperature or current to ensure maximum reliability.
Semiconductor devices shall be sealed. Relays shall be provided with dust covers. The
manufacturer shall conduct inspections on incoming parts, modular assemblies, and final
products.
3.04 Delivery, Storage and Handling:
Deliver materials to the Project site in supplier’s or manufacturer’s original wrappings and
containers, labelled with supplier’s or manufacturer’s name, material or product brand name,
and lot number, if any.
Store materials in their original, undamaged packages and containers, inside a well-ventilated
area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
Products shall be packaged in a manner to prevent penetration by debris and to allow safe
delivery by modes of ground transportation and air transportation where specified.
Prior to shipping, products shall be inspected at the factory for damage.
Equipment shall be protected against extreme temperature and humidity and shall be stored in
a conditioned or protected environment.
Equipment containing batteries shall not be stored for a period exceeding three months without
powering up the equipment for a period of eight hours to recharge the batteries.
3.05 Project Conditions:
Environmental Requirements:
Do not install solid state UPS until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is
completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete and ambient temperature and
humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for
final occupancy.
The UPS shall operate under the following environmental conditions:
(i) Temperature:
UPS Module Operating: 32°F (0°C) to 104°F (40°C).
Non-Operating: 4°F (20°C) to 113°F (4°C).
(ii) Relative Humidity (Operating and Storage): 0 percent to 95 percent non-condensing
(iii) Barometric Pressure:
Up to 3281 feet (1000 meters) above sea level (up to 6562 feet [2000 meters] with
ambient temperature less than 82 °F [28 °C]) / up to 39,370 feet (12,000 meters) above
sea level non-operating.
(iv) Audible Noise: 69 dBA at 3 feet (914 mm).
129
3.06 Warranty:
Special Warranty:
The Contractor shall warrant the work of this Section to be in accordance with the Contract
Documents and free from faults and defects in materials and workmanship for period indicated
below. This special warranty shall extend the one year period of limitations contained in the
General Conditions. The special warranty shall be countersigned by the Installer and the
manufacturer.
UPS Module:
The UPS shall be covered by a full parts and labour warranty from the manufacturer for a period
of 12 months from date of installation or acceptance by the Owner or 18 months from date of
shipment from the manufacturer, whichever occurs first.
Battery:
The battery manufacturer’s warranty shall be passed through to the final Owner and shall have
a minimum period of one year.
Additional Owner Rights:
The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other
provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent with other
warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
3.07 Maintenance:
The manufacturer shall, upon request, provide spare parts kits for the UPS module in a timely
manner as well as provide access to qualified factory trained first party service personnel to
provide preventative maintenance and service on the UPS module when required.
UPS subassemblies, as well as the battery, shall be accessible from the front. UPS design shall
provide maximum reliability and minimum MTTR (mean time to repair). To that end, the UPS
shall be equipped with a self-test function to verify correct system operation. The self-test
function shall identify the subassembly requiring repair in the event of a fault. The electronic
UPS control and monitoring assembly shall therefore be fully microprocessor based, thus doing
away with potentiometer settings. This shall allow:
(i) Auto compensation of component drift
(ii) Self-adjustment of replaced subassemblies
(iii) Extensive acquisition of information vital for computer aided diagnostics (local or
remote).
(iv) Socket connection to interface with computer aided diagnostics system.
The UPS shall be repairable by replacing standard subassemblies requiring no adjustments.
Communication via a modem with a remote maintenance system shall be possible.
The manufacturer shall offer additional preventative maintenance and service contracts
covering both the UPS and the battery bank. Accredited professional service engineers
employed exclusively in the field of critical power systems service shall perform maintenance
and service. The manufacturer shall also offer extended warranty contracts.
130
3.08 Modes of Operation
UPS module shall be designed to operate as a double conversion, on line reverse transfer system
in the following modes.
Normal:
The inverter shall continuously supply power to the critical load. The PFC rectifier shall derive
power from the utility AC source and supply DC power to the inverter while simultaneously
floats charging the battery.
Emergency:
Upon failure of the utility AC power source, the critical load shall be supplied by the inverter,
which, without any interruption, shall obtain its power from the battery.
Recharge:
Upon restoration of the utility AC power source (prior to complete battery discharge), the PFC
rectifier shall power the inverter and simultaneously recharge the battery.
Bypass Mode:
The static bypass transfer switch shall be used to transfer the load to the bypass without
interruption to the critical power load. This shall be accomplished by turning the inverter off.
Automatic retransfer or forward transfer of the load shall be accomplished by turning the
inverter on.
3.09 Component Description:
PFC Rectifier and Battery Charger:
Incoming AC power shall be converted to a regulated DC output voltage by an IGBT (insulated
gate bipolar transistor) power factor correction (PFC) rectifier. The PFC rectifier shall provide
high quality DC power to charge the batteries and power the inverter and shall have the
following characteristics:
Input Power Factor Correction (PFC):
The PFC rectifier shall be power factor corrected so as to maintain an input power factor of 0.98
lagging to unity at 75 percent or above load levels to ensure generator compatibility and avoid
reflected harmonics from disturbing loads sharing the utility power.
Input Harmonic Current Suppression:
The PFC rectifier shall produce a sinusoidal input AC current on each phase with low harmonic
content, limiting THD on the UPS input to below 3 percent. This shall eliminate the requirement
for an input filter.
Modular Assembly:
The PFC rectifier assembly shall be constructed of modular design
to facilitate rapid maintenance.
Battery Charger Current Limiting:
The UPS shall be equipped with a system designed to limit the battery recharge current (from
0.05 C10 to 0.1 C10).
131
Charging Levels:
The battery charging circuitry shall be capable of being set for automatic battery recharge
operation, float service, manual battery charge service, and equalizing or commissioning
operation.
Intermittent Charging:
The battery charge level shall be maintained by an intermittent charging technique between two
values Vfmin and Vfmax very close to the floating voltage.
This technique shall be based on a cycle made up of a short charge period (a few seconds) from
Vfmin to Vfmax followed automatically by a slow discharge period (a few minutes) from
Vfmax to Vfmin. This cycle shall be repeated continuously to maintain the battery charge level.
In this way the battery shall actually be charging only for a small part of the time, which shall
considerably increase its service life.
Temperature Compensated Charging:
The battery charger shall be equipped with a temperature probe to enable temperature
compensated charging and shall adjust the battery float voltage to compensate for the ambient
temperature using a negative temperature coefficient of 3 mV per cell per degree Celsius at a
nominal temperature of 25°C.
Battery Capacity:
The battery charger shall have sufficient capacity to support a fully loaded inverter and shall
fully recharge the battery to 95 percent of its full capacity within 6 to 8 hours.
Inverter:
The UPS output shall be derived from a variable frequency Pulse Width Modulated (PWM)
IGBT inverter design. The inverter shall be capable of providing the specified precise output
power characteristics while operating over the battery voltage range. The inverter assembly
shall be constructed as a modular assembly to facilitate rapid maintenance.
Static Bypass – 100 Percent Rated, Continuous Duty:
The static bypass transfer switch shall be solid state, rated for 100 percent continuous duty
without mechanical contactor device in parallel for higher reliability and consistent response
time and shall operate under the following conditions:
Uninterrupted Transfer:
The static bypass transfer switch shall automatically cause the bypass source to assume the
critical load without interruption after the logic senses one of the following conditions:
(i) Inverter overload exceeds unit's rating.
(ii) Battery protection period expired and bypass current is available.
(iii) Inverter failure.
Interrupted Transfer:
If the bypass source is beyond the conditions stated below, the UPS shall make an interrupted
transfer (not less than 100 milliseconds in duration) Bypass voltage greater than +10 percent,
10 percent from the UPS rated output voltage.
Bypass frequency greater than ±2 hertz from the UPS rated output frequency.
132
Automatic Uninterrupted Forward Transfer:
The static bypass transfer switch shall automatically forward transfer power, without
interruption, after the UPS inverter is turned on after an instantaneous overload induced reverse
transfer has occurred and the load current returns the UPS’s nominal rating or less.
Manual Transfer:
A manual static transfer shall be initiated from the UPS control panel by turning the UPS
inverter off.
Overload Ratings:
The static bypass transfer switch shall have the following overload characteristics:
(i) 1000 percent of UPS output rating for 0.016 seconds (one cycle).
(ii) 150 percent for 1 second
(iii) 130 percent of UPS output rating for 1 minute.
Output Static Switch – 100 percent Rated, Continuous Duty: UPS output shall be equipped with
a 100 percent rated output static switch without mechanical contactor device in parallel for
higher reliability and consistent response time of 16.66 milliseconds.
Microprocessor Controlled Logic:
The full UPS operation shall be provided through the use of microprocessor controlled logic.
Operation and parameters shall be firmware controlled, thus eliminating the need for manual
adjustments or potentiometers. The logic shall include, but shall not be limited to, a self-test
and diagnostic circuitry such that a fault shall be isolated down to the printed circuit assembly
or plug in power assembly level.
Every printed circuit assembly or plug in power assembly shall be monitored. Diagnostics shall
be performed via a PC through the local diagnostics port on the UPS.
Standard Display, Control and Indicator Panel:
The UPS shall include, but shall not be limited to, a standard easy to use control and indicator
panel.
Included shall be a backlit, colour graphic animated LCD display and LED indicators.
The UPS panel shall include, but shall not be limited to, UPS on and UPS off pushbuttons that
shall permit the Owner to safely command the UPS on or off without risk of load loss.
3.10 System Controls and Indicators:
Front Panel LCD Display:
The UPS control panel shall provide a backlit, colour graphic display with choice of over 15
operating languages for indication of UPS status, metering, battery status, alarm/event log, and
advanced operational features.
Access:
The display shall provide access to:
(i) An animated, colour mimic diagram indicating UPS power flow
(ii) Measurements, status indications and events.
133
(iii) Bar graphs and waveforms of the measured values.
(iv) Personalization menu protected by a password, used to make specific settings.
(v) Event log with time stamping.
(vi) Access to measurements.
System Parameters Monitored:
The visual display shall display the following system parameters based on true RMS metering:
Measurements:
(i) Input voltage (Ph-Ph).
(ii) Input current per phase.
(iii) Bypass voltage.
(iv) Bypass input frequency.
(v) UPS output voltage (Ph-Ph and Ph-N) (three phase simultaneously).
(vi) UPS output current per phase (three phase simultaneously).
(vii) UPS output frequency.
(viii) UPS output percent load.
(ix) UPS output kVA.
(x) UPS output power factor.
(xi) Battery voltage.
(xii) Crest factor.
(xiii) Battery current.
(xiv) Battery backup time and remaining service life.
(xv) Battery temperature.
Status Indications and Events:
(i) Load on battery.
(ii) Load on UPS.
(iii) Load on automatic bypass.
(iv) Low battery warning.
(v) General alarm.
(vi) Battery fault.
(vii) Remaining back up time during operation on battery power.
(viii) Bypass source outside tolerances.
(ix) Battery temperature.
Additional indications shall provide maintenance assistance.
Display of Operating Curves:
The graphical display shall be capable of displaying curves and bar graphs of the above
mentioned measured values for significant periods.
Time Stamped Historical Events:
This function shall time stamp and store important status changes, anomalies, and faults and
make this information available for automatic or Owner requested consultation.
134
LED Status Indicators:
The UPS control panel shall provide three LEDs that shall signal the following status
conditions:
Green LED: Load protected.
Yellow LED: Minor fault.
Red LED: Major fault, load not protected.
On/Off Switch:
The UPS shall provide the on and off buttons to start and stop the inverter. The switch shall
provide a built in time delay to eliminate the risk of inadvertent operation (additional
confirmation shall be requested). It shall be possible to remotely activate the off function via
an isolated dry contact to create an emergency power off function, resulting in:
(i) Inverter shutdown.
(ii) Opening of the automatic bypass.
(iii) Opening of the input, bypass, output, and battery switches/circuit breakers.
(v) Opening of the isolated dry contact on the programmable relay card.
Audible Alarm Reset:
The UPS shall provide an audible alarm that can be stopped using the Owner’s interface. If a
new alarm is sensed after the original alarm has been silenced, it shall reactivate the audible
alarm.
Emergency Power Off (EPO):
The UPS shall be equipped with a local emergency power off button and dry contact input that
shall be used to command UPS shutdown remotely. Activation of this command shall lead to
the following actions:
(i) Inverter shutdown.
(ii) Opening of the static bypass switch and the battery circuit breaker.
(iii) Opening of input and output switch/circuit breaker.
(iv) Opening of an isolated dry contact on the programmable relay board.
DB 9 Connector:
One DB 9 connector with serial output shall be provided for field diagnostics.
Dry Contacts:
The UPS shall be provided standard with a programmable input/output relay board. This board
shall have eight dry contacts (i.e., six for input signals and two for output signals).
Contacts shall be programmed as:
(i) UPS on line.
(ii) Load on bypass.
(iii) UPS on battery.
(iv) UPS battery low.
(v) General alarm.
(vi) Remote UPS on (input).
(vii) Remote UPS off (input).
The contacts shall be normally open and shall change state to indicate the operating status. The
contacts shall be rated at 2.0 amperes (250 volts AC/30 volts DC).
135
3.11 Mechanical Design and Ventilation:
Enclosure:
The UPS shall be housed in a freestanding enclosure with dead front construction. The
mechanical structure of the UPS shall be sufficiently strong and rigid to withstand handling and
installation operations without risk. Access to UPS subassemblies shall be through the front or
top.
The sheet-metal elements in the structure shall be protected against corrosion by a suitable
treatment, such as zinc electroplating, Bi-chromating, epoxy paint, or an equivalent.
Cable Access:
The standard UPS available shall accommodate top and bottom entry cables.
Cabinet Weights and Dimensions:
The width of the UPS shall be 730 × 1975 × 800mm) and shall have a maximum weight of 368
– 379 kg)
Ventilation and Heat Rejection:
The UPS shall be designed for forced air cooling. Air inlets shall be provided from the front
bottom of the UPS enclosure. Air exhaust shall be from the top portion of the unit. Full load
heat rejection shall be 36,000 BTUs per hour.
3.12 Battery:
General:
The UPS module shall use a valve regulated sealed lead acid heavy duty industrial battery,
designed for auxiliary power service in an UPS application. The primary battery shall be
furnished with impact resistant plastic cases and housed in a matching cabinet(s) next to the
UPS module.
Protection Against Deep Discharge and Self Discharge:
The UPS shall be equipped with a device designed to protect the battery against deep discharge,
depending on discharge conditions, with isolation of the battery by a circuit breaker. In
particular, a monitoring device shall adjust the battery shutdown voltage as a function of a
discharge coefficient to avoid excessive discharge at less than the rated output. A second device
shall avoid self-discharge of the battery into the UPS control circuits during an extended
shutdown of the UPS (over two hours).
Battery Self Tests:
The battery monitoring system shall be able to perform the following automatic functions:
(i) Battery circuit checks every 12 hours.
(ii) Open circuit battery test once a month.
(iii) Partial discharge test every three months
This self-test system shall signal faults via LEDs on the front panel or a message to remote
supervision systems.
136
3.13 Accessories:
Extended Battery Cabinet:
Matching battery cabinets shall be furnished in either adjacent or stand-alone versions. The
cabinet shall match the height and depth of the UPS module and shall have a width of 26.5
inches (673 mm) or 33.5 inches (851 mm) per battery cabinet. Power wiring and control cables
shall be included for adjacent models.
UL 924 Listed Battery Cabinets:
If UL 924 listed battery cabinets are provided for modules, the specific UPS and specific battery
cabinets shall comprise the UL 924 listed system. This system shall be in compliance with UL
924 criteria for a minimum of 90 minutes of battery operation with a full load on the UPS. UL
924 recharge criteria shall be met with both normal and reduced input voltage conditions.
The battery cabinets shall be non-matching and available in stand-alone version only. Power
wiring and control cables from the UPS to the battery cabinets shall not be included. With
multiple battery cabinets, interconnect cables shall be provided.
Automated Monitoring/Remote Power Monitoring Service:
Remote power monitoring, a 24 hours per day, seven days per week remote UPS monitoring
and reporting service, shall be provided. The system shall use standard analog telephone lines
(via modem) as the communication medium to transmit critical UPS data, alarms, and anomalies
back to a central station. In addition, the central station shall communicate with each of the
subscribing UPS on a routine basis to check equipment status, operating conditions, and
measured values. Reported anomalies and routine interrogation data shall be accumulated for
utilization in generating a quarterly Owner report.
External Control and Communications Devices:
Up to three of the following control and communications devices may be installed in the UPS
module:
RS 232/U Talk or Dry Contacts Card (66060):
The U Talk protocol shall be used with Solution Pac 2 for remote monitoring or graceful
shutdown for most popular file servers. The dry contacts shall close on predefined conditions
to monitor UPS operations. This shall require one communication slot and optional cables.
The dry contacts shall close on the conditions listed below, but shall be Owner programmable
to close on pre-set thresholds of other Owner UPS parameters:
(i) UPS on line
(ii) Load on bypass.
(iii) UPS on battery
(iv) Low battery warning
(v) Battery fault
(vi) General alarm
Two dry contact inputs shall also be provided to turn the UPS inverter on and off remotely upon
closure of the contacts. This feature may also be disabled if required.
137
RS 232 or RS 485 JBus/Modbus Card (66061):
The U Talk protocol shall be used with Solution Pac 2 for remote monitoring or graceful
shutdown for most popular file servers. The JBus protocol shall be used with third party building
management systems (BMS) to monitor detailed three phase information. This shall require
one communication slot and optional cables.
High Voltage 6 Alarm Relays Card (66069):
A second set (one set shall be provided standard with the UPS module) of six normally open
dry contact outputs rated at 2.0 amperes (250 volts DC/30 volts DC) shall be available to
monitor UPS operation.
The dry contacts shall close on the conditions listed below, but shall be Owner programmable
to close on pre-set thresholds of other Owner UPS parameters:
(i) UPS on line.
(ii) Load on bypass.
(iii) UPS on battery.
(iv) Low battery warning.
(v) Battery fault.
(vi) General alarm.
Two dry contact inputs shall also be provided to turn the UPS inverter on and off remotely upon
closure of the contacts. This feature may also be disabled if required.
Network Management Card (66074):
The network management card (NMC) shall provide a web interface, SNMP (simple network
management protocol), logging, and email capabilities. The NMC shall be used for remote
monitoring or graceful shutdown for most popular file servers.
IBM AS/400 Volt Free Contact/Remote Power Off Card (66068):
The UPS shall interface with an IBM AS400 UPS signal interface providing the following
signals via dry contacts:
(i) Load on battery.
(ii) Load on bypass.
(iii) Low battery shutdown warning.
(iv) Load powered by UPS.
Multi Slot Communications Card Expander (66071):
The Multi Slot shall provide three additional communication slots. The U Talk Acquisition Card
(66063) shall be included.
Distribution Panelboard:
A 42 pole front facing distribution Panelboard shall be provided with the UPS in a matching
adjacent wide cabinet. The Panelboard shall be a Square D, NQO panel accommodating ten 100
ampere breakers. The Panelboard shall accommodate any combination of one, two, or three
pole breakers and shall have a sub main circuit breaker (optional) feeding the Panelboard.
138
Two or Three Circuit Breaker External Maintenance Bypass Wall Mount:
The maintenance bypass option shall provide for two or three circuit breakers mounted inside a
wall mounted enclosure to provide a wraparound bypass configuration for total UPS isolation
during maintenance. Maintenance bypass transfers shall be without interruption and shall have
mechanical keyed interlocks to protect the UPS from damage in the event of out of sequence
transfers. An optional electrically based solenoid activated key release shall be available to
control the removal of the keys from the key interlocks.
Remote Alarm Status Panel (RASP):
A wall mounted panel, 17.5 inches (445 mm) high by 12 inches (305 mm) wide by 4 inches
(102 mm) deep, with eight indicating LED's shall display UPS status and any active alarms.
The alarms shall be a latching type, such that if an alarm is triggered, the LED shall stay on
(latch) even if the alarm is corrected. This feature shall provide the operator the chance to verify
the occurrence of the alarm.
The parameters monitored and controls provided on the RASP panel include, but shall not be
limited to, the following:
(i) UPS on line (green LED).
(ii) UPS on battery (yellow LED).
(iii) Load on bypass (yellow LED).
(iv) UPS summary alarm (red LED).
(v) Low battery shutdown.
The RASP shall also be equipped with:
(i) Alarm test/reset pushbutton (white LED) to reset the latching alarm.
(ii) Audible alarm for alarm annunciation.
(iii) Audible alarm reset pushbutton (white LED) to silence the audible alarm.
The RASP door shall be equipped with a key lock. The recommended maximum distance from
the UPS module shall be 500 feet (152 m).
Remote Summary Alarm Panel (RSAP):
A wall mounted panel with five indicating LED's shall display UPS status and any active alarms.
The alarms shall be a latching type, such that if an alarm is triggered, the LED shall stay on
(latch) even if the alarm is corrected. This feature shall provide the operator the chance to verify
the occurrence of the alarm.
The parameters monitored and controls provided on the RSAP include, but shall not be limited
to, the following:
(i) UPS summary alarm (red LED).
(ii) UPS on battery (yellow LED)
Seismic Anchors:
Seismic Zone 4 anchors shall be available for system cabinets.
Dual Input:
A second input terminal block shall be provided to accommodate a separate input source.
139
Internal Maintenance Bypass:
An internal manual maintenance bypass switch shall be optionally provided to isolate the UPS
inverter output and static bypass transfer switch for maintenance. This shall allow the UPS to
be tested or repaired without affecting load operation.
Bypass Input Fuses:
Bypass input fuses shall be optionally provided on the bypass for current limiting.
3.13 Examination:
Verification of Conditions:
Examine areas and conditions under which the work is to be installed, and notify the Contractor
in writing, with a copy to the Owner and the Architect/Engineer, of any conditions detrimental
to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Beginning of the work shall indicate acceptance of the areas and conditions as satisfactory by
the Installer.
3.14 Installation:
Preparation and installation shall be in accordance with reviewed product data, final shop
drawings, manufacturer’s written recommendations, and as indicated on the Drawings.
3.15 Field Quality Control:
Field Service Engineer Qualifications:
The Contractor shall employ a field service Engineer, factory trained with an accredited and
proven competence to install and service three phase UPS.
Spare Parts:
Contractor / Field Engineer shall have immediate access to recommended spare parts with
additional parts storage located in the country. Additional spare parts shall be accessible on a 7
x 24 basis from the national depot and shall be expedited on a next available flight basis or via
direct courier (whichever mode is quickest).
3.16 Demonstration:
The Contractor shall provide the services of a train Engineer to provide start up service and to
demonstrate and train the Client’s personnel.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
Train the Client’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to start up and
shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
Review data in operation and maintenance manuals with the Bank’s personnel.
The manufacturer shall make available to the Owner various levels of training ranging from
basic UPS operation to UPS maintenance.
140
3.17 Protection:
Contractor shall provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the
Installer that shall ensure that the solid state UPS shall be without damage at time of Substantial
Completion.
Note: Critical loads mean power supply to VSAT System, CCTV Control Panel, Fire Alarm
Panel, Door Access Control Panel, Emergency Lighting Controls etc. as deem necessary
by the Client.
Note: In the case of decentralized parallel architecture, each module includes a CPU that is
fully autonomous. All CPUs are connected to one another via a communication bus. In
case of a CPU failure of a state of the art decentralized parallel architecture, only the
faulty module will be safely disconnected to the load, and the system will run normally
on the other modules.
Advantages:
• Higher level of availability than capacity configurations because of the extra capacity
that can be utilized if one of the UPS modules breaks down
• Lower probability of failure compared to isolated redundant because there are less
breakers and because modules are online all the time (no step loads)
• Expandable if the power requirement grows. It is possible to configure multiple units in
the same installation
• The hardware arrangement is conceptually simple, and cost effective
• Modules must be of the same design, same manufacturer, same rating, same technology
and configuration
141
3.18 Technical specifications:
GENERAL DATA DPA Triple
Maximum output power (frame) 10kVA
Number of UPS modules 2
Module type MX
Output power modules 10kVA
Output power factor 0.8
Topology True online double conversion
Parallel configuration 2 modules
UPS type Modular (DPA)
Cable entry Front access
INPUT
Nominal input voltage 2 × 400 / 230V + N, 2 × 415 / 240V + N
Voltage tolerance (Ref. to 2 × 400/230V) For loads < 100% (–23%, +15%), < 80% (–30%, +15%), < 60%
(–40%, +15%)
Input distortion THDi ≤ 3% at 100%
Frequency 35–70Hz
Power factor 0.99
OUTPUT
Rated output voltage 2 × 400 / 230 V + N, 2 × 415 / 240 V + N
Voltage distortion (Ref. to 2 × 400/230 V) < 2 %
Frequency 50Hz
Overload capability 10 min.: up to 125 % or 1 min.: up to 150 %
Unbalanced load 100 % possible
Crest factor 3 : 1
EFFICIENCY
Overall efficiency Up to 96 %
In eco-mode configuration 98 %
ENVIRONMENT
Storage temperature –25 – +70 °C
Operating temperature 0–40 °C
Altitude 1000 m without de-rating
BATTERY
Battery capacity Configurable up to several hours
Internal batteries Yes
No. of internal batteries Up to 240
COMMUNICATIONS
LCD display Yes (per module)
LEDs LED for notification and alarm
Communication ports USB, RS-232, SNMP slot, potential-free contacts
STANDARDS
Safety IEC / EN 62040-1-1, IEC / EN 60950-1
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) IEC / EN 61000-6-4 (IEC / EN 62040-2 limit A [C2 UPS])
IEC / EN 61000-6-2 (IEC / EN 62040-2 criterion A [C2 UPS])
IEC / EN 61000-4-2, IEC / EN 61000-4-3, IEC / EN 61000-4-4,
IEC/EN 61000-4-5, IEC / EN 61000-4-6
Performance IEC / EN 62040-3
Product certification CE
IP rating IP 20
142
SPECIFICATION FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF
200kVA GROUND-MOUNTED POWER TRANSFORMER FOR OFFICE BUILDING AT REGENT
ROAD, HILL STATION, FREETOWN FOR SIERRA LEONE FIELD OFFICE OF THE AFRICAN
DEVELOPMENT BANK (ADB)
143
200kVA GROUND-MOUNTED POWER TRANSFORMER (ANSI/IEC STANDARDS)
1.0 General:
The proposed 200kVA Ground-mounted power transformers shall be used to step down three-
phase utility (EDSA) high voltage to low voltage for energy distribution for the Office Building
at Regent Road, Hill Station, Freetown for Sierra Leone Field Office at the African
Development Bank (ADB).
The standard version shall be three-phase hermetically sealed, free breathing with/without
conservator type that can be installed both outdoor and indoor with flexible corrugated tank
walls or radiators to enable sufficient cooling of the transformer and compensate for changes in
the oil volume due to temperature variations during operation.
2.0 Product scope
(i) Rated power: 200kVA
(ii) Rated voltage: 11kV
(iii) Cooling type: ONAN
(v) Available fluids: mineral oil and ester fluids (natural and synthetic)
3.0 Standard features
Hermetically sealed construction:
– Corrugated tank
– Medium voltage and low voltage porcelain bushings
– Off-circuit tap changer
– Oil drain valve
– Oil filling plug on the cover
– Lifting lugs
– Earthing terminals
– Rating plate
– Mineral oil
4.0 Construction with conservator:
– Magnetic oil level indicator
– Buchholz relay
– Oil filling plug on the conservator
– Dehydrating breather
5.0 Construction with air cushion for 3-phase unit.
The proposed Ground-mounted distribution transformers shall be manufactured to provide a
high quality and reliable transformer to the end user
6.0 The key production features shall include:
– Oval core
– Step lap
– Automatic cutting and stacking of core legs
– Windings directly wound on the core legs or mandrels with 2 HV coils in parallel (smallest
units)
– Epoxy diamond dotted paper insulation between LV layers
– Tapered or full width layer insulation in HV windings
7.0 Core The magnetic circuit shall be of column type with mitred joints and manufactured with first
rate, grain oriented magnetic cold-rolled silicon steel lamination or amorphous steel. The
mounted core shall be clamped down to reduce vibrations and minimize noise level.
144
8.0 Windings
The windings shall be made of two components, conductor and the insulation materials. The
conductors used shall be a high grade electrolytic copper or aluminium and insulated with pure
cellulose or double enamel. The MV windings shall be wound either with round, double enamel
insulated or rectangular, paper insulated wire. The LV windings shall be wound with
rectangular, paper insulated wire, enamelled wire or foil.
9.0 Off-circuit tap changer
The tappings of the MV windings shall be connected to the off-circuit tap changer and the
handle located on the cover and should only be operated when the transformer is de-energized.
The mechanism shall be pad-locked during normal operation.
10.0 Insulating liquids
The mineral oil – both inhibited and uninhibited types – with its electrical and chemical
characteristics shall be in compliance with IEC standards and PCB and PCT free.
11.0 Tank and cover
That Tank walls shall be made of corrugated cooling surfaces and the welds are tested for oil
tightness. The complete tank shall be tested and approved acc. to Cenelec HD 428.6 S1 standard.
12. Painting and surface treatment
All metal parts shall be carefully sand-blasted and painted for use in heavy corrosion areas.
145
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION - 200kVA POWER TRANSFORMER
Characteristic:
Product Name: Liquid-Filled Groundmount Transformer, 3PH
200kVA, HV 11000D, LV 415yn
Country of origin:
Rated Power: [kVA] 200
Insulation Liquid Mineral Oil
High voltage [V] 1100
High voltage tappings (OFF LOAD) +2 -2 2.5%
Low voltage at no load [V] 415
High voltage insulation level [kV] L1 75 / AC 28 / Um 12
Low voltage insulation level [kV] L1 - / AC 3 / Um 1.1
Frequency [Hz] 50
Number of phases 3
Vector group Dyn11
Ambient temperature
max./monthly/annual average 0C
50 / 40 / 30
Max. average temperature rise
(Oil/Winding) [C/C]
50 /55
Surface treatment Painted, RAL 7033
Altitude (a.s.l) [m] <1000
Location Indoor/Outdoor
Performance values:
Standards IEC 60076
Impedance [%] 4(+-10%)
No load losses [W] 450(+15%)
Load losses at 750C [W] 2510(+15%)
Preliminary dimensions and weight:
Length [mm] 1300
Width [mm] 950
Height [mm] 1150
Roller distance (c/c) [mm] x
Oil Weight [kg] 160
Total weight [kg] 800
Type of design:
Tank construction Corrugation, Hermetically sealed
Cooling ONAN
High voltage winding conductor material Cu
High voltage winding conductor material Cu
Standard Features/Accessories:
Off-circuit tap changer (with 5 positions)
DIN type porcelain HV and LV bushings on tank cover
Air insulated standard cable box on HV and LV bushings
Dial type contact thermometer
Pressure relief valve (without contact)
Lifting lugs and Earthing terminals on tank
146
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING SERVICE INSTALLATION
147
SPECIFICATION FOR THE SUPPLY, INSYALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF
CONFORT COOLING VRV / VRF AND SINGLE SPLIT WALL MOUNTED AIR-CONDITIONING
UNITS AND CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION FOR OFFICE BUILDING AT REGENT ROAD,
HILL STATION, FREETOWN FOR SIERRA LEONE FIELD OFFICE OF THE AFRICAN
DEVELOPMENT BANK (ADB)
148
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND
COMMISSIONING OF CONFORT COOLING AIR-CONDITIONING AND CONTROL SYSTEM
FOR THE OFFICE BUILDING AT REGENT ROAD, HILL STATION, FREETOWN FOR SIERRA
LEONE FIELD OFFICE OF THE AFRICAN DEVELOPMENT BANK (ADB)
A. SCOPE AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1 SCOPE OF SPECIFICATION 1.1 Installation to Comply with this Specification
1.2 Scope of the Work
2. STATUTORY OBLIGATIONS AND OTHER REGULATIONS
2.1 Statutory Obligations and Other Requirements
2.2 Case of Conflict
3 EXECUTION OF WORKS
3.1 International System of Units (SI)
3.2 Programme of Works
3.3 Builder’s Work
3.4 Coordination of Contract Works
3.5 Cooperation with Other Contractors
3.6 Site Supervision
3.7 Advice of Order Placed
3.8 Record of Materials Delivery
3.9 Protection of Materials and Equipment
3.10 Service Condition
3.11 Voltage Covered by this Specification
3.12 Labels and Related Instruction
3.13 Materials and Equipment
3.14 Workmanship
3.15 Surveys and Measurements
3.16 Submission of Testing and Commissioning Procedure
A4 DRAWINGS AND MANUALS
4.1 Standard Drawings
4.2 Drawings in Electronic Format
4.3 Installation Drawings
4.4 As-built Drawings
4.5 Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual and User Manual
B GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS (INSTALLATION METHODOLOGY)
1 AIR CLEANING EQUIPMENT
1.1 General
1.2 Washable Panel Filter
2 AIR HANDLING AND TREATMENT
2.1 General
2.2 Fan Coil Units
2.3 Cassette Type Fan Coil Units
3 CONTROL
3.1 Control System (CS)
149
4 ELECTRIC MOTORS AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
4.1 Low Voltage - General
4.2 Low Voltage - Electric Motors
4.3 Low Voltage - Motor Switchgear, Starter and Control Panel
5 REFRIGERATION MACHINE
5.1 General
5.2 Positioning and Isolation/Removal of Equipment
5.3 Delivery of Equipment
5.4 Refrigeration Pipework and Fittings
5.5 Air-Cooled Condenser
5.6 Vibration Isolation
5.6 Electrical Work
6 PIPEWORK
6.1 General
6.2 Air Venting
6.3 Changes in Pipe Size
6.4 Connections in Pipework
6.5 Joints and Fittings for Copper Tubes
6.6 Pipework General Details
6.7 Pipework Layout
6.8 Plastic Pipework
6.9 Supports for Pipework
6.10 Brazing
7 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
7.1 General
7.2 Equipment Bases
7.3 Vibration Isolators
7.4 Plant/Equipment Vibration Isolation
7.5 Pipework Vibration Isolation
7.6 Inspection
8 UNITARY AIR-CONDITIONER
8.1 General
8.2 Installation and Servicing
8.3 Anti-Vibration Mounting
8.4 Casing
8.5 Compressor
8.6 Supply Air Fan and Motor
8.7 Cooling and Heating Coils
8.8 Air Filter
8.9 Air-cooled Condensers
8.10 Refrigerant Piping
8.11 Condensate Drain Pipe
8.12 Minimum Installation Requirements of Safety and Operational Control for Unitary Air Conditioners
8.13 Split Condensing Unit and AHU
8.14 Variable Refrigerant Volume System
8.15 Maintenance Servicing Platform
150
C GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS (MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
SPECIFICATION)
1 AIR CLEANING EQUIPMENT
1.1 General
1.2 Standards
1.3 Washable Panel Filter
1.4 Additional Requirements (Spare Filter Media)
2. FAN COIL UNIT (FCU) AND TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
2.1 General
2.2 Cassette Type Fan Coil Unit
2.3 Energy Efficiency and Performance
3 REFRIGERATION MACHINE
3.1 General
3.2 Compressor-Rotary Type
3.3 Condenser-Air Cool
3.4 Refrigerant Pipework
4. CONTROL
4.1 Electrical Wiring
4.2 Air Cooler Control
4.3 Electrical/Electronic (Localized) Control System
4.4 Standalone Direct Digital Controllers/Outstation (DDC/O)
4.5 Digital Temperature Display
4 CENTRAL REFRIGERATION MACHINE, DIRECT EXPANSION EVAPORATOR AND
HEAT REJECTION PLANT
4.1 General
4.2 Absorption Units
4.3 Cold Storage Refrigeration
4.4 Compressors, Reciprocating Type
4.5 Compressors, Centrifugal Type
4.6 Compressors, Screw Type
4.7 Compressors, Scroll Type
4.8 Condensers, Shell and Tube-General Requirement
4.9 Condensers, Air-Cooled
4.10 Condensers, Evaporative
4.11 Evaporators, Air Cooling
4.12 Liquid Receivers
4.13 Pressure Testing
4.14 Pump Down of System
4.15 Refrigerant Pipework
4.16 Energy Efficiency Performance
5 ELECTRIC MOTORS AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
5.1 Low Voltage - General
5.2 Low Voltage - Wiring for Refrigerated Situations
5.3 Low Voltage - Electric Equipment
151
6 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
6.1 General
6.2 Equipment Bases
7 PIPE MATERIAL
7.1 Pipework Applications
8 THERMAL INSULATION
8.1 General
8.2 Types of Thermal Insulation Materials
8.3 Measure to Prevent Smoke, Noxious & Toxic Fumes Propagation in Event of Fire
8.4 Vapour Barriers
8.5 Insulation Thickness
9 UNITARY AIR-CONDITIONER
9.1 General
9.2 Equipment Suitable for Local Electricity Supply
9.3 Selection of Air-cooled Condensers and Condensing Units
9.4 Casing
9.5 Compressor
9.6 Supply Air Fan and Motor
9.7 Cooling and Heating Coils
9.8 Air Filter
9.9 Air-cooled Condensers
9.10 Refrigerant Piping
9.11 Condensate Drain Pipe
9.12 Safety Control
9.13 Operational Control
9.14 Split Condensing Unit and AHU
9.15 Variable Refrigerant Volume System
9.16 Energy Efficiency Performance
D. INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING 1.1 General
1.2 Testing and Commissioning – Definitions
1.3 Testing and Commissioning – General
1.4 Off-Site Tests
1.5 Site Tests
1.6 Inspection and Testing during Construction Period
1.7 Documents and Data required for Hand-over Meeting
1.8 Testing and Commissioning Procedures
E. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
I.1 General
I.2 Level One Services - Mandatory Responsibilities during Maintenance Period
I.2.1 Requirement for Training
I.2.2 Requirement during Maintenance Period
I.3 Level Two Services - Specified Contractor’s Maintenance Responsibilities during Maintenance Period
I.3.1 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the following within the Maintenance Period
I.3.2 The Contractor shall provide Labour, Minor Spare Parts, Components and Consumable Materials in
the following Services during the Maintenance Period
I.3.3 Contractor’s Responsibilities for Breakdown Call-Out
I.3.4 Maintenance Programme and Schedule
I.3.5 Co-ordination
152
I.3.6 Plant Log and Breakdown/Fault Call Report
I.3.7 Monthly Works
I.3.8 Half-Yearly Works
I.3.9 Annual Works
EI.4 Spare Parts and Special Tools
F. TYPICAL VRV SYSTEM INSTALLATION LAYOUT
G. SCHEDULE OF PROPOSED CONFORT COOLING VRV IN CEILING MOUNTED AND
SINGLE SPLIT WALL MOUNTED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
153
1 SCOPE OF SPECIFICATION
1.1 INSTALLATION TO COMPLY WITH THIS SPECIFICATION
The air-conditioning and control system installation shall comply with this Specification which details
the intrinsic properties (including materials and workmanship) of the installation in so far as it is not
overridden by the Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions of Contract, and Particular Specification
for the Works, Drawings and/or written instructions of the Project Architect.
1.2 SCOPE OF THE WORKS
This Specification, Particular Specification, Tender Equipment Schedule and Drawings detail the
performance requirements of the Works. The Works to be carried out in accordance with this
Specification shall include the installation and supply of all materials necessary to form a complete
installation including any necessary tests, adjustments, commissioning and maintenance as prescribed
and all other incidental sundry components together with the necessary labour for installing such
components, for the proper operation of the installation.
2 STATUTORY OBLIGATIONS AND OTHER REGULATIONS
2.1 STATUTORY OBLIGATIONS AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS
The Air-Conditioning and Control System installation shall comply with the followings:-
2.1.1 Statutory Obligations
a) Building (Ventilating System) Regulation under Buildings legislations - Sierra Leone);
(b) Electricity legislation made under the EDSA Codes;
(c) Fire Service (Installations and Equipment) Regulations, Fire Services legislations;
(d) Noise Control legislation - Sierra Leone;
(e) Air Pollution legislations – Sierra Leone;
(f) Ozone Layer Protection, and other subsidiary legislation – Sierra Leone;
(g) Environmental Impact Assessment legislations – Sierra Leone;
(h) Places of work Public Law of Sierra Leone and other subsidiary legislations
2.1.2 Other Requirements
(a) Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations published by Electrical Distribution and
Services Authority (EDSA) and Mechanical Services Department, Ministry of Works,
Government of Sierra Leone;
(b) Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Electrical Services Installations and Air Conditioning
Services Installations issued by Electrical & Mechanical Services Department, Government of
Sierra Leone;
(c) Codes of Practice issued by the following international institutions:-
- American National Standard Institute
- Air-conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
- American Society of Mechanical Engineers
- American Society of Testing and Materials
- The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
- International Organization for Standardization
- National Fire Protection Association
- Codes of Practice on Prevention of Legionnaires’ disease;
(d) Technical Memorandum to issue Air Pollution Abatement Notice to control Air Pollution from
Stationary Processes and the Assessment of Noise from Places other than Domestic Premises and
Public Places;
(e) Technical Memorandum on Environmental Impact Assessment Process.
154
2.1.3 Safety Requirements
(a) Occupational Safety and Health Ordinance and others made under the Ordinance;
(b) Construction Site (Safety) Regulations
2.1.4 Technical Standards
BS, BS EN, ISO Standards, IEC Standards and Codes of Practice, etc. shall be deemed to include all
amendments, revisions and standards superseding the standards listed herein, which are current at the
closing date of the tender of the Contract unless otherwise specified.
2.2 CASE OF CONFLICT
The documents forming the Contract are to be taken as mutually explanatory of one another but in case
of ambiguities or discrepancies the same shall be explained by the Project Architect who shall issue to
the Contractor instructions clarifying such ambiguities or discrepancies.
3 EXECUTION OF WORKS:
3.1 INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM OF UNITS (SI)
The International System of Units (System International Unites) of weights and measures shall be used
for all materials, equipment and measurements.
3.2 PROGRAMME OF WORKS
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Architect a detailed programme of the Works within
4 weeks from the acceptance of his tender showing the intended method, stages and order of work
execution in coordination with the building construction programme, together with the duration he
estimated for each and every stage of the Works. The programme shall include at least the following:-
(a) Dates for the placement of orders for equipment and materials;
(b) Expected completion dates for builder’s work requirements, i.e. when work site needs to be ready;
(c) Delivery dates of equipment and materials to Site;
(d) Dates of commencement and completion of every stage of the Works in line with the building
construction programme, i.e. each floor level and/or zone area;
(e) Dates of documents/drawings submissions to Project Architect to obtain the necessary approvals;
(f) Dates of requirement of temporary facilities necessary for testing & commissioning, e.g. electricity
supply and town gas;
(g) Dates of completion, testing and commissioning; and
(h) Short term programme showing the detailed work schedules of coming weeks and months shall
also be provided to the Project Architect. Programme shall be regularly updated to reflect the actual
progress and to meet the Contractors’ obligations under the Contract.
In addition, detailed submission schedules for installation drawings, equipment and testing and
commissioning shall be submitted to the Architect for approval.
The formats and information to be included in the schedules shall be as required by the Project
Architect.
3.3 BUILDER’S WORK
All builder’s work including openings or holes through building structure or partition walls; trenches,
ducts and cutting; and all plinths, concrete bases, supports, ducts, etc. required for the installation will
be carried out as part of the building works by the building contractor at the expense of the Employer
provided that the Contractor has submitted full details of such requirements within a reasonable time
to the Project Architect for approval, so that due consideration may be given before the building
contractor commences the building works in accordance with the building programme in the areas
concerned. After obtaining the said approval of the Project Architect, the Contractor is required to mark
out at the relevant locations of the Site the exact positions and sizes of all such works and to provide
detailed information of such works to the building contractor to facilitate him to carry out the builder’s
works as the works proceed.
155
All "cutting-away" and "making-good" as required to facilitate the Contractor’s works will be carried
out by the building contractor, except for minor provisions required for the fixing of screws, raw plugs,
redhead bolts, etc. which shall be carried out by the Contractor. The Contractor shall mark out on Site
and/or supply drawings of all "cutting-away" to the building contractor within a reasonable time.
All expenses properly incurred and losses suffered by the Employer as a result of the Contractor’s
failure to comply with the above requirements are recoverable by the Employer from the Contractor.
The Contractor shall ensure that such works are essential for the execution of the Works. In the event
that any of such works is proved to be non-essential, unnecessary and/or abortive, the Contractor shall
bear the full cost of such works including but not limited to any unnecessary or incorrect cutting-away
and making-good and shall reimburse the Employer for all cost incurred in this connection.
Upon completion of the builder’s works by the building contractor, the Contractor shall forthwith check
and examine that all builder’s works so executed have been completed in accordance with his
requirements. If at any time it becomes apparent to the Contractor that any builder’s works completed
by the building contractor does not comply with his requirements in any respect whatsoever, the
Contractor shall forthwith give notice in writing to the Project Architect and specify in details the
extents and effects of such non-compliance in that notice. The Contractor is deemed to have satisfied
with the builder’s works after a period of 7 days from the date of completion of the builder’s works if
the above notice is not served to the Project Architect within such period. All additional expenditure
properly incurred and all loss suffered in this connection by the Employer in having such works re-
executed and rectified shall be recoverable by the Employer from the Contractor.
3.4 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT WORKS
The Contractor shall coordinate the Works with those works of the building contractor and any other
contractors and sub-contractors.
The Contractor shall note that the Drawings supplied to him only indicate the approximate locations of
the works. He shall make any modification reasonably required of his programme, work sequence and
physical deployment of his work to suit the outcome of work coordination or as necessary and ensure
that all cleaning, adjustment, test and control points are readily accessible while keeping the number of
loops, cross-overs and the like to a minimum.
The Contractor shall pay particular attention to the building works programme and shall plan,
coordinate and programme his works to suit and adhere to the building works in accordance with the
building programme.
Any significant problems encountered during the coordination work, which are beyond the Contractor’s
control, shall promptly be reported to the Architect.
3.5 COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS
The Contractor shall cooperate at all times with the building contractor and all other contractors and
sub-contractors in order to achieve efficient workflow on Site.
Any significant problems beyond the Contractor’s control shall promptly be reported to the Project
Architect.
156
3.6 SITE SUPERVISION
The Contractor shall keep on the Site a competent and technically qualified site supervisor to control,
supervise and manage all his Works on Site. The supervisor shall be vested with suitable powers to
receive instructions from the Project Architect.
The site supervisor shall be technically competent and have adequate site experience for the Works.
The qualified and competent Supervisor shall have minimum 5 years on site experience for similar type
of installation works. The Contractor shall also refer to the Particular Specification for other specific
requirements, if any, on site supervision.
Approval by the Project Architect shall be obtained prior to the posting of the supervisor on Site. The
Contractor shall immediately replace the Site supervisor whose experience, skill or competency is, in
the opinion of the Project Architect/M&E Engineer, found to be inadequate for the particular work.
All tradesmen must be experienced in the trade and the work carried out shall be consistent with good
practice in Sierra Leone and to the satisfaction of the Project Architect.
The Contractor shall also employ a full time competent foreman on site for each trade. All trade foremen
shall be registered tradesmen of the relevant trade.
3.7 ADVICE OF ORDER PLACED
The Contractor shall submit copies of all orders placed for major items of equipment and materials to
the Project Architect for record.
3.8 RECORD OF MATERIALS DELIVERY
All materials and equipment delivered to Site shall be accurately listed and recorded in the site record
books maintained by the representatives of the Project Architect on Site.
Materials and equipment delivered to Site and paid for in interim payment shall be the Employer’s
property. Such materials and equipment shall not be removed from Site without the approval of the
Project Architect in writing and appropriate deduction shall be made in the next interim payment in
accordance with the Contract.
Where the building contractor is in overall control of the Site, the building contractor may also be
required to record details of all incoming/outgoing materials. In this case, the Contractor shall comply
with the building contractor’s arrangements.
3.9 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Unless the responsibility is clearly defined in the Contract that the protection on Site for delivered
equipment, materials and installation is solely by other contractors, the Contractor shall be responsible
for the safe custody of all materials and equipment as stored or installed by him until finally inspected,
tested and accepted. In addition, the Contractor shall protect all work against theft, fire, damage or
inclement weather and carefully store all materials and equipment received on Site but not yet installed
in a safe and secure place unless otherwise specified.
All cases of theft and fire must immediately be reported to the police, the building contractor, the
Project Architect and the representatives on Site with full details.
Where necessary the Contractor shall provide lockable steel container or other equally secure
enclosures placed within a securely fenced-in compound provided by the Building Contractor on Site
for the storage of materials and equipment.
157
The Contractor shall co-ordinate and arrange with the Building Contractor who shall provide clean,
reasonably finished and lockable secure accommodation for the storage of sensitive and/or expensive
items before installation.
If there is no Building Contractor, all the storage facilities and spaces shall be provided by the
Contractor.
3.10 SERVICE CONDITION
The following service conditions shall apply to materials and equipment’s:
Building Location
Freetown, Sierra Leone
08030’N, 13014’W, Altitude 11m
Design Criteria
1. External Environmental Conditions
High temperatures, high humidity, saline atmosphere, presence of airborne dust particles during
Harmattan, periods of high precipitation
2. External Ambient Design Conditions
330 C db. 270C wb. Average max/min daytime temperatures 300C.db / 240C.wb (Diurnal Range
60C)
References: CIGSE Design Guide
BBC Weather Data, based on readings at location for 14 years
3. Internal Environmental Design Conditions
Refer Schedules 1-3 for internal temperatures, occupancy levels and fresh air requirements.
4. Internal Noise Criteria
5. IEE Wiring Regulations
6. CIBSE Commissioning Codes
3.11 VOLTAGE COVERED BY THIS SPECIFICATION
Unless otherwise specified, all apparatus, equipment, materials and wiring shall be suitable for use with
a 3-phase and neutral, 4-wire, 400/230 V ±6%, 50 Hz ±2%.
3.12 LABELS AND RELATED INSTRUCTION
3.12.1 Labels and Related Instruction
In order to make cross reference to the Operation/Maintenance/Service Manuals and Schematic
Drawings, etc., the Contractor shall provide labels for marking all pipework, switches and other
equipment, etc. and elsewhere to facilitate maintenance or as directed by the Project Architect/M&E
Engineer with engraved multi-layer formica or similar material. Wording shall be submitted to the
Project Architect for approval before manufacture.
All labels shall be of adequate size as to give clearance between lettering and fixings to ensure an
aesthetic arrangement on completion.
All English lettering used on labels shall be "Bold" capitals (except otherwise directed) with black
letters on white labels for normal purposes. Where special colours or details are required these shall
be as specified or directed.
3.12.2 Manufacturers’ Technical Support in Sierra Leone
All equipment listed in the Equipment Schedule shall be supplied through authorised agencies of the
manufacturers in Sierra Leone or through the Sierra Leone office of the manufacturers.
158
These local agencies or offices shall have adequate technical staff to provide presale and after-sale
services to the Contractor. Unless otherwise specified in this Specification, equipment’s supplied
directly by the manufacturers which do not have local agent or office in Sierra Leone will not be
accepted. Spare parts should also be available in the local market easily.
3.12.3 Guard for Rotating Parts of Equipment
All rotating parts of equipment shall be provided with an approved guard complying with the
Factories & Industrial Undertakings (Guarding an Operation of Machinery) Regulations, published
by the Labour Department, Ministry of Works together with any amendments made thereto.
Guards shall be rigid and of substantial construction and shall consist of heavy mild steel angle
frames, hinged and latched with either heavy galvanized mild steel wire crimped mesh securely
fastened to frames or galvanized sheet metal of 1.2 mm minimum thickness.
All apertures shall be such that finger access to dangerous part is not possible. All sections shall be
bolted or riveted.
(a) Temporary Guards
During the execution of work, the Contractor shall ensure that all moving parts are adequately
guarded by temporary guards.
Adequate temporary guard railings etc. around dangerous floor/wall openings in the vicinity of
any work for the protection shall be provided.
For the safety of workers, guard railings etc. are to be provided by the building contractor, but
in case they are not provided, the Contractor shall immediately report the matter to the Project
Architect.
(b) Permanent Guards on Plant
Unless specified otherwise in the Particular Specification, the Contractor shall provide removable
guards or railing for protection from moving or rotating parts. The design and construction of
safety guards for moving parts such as belt drives shall conform to the requirements laid down in
the Factories & Industrial Undertakings (Guarding an Operation of Machinery) Regulations.
3.13 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
3.13.1 Material and Equipment Standards
All materials, equipment and installation work shall be carried out by adoption of the best available
quality materials and workmanship and shall, where applicable, comply with the latest edition of the
appropriate standards and/or codes of practice issued by the relevant international Institutes and
Standards and as specified in this Specification. This requirement shall be deemed to include all
amendments to these standards and codes up to the date of tendering.
3.13.2 Compatibility of Materials and Equipment
Where different components of equipment are interconnected to form a complete system, their
characteristics of performance and capacities shall be matched in order to ensure efficient,
economical, safe and sound operation of the complete system.
3.13.3 Equipment Catalogues and Manufacturer’s Specifications
Equipment catalogue and manufacturer's specification related to proposed items of equipment shall
be specific and shall include all information necessary for the Project Architect to ascertain that the
equipment complies with this Specification and/or the Particular Specification and Drawings. Data
and sales catalogue of a general nature are not acceptable. Unless agreed to by the Project Architect
in writing, all data and catalogues submitted must be in English and in pure SI units i.e. mm, m, kPa,
m/s, Hz, kW, l/s, etc.
159
Contractor shall submit catalogues and manufacturer's specification of the proposed equipment for
the examination and approval of the Project Architect in writing before any equipment is ordered.
3.13.4 Equipment Deviations
Subsequent to the award of the Contract, and only in exceptional circumstances where it is
demonstrated in writing by the Contractor that the original equipment offered cannot be obtained, the
Project Architect may consider and accept, in writing, alternative equipment and materials proposed
by the Contractor provided always that these are fully in compliance with the relevant Specifications
and Drawings and do not impose any additional contractual or financial liabilities onto the Employer.
The Contractor shall bear in mind that submission of alternatives usually causes delay because of
additional time required by the Project Architect to process further approval. The consequences of
such delay shall be borne by the Contractor.
Subject as always to the Project Architect's approval, where the Contractor proposes to use items of
equipment other than those specified and dimensionally different from the Contract Drawings, the
installation of which items requires any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping,
wiring or any other part of the mechanical, electrical or architectural layout, then drawings showing
the layout of the proposed equipment and any redesign involved shall be prepared by the Contractor
at the Contractor’s own expenses and be submitted to the Project Architect for approval.
Where the equipment deviation involves significant changes to the building, e.g. a larger equipment,
this will unlikely be agreed unless the enlargement presents no significant problem and the Contractor
is prepared to pay for the building alterations involved.
Where such approved deviation necessitates a different quantity and arrangement of ductwork,
piping, structural supports, insulation, controls, motors, starters, electrical wiring and conduits, and
any other additional materials together with all necessary accessories from that originally specified
or indicated in the Contract Drawings, the Contractor shall supply and install such ductwork, piping,
structural supports, insulation, controls, motors, starters, electrical wiring and conduits, and any other
additional materials together with all necessary accessories required by the system at no additional
cost to the Employer. The Contractor shall also be responsible for all other expenses by other
contractors in view of the change. Any deduction of cost due to the change shall be deducted from
the contract.
The responsibility and detailed arrangement for abortive work and cost different for alternative
equipment and material shall be in accordance with the Preliminaries of the Contract.
3.13.5 Selection of Equipment
Selection of equipment shall be based on this Specification, the Particular Specification, and the
technical data contained in the Drawings for this particular installation.
Where items of equipment are interconnected to form an integral part of the complete air conditioning
installation, their characteristics of performance and capacities shall be so matched as to give safe,
reliable, efficient and economical operation of the complete air conditioning installation.
3.14 WORKMANSHIP
3.14.1 Safety on Site
Work shall be carried out in such a manner as to comply with all the regulations, standards, etc., as
listed in the ‘’Safety Requirements’’ of this Specification together with any amendments made
thereto.
160
3.14.2 Tools and Instruments
Proper tools shall be used for the works. Adequate and accurate testing/measuring instruments shall
be used to demonstrate compliance of the installations with the relevant specifications and
regulations. The Project Architect has the right to stop any work in which the correct tools and/or
instruments are not used.
Instruments used for acceptance tests shall be calibrated at an interval time of one year unless
otherwise as required in the Contract for this particular project.
3.14.3 Workmanship Standard
The installation works shall be in line with the good practice accepted by the international/local
industry and verified by commissioning and testing results.
The installation works shall be in compliance with this Specification, Particular Specification and
drawings of the project.
The installation shall be in compliance with the statutory requirements as specified in this
Specification in respect of labour safety, fire safety, structural safety, electrical safety and
environmental protection.
Apart from those requirements as stipulated in this Specification and other statutory requirements,
due care shall be taken to secure public safety and health both during the execution of the works and
in the selection of equipment and materials for the Air Conditioning installation contract.
3.14.4 Warning Notice
Warning notices shall be provided as required by the Electricity Ordinance and the Code of Practice
for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations. In addition, the following warning notices in English shall
be provided at the appropriate positions:-
(a) A label having minimum size of 65 x 50mm marked with the words ‘DANGER – HIGH
VOLTAGE’ in red lettering not less than 5mm high to be fixed on every container or enclosure
of equipment for operating at voltages exceeding "Low voltage"; and
(b) A label to be fixed in such a position that any person may gain access to any moving parts of
an item of equipment or enclosure will notice or be warned of such a danger.
3.14.5 Space for Equipment/Plant
The Contractor shall ensure that all equipment/plants, material and equipment supplied by him can
be accommodated and installed within the spaces as generally shown on the Contract Drawings with
adequate access and space for maintenance of all items supplied.
The Contractor shall also ensure that access to plant is adequate to allow for its removal and/or
ultimate replacement. Where this is considered not possible or necessary the Project Architect shall
be consulted for alternative arrangements.
3.14.6 Water Proofing
Where any work requires piercing waterproofing layers or structures, the method of installation must
have prior approval, in writing, from the Project Architect.
Unless otherwise specified or instructed, the Contractor shall provide all necessary sleeves, caulking
and flashing as appropriate to make these penetrations absolutely watertight.
3.14.7 Quality Assurance Standards
All materials and equipment shall be manufactured by factories with acceptable quality assurance
procedures. Factories having ISO 9001:2000 certification are deemed to have acceptable quality
assurance procedures. Other similar quality assurance standards may be accepted by the Project
Architect on their individual merits. Details of such other quality assurance standards shall be
submitted with the Equipment Schedule.
161
3.15 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS
The Contractor shall relate all horizontal and vertical measurements taken and/or applied, to establish
bench marks such as design drawing grid lines, finished floor levels, etc. and shall thus establish
satisfactory lines and levels for all work.
All works shall be installed to these established lines and levels and the Contractor shall verify all
measurements on site and check the correctness thereof as related to the work.
Primary bench base line, datum level, horizontal reference grid, secondary grid and transferred bench
mark on each structural level will be provided by the building contractor. The Contractor shall co-
ordinate with the building contractor to obtain all necessary datum and reference grids prior to their
surveys and measurements.
3.16 SUBMISSION OF TESTING AND COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE
Upon completion of the installation but prior to acceptance, the Contractor shall submit to the Project
Architect in good time a schedule showing the appropriate testing and commissioning procedures to be
carried out. The schedule shall be agreed by the Project Architect/M&E Engineer before any testing
and commissioning work is carried out.
Detailed requirements for testing and commissioning shall be in accordance with the relevant Sections
of this Specification.
4.0 DRAWINGS AND MANUALS
4.1 STANDARD DRAWINGS
There are standard abbreviations, symbols and standard drawings prepared by the M&E Engineer to
show details of the common standard installations. The Contractor shall refer to these standards and
drawings whenever such are mentioned or specified in the Drawings or the Particular Specification.
The same standards shall also be used in the Contractor's "as-built" drawings, etc., whenever applicable.
4.2 DRAWINGS IN ELECTRONIC FORMAT
The Contractor shall provide drawings in electronic format as required in the following clauses. These
drawings shall conform to the latest version of CAD Standard of Works Projects (CSWP) and in
accordance with the latest version of CAD Manual for Architectural Services Department Projects.
Should any technical conflict between the CSWP and the CAD Manual arise, the CSWP shall take
precedence.
4.3 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS
4.3.1 Drawing Submission Schedule
The Contractor shall submit a detailed installation drawing and programme to the Project Architect.
The Contractor shall allow reasonable time in the programme for vetting of the installation drawings
by the Project M&E Engineer and for drawing resubmissions as necessary.
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Architect a comprehensive “Submission Schedule” of
installation drawings and builders work drawings within 2 weeks after the acceptance of ‘’Tender’’,
taking into account of the overall programme of the Works including any Specialist Works to be
undertakings. No equipment shall be delivered to the Site and no work shall be executed until the
installation drawings have been approved by the Project Architect.
The Contractor shall ensure that the installation drawings and builder’s work drawings are
progressively submitted in accordance with the approved “Submission Schedule”. The Contractor shall
provide at least 4 hard copies and one electronic copy, unless otherwise specified in the Contract, of
the approved installation drawings to the Project Architect for distribution.
Unless otherwise indicated or instructed, the Contractor shall, in the stated or in adequate time before
each section of the work proceeds, prepare, and submit for acceptance by the Project Architect/M&E
Engineer, detailed installation drawings and/or shop drawings (which may also be referred to as
162
working drawings) to demonstrate how they propose to install the works both in ‘Detail’ and ‘Form’ to
facilitate the practical installation. These drawings shall be fully dimensioned and shall be based on the
basic intentions of the ‘Contract Drawings’ but shall not be simply a copy of them.
Installation drawings and shop drawings in this context shall mean the drawings of items to be
constructed by the Contractor at a workshop away from the site
4.3.2 Size of Installation Drawings
Drawings submitted by the Contractor shall only be of standard sizes A3 as stipulated in ISO 5457:1999
and for this Particular Project.
Contractor’s ‘Installation Drawings’ and/or ‘Shop Drawings’ shall be prepared to such scales that will
clearly show all necessary details.
The drawings shall be prepared to the same sheet sizes and scales as to be used for the ultimate ’As-
Installed’ record drawings.
4.3.3 Contents of Installation Drawings
In accordance with the provisions of this Specification and as stated elsewhere in the Contract
Documents, the installation drawings must incorporate details of the actual plant and equipment items
as approved by the Project Architect.
The Contractor shall ensure all installation drawings are accurate representation of the Works, before
submitting them to the Project Architect.
All installation drawings shall be fully dimensioned and suitably scaled showing construction, sizes,
weights, arrangements, operating clearances and performance characteristics.
(a) "Installation Drawings" shall generally include, but not limited to, the following:-
- Symbols and notations same as and compatible with the Employer’s own Contract Drawing
standard;
- Complete layout/assemblies including all necessary minor items and accessories;
- Positions of all fixings, hangers and supports;
- Maintenance spaces for all withdrawable items, such as coils and fan blowers, cleaning and
replacement of tubes, removal of guards, etc.
- Positions & sizes of all test holes, bends and fittings, clearances to allow for the removal of
inserted equipment where applicable;
- Lifting points and safe working weights of each item.
Note: These may be shown on separate drawings, if necessary, to avoid confusion.
(b) Fan Coil Unit (FCU) Installation Drawings
All Fan Coil Unit (FCU) installation drawings shall include details of all equipment to be
installed therein including Wall Mounted and In-Ceiling Units with withdrawal clearances;
cleaning spaces for coils; filter; detail of hinges with manufacturers type and numbers for
proprietary items; details of drains, drain traps, cleanouts, and as well as provisions made and
the necessary clearance spaces for in-situ servicing or removal.
These drawings shall also show, in outline form only, any significant adjacent building structure
and the clearances from and other equipment and/or known services no matter whether these
elements are provided by the Contractor or others. All such known positions and/or clearances
shall be dimensioned wherever possible.
163
(c) Pipework Installation Drawings
Prior to the commencement of any installation, the Contractor shall submit to the Project
Architect for technical appraisal installation drawings for the pipework installation. Generally,
the drawings shall be drawn to a scale of not less than 1:50. Subject to the Architect’s approval
a scale of 1:100 may be adopted where the installation is a simple one.
The drawings shall indicate the location, with dimensions given of all pipework in relation to
the building structure and other pipework and equipment, etc.
Details and outline of insulation shall be shown including clearances and all hangers and
supports shall be shown and the positions dimensioned.
.
(e) Control and Wiring Installation Drawings
The Contractor shall prepare and submit schematic diagrams showing the control layout with
each item clearly identified with all interlocking and related facilities.
These drawings shall include wiring diagrams showing full details including terminal and wire
numbers, colour code, etc. for all items of electrical/electronic equipment.
Installation Drawings shall also be prepared and submitted for all physical wiring and piping
systems detailing positions, fixings, support, protection, sizes and number of cores/pipes for all
runs.
The Installation Drawings shall show positions in relation to the building structure and other
plant, equipment and/or installations. In the context, the equipment and/or installations will
mean to include the Contractor’s own installed services and those installed by others. For those
services installed by others, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining sufficient details
of relevant information from them in order to complete the drawings.
(f) Switchgear, Starter, Control/Instrumentation/Motor Control Installation Drawings
Shop/Installation Drawings shall show the physical construction and layout, internally and
externally, of all panels/cabinets/cubicles including the physical arrangement of all major and
important components, bus-bars, phase separation barriers, interconnecting wiring, piping,
labels, etc.
Wiring diagrams and schematic diagrams shall show all internal & external wiring/piping
including all interlocks and connections from the panels to external equipment.
Operation and control philosophy shall also be included in the submission. The drawings shall
include proposed full wording of all labels to be installed in English.
4.3.4 Builder’s Work Drawings
Unless otherwise approved by the Project Architect, the Contractor shall submit to the Project Architect
in accordance with the approved “Submission Schedule”, 4 copies of drawings showing details of all
builders’ work required e.g. the weight and the load on each support of equipment.
Such drawings shall clearly indicate the details and positions of all openings, trenches, ducts, drain and
cutting required and construction details for plinths and equipment bases.
4.3.5 Manufacturer’s Shop Drawings
The manufacturer’s shop drawings are drawings for equipment to be manufactured by a specialist
manufacturing supplier in their own workshops and places away from the Site.
164
The drawings shall show detailed construction, principal dimensions, weights and clearances for
maintenance, etc. Immediately after placing of any order or at any event within 4 weeks unless
otherwise approved in writing by the Architect, the Contractor shall forward to the Project Architect
for comment, 4 copies of manufacturer’s shop drawings indicating detailed construction, principal
dimensions and weights, clearances for withdrawals and/or cleaning, etc. No work shall proceed on or
off Site unless drawings requiring approval are so approved in writing by the Project Architect.
4.3.6 Drawings for Submission to Other Authority
4.3.6.1 Checking Drawings of Other Trades
The Contractor shall follow the design intent of the Contract Drawings in planning and carrying out the
work and shall cross check with other trades in order to verify the line, level, space and sequence in
which the work is to be installed.
If directed by the Project Architect, the Contractor shall, without extra charge, make reasonable
adjustments to the proposed installation drawing layouts as are necessary to prevent conflicts with the
work of other trades or for the proper sequence of and execution of work.
Where such modifications are of a nature and of such unforeseen complexity that they involve
unreasonably extra work not covered by the Contract, they may be covered by variation order to be
issued by the Project Architect wherever such a requirement is justified.
4.4 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
4.4.1 Submission of As–built Drawings
The Contractor shall submit 4 sets of the first draft prints of as-built drawings within 21 days of the
issuance of the certification of completion to the Project Architect/M&E Engineer for checking. The
Project Architect/M&E Engineer after checking the draft prints shall return one set of the marked up
copies of these as-built drawings to the Contractor within 14 days from the date of submission of the
Contractor’s draft prints with comments. The Contractor shall within a further 7 days from the date of
receiving the Project Architect’s comments on the draft as-built drawings re-submit to the Project
Architect for his approval another 4 sets of the second draft prints of as-built drawings with the Project
Architect’s comments incorporated. This process of submission and approval shall continue until the
final approval of the Project Architect on these as-built drawing is obtained.
The final approved as-built drawings shall be in 4 sets of hard copy and 2 sets of electronic copies.
These shall be submitted within 7 days from the date of final approval. Each electronic copy shall be
in the form of CD-ROM, labelled, with cross reference to a printed list of files explaining the contents
and purpose of each file and supplied in sturdy plastic encases.
4.4.2 Size of As-built Drawings
As-built drawings shall only be of standard sizes of A3 size as stipulated in ISO 5457:1999.
4.4.3 Content of As-built Drawings
The Contractor shall ensure all as-built drawings are accurate representation of the Works, before
submitting them to the Project Architect.
The as-built drawings required to be provided by the Contractor for various types of BS/M&E
installations shall include, but not limited to the following:-
(a) Building services layout plans such as trunking arrangement, piping arrangement, etc.
(b) System schematic diagrams, control diagrams and wiring diagrams;
(c) Concealed work layout plan such as concealed conduit routing, etc.; and
(d) Installation details drawings such as LV cubicle switchboards layout and remote control
position etc. "As-built" drawings complete with all details such as design air to be used for
commissioning purposes. Any amendments noted on these drawings during the commissioning
165
and test stage shall subsequently be transferred to the original "As-built" drawings once the
amendments have been accepted by the Project Architect.
4.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUAL AND USER MANUAL
4.5.1 General
The Contractor shall provide two types of manuals to the Project Architect with all changes made to
the installation during the course of the Contract suitably incorporated.
The O&M Manual is for use by the maintenance agent of the completed installation. It shall contain
detailed technical information covering both operation and maintenance aspects of the installation.
The User Manual seeks to give users of the completed installation an overview of the essential
information of the installation. The contents of the manual should be concise and succinct for ease of
comprehension by people with a non-technical background.
4.5.2 Presentation
All manuals shall be written in English, unless otherwise specified.
The text of descriptive parts shall be kept concise while at the same time ensure completeness.
Diagrammatic materials shall also be supported by comprehensive descriptions.
The manuals shall comprise A4 size loose-leaf, where necessary, A3 size folded loose-leaves. The
loose-leaf shall be of good quality paper that is sufficiently opaque to avoid "show-through". Unless
otherwise specified in the Contract, the manuals shall be bound in durable loose-leaf 4 ring binders
with hard covers. The manuals shall have labels or lettering on the front cover and spine.
The Architect’s approval shall be obtained on this at the draft manual stage. The electronic copy of
manuals including the technical literatures shall be in PDF format readable by Acrobat Reader
Freeware.
4.5.3 Checking and Approval
The Contractor shall submit 3 sets of the first draft of O&M Manuals together with a list of
recommended spare parts for one year’s operation and a list of special tools, both complete with prices
to the Project Architect for comment within 21 days of the issuance of the certificate of completion.
The Contractor shall submit 2 sets of the first draft of the User Manual to the Project Architect for
comment at least 15 calendar days before the date of completion.
The Project Architect will check the drafts and return them to the Contractor within 14 days from the
date of submission with comments necessary for a final and approved set of document. The Contractor
shall then make all necessary amendments to the documents and resubmit them to the Project Architect
within 7 days from the date of receipt of comments.
The Contractor shall submit 4 sets of hard copies (one of which shall be the original) and one set of
electronic copy of the final approved O&M Manuals in CD-ROM within 14 days from the date of
approval by the Project Architect.
The Contractor shall submit 2 sets of hard copies and one electronic copy of the final approved User
Manuals in CD-ROM within 7 days from the date of approval by the Project Architect.
166
4.5.4 Structure and Contents of O&M Manual
The detailed requirements, structure and contents of the O&M Manual shall be as specified in elsewhere
in the Contract and shall include the following information under separate sections where appropriate:-
(a) Project Information
This shall include:-
Project title, site address, contract no., contract title, contractor/sub-contractor name, address,
contact persons and their telephone/email, contract commencement date, substantial completion
date and end date of maintenance period.
(b) System Description
- Type(s) of system(s) and equipment installed;
- Design criteria, design data and parameters;
- Locations of the system and major equipment, and what they serve;
- Description of operation and functions of the system and equipment; and
- General operating conditions, expected performance and energy and resources
consumption where applicable.
(c) List of Installed Equipment
Schedule of all items of equipment, stating the location, name, model no. manufacturer's serial
or reference no., manufacturer’s design duties and data
(d) Spare Parts and Special Tools Lists
- List of Spare Parts supplied by the Contractor:
Item descriptions, supplied quantities, model nos., manufacturer’s serial or reference nos.
and storage locations; and
- Recommended Spare Parts List and Special Tools List:
Manufacturers’/suppliers’ recommendations for spare parts and special tools with item
description, unit rate, recommended stock quantities as well as the agents for the spare parts
and special tools.
(e) Manufacturers’ Certificates/Guarantees
- Manufacturers’ certificates such as factory test certificates and guarantees and any others
where required for the equipment, etc.; and
- Originals of Statutory Inspection Certificate for various installations, including:-
- Other equipment such as surveyor’s test certificates for high pressure vessel; and
- Electrical installations (Work Completion Certificate).
[Note: Testing records & commissioning data (other than the types prescribed above), which
are required under the Contract such as the Testing & Commissioning (T&C) procedures,
etc. to verify the compliance of the BS/M&E system’s/equipment’s performance with the
Contract requirements, are checked and endorsed separately by the Project Architect and do
not form part of the O&M manuals.]
(f) Safety Precautions for Operation & Maintenance State, where applicable, hazard warnings and
safety precautions of which the operation and maintenance staff need to be aware:-
- Mandatory requirements relating to safety;
- Known hazards against which protection measures shall be taken; and
- Known features or operational characteristics of the installed equipment or systems which
may cause hazard and the related safety precautions.
167
(g) Operation Instructions
Instructions for the safe and efficient operation, under both normal and emergency conditions,
of the installed system which shall comprise:-
- An outline of the operating mode;
- Procedures and sequences for start-up and shut-down;
- Interlocks between equipment/system;
- Calling on of stand-by equipment;
- Precautions necessary to overcome known hazards;
- Means by which any potentially hazardous equipment can be made safe;
- Forms for recording plant running hours, energy consumption and energy costs; and
- Operating data such as running current, operating pressure, etc.
(h) Maintenance
a) Maintenance Instructions
The Manufacturer’ and the Contractor's recommendations and instructions for the maintenance
of the installed equipment should give a clear distinction between planned tasks (preventive
maintenance) and fault repair tasks (corrective maintenance). Instructions shall be given on each
of the following, as appropriate:-
(i) Nature of deterioration and the defects to be looked for;
- Isolation and return to service of equipment;
- Dismantling and reassembly;
- Replacement of components and assemblies;
- Adjustments and testing; and
- Special tools, test equipment and ancillary services.
- Maintenance Schedules
Proposed maintenance schedules for all the preventive maintenance tasks identified above. The
schedules shall be based on both manufacturers' recommendations and other authoritative
sources (e.g. statutory or mandatory requirements) and should include:-
- Routine servicing;
- Inspections;
- Tests and examinations; and
- Adjustments;
The frequency of each task may be expressed as specific time intervals, running hours or
number of completed operations as appropriate. Collectively, the schedules will form a
complete maintenance cycle, repeated throughout the whole working life of the installation.
(i) Drawing Lists
- A complete list of as-built drawings identified with drawing number/reference;
- A complete list of manufacturers’ shop drawings with drawing number/reference, where
applicable.
168
(j) Technical Literatures
A complete set of manufacturers' literatures for all the plants and equipment’s installed in the
system. The contents of these literatures shall cover the following areas where applicable:-
- Description of equipment with model numbers highlighted;
- Performance - behavioural characteristics of the equipment;
- Applications - suitability for use;
- Factory/laboratory test reports, detailed drawings, circuit diagrams;
- Methods of operation and control;
- Operation instructions;
- Cleaning and maintenance requirements;
- Protective measures and safety precautions for operation and maintenance; and;
- Part lists.
4.5.5 Structure and Contents of User Manual
The detailed requirements, structure and contents of the User Manual shall include, where applicable,
the following information:-
(a) Project Information
This shall include:-
Project title, site address, contract no., contract title, contract commencement date, substantial
completion date and end date of Maintenance Period
(b) System Description
i Type(s) of system(s) and equipment installed, and their purposes;
ii Locations of equipment;
iii Brief description of the operation and functions of the systems and equipment; and
iv Listing of set points which can be adjusted by the user to suit their operation needs.
(c) Schedule of equipment location and Installed Equipment
(a) Schedule of major equipment including their locations and serving areas.
(d) Safety Precautions for Operation
Any safety precautions and warnings signals that the users shall be aware of in the daily operation
of the various systems and equipment in the installation including:-
(a) Mandatory requirements relating to safety;
(b) Features or operational characteristics of the installed systems or equipment which may cause
hazard and the related safety precautions;
(c) Protective measures and safety precautions for operation; and
(d) List of warning signals and the related meanings that the user shall be aware of and the actions
to be taken.
(e) Operation Instructions
Instructions for the safe and efficient operation, under both normal and emergency conditions, of
the installed system which shall comprise:-
(a) An outline of the operating mode;
(b) Step by step operation instructions for systems and equipment that are to be operated by the
user, including at least procedures for start-up and shutdown;
(c) Means by which any potentially hazardous situation can be made safe; and
(d) Cleaning and basic maintenance procedures.
169
(f) List of Statutory Periodic Inspections and Tests
A schedule of periodic inspections and tests that owner and/or user of the installation have to
arrange to achieve compliance with the requirements stipulated in the relevant Laws of Sierra
Leone. The frequency of such inspections and tests shall be expressed in specific time intervals.
(g) Drawings
A set of selected as-built drawings shall be able to illustrate to the user the general layout of the
completed installation.
(h) Photographs
A set of photographs with suitable caption’s to illustrate to the user the appearance and locations
of devices which require their setting and operation.
4.5.6 Intellectual Property Rights
The Office Building at Regent Road, Hill Station, Freetown for Sierra Leone Field Office at the African
Development Bank (ADB) shall become the absolute and exclusive owner of the Operation and
Maintenance Manuals and the User Manual and all intellectual property rights subsisting therein free
from all encumbrances.
In the event that the beneficial ownership of any intellectual property rights subsisting in the above
Manuals are vested in anyone other than the Contractor, the Contactor shall procure that the beneficial
owner shall grant to the Employer a transferable, non-exclusive, royalty-free and irrevocable license
(carrying the right to grant sub-licenses) to utilize the intellectual property rights in the manuals for the
purposes contemplated in the Contract. For the avoidance of doubt such purposes shall, but not limited
to, include providing free copying of the materials in the manuals by any subsequent owner or user of
the installation, and/or any party responsible for the operation and maintenance of the installation in
connection with any subsequent alteration, extension, operation and maintenance of the installation.
170
B GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS (INSTALLATION METHODOLOGY)
1 AIR CLEANING EQUIPMENT
1.1 GENERAL
The complete air filter shall be of heavy-duty airtight factory fabrication designed to ensure a positive
seal against leakage of unfiltered air. Generally, it shall be complete with robust enclosure, holding
frames and housing, all supplied by the same manufacturer, as below:-
1.1.1 The robust enclosure shall be factory assembled in such a manner that a rigid and durable enclosure for
the filters is ensured. The periphery of the filter shall be continuously bonded to the inside of the
enclosing frame to eliminate air bypass and to ensure the optimum filtration efficiency.
1.1.2 The holding frames, which are designed to accommodate standard sized filters of the specified
efficiency, shall be factory assembled and manufactured by the filter manufacturer. It shall be
constructed and equipped with positive gasket seals at the entire length of the holding frames. The
gaskets are provided to stop the air bypass between the filter cell and the frames, between the adjacent
frames, and also between the frames and the housing. To firmly hold the filter cells against sealing
gaskets, fixtures shall be provided adequately. The above elements are to be fully supported against the
direction of airflow and become totally rigid when installed.
1.1.3 The Contractor shall provide all required new filters for all air handling equipment (FCU’s) at the time
of practical completion.
For cleanable filters, the Contractor shall provide at least 1 extra set of each type of installed filters for
spare and be responsible for the cleaning of filters when necessary during the maintenance period. This
set of filters shall be handled over to the Project Architect at the end of the maintenance period.
1.2 WASHABLE PANEL FILTER
The holding frames shall be equipped with fixtures for easy removal of the filter cells without the use
of any special tools. For filter cells installed inside air handling units (FCU’s) separate housing is not
required.
However, the holding frames shall be factory mounted in the air handling unit casing and installed to
provide service from the air side.
2 AIR HANDLING AND TREATMENT
2.1 GENERAL
Fans shall be installed using galvanized steel plate, supports, bolts, nuts and washers with all "as cast"
bearing surfaces for bolt heads and washers counterfaced. Anti-vibration mountings shall be in
accordance with Sections in this specification.
Fan guards shall be provided for all open unprotected intakes to centrifugal fans; for unprotected intakes
to and exhausts from axial flow fans; for open unprotected and easily accessible intakes to and exhausts
from propeller and elsewhere as indicated.
2.2 FAN COIL UNITS
2.2.1 The fan coil unit shall be of integrated wall mounted type which combines the supply air slot, return
air grille, fan, casing, cooling coil etc. into a single unit.
2.2.2 Remote control unit shall be provided as specified.
2.2.3 Flexible joints shall be installed for drainage pipe, conduit and other services connection to the unit to
isolate vibration generated by the unit.
171
2.2.4 Power supply will be provided by electrical contractor and terminated at fused connector unit adjacent to
each fan coil unit, all cabling from the power source (e.g. connector unit) to the control box of the fan
coil unit and fan coil room remote control and accessories at convenient position including the
termination shall be carried out by the Contractor.
2.2.5 The location of the local control box shall be within 600 mm from the terminal box of the fan coil unit.
2.2.6 All units shall be selected for wall mount to suit the space within the Server and UPS Rooms, with due
consideration to access for maintenance and servicing.
2.2.7 All blowers and motors of fan coil units shall be within the unit assembly for maintenance purpose
without causing damage to the associated pipework and insulation.
2.2.8 Insulated drain pan shall be provided for those fan coil units installed in Server and UPS Rooms and
other essential areas sensible to water damage.
Fan coil unit and its associated piping should not be mounted above essential electrical and control
equipment such as switchboard, lift machine, control panel, UPS, etc.
2.3 CASSETTE TYPE FAN COIL UNITS
2.3.1 Generally, the cassette fan coil units shall comply with of this Specification.
2.3.2 The fan coil unit shall be of integrated cassette type which combines the supply air slot, return air grille,
fan, casing, cooling coil etc. into a single unit.
2.3.3 Fan coil units shall be selected at design duty and specified noise level with fan running at medium
speed.
2.3.4 Remote control unit shall be provided as specified.
3. Cooling coil shall be constructed with copper tubes and shall be arranged horizontally.
Fins shall have smooth drawn collars of length equal to fin spacing and mechanically bonded to tubes.
Fins shall be of the plate type, corrugated to ensure maximum air contact. Working pressure of coil
shall be as manufactured to suit system pressure design.
2.3.6 Each fan coil unit shall be provided with a high grade AISI 316 stainless steel drain pan situated beneath
the cooling coil and arranged so that all moisture will collect in and drain from the pan. Drain pans
shall be insulated externally with a minimum of 25 mm approved type foamed plastic. Each drain pan
shall be fitted with a drain pipe which shall be connected via suitable runs (correctly laid to fall) to the
drainage system. Drain pans shall have copper male connectors for connection to the condensate drain.
The connector shall be positioned to ensure rapid discharge of moisture from the pan.
2.3.7 Built-in condensate pump shall be provided for the removal of condensate. A water sensing system
with low, high and warning limits shall be provided which actuates the running of condensate pump at
high water limit and trigger the alarm system at warning level.
When water level reaches the warning limit, the sensing system shall cut off the unit operation. An
alarm signal shall be triggered. The signal shall be connected to a remote indication system as design.
Condensate pump shall be designed to run and sense water level in the drain pan after the unit is
switched off as specified. The power source for condensate pump and the associated control system
shall be independent from that of the fan coil unit such that the pump can still be operated after the
units have been switched off.
172
2.3.8 The filter media shall be of the washable type and shall be enclosed in a one-piece formed frame.
2.3.9 Fan shall be of the quiet running direct driven centrifugal type with aluminium blades mounted to a
solid steel shaft. Fan motors shall be of the "split capacitor" type suitable for single phase electrical
supply.
The motor shall be resiliently mounted to the fan tray or scrolls. The motor/fan tray assembly itself
shall also be resiliently mounted to the casing structure.
2.3.10 Adjustable louvres for directional airflow shall be provided for supply air slot in each fan coil unit.
Options shall be given to choose the 4-way supply air discharge.
3 CONTROL
3.1 CONTROL SYSTEM (CS)
The Control System (CS) is the Control located within the room that controls the proper, effective and
efficient operation of the Air Conditioning System (s) within the room(s).
The CS shall be as simple as an electronic controller with built-in features for scheduling controls.
The appropriate CS shall be so designed to meet the requirements and operation needs of the end users.
The main function of the CS is for on/off controls, monitoring of operation status and alarms generation
of the connected systems in room(s). Comprehensive system controls of each individual system shall
be carried out by the system controller of each individual air conditioning in the room.
The CS shall be so designed to achieve a reliable control in performing the functions set in the design
criteria and shall be of electronic or direct digital control type as specified. Unless otherwise specified,
the CS controller shall be located inside the office were the Fan Coil Unit is installed.
3.1.2 Direct Digital Controller (DDC)
(a) Each controller shall operate as a standalone unit capable of performing its specified control
responsibilities independently of other controllers.
(b) Local keypad and display shall be provided for local viewing and operation.
(c) Power Fail Protection
All system set point, control algorithm and other parameter should be stored such that power
failure of any duration does not necessitate reprogramming the DDC controller.
3.1.3 Control of Fan Coil Unit (FCU)
Micro-processor based electronic controller or DDC as specified shall be used for the control of the
FCU and its associated equipment. The following functions shall be provided as specified:-
(a) Start-Stop Control
(i) (Manual On/Off Control (maintenance/manual mode);
(ii) On/Off Control by the CS as scheduled;
(iv) On/Off Controls by special demand overriding the pre-set schedule for dehumidification and/or cooling
during night for special duty cycles in the Server & UPS Rooms as specified;
(v) Demand On/Off Control. The operation of any FCU served by the unit shall energize the PAU.
Unit will only be cut-out when all associated FCUs are turned off by the CS as scheduled.
(b) Capacity Control
(i) Temperature Display
LCD or 7-bit segment (self-illuminated) digital display of the room temperature thermostat within
readable size from three metres apart at the appropriate locations inside the air-conditioned areas shall
be provided. Temperature display shall be setting up in steps not coarser than 0.5K.
3.1.4 Control of Zone Air Distribution Units
(a) Fan Coil Unit (FCU)
173
Unless otherwise specified, controller for FCU shall be of micro-processor based electronic type or
DDC type as specified. Backup battery shall be provided for all controllers.
Unless otherwise specified, the control functions listed below shall be performed by the controller:-
(i) Start-stop control
- Manual on/off control by the three-speed controller; c/w space temperature sensor
(ii) Temperature Control
- Cooling
Unit on/off control valve shall be turned on and off to maintain the room temperatures pre-set in
the controller.
- Temperature Display
LCD or 7-bit segment (self-illuminated) digital display of the room temperature thermostat within
readable size from three metres apart inside the air conditioned areas shall be provided.
Temperature display shall be setting up in steps not coarser than 0.5K.
4 ELECTRIC MOTORS AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
4.1 LOW VOLTAGE - GENERAL
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide and install all low voltage electrical equipment
necessary for the complete installation under the Contract and shall carry out all necessary wiring from
the points of power supply provided by others as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of all installation and shop drawings and wiring
diagram and for the correct internal wiring of all pre-wired equipment supplied under the Contract.
All electrical equipment, wiring and installation work, and materials shall comply with the provisions
of the relevant parts of the Electrical Specification.
4.2 LOW VOLTAGE - ELECTRIC MOTORS
The low voltage electric motors shall comply with the latest IEE Regulations for low voltage
equipment’s.
4.3 LOW VOLTAGE - MOTOR SWITCHGEAR, STARTER AND CONTROL PANELS
The low voltage motor switchgear, starter and control panels shall comply with the latest IEE
Regulations for low voltage equipment’s.
5 REFRIGERATION MACHINE
5.1 GENERAL
All necessary refrigerants shall be supplied by the Contractor during testing and commissioning and
plant operation stages until the plant is accepted and end of maintenance period is certified complete
by the Project Architect. Each unit shall have an electronic/microcomputer control PC board factory
installed and tested.
The plant shall be so selected and installed with sufficient space allowed for effective heat dissipation
to surrounding air, and for easy maintenance and servicing.
Appropriate corrosion resistant materials shall be used including isolation of dissimilar metals against
galvanic interaction, etc.
Mounting and fixing details including details and dimensions of equipment bases, fixing bolts,
supporting steelwork, flexible connections, vibration isolators and any special builder’s work
requirements, etc. shall be provided by the Contractor to meet the contract programme.
Any damage to finishes of the equipment which may have occurred during transit, storage, installation
or other causes shall be made good in the manner recommended by the manufacturer and to the
satisfaction of the Project Architect.
174
Same type of paint shall be used for making good the damages.
All mounting and fixing supports shall be of galvanized steel and exposed metal surface after cutting
shall be treated against corrosion and painted in with anti-corrosion paint as specified in Sections of the
Specification.
5.2 POSITIONING AND ISOLATION/REMOVAL OF EQUIPMENT
The equipment position shall be so arranged that equipment may be isolated for servicing without
completely draining the refrigerant of the whole plant and shall follow the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard
15-2004 or BS EN 378-2:2000 to BS EN 378-3:2000.
All equipment shall be located within safe area indicated on the Tender Drawings and approved by the
Project Architect.
Remote control shall be installed inside the office which is free from water pipes with glazing window
for equipment provided by the building contractor.
5.3 DELIVERY OF EQUIPMENT
All equipment delivered to site shall be properly protected as detailed in Sections of this Specification
The Contractor shall take into account the site constraints when planning the delivery of the equipment.
The delivery of equipment shall be communicated with the Project Architect and Main Contractor to
coordinate the site security requirement before delivery.
Written approval for delivery of equipment to site is required from the Project Architect prior to the
transportation of the equipment to site Any temporary hoisting or handling facilities and installations
to facilitate the delivery of the equipment shall be provided and removed after use by the Contractor.
5.4 REFRIGERATION PIPEWORK AND FITTINGS
Joints in copper pipe shall be flared (up to 20mm OD only), or brazed with or without capillary fittings.
Brazing shall be carried out to the requirements of the HVCA Code of Practice - Brazing and Bronze
Welding of Copper Pipe.
Screwed joints will not be accepted in refrigerant pipes.
Plastics pipe will not be accepted for any other refrigerant pipework.
Compression fittings will not be accepted on refrigerant pipework.
The pipework shall be so install that oil in the refrigerant leaving the compressor shall be carried
through the system and back to the compressor at the lowest stage of capacity unloading.
Pipework shall be firmly supported and secured to minimize vibration.
Vibration eliminators shall be fitted to the compressor suction and discharge pipes to minimize
transmission of vibration or noise. Where indicated, a gas pulsation damper shall be fitted at the
refrigerant discharge pipe, as close as possible to the refrigeration compressor.
After completion, the refrigerant pipe work shall be pressure tested as detailed in T&C Procedure.
All parts and components containing refrigerant shall be clean and dry before they are connected to the
system. No mill scale shall be permitted in pipes and all pipes shall be capped on site until welded in.
Prior to charging refrigerant to the refrigeration system, field pressure tests shall be carried out in
accordance with Part H. Any leak found shall be repaired before the system can be considered tight.
175
Hangers, clips and other hanging or clamping studs shall be galvanized and they shall not be welded to
pipes containing refrigerant. Pipework and other parts shall be erected and clamped so that vibration
and noise are kept to minimum.
The Contractor shall pay particular attention and precaution when handling the refrigerant pipework’s
installation. For charging of refrigerant to the system, the recommendations from the supplier and the
procedures stipulated in the Testing and Commissioning Procedure for Air-conditioning and Control
Systems Installation shall be followed. The work shall also be carried out by trained and qualified
persons approved by the Project Architect.
5.5 AIR-COOLED CONDENSER
Air cooled condensers mounted outside buildings shall have weather proof fan motors. The units shall
discharge air vertically upwards.
The unit shall be installed on vibration isolation devices as specified in Sections B8 and C8. The
Contractor shall, according to the manufacturer’s recommendation, advise the requirements on strength
of the roof curb structure for supporting the unit. Selection of the vibration isolators shall be submitted
to the Architect for approval prior to execution of work.
The unit shall be installed so that air can circulate through the condenser coils without any hindrance,
and the air discharged from the condenser fans is not recycled. If the unit has to be placed near a wall
or an obstacle that may prevent satisfactory air circulation, sufficient distance as recommended by the
manufacturer shall be maintained between the unit and the obstacle.
5.6 VIBRATION ISOLATION
All equipment offered shall have minimum vibration and noise levels during operation, with particular
attention to the requirement that the sound pressure level measured at one meter from the equipment
with all fully operated shall not be more than 5 dB higher than the ambient sound level at any time, and
shall comply with any other requirements of Environmental Protection Department or other statutory
noise control requirements issued prior to tendering, whichever is more stringent.
The Contractor shall be responsible for provision of adequate vibration isolation and/or sound
attenuation measures for the refrigeration plant to meet the requirements as detailed in Sections of this
Specification and to the satisfaction and acceptance of the Project Architect.
5.6 ELECTRICAL WORK
The Contractor shall supply and install suitable power cables, cable trays, G.I. supports, starters/motor
drives, isolators, control, safety earth bonding and all necessary accessories to connect power from the
isolator to each electricity driven equipment. The Contractor shall allow for adequate cable size and
protection devices to meet the current demand and voltage drop requirements of the equipment offered.
6 PIPEWORK
6.1 JOINTS AND FITTINGS FOR COPPER TUBES
Fittings for copper pipework shall be as follows:-
B9.9.1 Size up to and including 65 mm shall be of the capillary or compression type to ISO 2016:1981.
6.1.1 Pipework shall be arranged with adequate connection points to allow easy dismantling. Connection
points in copper pipework size up to and including 65 mm size shall be unions and for pipework of size
76 mm and above shall be flanged.
176
6.2 PIPEWORK GENERAL DETAILS
6.2.1 Pipework shall follow the contours of walls and shall be suitably graded not less than 1 in 500 to
ensure proper draining.
Generally, the clearance between pipework (or the lagging) and the wall and any other fixtures shall be
not less than 25 mm. Pipework shall not run near to or above electrical appliances, cables, trunking
and conduits.
6.2.2 Where two or more pipe runs follow the same route, all pipes shall run parallel with one another and
to the building structure without prejudice to the necessary allowances for drainage or other reasonable
restrictions. Any pipework which requires subsequent insulation shall be adequately spaced to allow
for individual finish.
6.2.3 Tubes shall be reamed after cutting and shall be free from burrs, rust, scale and other defects and shall
be thoroughly cleaned before erection. Pipe ends left open during the progress of work shall be
temporarily closed with purpose-made plastic plugs or caps and protect from corrosion.
6.2.4 Joints shall not be made in the thickness of any wall, floor or ceiling and pipework shall not be
embedded in the structure of floors unless otherwise instructed by the Project Architect. Where
pipework passes through walls, floors or ceilings, sleeves shall be provided. Pipework passing through
floors shall, where specified, be provided with approved type floor and ceiling plates and fastened
securely to the sleeve. Sleeves shall be of the same material as the pipe. The space between pipework
and sleeve shall be sealed with an approved fire resisting material having FRP of not less than that of
the wall and floor and in compliance with relevant regulations and code of practices.
6.2.5 All entry and exit holes to or from a building for a pipework services shall be sealed and plugged. The
sealant shall be a mastic compound or silicone rubber. Where the pipework enters the building through
a large hole or duct, a mild steel blanking plate not less than 6mm thick shall be built into the wall of
the hole or duct. The service pipes shall pass through clearance sockets welded to the plate. The space
between pipe exterior and socket interior shall be sealed and plugged with waterproof material or
sealant having an FRP of not less than that of the wall and in compliance with the relevant regulations
and code of practices, all to the approval of the Project Architect.
6.2.6 All fittings shall, as far as practicable, be the same size as the tubes and pipes connected to them. Bushed
outlets will only be accepted if the required outlet size of a fitting is not of standard manufacture.
6.2.7 Elbows shall be used, where practicable, in preference to bends.
However, square elbows will not be permitted. Unless otherwise specified, long radius elbows shall be
used in order to minimize hydraulic resistance.
6.3 PIPEWORK LAYOUT
The Tender/Contract Drawings indicate the size and general layout of the required pipework. The exact
position may not be indicated on the drawings as for the purpose of clarity, they are generally shown
as separately spaced out from one another as if they were at the same plan level. The Contractor shall
accurately set out the various pipelines in the installation in compliance with the provisions of Clause
A3.15 and A4.3 of this specification.
6.4 PIPEWORK SUPPORTS, EXPANSION JOINTS AND ANCHOR POINTS
6.4.1 Where the Employer’s Guide Drawings & Details for pipework supports and brackets, are issued
with the specific Contract Documents or have previously been issued to Approved Contractors for
general application on the Employer’s projects, these standard details shall be followed "In-
Principle" but adjusted as to the detail in order to suit the particular circumstances.
Such adjustments shall be indicated on the Contractor’s own Installation/Shop Drawing and loading
calculation Submissions and be approved by the Project Architect before work commences.
177
6.4.2 Pipework shall be supported so as to permit movement due to expansion and contraction. Pipework
supports shall be installed as near as practicably possible to joints and changes in direction. Each
support shall take its due proportion of the load. The spacing of the supports shall not exceed the
canters given in Tables B6.8-(1) and B6.8-(2). Where there are two or more pipes, the spacing shall
be based on the canters required by the smallest bore pipework.
6.4.3 Vertical rising pipework shall be managed on cable trays within the riser.
6.4.4 Where pipework up to 50 mm size is fixed to solid wall, brackets may be of the screw-on or long
shank built-in type in case the walls are plastered; only the long shank built-in type shall be used.
For fixing to woodwork and lightweight partitions or walls, brackets shall be of the screw-on pattern
of adjustable two-piece type. Brackets for mild steel and plastic pipework shall be mild steel or
malleable iron; brackets for copper pipework shall be brass or gunmetal. The upper half of the pipe
clip shall be detachable without disturbing the fixing.
6.4.5 Brackets screwed to walls shall be secured by expanding plugs. Other purpose designed fixing
devices or softwood plugs will not be permitted.
6.4.6 Unless otherwise specified, hangers for horizontal pipework at high level shall be supported from
galvanized mild steel angle or channel sections or approved proprietary devices supplied by the
Contractor, suitable for building-in or otherwise securing to the structure by the building contractor.
Adjustable mild steel hangers shall be used. Pipe rings shall be of malleable cast iron or fabricated
steel, made in halves and secured by bolts or screws. Alternatively, malleable iron hinged pipe rings
may be used. Calliper type hooks will not be permitted.
6.4.7 Where pipework is fitted in service duct or trenches and supported from walls, the design of the pipe
supports, guides and anchors shall be in accordance with the Contract Drawings. Otherwise, the
Contractor shall submit details and proposal to the Project Architect for approval. Where roller
supports are required, they shall be of an approved type. The performed insulation shall be kept free
of the rolling surface. Load-bearing insulation at supports, where required, shall be fitted by the
Contractor at the time of erecting the pipework.
6.4.8 For copper pipework, the anchors shall be provided by wide copper straps secured to the pipework
in such a manner that the pipe is not damaged.
6.4.9 The Contractor shall supply, and fix in position ready for building-in, all cleats, brackets and
steelwork required for anchor points. Anchor steelwork secured to the bottoms of ducts or trenches
shall be coated with hot-poured bitumen to inhibit future corrosion.
6.4.10 Supports for plastics pipework may be of any approved pattern that prevents free axial movement of
pipe at all temperatures and have radial edges to prevent cutting into the pipe. The entire bearing
surface must be sufficiently wide to prevent indentation.
Valves, meters and other heavy "in-line" equipment must be supported independently.
Supports for pipes carrying water at a maximum temperature of 150C and covered with lightweight
insulation shall be spaced in accordance with Table B6.8-(2) under Clause B6.8. Alternatively, the
pipework may be continuously supported, provided that the thermal insulation covering the
pipework is sufficiently rigid to ensure that no compression or deformation of the insulation occurs.
178
6.4.11 Provision for movement due to expansion and contraction shall be generally as indicated and/or shall
be by changes in direction of the pipework, by loops or by other approved expansion devices.
6.4.12 Supports and guides shall be arranged to ensure that all movement is taken up by the change in
direction of the pipework or by the loop or device.
6.4.13 The spacing of supports for copper and plastic pipework shall be in accordance with
Tables 6.8-(1) and 6.8-(2)
6.4.14 Cold Bridge should be prevented between the insulated pipework and the associated hangers and
pipework supports.
6.5 PLASTIC PIPEWORK
Fittings for plastics pipework shall be as follows:-
6.6.1 Fittings shall be of the same material as the pipework to which they are joined. They shall be made or
approved for the solvent welding process.
As a general rule PVC pipe should only be made threaded and screwed into metal "Female" threaded
fittings.
6.6.2 Joints between pipe and pipe fittings shall be made by the solvent welding process. No cleaning fluid
or solvent cement other than that supplied or recommended by the pipe manufacturer shall be used.
6.6.3 Where it is required to form a spring in the pipe run, the pipe shall be softened by immersion in (or by
pouring on) heated brine, glycerine oil or water as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. The use of
a naked flame on the pipe surface will not be accepted.
6.6.4 Where uPVC is used for condenser cooling circuits and for the inlet and outlet to pumps, it must be
effectively isolated from the vibration of the machine. This shall be achieved by the insertion of flanged
synthetic rubber vibration de-couplers installed between uPVC pipework and plant on all connections.
6.7 'T' AND 'Y' FITTINGS Except at vent and drain points, all tees and 'Y' fittings shall be of the swept type.
The sweep radius being at least equal to that of the medium bend but where specified as a long sweep
it shall then be equal in radius to the long bend.
6.8 SUPPORTS FOR PIPEWORK
Table 6.8 – (1) Supports for Copper Pipework
Size of tube Intervals for horizontal runs Intervals for Vertical Runs
Bare Lagged Bare and Lagged
mm m m m
15 1.2 1.2 1.8
12 1,2 1.2 1.8
18 1.8 1.5 2.4
35 2.4 1.8 3.0
42 2.4 1.8 3.0
Table 6.8 – (2) Supports for Plastics Pipework
Nominal Bore of Pipe Intervals for horizontal runs Intervals for Vertical Runs
mm m m
15 0.75 1.5
22-28 1 1.8
28-35 1 2
42 1.2 2.5
179
6.9 BRAZING
The procedure and the competence of the operative shall be in accordance with the recommendations
contained in the following HVCA publications:-
6.9.1 "Code of Practice - Brazing and Bronze Welding of Copper Pipework"
Welding operations which are beyond the scope of (a) and (b) shall comply in particular with:-
6.9.2 ISO 5187:1985 and ISO 10564:1993 - Brazing (copper pipe)
Where the visual inspection and tests reveal those brazing joints which are reasonably believed to be
unacceptable, the Project Architect/M&E Engineer shall be entitled to have such brazing examined by
approved inspection method and independently assessed. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
cost of the tests and subsequently remedy the work to the satisfaction of the Project Architect/M&E
Engineer if tests prove the brazing joints to be non-compliance with the specification.
7 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
7.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall install sufficient noise and vibration control measures on the plant/equipment, the
interconnected piping, so that when the installed plant/equipment are put into operation, the resulting
noise and vibration levels at locations within the building and at adjacent or nearby buildings shall not
exceed the acceptable limits.
Unless otherwise specified in the Specification, the total noise level in occupied areas within the
building, whether it be airborne, structure-borne or ductwork-borne, shall not exceed the following
limits when all the plant/equipment installed by the Contractor are put into operation:-
Table 8.1 Noise Control Criteria
Private offices, libraries, meeting and conference rooms NC 35
General offices NC 40
The specified noise criteria shall apply to all areas as measured at a level of 1.5m above the floor and
the measuring points shall be 1.5m away from the walls or doors of the rooms.
The Corrected Noise Level at potential Noise Sensitive Receiver in the adjacent or nearby building, if
so identified in the Contract Documents, shall not exceed the Acceptable Noise Level stipulated in the
Technical Memorandum for the Assessment of Noise from Places other than Domestic Premises or
Public Places issued by Environmental Protection Department when the plant/equipment installed by
the Contractor are put into operation.
7.2 EQUIPMENT BASES
7.2.1 General
Floor mounted equipment shall be installed on 100 mm high concrete housekeeping pads provided by
the building contractor covering the whole floor area requirements of the equipment bases plus a
minimum of 150 mm further on each side or on inverted beams at roof.
Vibration isolators are then mounted on this concrete pad or inverted beams.
Unless otherwise specified in the Particular Specification, plant/equipment to be isolated shall either
be supported by structural steel bases or concrete inertia bases.
7.2.2 Wall Mounted Welded Structural Steel Brackets
Detailed design calculation of the base and its anti-vibration isolator arrangements plus shop drawings
for each base shall be provided for approval by the Architect before manufacture.
180
7.2.3 Concrete Inertia Bases
Detailed design calculation of the base and its anti-vibration arrangements plus shop drawings for each
base shall be provided for approval of the Project Architect before construction/manufacture.
7.3 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
The following types of vibration isolation mountings or suspensions are not exhaustive but serve to
cover the main types that shall be applied as appropriate unless otherwise stated in the Particular
Specification.
7.3.1 Double Deflection Neoprene Mounts
These mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of 8.5mm.
Bolt holes shall be provided for applications where bolting down is required. They shall be carefully
positioned such that all supporting mounts would be properly loaded and the weight load on each mount
would be evenly distributed over the entire surface.
7.3.4 'D' - Neoprene Pads
Where necessary, pads may be bolted through with bolts isolated from the machine by neoprene
grommets. Alternatively "waffled" neoprene pads can be used without holding down bolts where the
vibration is minimal and the weight of machine is such that the resultant friction is adequate and the
machine is unlikely ever to move.
They shall be carefully positioned such that all supporting pads will be properly loaded and the weight
load on each pad will be evenly distributed over the entire surface.
7.4 PLANT/EQUIPMENT VIBRATION ISOLATION
7.4.1 General
All rotating or reciprocating equipment shall be mounted on vibration isolation mountings or suspended
from vibration isolation hangers.
The Contractor shall ensure that there is no rigid connection in whatever form between the isolated
equipment and the building structure which will otherwise short-circuit the vibration isolation system
and degrade its performance. This includes the necessary coordination with other trades by the
Contractor.
All isolators shall operate in the linear portion of their load versus deflection curve. The load versus
deflection curves shall be furnished by the manufacturer, and must be linear over a deflection range of
not less than 50% above the design deflection.
All vibration isolators shall have their known undefeated heights or calibration markings so that, after
adjustment when carrying their loads, the deflection under load can be verified, thus determining that
the load is within the proper range of the device and that correct degree of vibration isolation is achieved
according to the design.
The installation of all vibration isolators, hangers and associated equipment bases shall be carried out
strictly in accordance with the approved manufacturer’s written instructions.
7.4.2 Method of Installation
The equipment structural steel or concrete inertia base shall be placed in position and supported
temporarily by blocks or shims. The machinery shall then be installed on the base and when that is
complete, the isolators are to be installed without raising the machine and frame assembly.
After the entire installation is complete and under full operational load, the isolators shall be adjusted
such that the load, are transferred from the blocks to the isolators. When all isolators are properly
adjusted, the blocks or shims will become slightly free and can then be removed.
181
Prior to start-up, remove all foreign matter underneath the equipment base and verify that the vibration
isolation system is not short circuited.
Electrical circuit connections to isolated equipment shall be looped to allow free motion of isolated
equipment.
7.5 PIPEWORK VIBRATION ISOLATION
7.5.1 General
Unless otherwise indicated, all piping having connection to vibrating equipment shall be isolated by
means of noise and vibration isolation materials.
All piping to be isolated shall neatly managed on cable trays installed within the false ceiling and freely
pass through walls without rigid connections. Penetration points shall be sleeved or otherwise formed
to allow passage of piping, with adequate clearance around the outside of the piping shall be
maintained. The clearance space shall be tightly packed with glass fiber or rock wool and caulked
airtight after installation of piping.
7.5.2 Horizontal Pipe Isolation
Where horizontal pipe isolation is required, the pipes shall be secured with cable ties on the cable tray.
7.5.3 Pipe Riser Isolation
Where pipe riser isolation is required, the pipe risers to be isolated shall be secured on cable trays
installed in the riser and anchored with pipe anchors or pipe guides.
7.6 INSPECTION
On completion of the installation of all noise and vibration control devices, the Contractor’s engineer
shall inspect the completed system and report in writing to the Main Contractor concerning any
installation errors, improperly selected isolation devices, and/or other faults that could adversely affect
the overall performance of the system.
The Main Contractor shall then submit a report to the Project Architect in which the report shall include
all findings of the Contractor’s engineer and confirmation of the satisfaction completion of all isolation
work together with any remedial actions proposal.
Where remedial action has to be taken by the Contractor, further inspections shall be carried out until
all faults are rectified.
8 UNITARY AIR-CONDITIONER
8.1 GENERAL
8.1.1 Unitary air-conditioners shall include
(a) Condensing unit and blower coils;
(b) Condensing unit with variable refrigerant volume control and indoor fan coil units;
8.1.2 Unitary air-conditioners shall be factory fabricated and assembled.
The equipment shall be rated and tested in the same country of manufacture and meet with the
requirements of the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) Standards 5151:1994 (non-
ducted air-conditioners and heat pumps) or 13253:1995 (ducted air conditioners and air-to-air heat
pumps) or 13256-1 & -2:1998 (water to- air and water-to-water heat pumps) or other internationally
recognized quality assurance standards approved by the Architect.
8.1.3 The most energy efficient model in the series shall be selected for submission and shall be referred to
Clause C12.19 of this General Specification.
8.2 INSTALLATION AND SERVICING
Installation and servicing of unitary air-conditioners shall comply with the practice set out in the ISO
13261-1:1998 & ISO 13261-2:1998 and the manufacturer’s recommendation.
182
8.3 ANTI-VIBRATION MOUNTING
Vibration mounting shall be installed in accordance with relevant clauses of Section B8.
8.4 CASING
Removable panel for casings shall be provided to give access to all working components, parts, and
connections for installation and service. The casing shall be rigid G.I. Sheets and painted.
The compartment housing for the direct-expansion coil and blower shall be adequately insulated to
prevent sweating and shall contain a suitable drip pan with a drain connection. The compartment
housing for the compressor shall be treated for effective sound insulation to ensure that the noise
emitted is within the limits as specified in the Specification.
8.5 COMPRESSOR
Each compressor shall form a separate refrigerant circuit with its own condenser, evaporator and
controls.
8.6 SUPPLY AIR FAN AND MOTOR
All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Fans shall be equipped with self-aligning bearings
suitable for the installed altitude of the fan.
8.7 COOLING COILS
Adequate water collecting tray for run off and removal of the condensation shall be provided.
8.8 AIR FILTER
Air filters shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation
8.9 AIR-COOLED CONDENSERS
Condenser fan shall be of propeller type arranged for either horizontal discharge.
8.10 REFRIGERANT PIPING
Refrigerant piping and insulation shall be installed in accordance with relevant Sections in this
Specification.
8.11 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPE
Condensate drain pipe shall lead to the nearest convenient drain in the building or as indicated on the
Contract Drawings or as directed by the Architect on site.
8.12 MINIMUM INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS OF SAFETY AND OPERATIONAL
CONTROL FOR UNITARY AIR-CONDITIONERS
Table: 12.12 Standard Provisions
Item Associated Components/Facilities Unit Cooling Capacity
Up to 7 kW 7 kW-14
kW
1 Self-contained safety and operational components of factory standard Yes Yes
2 Pressure gauges c/w stop valves, sight glass - Yes
3 Renewable filter-drier c/w accessories - Yes
4 Externally mounted adjustable Hi-Lo pressure cut-out with hand reset for High
side
- Yes
5 Anti-recycling device Yes Yes
6 Emergency Stop Switch Yes Yes
7 Crankcase Heater - Yes
8 Pump down function and facilities - -
9 Refrigerant R410a R410a
10 Mechanical and weather protection to thermal insulation which exposed to
view
183
8.13 SPLIT CONDENSING UNIT AND FAN COIL UNIT (FCU)
The Split Condensing Unit shall be air-cooled and installed outside the building. The interconnecting
refrigerant piping between condensing unit and fan coil unit (FCU) shall be field connected.
8.14 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME SYSTEM (VRV)
The refrigerant piping shall be capable of extending up to 100 metres equivalent length with 50 metres
level difference without any oil trap. The entire system completed with all necessary piping and
accessories shall be supplied and designed by a single proprietary manufacturer who has proven record
for its product.
8.15 MAINTENANCE SERVICING PLATFORM
Where unitary air-conditioners are installed at levels that are normally inaccessible from ground these
shall be provided with an adequately sized service platform complete with railings and steel cat ladder
with safety wings.
Such platforms shall be of reasonable substantial rigid galvanized metal construction and shall be well
protected against corrosion. The design must be approved by the Project Architect before installation.
Under Labour Department Ordinance, it is required to provide working platform for activity over 3
metres. This maintenance servicing platform requirement shall apply to all equipment and installation.
184
C GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS (MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
SPECIFICATION)
1 AIR CLEANING EQUIPMENT
1.1 GENERAL
Filters shall be of proprietary product and have the specified performance and fire property in
accordance with the test methods of one or more of the standards stated hereinafter.
To improve indoor air quality and protect air conditioning equipment, outdoor air and re-circulated
indoor air shall be filtered to remove dust, bacteria, pollens, insects, soot and dirt particles before it
enters the air conditioning system. The following air cleaning devices, dependent on their compatibility
with the general air conditioning system, shall be incorporated into the system as in-duct devices or
stand-alone devices.
1.1.1 Particulate Filter
Particulate filters are the most commonly used air cleaning devices in buildings. The filter shall be
selected depending on the physical characteristics and levels of the dust to be removed, the capacity of
the system to overcome the associated pressure drop across the filter and the degree of indoor air
cleanliness required:-
The filters shall be cleaned or replaced on a regular basis according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations or when the specified maximum pressure drop is reached.
1.2 STANDARDS 1.2.1 Performance of Air Filter
The performance of air filters shall comply with one or more of the following standards:-
(a) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 52.1-1992 – Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air-
Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter;
(b) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 52.2-1999 – Method of Testing General Ventilation Air Cleaning Device
for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size;
(c) European Standard BS EN-779:2002 - Particulate Air Filters for General Ventilation;
(d) European Standard BS EN 1822-1:1998 to BS EN 1822-3:1998 and BS EN 1822-4:2000 to BS EN
1822-5:2000 –High Efficiency Air Filters (HEPA and ULPA); or
(e) Any other standards equivalent to the standards above and approved by the Architect to suit
particular project requirements.
1.2.2 Fire Property of Air Filter
The fire property of air filters and its associated accessories shall comply with one of the following
standards as well as the requirements of Fire Services Department:-
(a) British Standard Institution BS 476-4:1970 - Non-Combustibility Test for Materials;
(b) British Standard Institution BS 476-6:1989 - Method of Test for Fire Propagation for Products,
with Indices "I" ≤ 12 and "i1" ≤ 6;
(c) European Standard DIN 53438-3:1984 - Response to Ignition by A Small Flame, Surface
Ignition, Class F1.
1.3 WASHABLE PANEL FILTER
This type of filter shall be constructed to withstand washing by water or steam. The filter panel shall
be constructed from multiple layers of expanded aluminium mesh or glass, natural or synthetic fibre,
with the layers being corrugated or plain and arranged alternately at right angle at one another.
1.4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS (SPARE FILTER MEDIA)
The Contractor shall replace all filters used during testing and commissioning stage and in addition
provide the following to the Architect for use by Client’s operation staff during maintenance period:-
185
(a) For washable type filters, 20% in number of each size of filter cells provided. These shall be new
and in good condition. Besides, 10 litres of the approved cleaning detergent per filter installation
shall be provided. Regarding filters of viscous type, a drum or drums of fluid
Within one month before end of the maintenance period, all the filter cells/media shall be replaced
with new ones. In addition, 10 litres of the approved cleaning detergent per washable filter
installation shall be provided..
2 AIR HANDLING AND TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
2.1.1 GENERAL
Fan coil units shall comply with the manufacturer’s own ISO 9001:2000 quality standard in respect of
design and manufacturing and be type-tested to BS 4856-2:1975 for thermal volumetric and acoustic
performance. The Contractor shall submit the make and type of each fan together with the "type" test
certificate for the Architect’s approval. The origin of the fan shall be from the country where the "type"
test was conducted.
Fans, filters, cooling coils, motors, thermal and acoustic insulation shall comply with the appropriate
sections of this Specification and the following requirements:-
(a) Fans shall be of tangential flow types and shall be of mild steel, aluminium, reinforced glass fibers
or rigid plastic material as specified in Particular Specification;
(b) Air filters shall be as indicated in the relevant content of Section but with an efficiency of not less
than 50% when tested in accordance with BS EN 779:2002;
(c) Motors shall be quiet running and have sleeve or ball bearings factory lubricated for life. Motor
windings and electrical components shall be impregnated or protected to avoid trouble from
condensation. The fan motor shall be of the single phase permanent split capacitor type provided
with three speed tapped windings;
(d) All fan coil units capacity and air flow rate shall be selected based on the performance of the units
at medium fan speed; and
(e) In selecting the fan coil units, allowance shall be made for the actual resistance imposed on the air
flow of the units. The added resistance is to be applied to all fan coil units and shall be taken as not
less than 50 Pa external to the unit.
2.1.2 Casings
Casings shall be of factory treaded plastic with thickness not less than 1.0 mm suitably stiffened to
minimize drumming and vibration and shall be protected against corrosion and finished inside and
outside with stove primer. All corners shall be rounded off without sharp edges. Casings shall include
space for pipework connections, and there shall be ready access to the fan and motor, filter, drain pan
and pipework connections, for maintenance purposes.
The motor and fan shall be mounted on a detachable mounting chassis that can be removed from the
fan coil enclosure as one assembly (with extended cables) to facilitate fan and motor cleaning. It shall
then also be possible to remove the fan impeller scroll casing in order to properly clean the fan blades.
Fan and motor assemblies shall be completed with neoprene rubber anti-vibration mountings.
2.1.3 Coils
(a) Cooling coils shall be minimum two-row and shall include an air vent cock and drain valve.
(b) The chilled water cooling coil shall be rated in accordance with ARI 410:2001 and constructed from
seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminium fins.
186
(c) Each coil shall be provided with motorized 2-way solenoid control valve and isolation valves. Flexible
pipe connectors completed with union joints to facilitate removal of the (d) Working pressure of coils
shall suit specific requirements.
2.1.4 Components
(a) All units shall include an easily removable filter capable of treating the total air volume. Filters shall,
unless otherwise specified, be washable. It shall be supported in a stiff aluminium/stainless steel
detachable frame.
(b) Drain pans shall be made of plastics or reinforced glass fibre materials insulated with a minimum of 13
mm thick flexible closed cell elastomeric insulation. Drain pans shall be large and deep enough to
collect all condensate from the coil, return bends and pipework connections. The pan shall be removable
and have a slight fall to the drain connection to deal with the condensed moisture.
2.1.5 Controls
Fan coil units shall have a combined room temperature sensor completed with 3-speed controller and
cooling mode selector as specified.
2.1.6 Noise level
The noise data provided shall include an octave band analysis of the sound power level of each unit
when operating at its full or the stated design speed.
2.1.7 Remote control unit shall be provided as specified
2.2. CASSETTE TYPE FAN COIL UNITS
2.1.1 Generally, the cassette fan coil units shall comply with the requirements Clause of this Specification.
2.1.2 The fan coil unit shall be of integrated cassette type which combines the supply air slot, fan, casing and
cooling coil into a single unit.
2.1.3 Fan coil units shall be selected at design duty and specified noise level with fan running at medium
speed.
2.1.4 Remote control unit shall be provided as specified.
2.1.5 Cooling coil shall be constructed with copper tubes and shall be arranged horizontally. Tubes shall have
brazed copper return bends. Fins shall have smooth drawn collars of length equal to fin spacing and
mechanically bonded to tubes. Fins shall be of the plate type, corrugated to ensure maximum air contact.
Working pressure of coil shall be of a minimum of 1200 kPa and to suit system pressure design.
Connection of water piping shall be with flexible pipe connectors completed with union joints to
facilitate removal of the entire unit shall be provided. The connector shall be stainless steel braided
polymer tubing limited to 300 mm long and suitable for the system pressure.
2.1.6 Each fan coil unit shall be provided with a high grade AISI 316 stainless steel drain pan situated beneath
the cooling coil and arranged so that all moisture will collect in and drain from the pan. Drain pans
shall be insulated externally with a minimum of 25mm approved type foamed plastic. Each drain pan
shall be fitted with a drain pipe which shall be connected via suitable runs (correctly laid to fall) to the
drainage system. Drain pans shall have copper male connectors for connection to the condensate drain.
The connector shall be positioned to ensure rapid discharge of moisture from the pan.
2.1.7 Built-in condensate pump shall be provided for the removal of condensate. A water sensing system
with low, high and warning limits shall be provided which actuates the running of condensate pump at
high water limit and trigger the alarm system at warning level.
187
When water level reaches the warning limit, the sensing system shall cut off the unit operation.
Condensate pump shall be designed to run continuously. The power source for condensate pump and
the associated control system shall be independent from that of the fan coil unit such that the pump can
still be operated after the units have been switched off.
2.1.8 The air filter media shall be of the washable type.
2.1.9 Fan shall be of the quiet running direct driven centrifugal type with aluminium blades mounted to a
solid steel shaft. Fan motors shall be of the "split capacitor" type suitable for single phase electrical
supply.
The motor shall be resiliently mounted to the fan tray or scrolls. The motor/fan tray assembly itself
shall also be resiliently mounted to the casing structure.
2.1.10 Adjustable louvres for directional airflow shall be provided for supply air slot in each fan coil unit.
Options shall be given to choose from 4-way supply air discharge.
2.3 ENERGY EFFICIENCY AND PERFORMANCE
(a) The efficiency of fan and motor used for all air treatment equipment shall be in accordance with
Section detailed in this Specification and Fan System under the Code of Practice for Energy
Efficiency of Air Conditioning Installation issued by the Electrical & Mechanical Services
Department in the General Air Conditioning, Refrigeration and Ventilation specification manual as
certified
(b) The type of insulation used shall have optimized thermal conductivity, and the design of the
insulation thickness for pipe, drain pan, etc. of the air handling equipment shall be in accordance
with Section as detailed in this General Specification.
(c) The Contractor shall submit relevant factory test certificates and field test records for calculation
and assessment by the Project Architect/M&E Engineer
3 REFRIGERATION MACHINE
3.1 GENERAL
The refrigeration plant for air conditioning purposes shall generally be of the mechanical, vapour
compression type using environmental friendly refrigerants.
The refrigeration machine shall be factory assembled and tested complete "packaged" units which may
have rotary type compressors and as specified in the Particular Specification. The testing of the cooling
capacity of the refrigeration machine shall be carried out in accordance with BS EN 14511-1:2004 to
BS EN 14511-4:2004 or other international recognized standards.
The plant shall include any accessories necessary to ensure continuous and reliable operation.
Each unit shall be capable of running continuously at the lowest step of cooling capacity provided
without any adverse effect.
Compressor and motor speeds shall not exceed 50 revolutions per second for rotary type. Energy
efficient motor to optimize the system coefficient of performance shall be required. The noise level of
the refrigeration machine shall comply with the requirements as specified in the Particular Specification
or the relevant environmental protection ordinances whichever is more stringent.
Each compressor shall form a separate independent oil circuit with its own oil separator, oil filter and
positive lubrication oil safety control circuit equipped to ensure proper functioning of each compressor
and accessories.
188
All units shall comply, where applicable, with the following codes: ISO 5149:1993, ANSI ASHRAE
Standard 15 -2004; ARI Standard 550/590:2003 Testing and Ratings; BS EN 14511-1:2004 to BS EN
14511-4:2004 Testing and Ratings and Code of Practice for Electricity (Wiring) Regulations.
Characteristic curves shall show the energy consumption in kilowatts, pressure drop through the
evaporator, condenser fan speeds, etc., for each unit at 15%, 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% of full capacity.
Sound pressure level characteristic curves shall be in dB measured in accordance with ARI standard
575:1994 for 15%, 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% of full capacity.
3.2 COMPRESSORS, ROTARY TYPE
3.2.1 Rotary compressors will be acceptable where either:-
(a) The entire refrigeration system is completed and charged with refrigerant at the manufacturer’s
works; or
(b) The condensing unit incorporating the rotary compressor has a hold charge of refrigerant or
inert gas on arrival at site.
3.3 CONDENSERS, AIR-COOLED
4.3.1 Air cooled condensers shall have copper tubes with:-
- Aluminium fin coated with corrosion protection coating;
- Electro-tinned copper fins; or
- As otherwise indicated in the Particular Specification.
Corrosion protection coating of the condenser fins shall be applied in factory by the chiller
manufacturer. Fins with minor damage shall be combed straight. Units with extensive damage to fins
will not be accepted. Provision shall be made for the purging of non-condensable from the condenser.
3.3.2 Air cooled condensers mounted outside buildings shall have weatherproof fan motors. The units shall
discharge air vertically upwards.
3.3.3 Automatic control of the condensing pressure shall be incorporated.
Where modulation of air flow is by outlet dampers only, the fan motor shall be selected for this
application and arranged so that it is de-energized on complete closure of the dampers.
3.3.4 Fans shall comply with limitations on permitted noise levels where indicated in the Particular
Specification. Fans shall have sufficient static pressure to cater for the additional acoustic treatment
such as silencer, if any, in order to meet the noise requirements set out in Section C8 and the Particular
Specification.
3.3.5 The complete condenser coil shall be pressure tested at the manufacturer’s work.
3.4 REFRIGERANT PIPEWORK
3.4.1 Pipework for refrigerant systems shall be of copper or steel, which shall be internally degreased and
cleaned. Copper pipe shall be of refrigeration quality (i.e. material to BS EN 1057:2006).
3.4.2 For all chlorofluoro-methane or ethane compounds:-
(a) All pipes up to 18 mm OD shall be of fully annealed copper.
(b) All pipes from 22 mm to 108 mm OD shall be of hard drawn copper.
(c) All pipes over 108 mm OD shall be of black extra heavy seamless steel pipe to BS EN 10216-
1:2002 grade 1.0255.
(d) On fully packaged refrigeration machine, pipework other than copper, i.e. steel fitted and tested
in the factory as standard production for the units, will be acceptable subject to notification and
written approval by the Architect.
3.4.3 Size of Refrigerant Piping:-
189
Refrigerant piping shall be sized to avoid excessive pressure drop of the fluids or gases they carry. The
recommendations of the Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (UK) and/or the
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-conditioning Engineers/or other reputable/factory
standards approved by the Architect on the sizing of refrigerant piping shall be complied with.
4.0 ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC (LOCALISED) CONTROL SYSTEM
The systems shall be operated at single phase mains voltage or at extra low voltage such as 12 V or
24 V as indicated in the Particular Specification.
Where a particular manufacturer’s system is offered and accepted, the installation shall be installed to
comply with that manufacturer’s recommended technical details and methods of installation.
4.4.1 Standalone Direct Digital Controller (DDC) unless otherwise specified, the direct digital controller
shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system.
(a) Each controller shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system including:-
- Control Processes;
- Energy Management Applications;
- Alarm Management;
- Maintenance Support Applications;
- Operator I/O; and
- Manual Override Monitoring.
(b) Battery Backup
Battery shall be able to support programme
When the battery replacement is necessary, the open processor shall illuminate a "battery low"
status LED and replaced.
5 ELECTRIC MOTORS AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
5.1 LOW VOLTAGE - GENERAL
The mains for the low voltage electrical motors and equipment shall be suitable for a supply as specified
in Sections of the Specification.
Unless otherwise indicated, all electrical equipment shall be tropicalized and suitable for use in service
conditions as specified in Sections of the Specification. Equipment shall be protected against
atmospheric corrosion, including that caused by salt-laden air. Materials used shall not be susceptible
to mold growth or attack by vermin.
Cables for power circuits shall not be less than 2.5mm2 copper conductors and cables for control circuit
shall not be less than 1.5mm2 copper conductors.
5.2 LOW VOLTAGE - WIRING FOR REFRIGERATED SITUATIONS
All electric wiring to be installed into refrigerated situations where the temperature is to be maintained
at or below 0oC shall be either MICS or elastomeric cables that are applicable for the designed operating
environment.
5.3 LOW VOLTAGE - ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT The low voltage electric equipment shall comply with the relevant sections of the Electrical
Specification.
190
6 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
6.1 GENERAL
This section of the Specification intends to direct the Contractor to select the appropriate and sufficient
noise and vibration control measures on the plant/equipment, the interconnected piping, so that when
the installed plant/equipment are put into operation, the resulting noise and vibration levels at locations
within the building and at the adjacent or nearby buildings shall not exceed the acceptable limits as
promulgated by the statutory requirements of the Environmental Protection Department.
The Corrected Noise Level at potential Noise Sensitive Receiver in the adjacent or nearby building, if
so identified in the Particular Specification and/or Drawings, shall not exceed the Acceptable Noise
Level stipulated in the Technical Memorandum for the Assessment of Noise from Places other than
Domestic Premises, Public Places or Construction Sites issued by the Environmental Protection
Department when the plant/equipment installed by the Contractor are put into operation.
6.2 EQUIPMENT BASES
6.2.1 General
Floor mounted equipment shall be installed on 100mm high concrete housekeeping pads provided by
the building contractor covering the whole floor area requirements of the equipment bases plus a
minimum of 150 mm further on each side or on inverted beams at the roof.
Vibration isolators shall be mounted on this concrete pad or inverted beams.
6.2.2 Welded Structural Steel Bases
Bases shall be constructed of adequate "I" or channel hot dipped galvanized steel members reinforced
as required to prevent the bases from flexing at start-up and from misalignment of drive and driven
units.
All perimeter members shall be of steel sections with a minimum depth equal to 1/10th of the longest
dimension of the base but need not exceed 350 mm provided that the deflection and misalignment are
kept within acceptable limits as determined by the equipment manufacturer.
Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to provide a base clearance of 50
mm.
6.2.3 Concrete Inertia Bases
Concrete inertia bases shall be formed within a structural steel beam or channel frame reinforced as
required to prevent flexing, misalignment of the drive and driven units or transferal of stresses into
equipment. The base shall be completed with height saving brackets, concrete reinforcement and
equipment bolting down provisions.
In general the thickness of concrete inertia bases shall be of a minimum of 1/12th of the longest
dimension of the base but never be less than 150 mm. The base depth needs not exceed 300 mm unless
specifically required.
As an indication of the standards required, minimum thickness of the inertia base shall generally
comply with the following table or be 1/12th of the longest dimension of the base, whichever is the
larger:-
Table .6.2.3 Minimum Thickness of Inertia Base
Motor Size (kW) Minimum Thickness
3.7 - 11 150 mm
15 - 37 200 mm
45 - 55 250 mm
Base forms shall include minimum concrete reinforcement consisting of 13 mm bars or angles welded
in place on 150 mm centers running both ways in a layer of 40 mm above the bottom, or additional
steel as is required by the structural conditions.
191
Unless otherwise specified, concrete inertia bases shall weigh from 2 to 3 times the combined weight
of the equipment/plant to be installed thereon.
Base forms shall be furnished with drilled steel members and with anchor-bolt sleeves welded below
the holes where the anchor bolts fall in concrete locations. Height saving brackets shall be provided in
all mounting locations to maintain a base clearance of 50 mm.
7 THERMAL INSULATION
7.1 GENERAL
7.1.1 Thermal insulation shall comply with the requirements of BS 5422:2001 and BS 5970:2001 or other
statutory standards such as IEC, ISO and etc. or equivalent.
7.1.2 Unless otherwise indicated, all thermal insulating materials used within any building shall, when tested
in accordance with BS 476-6:1989, BS 476-7:1997, BS 476-12:1991, shall comply with the following:-
(a) BS 476-12:1991: Ignitable T (Ignition Source A);
(b) BS 476-6:1989: Fire propagation I < 12, i1 < 6; and
(c) BS 476-7:1997: Surface spread of Flame Class 1 or comply with Clause C11.1.2 (a) as
mentioned above and conform to Class 'O' to UK Building Regulation 2000 certified by the
"Warrington Fire Test Laboratory" or approving organizations and standards recognized by the
Fire Services Department.
7.1.3 The insulation used for the air conditioning installation is "air" insulation which shall satisfy the
following:-
(a) Adequate strength and rigidity to maintain the thickness of air;
(b) Creating adequate number of closed air cells within the material to minimize heat loss due to
convection and conduction; and
(c) Covered on exposed surface with good quality foil to stop heat loss from radiation.
7.1.4 Insulation materials and their finishes shall be free from asbestos.
Where any work is carried out on existing insulation material or finish which contains asbestos in any
form the Contractor’s attention is drawn to the responsibilities under the provisions of the Asbestos
Regulations current in the Sierra Leone at the time of the works.
The Contractor shall also notify the Project Architect should the presence of asbestos be suspected.
7.1.5 Insulation materials and finishes shall be inherently proof against rotting, mold and fungal growth and
attack by vermin, be non-hygroscopic and in all respects be suitable for continuous use throughout the
range of operating temperatures and for the environment indicated.
7.1.6 The Contractor shall bear the cost and provide relevant certificates from an approved testing laboratory
in order to prove the physical properties of the insulation to be used in the project are conforming to
the specification.
7.2 TYPES OF THERMAL INSULATION MATERIALS
The type of insulation required for a particular installation will generally be indicated in the Particular
Specification. Where this is not so the Contractor shall include for the types described herein:-
7.2.1 Type "A" - CFC & HCFC Free Phenolic Foam Insulation
(a) Temperature range: sub-zero to 120°C;
(b) Density: 40 kg/m3;
Except at pipe and other support points where a higher density load bearing quality insulation shall
be used in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations. In general, phenolic foam
192
sections with 80 kg/m3 for pipe sizes of up to 125mm and 120 kg/m3 for pipe sizes of 150mm or
above and made to the same thickness as the adjacent pipe insulation;
(c) Compressive Strength: 140 kN/m2 (BS 4370-1:1988, method 3 or ISO 844:2004)
(d) Thermal Conductivity: 0.022 W/m°C at 20°C mean temperature (BS 4370-2:1993, method
7 or ISO 8302:1991);
(e) Closed Cell Content: 90% minimum (BS 4370-2:1993, method 10 or ISO 4590:2002);
(f) Vapour Transmission: 10 micron gram meter/Nh at 38°C 88% RH (BS 4370-2:1993, method 8
or ISO 1663:1999); and
(g) Fire Rating: shall have class "O" fire rating and test certificate
The above properties shall be tested independent of facings which shall be factory applied Class "O"
double sided reinforced foil vapour barrier for both condensation control and mechanical protection.
The external side shall be of white antiglare coating and the internal side shall be of aluminium foil
fully adhered to the phenolic foam. Facing with all service jackets on the outside is also acceptable.
The surface emittance of the all service jackets shall be 0.7 or greater when tested with ASTM E-408-
71:2002. In addition, the performance of both vapour barriers and all service jackets shall comply with
the requirement stipulated at Clause C11.4.2.
The manufacturer shall provide proof if required by the Architect, that the above properties of the
material supplied remains constant or are stable enough throughout the working life.
7.2.2 Type "B" - Flexible Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation
Flexible closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation shall be CFC free, in continuous lengths, with factory
applied talc coating on inner surface.
Flexible Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation shall comply with the following requirements:-
(a) Thermal Conductivity (at 20oC mean temperature): <0.04 W/moC;
(b) Density: 65 kg/m3 ±5%;
(c) Water Vapour Permeability (without additional vapour barrier foil): 0.28 micron gram meter/Nh;
(d) Maximum Operating Temperature: > 80oC;
(e) No putrefaction and mildew shall form on the insulation material. The water absorption properties
of the insulation shall be of not more than 1.5% after 28 days;
(f) The material, including adhesives and all accessories shall have fire properties to Class 'O' comply
with the requirements of the Building Regulation in UK. The insulation material shall be a "built-
in" vapour barrier and achieve condensation control without any additional vapour barrier foil;
(g) Smoke Visibility (ISO 5659-2:2006); and
The mean specific optical density, Dm shall be less than 500 under all test conditions. The
thickness of the test specimen shall be 25 mm and the Dm shall be the maximum value of the
specific optical density (Ds10) of the three tests computed at 10 minutes time interval.
(h) Smoke Toxicity:
The results shall comply and in accordance with either of the following standards or equivalent:-
- International Maritime Organization (IMO) – International Code for Application of Fire Test
Procedure: Part 2 – Smoke and Toxicity Test, IMO MSC 61(67); or
- Naval Engineering Specification (NES) 713 (Issue 3) – Determination of the Toxicity Index of the
Products of Combustion from Small Specimens of Material
193
7.3 INSULATION THICKNESSES
7.3.1 Refrigerant Pipe
All refrigerant pipes except pipes on high pressure side of refrigeration cycle should be insulated with
minimum insulation thickness in accordance with Table C11.5.2-(1), C11.5.2-(2) or C11.5.2-(3).
Table 7.3.1 – (1): Minimum Insulation Thickness for Indoor Refrigerant Pipe (Case 1)
Minimum Thickness of Insulation for Refrigerant Pipe Installations (mm)
Indoor Condition at 28oC, 80% RH; still air; h(3) = 10
Fluid Operating Temperature
Outer Diameter of Pipe(mm)(1) 0oC -10oC -20oC
Thermal
Conductivity(2)
λ
Thermal
Conductivity(2)
λ
Thermal
Conductivity(2)
λ
0.02 0.03 0.04 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.02 0.03 0.04
6 8 10 13 10 13 16 12 16 20
8 8 11 14 10 14 18 13 17 21
10 8 11 14 11 15 18 13 18 22
12 9 12 15 11 15 19 14 19 23
15 9 12 15 13 16 20 14 20 25
22 10 13 17 13 18 22 16 22 27
28 10 14 18 13 18 23 16 28
35 10 15 18 14 19 24 17 23 29
42 11 15 19 14 20 25 18 24 30
Note: (i) The above table assumes pipes to be copper pipe of BS EN 1057:2006.
For other metal pipes, same insulation thickness is applied to comparable outer diameters.
(2) The insulation thickness in above table is based on thermal conductivity rated at 20oC mean.
(3) The surface coefficient, h = 10 is assumed for cement or black matt surfaces at indoor still air
condition.
Table 7.3.2 – (2): Minimum Insulation Thickness for Indoor Refrigerant Pipe (Case 2)
Minimum Thickness of Insulation for Refrigerant Pipe Installations (mm)
Indoor Condition at 30oC, 95% RH; still air; h(3) = 10
Fluid Operating Temperature
Outer Diameter of Pipe(mm) (1) 0oC -10oC -20oC
Thermal
Conductivity(2)
λ
Thermal
Conductivity(2)
λ
Thermal
Conductivity(2)
λ
0.02 0.03 0.04 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.02 0.03 0.04
6 26 36 44 33 45 56 39 53 67
8 28 38 47 35 48 60 42 57 71
10 29 40 50 37 50 62 44 60 75
12 31 42 52 38 52 65 45 62 78
15 32 44 54 40 55 68 48 65 81
22 35 48 59 44 60 74 52 71 89
28 37 50 63 46 63 79 55 75 94
35 39 53 66 49 66 83 58 79 99
Note: (1) The above table assumes pipes to be copper pipe of BS EN 1057:2006.
For other metal pipes, same insulation thickness is applied to comparable outer diameters.
(2) The insulation thickness in above table is based on thermal conductivity rated at 20oC mean.
(3) The surface coefficient h = 10 is assumed for cement or black matt surfaces at indoor still air
condition.
194
Table 7.3.3 – (3): Minimum Insulation Thickness for Outdoor Refrigerant Pipe
Minimum Thickness of Insulation for Refrigerant Pipe Installations (mm)
Outdoor Condition at 35oC, 95% RH; wind speed = 1 m/s; h(3) = 13.5
Outer Diameter of Pipe(mm)(1) Fluid Operating Temperature
0oC -10oC -20oC
Thermal
Conductivity(2)
λ
Thermal
Conductivity(2)
λ
Thermal
Conductivity(2)
λ
0.02 0.03 0.04 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.02 0.03 0.04
6 23 32 40 29 39 49 33 46 57
8 25 34 42 30 41 52 36 49 61
10 26 36 45 32 44 54 38 51 64
12 27 37 46 33 45 57 39 53 66
15 29 39 49 35 48 59 41 56 70
22 31 43 53 38 52 65 45 61 76 76
28 33 45 56 40 55 69 48 64 80
35 35 48 59 42 58 72 50 68 85
Note: (1) The above table assumes pipes to be copper pipe of BS EN 1057:2006.
For other metal pipes, same insulation thickness is applied to comparable outer diameters.
(2) The insulation thickness in above table is based on thermal conductivity rated at 20oC mean.
(3) The surface coefficient h = 13.5 is assumed for cement or black matt surfaces at outdoor
condition with a wind speed of 1 m/s.
195
8 UNITARY AIR-CONDITIONER
8.1 GENERAL
Unitary air-conditioners shall include:-
(a) Inverter Condensing unit and Single split Wall Mounted fan coil units;
(b) Condensing unit with variable refrigerant volume (VRV) control and In-Ceiling Mounted
Cassette indoor fan coil units;
Unitary air-conditioners shall be factory fabricated and assembled. The equipment shall be rated and
tested in the same country of manufacture and meet with the requirements of the International
Organization for Standardization (ISO) Standards 5151:1994 (non-ducted air-conditioners and heat
pumps) or 13253:1995 or other internationally recognized quality assurance standards approved by the
Project Architect.
The most energy efficient model in the series shall be selected for submission and shall be referred to
Sections in Clause this Specification.
8.1.1 Equipment Suitable for Local Electricity Supply
Unless otherwise specified, the electrical equipment’s of the unitary air-conditioners shall be suitable
for use with 3-phase and neutral, 4-wire, 400/230 V, 50 Hz source for neutral earthed system with
provision of bonding.
8.1.2 Selection of Air-Cooled Condensers and Condensing Units
Air-cooled condensers and condensing units of unitary air-conditioners shall be selected to give rated
capacity with condensing temperature not exceeding 50°C for the ambient condition as specified
under Clause 3.11 of this Specification.
8.1.3 Casing
Casings of unitary air-conditioners shall be constructed of rigid galvanized sheet steel and painted in
accordance with Part G, suitably reinforced with channels and sections to form a robust cabinet.
Casing for outdoor installation shall be of weatherproof finish, preferably galvanized, painted or
anodized aluminium.
8.1.4 Compressor
Compressors shall be rotary of the hermetically sealed type. Compressor shall be complete with
internal motor protection, positive lubrication, mufflers, crankcase heater, and internal and external
vibration isolation.
8.1.5 Supply Air Fan and Motor
Supply air fans shall be of the double width, double inlet, centrifugal type of ample sized for operation
against the specified static pressure. Fan motors shall be permanently lubricated and have adequate
power so as to be non-overloading throughout the range of the fan characteristic. The motor shall be
high efficiency motor.
8.1.6 Cooling Coils
Cooling coils shall be of the direct expansion type and constructed with copper tubes and aluminium
fins to give high heat transfer performance. The coils shall have sufficient number of rows of tubes
to provide efficient dehumidification of the air in addition to its cooling.
Heating coil shall be constructed with copper tubes and aluminium fins to give high heat transfer
performance.
196
8.1.7 Air Filter
Air filters shall unless otherwise specified be of the washable panel type. The filter performance shall
be referred to Clause 1. Higher filter efficiency shall be adopted to meet with the IAQ objective
designed.
8.1.8 Air-Cooled Condensers
Air-cooled condensers shall unless otherwise specified be suitable for outdoor installation with ample
capacity to dispose of the rejected heat from the air conditioning system. Condenser coils shall be
constructed with copper tube and aluminium fins. Special corrosion resistant treatment for the
condenser coils and fins shall be considered for the equipment to be located on corrosive environment.
8.1.9 Refrigerant Piping
External refrigerant piping shall include all necessary fitting and amerflex insulation. Size of the
refrigerant pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with the recommended standards as stated in this
Specification
8.1.10 Condensate Drain Pipe
Condensate drain pipe shall be PVC and adequately insulated and mechanical protected in accordance
with the recommended standards as stated in this Specification
8.1.11 Safety Control
Controls shall be factory wired. Field wiring in conduit or trunking shall be limited to
interconnections between separate pieces of equipment and power wiring. Each unit shall be protected
and controlled by a factory built control panel incorporating all necessary devices, switches, indicator,
etc. Functions required shall include those such as interlock with lubricating oil pump and other
auxiliary components for unit starting, control circuit for compressor stop with pump down and
crankcase heaters, automatic unloading, isolating switches and emergency stop facilities.
Safety protections shall include low lubricating oil pressure cut-out, low evaporating pressure cut-
out, high condensing pressure cut-out, low refrigerant temperature cut-out, high motor coil
temperature cut-out and other protections necessary for the proper and safe operation of the unit.
Overload and motor burnout protections shall be provided as well.
8.1.12 Operational Control
For a conventional split type A/C unit, a wired or wireless remote controller shall be provided for the
selection of room temperature setting, fan speed and timer setting. For an advance multi-zone modular
split type, the remote controller shall be of the liquid crystal display (LCD) type with an on-off switch
for operational features such as speed selection, timer setting, temperature setting, self-diagnosis
function and auto restart function.
8.1.13 Split Condensing Unit and AHU
The condensing unit shall include rotary compressors, air-cooled condensing coils, fans and motors
control and safety devices, piping and all necessary accessories factory assembled in a weatherproof
painted G.I. casing. The refrigerant circuit shall be field connected to the matched AHU or fan coil
units each completed with direct expansion cooling coil, expansion valve, blower with motor and the
necessary number of air filters in a well-insulated, sturdy G.I. metal casing with paint to an attractive
appearance.
8.1.14 Variable Refrigerant Volume System
The air conditioning system shall be of the multi-zone modular split type. Each zone shall consist of
one air-cooled outdoor condensing unit connected to a group of indoor fan coil units in one single
refrigerant circuit. The outdoor unit shall not comprise more than three compressors. For multi
compressors outdoor unit, one shall be inverter control compressor. The inverter compressor shall be
197
incorporated with a frequency inverter control to achieve the optimum flow of refrigerant in response
to the actual load.
The multi-zone modular split type unit shall be provided with heating (Heat Recovery) and cooling
output simultaneously.
8.1.15 Energy Efficiency Performance
All unitary air conditioners shall be selected aiming for the highest operation efficiency. The
minimum Coefficient of Performance (COP) for Air-Cooled Unitary Air Conditioner and Water-
Cooled Unitary Air Conditioner excluding room coolers shall be as shown in the Tables below:-
Table 8.1.15(a): Minimum COP for Air-Cooled Unitary Air Conditioner
Capacity Range
(kW)
Above 10
and
Below 40
40 to 200
Minimum COP (Cooling Mode) 2.4 2.4
3 for VRV 2.9 for VRV
Minimum COP Heat Pump
(Heating Mode)
2.7
2.8
VRV: Air Conditioner with capacity control through variation of refrigerant volume flow
8.1.16 Energy Efficiency and Energy Conservation
All equipment provided by the Contractor for the air conditioning installation shall conform to the
highest efficient rating of energy efficiency and energy conservation requirement as stipulated in this
Specification, and/or the Codes of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Air Conditioning Installations
and of Electrical Installations issued by Electrical and Mechanical Services Department.
In case of any non-compliance, the Contractor shall submit full justification with technical data
supporting the deviation from the requirements as specified in this Specification and the Codes of
Practice for Energy Efficiency of Air Conditioning Installations and Electrical Installations issued by
Electrical and Mechanical Services Department.
D INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
1.1 GENERAL
Throughout the execution of the installation, the Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring
compliance with the Regulations included in clause 2 and shall notify the Project Architect of any
infringement which directly or indirectly detracts from the safe and satisfactory operation of the
installation(s) whether or not such infringement relates to the works covered in the Contract or to those
associated with others.
1.12 Standards and requirements for the testing and commissioning works are listed should be in accordance
to:-
(a) Statutory Obligations and other requirements, Specifications and Standards specified in this
Specification;
(b) Building Services Branch Testing and Commissioning Procedure for Air-conditioning,
Refrigeration, Ventilation & Control System Installation
(c) Manufacturers’ recommendations and specifications.
198
1.1,3 The Contractor is required to appoint a competent and experienced testing and commissioning engineer
responsible for the overall planning, organizing, coordinating, supervising and monitoring of the testing
and commissioning works and also certifying all results and reports from the testing and commissioning
works. The Contractor shall submit, at the commencement of the Contract, information detailing
qualification and experience of the testing and commissioning engineer for the Project Architect’s
approval.
1.1.4 It is necessary to require the Contractor to provide, at no cost to the Employer, all necessary equipment,
apparatus, tools and materials for carrying out of testing and commissioning works.
(a) Master Programmed of Testing and Commissioning Works
The Contractor is required to submit a programme for testing and commissioning works shall be
submitted at the commencement of the Contract, usually within the first three months. The
programme shall indicate the tentative dates of all tests and commissioning works that will be
carried out throughout the whole contract and all necessary submissions and approval relating to
testing and commissioning and ensure that the testing and commissioning programme matches the
master programme for construction and that all testing and commissioning works are complete
before the completion date of the Contract.
(b) Inspection, Testing and Commissioning Methods and Procedures
The Contractor is required to submit detailed inspection, testing and commissioning methods and
procedures together with report formats for reporting inspection, testing and commissioning results
for the Project Architect’s approval at least three months before commencement of testing and
commissioning works, or four months after the commencement of the Contract, whichever is
earlier.
(c) Labor and Materials
The Contractor is required to be responsible for provision of all labour and both consumable and
non-consumable materials for carrying out testing and commissioning works at their expenses.
Electricity supply, water and LP gas and town gas for carrying out of testing and commissioning
works shall also be arranged and provided by the Contractor at no cost to the Employer.
(d) Supply of Inspection, Measuring and Testing Equipment
The Contractor is required to supply the calibrated equipment and instrument for testing and
commissioning works in accordance with the requirements as specified in the Particular
Specification.
(e) Readiness for Commissioning and Testing
The Contractor is required to check the completion of the works to be tested or commissioned,
the associated builder’s works and the associated building services installations to ensure that
testing and commissioning can be preceded in a safe and satisfactory manner without obstruction.
(f) "Type-test" Certificate
"Type-test" for equipment shall be carried out at the manufacturers’ works or elsewhere
appropriate in order to demonstrate their compliance with the Regulation or requirements. "Type-
test" certificates together with the corresponding drawings, sketches, reports and any other
necessary documents shall be submitted to the Project Architect for approval before delivery of
the equipment.
1.1.5 The Contractor is required to provide advanced notice for inspection, testing and commissioning works
as follows:-
(a) Off-site Inspection and Testing
An advanced notice of at least one week before commencement of the inspection or test shall be
provided.
199
(b) On-site Inspection, Testing and Commissioning
An advanced notice of at least 4 calendar days before commencement of inspection, testing or
commissioning shall be provided.
1.1.6 Documentation and Deliverables
The Contractor shall record all commissioning information and testing results at the witness of the
Project Architect or his representatives.
Commissioning and testing record shall be properly checked and certified by contractor‘s Testing and
Commissioning Engineer and signed by the Project Architect or his representative who has witnessed
the testing or commissioning before submission to the Project Architect. The Contractor shall submit
full commissioning and testing report to the Project Architect within 14 calendar days after completion
of commissioning and testing of the installation.
1.2 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING – DEFINITIONS
For the purpose of this General Specification the following definitions shall apply:-
1.2.1 Commissioning:
The advancement of an installation from the stage of static completion to full working conditions to
meet the specified requirements. This will include setting into operation and regulation of the
installation.
1.2.2 Setting to work:
The process of setting a static system into motion
1.2.3 Off-site Tests:
Tests carried out on items of equipment at manufacturer’s works or elsewhere to ensure compliance
with the requirements of Specifications and/or relevant Standards or Codes of Practice (or other
standards specified).
1.2.4 Site Tests:
Tests on static plant and systems (e.g. inspection and testing of welds, hydraulic testing of pipe work,
etc.) to ensure correct and safe installation and operation
1.2.5 Regulation:
The process of adjusting the rates of fluid flow and heat transfer in a distribution system within specified
tolerances as stated in the relevant CIBSE Commissioning Code.
1.2.6 Performance Testing:
The measuring and recording of the performance of the commissioned installation
1.3 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING – GENERAL
1.3.1 Any defects of workmanship, materials and performance, maladjustments or other irregularities which
become apparent during commissioning or testing shall be rectified by the Contractor at no cost to the
Employer and the relevant part of the commissioning or testing procedure shall be repeated at the
Contractor’s expenses.
1.3.2 The entire testing and commissioning procedure shall be undertaken by the Contractor’s own competent
specialist staff or by a competent Independent Commissioning Specialist nominated by and acting for
the Contractor and approved by the Project Architect.
1.3.3 Where specified in the Particular Specification, the Contractor shall nominate a competent independent
Specialist to conduct commissioning work.
200
1.3.4 Where specified in the Particular Specification, the Contractor shall employ an approved specialist
testing and commissioning firm who shall be named in the returned Tender Documents.
1.3.5 At the appropriate time in the Contract, usually within the first two months, the Contractor shall furnish
the Provisional Testing and Commissioning Programme, methods, procedures and formats of test
records to the Project Architect. This shall be updated as the work progresses towards completion.
1.3.6 Unless otherwise indicated, all electricity, main water and other fuels, such as town gas, necessary for
the operation of the plant during preliminary runs and for full adjustments and commissioning tests will
be provided at no cost by the Contractor unless otherwise specified in the Contract.
1.3.7 If considered appropriate, the Contractor shall be required to carry out demonstration to dismantle those
parts/components of the installation which are considered difficult/impossible for maintenance access.
The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out all necessary modification work at no extra charge
to the Employer to alleviate the difficulties associated with dismantling or maintenance access.
1.4 OFF-SITE TESTS
Where the specified Standards or Codes of Practice stipulate, "type-tests" on items of equipment to
demonstrate compliance shall be carried out at the manufacturer’s works or elsewhere as appropriate.
In all cases, "type-tests" Certificates shall be submitted in duplicate to the Project Architect. Cases
where appropriate, "type-tests" Certificates will be accepted are as follows:-
1.4.1 Fans:
"type-tests" Certificates showing fan characteristic curves (ISO 5801:1997), "type-tests" Certificates
for sound power levels (ISO 5136:2003), fan dynamic balancing test Certificates completed with a
method of statement from manufacturer on testing to Grade 2.5, 4 & 6.3 on appropriate fan types in
accordance with ISO 1940-1:2003 and ISO 1940-2:1997.
1.4.2 Pumps:
"type-tests" Certificates for head, discharge, speed and power input (BS EN ISO 9906:2000 as
appropriate).
1.4.3 Electric motors:
"type-tests" Certificates in accordance with BS EN 60034-1:2004 and/or IEC 60072-1:1991, IEC
60072-2:1990 & IEC 60072-3:1994.
1.4.4 Low voltage starter switchgear and control gear assembly:
"Type-tests" Certificates for starter (e.g. auto-transformer) and control panels assembly as a whole in
accordance with BS EN 60439-1:1999.
1.5 SITE TESTS
F1.5.1 The Contractor shall carry out "on-site" tests in respect of all static systems to ensure safe and proper
operation as conforming to the design intent. Such tests shall include test of welds and pressure tests
on the hydraulic systems.
1.5.2 On completion of cleaning operations described in the T&C Procedure for Air-conditioning,
Refrigeration, Ventilation and Control Systems Installation, each installed unit shall be re-charged and
then subjected to gas pressure test as required.
Any items of equipment set to operate at or below the test pressure shall be isolated or removed prior
to applying this test.
201
1.6 INSPECTION AND TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION PERIOD
1.6.1 Periodic Site Tests
Site inspections of "work in progress" will be made by the Project Architect/M&E Engineer or the
representative from time to time. The Contractor shall keep such inspection record for checking from
time to time. Works to be permanently covered up shall be subjected to inspection and test before cover
up. During the inspection, if the Project Architect/M&E Engineer discovers any work that has been
covered up before inspection and testing, this work shall be uncovered for inspection and testing to the
Project Architect’s/M&E Engineer’s satisfaction. The cost involved in uncovering the work, inspecting,
testing and re-concealing the work together with any consequential losses shall be paid by the
Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer.
1.6.2 Tests at Works yard
The Contractor shall note that the Project Architect/M&E Engineer may require witnessing tests and
inspections of locally and manufactured equipment during construction at the contractor’s works yard.
Where this requirement is indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall allow for making
the necessary arrangements; including and indicating the Project Architect’s /M&E Engineer’s time
and subsistence expenses in the Bill of Quantities.
1.6.3 Factory Test Certificates
Certificates of all unit pressure and other manufacturers" tests carried out at the manufacturers" works
shall be forwarded in duplicate to the Project Architect for approval. This approval shall normally be
required before the materials or apparatus are dispatched from the manufacturer’s works.
Where specified, the Contractor shall subject certain materials and equipment to be tested by the
recognized institutions or laboratories and submit the type test certificates to the Project Architect for
approval.
1.7 DOCUMENTS AND DATA REQUIRED FOR HAND-OVER MEETING
1.7.1 General
The Contractor shall note that the system cannot be handed over until all the foregoing requirements
(where applicable) have been carried out to the satisfaction of the Project Architect.
1.7.2 Test Certificates
Before the handover inspection, the Contractor shall provide the follow test/record certificates where
applicable:-
(a) Copies of manufacturer’s works tests/record certificates on plant items comprising air
conditioning units including motors, fans, pumps, etc.;
(b) Copies of pressure test/record certificates for works carried out on site;
(c) Copies of refrigeration plant efficiency test/record certificates;
(d) Copies of all performance test/record certificates including room conditions, etc. These
certificates shall be accompanied with all appropriate charts and diagrams; and
(e) Copies of all noise test/survey records on every noise emitting plant and machineries, individual
room/space and a statement of compliance with the statutory requirements under the current Noise
Control Ordinance.
1.7.3 "As-built" Drawings
All necessary copies of "As-built" drawings as detailed in the Contract Documents and this
Specification. (*settings of all the sensors are to be indicated)
1.7.4 Operation Maintenance and Services Manuals
All necessary copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals as detailed in the Contract Documents
and this Specification.
The Contractor shall include functional spare parts and contact lists of the suppliers in the manual.
(*settings of all the sensors are to be indicated)
202
1.7.5 Manufacturer’s Name Plate
Every item of plant supplied by a manufacturer shall be fitted with a clearly engraved, stamped or cast
manufacturer’s name plate properly secured to the plant item and showing:-
- Manufacturer’s Name;
- Serial and/or Model No.;
- Date of Supply;
- Rating/Capacity; and
- Test and Working Pressure (where applicable)
1.8 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES
For Testing and Commissioning Procedures, please refer to:-
Testing and Commissioning Procedure for Air-Conditioning, Refrigeration Ventilation and Control
System Installation as specified and detailed in the latest editions of the American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air-conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) and the Heating and Ventilation
Contractor Association, U.K (HVCA)
203
E OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
1.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall provide all the Level One Services as specified in this Specification for all
installation works.
Level Two Services detailed in this Specification shall only be carried out if specified in the Particular
Specification of the Contract. The specified Level Two maintenance responsibilities shall be priced
separately in the tender with cost for each individual item.
1.2 LEVEL ONE SERVICES – MANDATORY RESPONSIBILITIES DURING MAINTENANCE
PERIOD
1.2.1 Requirement for Training
Training and familiarization for the operation and maintenance of sophisticated equipment shall be
provided and arranged by the Contractor. The training shall include all training facilities, material and
handouts, etc. The Contractor shall submit a "Training Schedule" at least two months prior to
completion of installation for the Project Architect’s Approval. The schedule shall consist of the
following requirements:-
(a) General Requirement
(i) The Contractor shall provide facilities and training programme to ensure that the Employer’s
operation and maintenance staff acquire full knowledge and operation, breakdown and routine
maintenance, diagnosis and hence operate and maintain reasonably effectively and efficiently
the system/equipment including Control and Monitoring System offered. The training proposal
shall be submitted at least two months prior to completion of the Contract and shall include all
aspects of operation and maintenance of the plant including the use of special tools. Besides,
equipment portfolio for Air-Conditioning, Refrigeration, Ventilation and Control System
offered shall be submitted together with the training proposal. The equipment portfolio shall
include quantity of equipment, equipment cost, recommended serviceable life by the
manufacturer and cycle of major overhaul;
(ii) A training proposal together with a detailed breakdown unit price for such service shall be
submitted at the time of tendering;
(iii) The training proposal shall also include details and duration of the training course(s),
qualifications of the instructor and the qualification requirements for the trainee(s);
(iv) Whenever possible, the training courses shall be held before or during the commissioning period
and shall be in Freetown.
Within two months after award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit full details of the
training syllabus for approval of the Project Architect;
(v) To reach the required depth of appreciation, the principles and theory and practical "hands-on"
demonstration shall be lectured; and
(vi) The operation and maintenance training of the Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) equipment shall also
be included in the training programme. Any manual for the IAQ equipment shall be prepared
by qualified personnel.
(b) Particular Requirement
The training course shall contain, but not limited to, the following:-
(i) General description of the system and its associated equipment as a whole;
(ii) Start-up and shut-down procedures;
(iii) Safety precautions during start-up and shut-down;
(iv) A detailed description of the functions of all switches and indicators on control console;
(v) Trouble shooting procedures;
(vi) Preventive and corrective maintenance requirements to ensure proper operation of a system or
equipment under the maintenance programme;
(vii) Identification of all the operating parameters which affects the performance of the plant;
(viii) Adjustment of the operating parameters to achieve optimum operating conditions;
(ix) Check-list of all the periodic inspection and servicing of the plant;
(x) Illustration of the construction of major components of the plant by sectional views;
204
(xi) Dismantling and reassembling procedures during a major repair;
(xii) The use of special tools;
(xiii) Calibration for testing equipment, measurement, record and performance assessment; and
(ix) Any other items as found necessary.
1.2.2 Requirement during Maintenance Period
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the following within the maintenance period:-
(a) Instruction to Employer’s Operation and Maintenance Staff
After the installation has been successfully handed over and put into operation, the Contractor
shall provide full time attendance for a period of at least 20 consecutive days or as stated in the
Specifications, by a qualified operator(s) who shall be fully conversant with the operation and
maintenance of the equipment. Their duties shall be to operate the systems and to guide and
instruct the Employer’s Operation Staff such that they will become fully conversant with the
operation of the complete air conditioning installation.
Note: This commitment shall be carried out where the operational responsibilities are to be
immediately transferred to the Employer’s own staff or at the end of Levels Two Service
operational arrangements.
(b) Completion of Any Outstanding Work
Within one month of receiving the Project Architect’s substantial completion certificate, the
Contractor shall complete all minor outstanding works listed thereon and rectify any defects
that have arisen up to that time.
(c) Faults and Complaints
The Contractor shall attend to faults and complaints arising from defective work materials
and/or system operation within one hour at any time during the maintenance period.
The Contractor shall also be responsible for attending emergency calls and rectifying all defects
leading to fault or breakdown of the equipment and/or system within reasonable time or
specified. The Contractor shall keep records of all the faults/breakdowns calls for submission
to the Project Architect. The costs for the attendance, labour, materials and spare parts for repair,
submission of fault/breakdown reports, etc. are deemed to have been allowed for in the
submitted tender price.
(d) Inspection during Maintenance Period
The Contractor shall, in addition to the periodic visits as stipulated in the Conditions of Contract,
make further working visit to the site one month before the end of the maintenance period to
check and, if necessary, re-adjust the systems to meet the actual operation conditions.
(e) Joint inspection at the end of Maintenance Period
The Contractor shall include for making visit(s) to the installation at the end of the maintenance
period in order to facilitate the acceptance and handing over of the installation to the Employer’s
Representatives.
Note (1): If the installation is proved to be unacceptable by the Project Architect, (d) and (e) may
have to be repeated at the Contractor’s expenses and with the effect of extending the
contractual defect liability period.
Note (2): When the installation is accepted and handed over to the Employer’s authorized
representative(s) at the end of maintenance period, the maintenance certificate will then
be issued by the Project Architect.
205
(f) Servicing, Replacement and Replenishment
During the maintenance period, the Contractor shall supply and install, without additional
charge to the Employer, replacements for all and any equipment or parts thereof or liquids or
gases, which may, in the opinion of the Project Architect, became unserviceable, especially
where the causes are attributable to faulty materials, workmanship, or inadequate performance.
The liability of the Contractor shall cover replacement of liquids or gases, oils and refrigerant
which may be lost by leakage or become contaminated or in other respects unserviceable.
(g) Record "Log Book"
For all Contract works under the maintenance period or ongoing Contract Maintenance, the
Contractor shall have maintenance staff complete the site/installation record "Log-Book" after
each visit/installation. The Log-Book may be completed in English. The Log-Book will be
supplied by the Contractor and kept in the Bank or location as agreed. Every attendance and
details of work done for the installation shall be entered into the Log-Book so as to form a
comprehensive maintenance record.
(h) Project Architect to be informed
No replacement of plant or parts of plant shall be carried out at any time unless the Project
Architect has previously been notified and approved.
(i) Annual inspection and submission of maintenance certificate
During the end of the maintenance period, the Contractor shall carry out and submit the annual
inspection and submission of maintenance certificate for the ventilation system as required
under Building (Ventilation Systems) Regulations to the ADB Resident Representative and the
Project Architect of the completed installation.
I.3 LEVEL TWO SERVICES – SPECIFIED CONTRACTOR’S MAINTENANCE
RESPONSIBILITIES DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD
Where specifically required in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall allow for and carry out
full and comprehensive maintenance of the installation for 12 months (or for a period as stated). The
works shall in addition to those required under the LEVEL ONE SERVICE include also the
followings:-
1.3.1 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the following within the maintenance period:-
(a) Inspection, checking, servicing, maintenance and repair including replacement of parts and
components due to normal tears and wears;
(b) Emergency inspection, checking and servicing, repair and rectification work;
(c) Provide skilled craftsmen to assistant the start-up, control, performance monitoring and shut-
down of the plant;
(d) Test and commissioning of the installation after the completion of services, maintenance and
repair; and
(e) Submission of services record and test report.
1.3.2 The Contractor shall provide labour, minor spare parts, components and consumable materials in the
following services during the maintenance period:-
(a) Consumable materials such as re-filling of refrigerant and lubricant, renewal of for blower
motor as and when required/necessary;
(b) All cutting and waste, packing, carriage, risk, moving, hoisting and fixing at the required
position;
(c) Repairs including first line attendance, emergency and miscellaneous repairs, plants, tools,
vehicles for transportation of material for purposes of execution of work; and
(d) Preparation and submission of records/reports, compliance with miscellaneous requirements.
Upon practical completion of the construction work is certified by the Project Architect, the
Contractor shall provide competent, experienced and qualified staff and workshop facilities to
undertake the Level Two maintenance works during the maintenance period. Detailed
206
information of the organization, workshop facilities and list of contact persons of the
Contractor’s maintenance team shall be submitted to the Project Architect one month before the
commencement date of the maintenance period.
1.3.3 Contractor’s Responsibilities for Breakdown Call-out
(a) The Contractor shall offer efficient and prompt response to breakdown call-out for the
installation/equipment failure.
The expedition of response shall be in accordance with the following categories:-
(i) VERY URGENT for installation breakdown including failure of compressor, pipe burst, water
dripping, fire alarm and electricity power failure, the Contractor shall respond and attend to the
Very Urgent calls immediately of not more than 30 minutes;
(ii) URGENT for abnormality of equipment operation, the Contractor shall respond and attend to
the Urgent calls within 1 hour from the receipt of the calls; or
(iii) NON URGENT for inadequate of room condition, the Contractor shall respond and attend the
fault within 4 hours.
Investigation report and proposal for repair/improvement/modification shall be submitted.
(b) The Contractor shall promptly complete any repair necessary for resuming the breakdown installation.
In case immediate permanent repair is not possible due to safety related reason, the following "time for
repair" targets counted from the receipt of breakdown or fault call shall be complied with:-
(i) Complete temporary repair for resumption of the suspended or breakdown services to a safe
operating condition within 24 hours; and
(ii) Complete permanent rectification works within 3 and 7 working days unless long component
and parts delivery time is required.
1.3.4 Maintenance Programme and Schedule
The Contractor shall prepare, submit and seek endorsement on the maintenance program before the
commencement of the Contract maintenance period. The maintenance programme should include
Monthly Routine Service, Half-Yearly Service and Annual Maintenance.
Upon the approval of the above maintenance program, the Contractor shall prepare a comprehensive
maintenance schedule for all installations and indicate dates for routine maintenance of the installations
before the commencement of the Contract maintenance period.
1.3.5 Co-ordination
The Contractor shall co-operate and co-ordinate with the Project Architect’s Representatives, user
department for the smooth execution of maintenance works.
1.3.6 Plant Log and Breakdown/Fault Call Report
The Contractor shall submit daily record of the following documentation and reports at three months
intervals:-
(a) Record of current status of plant and major equipment, all services, maintenance and
repair/replacement carried out for the plant and equipment including the following details:-
(i) Refrigerant pressure gauge readings;
(ii) Refrigerant compressor suction and discharge pressure;
(iii) Dry and wet bulb temperature of supply air at designed offices, meeting and conference rooms
and that of return air at system return and outdoor air condition; and
(iv) IAQ audit report with monthly measurements of all IAQ parameters.
207
(b) Equipment Breakdown Report
Equipment breakdown report shall be submitted after the rectification work and shall have full
details of findings during investigation/examination on cause of breakdown, account of
repair/replacement work needed, suggested precaution and/or action required to prevent the
recurrence of similar incident.
1.3.7 Monthly Works
(a) General
(i) To check the general condition of the plant and equipment such as compressors, condensers,
heat recovery equipment, heat pumps, IAQ equipment, fan coil units and the associated
electrical, electronic, mechanical controls and circuit boards. To ensure that the plant and
equipment are satisfactorily operating within design conditions;
(ii) To drain and clean the pre-filter and after-filter of the pneumatic control system, and clean the
refrigerated drier and after-cooler, if any;
(iii) To check the lubricating system of all fan blowers, compressors, control mechanisms and any
other running parts; cleaning, greasing and oiling where necessary;
(iv) To check any water leakage from the pipework and to repair if required;
(v) To keep all supply and return grilles and louvers clean;
(vi) To check the corrosion of metal surface, framework and support/mounting brackets, etc., and
to reinstate the surface by removing rust and repaint if necessary;
(b) Refrigerant Compressors, Condensers and Heat Pumps
(i) To check for proper operation of the refrigeration machines and related controls, control circuit,
and detect any abnormal noise and vibration, repair or adjust as necessary;
(ii) To check and record on log sheets and where appropriate on system performance sheet the
refrigerant compressor suction and discharge pressures, condenser air inlet and outlet
temperature and motor current;
(iii) To check condition of operating refrigerant, liquid level and lubrication level, refill or renew as
necessary;
(iv) To examine the condition of joints and seals for leaks, repair as necessary;
(v) To remove debris and maintain the condenser in clean and tidy condition;
(vi) To check the vibration of machines as compare to the recommendations by the manufacturer
for future baseline monitoring and maintenance.
(c) Motors for All motorized Devices and Equipment
(i) To clean motor casing, grease and lubricate;
(ii) To check and report any abnormal running noise and vibration. Replace the bearings, perform
megger test on motor and repair as necessary; and
(iii) To check, adjust and rectify/repair defect on circuit protective devices such as starters, control
relay and indicators.
(d) Fan Coil Units
(i) To check that the fan coil units and its control/sensing devices are functioning properly and
inspect drain pipes to ensure no clogging and flooding. Rectify if necessary;
(ii) To check and clean the condensing water drain pan, drain pipes to ensure no clogging and
flooding.
Rectify if necessary;
(iii) To clean the supply and return air grilles and filters; and
(iv) To check the control/protective devices for proper operation. Rectify if necessary.
(g) Heat Exchanger
(i) To check on all joints for leak. Rectify if necessary;
(ii) To check the temperature settings and functioning of the controls and ensure compliance with
manufacturers’ standards.
208
(h) Mechanical Ventilation System
(i) To clean fan blade and blades for wear and damage;
(ii) To check and if necessary to lubricate fan and motor bearings;
(iii) To check flexible connections and that anti-vibration mountings are free to move, and function
properly
(iv) To clean the air filters, supply and return air grilles and to renew air filters if necessary;
(v) To check the operation and function of the control devices;
(vi) To check all electrical wiring and connections and circuit protection devices including
switchgears and starters. Rectify if required
(i) Equipment
(i) To check and service all IAQ equipment including air cleaner and other filtration and sterilizing
system and equipment for IAQ; and
(ii) The Contractor shall take measurements of IAQ parameters and submit records to the Project
Architect.
1.3.8 Half-Yearly Works
Half-yearly service and maintenance shall include the following items:-
(a) To inspect the condition of pipe fittings, supports, hangers, etc., for sign of corrosion. Remove
the rust and repaint with primer and finish coating as necessary;
(b) To check the performance of controls and safety cut-outs and check all control panel indication
lamps, rectify as required;
(c) To clean electrical panels including wiring terminals and connection points;
(d) To touch up with finish-coating where there is any rust or sign of corrosion of the equipment
by first removing the rust/corrosion;
(e) To clean all the air-cooled condenser coils by high-pressure water or steam jet with approved
cleaning detergent to ensure that high heat transfer efficiency is maintained;
(d) To clean the cooling/heating coils (excluding fan coil units) by high-pressure water or steam jet
with approved cleaning detergent to ensure that high heat transfer efficiency is maintained;
(h) To check and serve all IAQ control and sensing equipment including CO2 sensors, air movement
sensors, thermostat, humidifiers, dehumidifiers, humidistat, pressurestat and
(i) To inspect all components of ventilation system for cleanliness and microbial growth and clean
them as necessary.
1.3.9 Annual Works
(a) To inspect the condition of pipe fittings, supports, hangers, etc., for sign of corrosion. Remove
the rust and repaint with primer and finish coating as necessary;
(b) To examine, check and maintain the proper operation of associated electrical panels in the plant
room. Repair and renew as appropriate;
(c) To check, test and recalibrate or replace as necessary, all control and safety devices;
(d) To check, test, adjust, clean and repair/rectify defects if required for all electronic circuit boards
and control/ sensing/detection devices including building automation system if available in the
system;
The Contractor shall arrange the cleaning work after the building office hour;
(e) To check and re-tighten any loose bolts and nuts in proper sequence.
I.4 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS
For plant and/or equipment included in the tender, the Contractor shall provide the types of spare parts
generally wherever these are appropriate to the plant and/or equipment involved plus any additional
items for the particular plant and/or equipment.
Unless otherwise specified, within two months of signing the Contract, or in such period of time as has
been agreed by the Project Architect in writing, the Contractor shall submit in respect of the proposed
plant and/or equipment a list of the manufacturer’s recommended spare parts that are likely to prove
209
necessary to service the plant and/or equipment during the first year’s operation and parts required
immediately following the completion of the Contract maintenance period.
The spare parts submission shall include diagrams or catalogue details of the parts concerned and bona-
fide manufacturer’s published price lists. The Contractor may add the net shipping costs for each item
plus a 15% margin to cover overheads and profit. Where appropriate, the prevailing exchange rate must
be stated. The Contractor should note that an unacceptable or inadequate response to this requirement
may result in their installation not being accepted.
Unless specified in detail, the criteria by which the Contractor shall judge the need for spare parts to be
included in the Schedule shall be any part or component of the plant or equipment that is subject to
frictional wear, vibration or temperature fatigue, rupturable to safety (or otherwise), corrosion, erosion,
unacceptable deposits and/or saturation by contaminants (such as for filters), normal fair wear and tear
and is likely to fail or reach an unacceptably low performance level within a period of three years or
less from its installation and/or commencement of operation excluding the Contract Testing and
Commissioning Periods.
The schedule shall include at least the following items where they are part of the installation concerned:-
- Standard replaceable type air filter media;
- Rupturable safety devices;
- Plug in relays;
- Indicator light lamps;
- Non-standard fuse cartridges; and
Any of the above spare parts and/or disposable items which are required to replace defective or
prematurely worn out parts that arise during the free maintenance period and/or defects liability shall
be replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Employer before the Maintenance Certificate is issued.
The above items shall not be exhaustive. The Contractor shall be responsible for the replacement of
other parts and components for normal operation of the installation.
Additionally the Contractor shall submit within the same period a priced schedule for the supply of any
special tools necessary for servicing and maintenance of any part of the installation.
Instructions for purchase of any special tool shall be issued separately but the basis for charging shall
be similar to that for the Contractor’s equipment manufacturer’s recommended spare parts.
The purchase of the needed spare parts and tools shall be secured by the Project Architect’s Instruction
for which a provisional sum shall be provided in the Contract.
The exact types and quantities shall be determined by the Project Architect based on the Contractor’s
best advice and at the most appropriate time during the Contract Period when requirements can be most
realistically assessed taking account of the installation as installed or still being installed.
210
F TYPICAL VRV SYSTEM INSTALLATION LAYOUT
211
G SCHEDULE OF PROPOSED COMFORT COOLING VRV / VRF AND SINGLE SPLIT WALL
MOUNTED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS TO BE INSTALLED FOR OFFICE BUILDING AT
REGENT ROAD, HILL STATION, FREETOWN FOR SIERRA LEONE FIELD OFFICE OF
THE AFRICAN DEVELOPMENT BANK (ADB)
No Room Schedule Qty. Type of Unit Cooling
Capacity
Total
Cooling
Basement Floor
1 Main Entrance Lobby Area (-B-05) 1 In-Ceiling Cassette Mounted 1 x 9,000BTU 9,000BTU
2 Waiting Room (B-06) 1 In-Ceiling Cassette Mounted 1 x 18,000BTU 18,000BTU
3 Public Information Center (B-07) 1 In-Ceiling Cassette Mounted 1 x 12,000BTU 12,000BTU
4 Corridor (B-11) 1 In-Ceiling Cassette Mounted 2 x 12,000BTU 24,000BTU
5 Office (B-08) 1 In-Ceiling Cassette Mounted 1 x 12,000BTU 12,000BTU
6 Server Room (B-9) (N+1) 1 Wall Mounted 2 x 12,000BTU 24,000BTU
7 UPS Room (B-10) (N+1) 2 Wall Mounted 2 x 12,000BTU 24,000BTU
8 LV Panelboard Room 1 Wall Mounted 1 x 12,000 BTU 12,000BTU
Ground Floor
9 Conference Room (G-07) (N+1) 2 In-Ceiling Cassette Mounted 2 x 24,000BTU 48,000BTU
10 Lobby (G-02) 1 In-Ceiling Cassette Mounted 1 x 12,000BTU 12,000BTU
11 Reception (G-01) 1 In-Ceiling Cassette Mounted 1 x 18,000BTU 18,000BTU
12 Corridor (G-12) 1 In-Ceiling Cassette Mounted 1 x 12,000BTU 12,000BTU
13 Corridor Toilet Area + Archive (G-05) 1 In-Ceiling Cassette Mounted 1 x 9,000BTU 9,000BTU
14 Office (G-03) 1 In-Ceiling Cassette Mounted 1 x 24,000BTU 24,000BTU
15 Country Program Officer (G-06) 1 In-Ceiling Cassette Mounted 1 x 12,000BTU 12,000BTU
16 Office (G-04) 1 In-Ceiling Cassette Mounted 1 x 12,000BTU 12,000BTU
First Floor
17 Lobby 1 In-Ceiling Cassette Mounted 1 x 12,000BTU 12,000BTU
18 Office (F-04) 1 In-Ceiling Cassette Mounted 1 x 24,000BTU 24,000BTU
19 Reception/Waiting (F-03) 1 In-Ceiling Cassette Mounted 1 x 18,000BTU 18,000BTU
20 Corridor (F-05)) 1 In-Ceiling Cassette Mounted 1 x 9,000BTU 9,000BTU
21 Corridor (F-14)) 1 In-Ceiling Cassette Mounted 1 x 9,000BTU 9,000BTU
22 Corridor Toilet Area 1 In-Ceiling Cassette Mounted 1 x 9,000BTU 9,000BTU
23 Office (F-07) 1 In-Ceiling Cassette Mounted 1 x 9,000BTU 9,000BTU
24 Secretary/Waiting (F-08) 1 In-Ceiling Cassette Mounted 1 x 18,000BTU 18,000BTU
25 Resident Representative (F-09) 1 In-Ceiling Cassette Mounted 1 x 24,000BTU 24,000BTU
26 Office (F-11) 1 In-Ceiling Cassette Mounted 1 x 9,000BTU 9,000BTU
27 Meeting Room (F-12) 1 In-Ceiling Cassette Mounted 1 x 12,000BTU 12,000BTU
Battery Room
28 Solar Battery Room 1 Wall Mounted 1 x 18,000 BTU 18,000BTU
212
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF
2 x 175kVA, 140kW MODEL TYPE TGC_IV-110 COMPLETE WITH SET MOUNTED
CONTROLLER TYPE DSE7310 CONTINUOUS RATED SOUND ATTENUATED
WEATHERPROOF CANOPY VOLVO GENERATOR SETS DESIGNED FOR AUTOMATIC MODE
OPERATION FOR OFFICE BUILDING AT REGENT ROAD, HILL STATION, FREETOWN FOR
SIERRA LEONE FIELD OFFICE OF THE AFRICAN DEVELOPMENT BANK (ADB)
213
2 x 175kVA, 140kW CONTINUOUS RATED SOUND ATTENUATED WEATHERPROOF CANOPY
VOLVO GENERATOR SETS DESIGNED FOR AUTOMATIC MODE OPERATION FOR OFFICE
BUILDING AT REGENT ROAD, HILL STATION, FREETOWN FOR SIERRA LEONE FIELD
OFFICE OF THE AFRICAN DEVELOPMENT BANK (ADB)
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION
CONTENTS
1.0 INTRODUCTION AND DESCRIPTION OF WORKS
2.0 SPECIFICATION OF 175kVA, 140kW, 400/230V~, 50Hz, 1500RPM, MODEL TYPE COMPLETE
WITH SET MOUNTED CONTROLLER TYPE DSE7310 GENERATOR SET
3.0 SPECIFICATION OF 250A AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES (ATS)
4.0 PROPOSED THREE SOURCE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS DESIGN
214
1.0 INTRODUCTION AND DESCRIPTION OF WORKS
1.1 Introduction:
This Particular Specification details the requirements for the supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of 2 x 175KVA, 140kW, 400/230V~, 50Hz, 1500RPM, Model Type VOLVO TGC
Generator sets complete with set mounted controller Type DSE7310 and shall be read in conjunction
with the latest IEE Regulations and ISO 8528.
1.2 General:
The Generator sets will be installed in a purposed built Generator House complete with all associated
Switchgears within the ADB secured perimeter fenced Complex. The entire Generator sets electrical
system shall be based on a 230/400V, 3-phase and neutral, 50 Hz, Terra Neutral- Separate (TN-S)
system.
1.3 Regulations and standards
The complete installation shall comply with all relevant British Standard and, where indicated, with
other standards and specifications and all amendments thereto. A Certificate of compliance shall be
provided for the Project Architect, to be included in the handover.
215
2.0 SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND
COMMISSIONING OF, OF 2 x 175kVA, 140kW VOLVO GENERATOR SETS, MODEL TYPE
TGC COMPLETE WITH SET MOUNTED CONTROLLER TYPE DSE7310, CONTINUOUS
RATED SOUND ATTENUATED WEATHERPROOF CANOPY GENERATOR SETS.
2.1 Technical Data:
175kVA, 140kW GENERATOR SET:
KVA: 175
KW: 140
V: 400
Ph.: 3
Hz: 50
Pf: 0.8
A: 253
RPM: 1500
The 175kVA, 140kW, 3-Phase, 400/230V, 50Hz, 0.8pf@ 1500RPM Standby Generator sets specified
shall be supplied complete with Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS) for fully automatic mode operation
in an event the Mains (Utility) supply fails.
The Generator Sets, as specified on the ‘’Name Plate’’ shall be rated for PRIME Operation in
accordance with ISO8528, which means it’s applicable for supplying continuous electrical power (at
variable load) in lieu of commercially purchased power. There is no limitation to the annual hours of
operation and specified model shall supply 10% overload power for 1 hour in12 hours.
Fuel consumption data at indicated load with diesel fuel with specific gravity of 0.85 and conforming
to BS2869:1998 Class A2
Rating Definitions:
Prime Power Rating (PPR):
Variable load: Unlimited hour’s usage with an average load factor ≥ of 70% of the published Prime
Power rating over each 24 hour period. A 10% overload shall be available for 1 hour in every 12 hours
operation.
Governor Regulation Class conforming to ISO 8528 G2
Basic technical data:
Number of cylinders: 6
Cylinder arrangement: Vertical, in line
Cycle: 4 stroke, compression ignition
Induction system: Turbocharged, air to air charge cooling
Direction of rotation: clockwise viewed on flywheel
Lubrication system:
Recommended lubricating oil shall be 5W / 40 which adequately meets the specifications of API CG4
216
Cooling system:
Recommended coolant shall be 50% clean water with 50% VOLVO ELC.
Where there is no likelihood of ambient temperature below 10 °C, clean ‘soft’ water may be used,
treated with 1% by volume of Engine inhibitor in the cooling system.
Cyclic irregularity for engine/flywheel maximum:
1500 rev/min: 0, 0192
Ratings:
Steady state speed stability at constant load: ± 0.25%
Electrical ratings are based on average alternator efficiency and are for guidance only (0.8 power factor
being used).
Engine management system:
Full electronic engine management system controlling:
Speed governing
Air / Fuel ratio
Start sequence
Engine Protection and diagnostics.
Starting requirements:
Notes:
The battery capacity is defined by the 20 hour rate at 0 °C
The oil specification should be for the minimum ambient temperature as the oil will not be warmed
by the immersion heater
The breakaway current is dependent on the battery capacity available. Cables should be capable
of handling the transient current this may be up to double the steady cranking current.
Fuel system:
Recommended fuel: To conform to BS2869 1998 Class A2
Type of injection system: MEUI
Fuel injector pressure: 2000 bar
2.2 General Description:
A standby sound attenuated canopy generator sets shall be supplied by the Vendor for the
Office Building at Regent Road, Hill Station, Freetown for Sierra Leone Field Office at the
African Development Bank (ADB) and they shall be rated as follows:
a) 2 x 175kVA, 140kW Continuous Rating
(3 Phase, 50Hz, 400/230 Volts, 1500 rpm, 0.8pf)
The Generating sets power rating environmental conditions shall be 270C (800 F, 152.4m (500ft) A.S.L,
and 60% relative humidity.
The new sets shall have an automatic mains failure operation to accept the full load of the building and
shall be connected to alternately operate the Office Building at Regent Road, Hill Station, Freetown for
Sierra Leone Field Office at the African Development Bank (ADB).
The sets shall be arranged for 1 x 175kVA to be duty set and 1 x 175kVA to be standby “one generator
is Lead and start first at the commercial power outage, and the second generator is Lag and
start only if the Lead generator fails to start, or after a determinate amount of the Lead generator
operation hours”)
217
2.3 Operation:
In the event of a mains (utility) failure of any one phase, the selected generator set (175kVA Main Set
or 175kVA Standby Set) shall automatically start, and accept the building load.
Upon reinstatement of the mains supply the load of the building will be transferred automatically back
to the mains supply (Utility) after the operation of delay timers adjustable between 3/5 minutes.
The generator set shall continue to run on no load for a further adjustable time period of between 3/5
minutes, after which it shall shut down and be ready for the next start-up operation.
The changeover equipment shall be part of the incoming supply switch panel and shall be constituted
of automatic thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers rated according to the loads and electrically
interlocked to prevent paralleling of Utility and Standby supply.
2.4 Control Panel:
The control panel shall be freestanding, one section, with suitable Protection Degree IP55 or better,
enclosure shall be provided with built-in suitable ventilation system. The generator set shall have the
following controls and instruments, as a minimum requirement:
ON/OFF/AUTO Selector Switch
OFF LOAD/ON LOAD Test Switch
Voltmeter and Selector Switch
Kilowatt Hour Meter
Three Ammeters
Frequency Meter
Hours run counter and automatic LEAD-LAG selector that change automatically the LEAD generator
to LAG after a selected amount of operation hours.
Battery Charger Selector Switch - Trickle and Boost Charge Selector
Battery Charger Ammeter
Indicator - Not in Auto
- Fail to Start
- Low Oil Pressure
- High Engine Temperature
- Over speed
- Reverse Power
- Low Fuel
- On Load
Audible Alarm
Emergency Stop Button
Motor Driven Circuit Breaker
Auxiliary Fuses
Grounding Bus
The Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) panels shall be of cubicle construction wall mounted with front
access and shall be adequately ventilated to suit the ambient temperatures of 27-320C
All the equipment shall be suitable for use in tropical conditions.
218
2.5 Sound Acoustic Enclosure:
The sound attenuated canopy shall be the fully weatherproof, sound attenuated enclosures in order to
withstand the rough weather and operation common in Freetown. It shall be supplied with sound
pressure levels (dBA) at 1500RPM (50HZ) 1M Full Load 72 dBA and NO Load 71 dBA.
The canopies features shall include:
1. Highly corrosion resistant construction
2. Excellent access for maintenance
3. Security and Safety provisions (emergency lighting, warning signs, emergency pushbuttons,
etc.)
4. Transportability
5. Residential Silencer
6. Suitable protection against dust and insect penetration
7. Adequate ventilation.
2.6 Engine Cooling:
Cooling shall be provided by an engine mounted fan assisted radiator suitably sized for tropical
conditions with pusher fan driven directly from the engine.
The cooling system shall be of the pressure type to ensure minimum water loss. Cooling system shall
be calculated and sized in accordance with PRIME rating at the outdoor temperature of 30°C.
2.6 Alternators:
AC Alternator shall be brushless screen protected, fan ventilated drip – proof, single bearing and rated
according to the aforementioned sizes at 0.8 power factor 400/230 volts, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50Hz when
operating at 1500 rpm, all as manufactured by Stamford Newage International or approved equal to BS
5000 Part 3, VDE 0530, UTE 5100 CEMA, IEC 34-1 CSA 22-2, NEMA MGI – 22 and AS 1359.
Voltage regulation shall be maintained within the limits of + 2½% from a no load to full load condition
including from cold to hot, at any power factor between 0.8 lagging and unity and inclusive of a speed
variation of 4½%.
Response to transient load changes shall be such that they recover to within 3% of the steady state value
in 0.3 seconds upon application of full load at a power factor of 0.8 lagging.
Rotor, Stator, exciters and any other winding shall be suitably impregnated with Class H thermosetting
insulating varnish to allow normal operation in tropical climates. Telephone interference suppression
shall be incorporated to comply with BS 4999 Part 4.
AC Alternator shall be fitted with Coastal Insulation Protection, direct driven centrifugal fan, and Anti
Condensation Heater
2.8 Complete Generator:
The engine and alternator shall be close coupled and mounted on a fabricated steel base frame with
built in daily fuel tank, 250 litres minimum capacity, or 12hours minimum operation at full load, with
leakage detection system and/or double wall type. The whole unit shall be mounted on at least 6 anti-
vibration mountings housed in the Weatherproof Sound Enclosure.
NOTE:
1. 1Nr. 250A ATS-1 with a selector switch, to select between 175kVA Main (Lead) Set and
175kVA Standby (Lag) Set and the common loads feed to ATS-2.
219
2. 1Nr. 250A ATS-2 to select between the common loads from Generator Sets (175kVA
Main Set & 175kVA Standby Set) and the Utility (EDSA) Supply.
2.9 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Deliver equipment on pallets or blocking wrapped in heavy-duty plastic, sealed to protect parts and
assemblies from moisture and dirt. Plug piping, conduit, exhaust, and air intake openings. Protect and
prepare batteries for shipment as recommended by the battery manufacturer.
Store auxiliary equipment at the site in covered enclosures, protected from atmospheric moisture, dirt,
and ground water. Deliver diesel generator sets dry, and provide separate lubricant oil, cooling fluid
and other necessary fluids in separate enclosures ready for the filling at the site.
2.10 Specific Manufacturers
Specific manufacture or trade names mentioned in the Specification are to be strictly adhered to for the
purpose of indicating the required class or quality of material, design of workmanship of fittings and
equipment. In order that parity of tendering may result, the Vendor shall use any such particular fitting
or equipment as a basis of pricing. The Vendor may submit for the Project Architect’s approval any
fitting or equipment of equal quality workmanship or design from any other established manufacturer,
but none shall be ordered before written approval of it is obtained from the Project Architect and any
variation which would entail additional cost will not be permitted. The Project Architect’s decision on
whether to accept or not, an alternative make shall be deemed final.
The Vendor shall state on the Bid form any proposals that he wishes to make under this clause together
with the savings, if any. In the event of the Project Architect approving any such proposal an appropriate
Variation Order will be issued by the Project Architect to the Vendor.
The Vendor shall be responsible for the specified performance of all fittings or equipment and it is
therefore recommended that he should obtain guarantees of performance from the Suppliers.
Where the quality of materials is not specified, they shall be the best of their respective kinds and
samples or full details shall be submitted to the Project Architect for approval before use.
All plant and materials shall be new and the Vendor shall ensure that no materials or equipment are
fitted which show signs of corrosion or faults or are damaged in any way.
220
3.0 SPECIFICATIONS OF AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH (ATS)
The Power-Command transfer switches shall include unique features that provide flexibility for
the intended applications. The microprocessor-based controls shall optimize performance while
simplifying operation and service.
For the ADB Field Office Building in Freetown having two (2) standby generator sets (double standby)
and a utility feed, when the utility fails, the standby generators transfer switch (250Amps ATS-1)
controls the feeds from the 2 x 175kVA Generators based on an established priority (load demand),
send a start signal to the primary duty standby generator and transfers the load. If the primary standby
generator fails, the transfer switch with the selector switch in the right position sends a start signal to
the second generator set and transfers the load.
If both Standby Generators feeds fail, the utility transfer switch sends a signal to the utility contactor
(250Amps ATS-2) to transfers the load.
The transfer switches shall give a range of controls for safe, dependable and easy-to-use power transfers
for these modes.
It must be noted that the applications for which these generators are operated determines the
nature of the load demand control parameters. The signals are determined when the pre-
established priority (load demand) parameters on site have been established and agreed upon by
the Bank.
Open-transition transfer:
Break-before-make switching action: Independent break-before-make action is used for both
4-pole/switched neutral switches
For the most basic type of transfer; the connection to one source is opened before the connection
to the second source is closed to allow the open-transition transfer control monitors both sources
and initiates the transfer — avoiding out-of-phase closing.
For open-transition operation, transfer switches system shall incorporate Power Command
microprocessor control and a reliable High-Endurance Mechanism and shall be ideal for utility-
to-genset and genset-to-genset applications
Programmed-transition transfer:
Similar to open-transition transfer: The switch opens the connection to one source, pauses for an
adjustable delay time, and then closes the connection to the second source. The adjustable time between
sources allows the decay of residual voltage before connecting to the second source.
Bypass-isolation transfer switches:
Shall be ideal for critical-need applications where any disruption of supply power, even for routine
maintenance, is unacceptable.
The bypass-isolation automatic transfer switch shall combine features of our advanced automatic
transfer switch with a closed- door draw out isolation mechanism, a two-source bypass switch and
exclusive microprocessor-based controls. The switches allow maintenance, service and testing of the
automatic transfer switch without disrupting power to critical loads. The resulting power transfer
redundancy helps ensure constant, reliable power for critical applications
221
3.1 ATS Minimum Requirements:
ATS shall be built to withstand thousands of switching cycles, ensuring reliable operation and
meets the following minimum requirements:
(i) Microprocessor control:
Fully-featured microprocessor control is standard with all settings and adjustments
designed for easy operator use via the front display panel for ease of setup and accuracy
(ii) Easy manual operation and Manual operation handle (standard):
Allows manual operation of the switch after proper disconnection of power sources and
also allows manual transfer to any available source at any time.
Plug connections, door-mounted controls, and ample access space, compatible terminal
markings simplify access.
Manual operating handles, shielded termination and over-center type contact mechanisms
allow effective, manual operation under de-energized conditions
(iii) Easy service/access:
Door-mounted controls, ample access space and compatible terminal markings allow for
easy access:
(iv) Positive interlocking:
Mechanical interlocking prevents source-to-source connection through the power
contacts or control wiring. Also prevents simultaneous closing of normal and emergency
contacts
(v) Solenoid:
A powerful and economical solenoid power transfer switches
(vi) Advanced transfers switch mechanism:
True transfer switch mechanism with break-before-make action with Bi-directional linear
motor actuator that provides virtually friction-free, constant-force, straight-line transfer
switch action with no complex gears or linkages
(vii) Continuously rated:
Can be used in applications up to their nameplate rating
(vii) Main contacts:
Heavy-duty long-life, high-pressure silver alloy contacts with separate arcing surfaces
and multi-leaf arc chutes rated for the total system transfer including overload interruption
to withstand thousands of switching cycles without burning, pitting or welding and
provide 100% continuous current ratings
(viii) Permanently mounted instructions:
Allows easy step-by-step operation
(ix) Robust control system design:
Optically-isolated logic inputs and high-isolation transformers for AC power inputs
provide high-voltage surge protection
222
3.3 ATS Command controls
(ATS command controls optimize the reliability and performance of the power generation system
while keeping costs competitive and providing unique capabilities for the entire system)
Note: The automatic transfer switches shall incorporate Power Command microprocessor control and
a reliable High-Endurance Mechanism ideal for Utility (EDSA) – to - Genset and Genset – to -
Genset applications.
S — standard features O — optional features
Sensing
3-Phase voltage-sensing utility S
3-Phase voltage-sensing generator S
Electrical isolation from AC mains S, transformer
Voltage-sensing accuracy +/-1%
O/U voltage-sensing utility S
O/U voltage-sensing generator S
O/U frequency-sensing utility S
Voltage imbalance S
Phase rotation S
Loss of phase S
General features/serviceability
Door-mounted S
Controls isolated from switch during service S
Single control package for sensing/timing S
Voltage surge immunity S
Optically isolated customer I/O S
Method(s) for sensor/timer adjustments Front panel, LED configuration
Number of time/date-stamped events 50
Real-time clock (RTC) S
On-board diagnostics/fault detection S
Field-upgradeable software, PC diagnostics S
Fully adjustable timers, sensors and control parameters S
Mode control key switch interface with control O
Supported voltages
240V; 380-480V S
Transition modes
Programmed transition S
In-phase monitor S
Display/metering/user interface
Display offered/type O, VFD
Front-panel LED status lamps 6-fixed (8 for configuration)
Front-panel test S
Front-panel TD override S
Front-panel lamp test/fault reset S
etN/ASSFront-panel set exerciser S
Color-coded bar graph meters for voltage, current,
frequency, kW and power factor
O
Engine-exerciser clock
Calendar-based exerciser with real-time clock S
Once/week exerciser S
Exerciser via external clock module O
Number of exercise programs 1
Exercise exceptions S, 1
223
Time \delays
Displays timer delay countdown O
Field-adjustable time delays S
Time-delay engine start S
Time-delay transfer (normal to emergency) S
Time-delay retransfer (emergency to normal) S
Time-delay engine cool down S
Time-delay elevator pre-transfer S
Time-delay programmed transition (delayed neutral) S
Time-delay override/bypass feature S
Automatic generator-generator changeover timer S
Customer inputs/outputs
Remote test with load/transfer to generator O
Remote engine start O
Transfer inhibit S
Re-transfer inhibit S
Generator (source-2) common alarm S
Utility (source-1) common alarm S
Panel security lock S
Generator battery charger status input S
Remote time delay override/bypass S
Remote lamp test/fault reset O
Bypass switch position contacts S
Generator interface
Generator (1) start contact (relay) S
Generator (2) start contact S
Relay outputs
Generator Source-1 connected S
Generator Source-2 connected S
Generator Source-1 available S
Generator Source-2 available S
ATS not in auto S
Test/exercise active O
Pre-transfer/load disconnect S, relay drives
Failure to disconnect S
Failure to close/open S
Approval code/standards
UL1008 S
ISO 8528 S
IEC S
CSA, NFPA, IEEE S
IBC S
NEMA ICS 10 S
224
4.0 PROPOSED THREE SOURCE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS DESIGN FOR SIERRA LEONE
OFFICE AFRICA DEVELOPMENT BANK:
BLOCK SCHEMATIC
NOTE:
1. 250Amps ATS 1 shall be equipped with a selector switch to select between any of the 175KVA, 140kW
KVA Generator Sets and.
2. 250Amps ATS 2 shall operates with the common load from either 175KVA, 140kW Generator Sets
and the Mains Supply (EDSA)
225
SPECIFICATION FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF 1
X 8 PASSENGER ELECTRIC LIFT FOR OFFICE BUILDING AT REGENT ROAD, HILL
STATION, FREETOWN FOR SIERRA LEONE FIELD OFFICE OF THE AFRICAN
DEVELOPMENT BANK (ADB)
226
1 X 8 PASSENGER ELECTRIC LIFT FOR OFFICE BUILDING AT REGENT ROAD, HILL
STATION, FREETOWN FOR SIERRA LEONE FIELD OFFICE OF THE AFRICAN
DEVELOPMENT BANK (ADB)
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION
CONTENTS
1 CONDITION OF CONTRACT AND PRELIMINARIES
2 TERMS AND INFORMATION
3 SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT
4 MACHINE ROOM EQUIPMENT
5 TECHNICAL AND CONSTRUCTION DETAILS OF EQUIPMENT
6 WORK PROGRAMME
7. SUMMARY TENDER
227
1.0 Condition of Contract and Preliminaries
1.01 Names of Parties and Definitions
1.02 Instructions for Tender
1.03 Form of Contract
1.04 Regulations and Quality of Work
1.05 Drawings, Specification, Orders and Other Particulars
1.06 Equipment and Materials
1.07 Technical and Construction Details of Equipment
1.08 Site Inspection
1.09 Cost of Testing Materials
1.10 Protecting, Drying and Cleaning the Work
1.11 Defects Liability and Maintenance Period
1.12 Assignments or Sub-Letting
1.13 Target Programme
2 0 Terms and Information
2.01 Schedule of Builders and Electrical Works (To be included as part of the contract)
2.02 Builders Works in the Lift Well
2.03 Electrical Works
2.04 Sub-Contractor to Note
3.0 Schedule of Equipment
3.1 Lift 1
4.0 Machine Room Equipment
4.01 Lift Machine (Electric Lifts)
4.02 Motor
4.03 Hydraulic Lifts – Machinery and Pump Unit
4.04 Power Control
4.05 Control System
4.06 Controller
4.07 Over speed Governor to Car
4.08 Machine Location Switch
4.09 Car Enclosure and Frame
4.10 Car Frame
4.11 Safety Gear
4.12 Car Enclosure
4.13 Internal Finishes
4.14 Load Details
4.15 Signal and Operating Devices
4.16 Car and Landing Entrances Equipment
4.17 Car and Landing Door Arrangement
4.18 Automatic Power Operation of Car Door
4.19 Signal and Operating Fixtures
4.21 Locking Devices and Switches for Car and Landing Entrances
4.22 Lift Shaft, Counterweight and Pit
4.23 Guides and Fixings
4.24 Buffers
4.25 Suspension Ropes
4.26 Counterweight and Screen
4.27 Emergency Signal
4.28 Limits and Switches
4.29 Electrical Requirements
4.30 Main Switch and Wiring
228
4.31 Drawing, Notices, Painting Etc.
4.32 Plans and Drawing
4.33 Notices Etc.
4.34 Painting
4.35 Silent Operation
4.36 Entrance Barrier
4.37 Radio and Television Suppression
4.38 Schedule of Testing and Finishes
4.39 Commissioning
4.40 Finishes Schedule
4.41 Lift Maintenance
4.42 Annual Maintenance Agreement
5.0 Technical and Construction Details of Equipment
5.01 Lifts 1 and 2
6.0 Work Programme
6.01 Lift Programme
6.02 Start on Site
6.03 Summary of Tender
229
1.0 CONDITION OF CONTRACT AND PRELIMINARIES
1.1 Names of Parties and Definitions
The names of parties and definitions used in the contractor documents shall have the meanings attached
to them as defined below.
i The “Employer” shall mean African Development Bank (ADB)
ii The “Consultants Engineer” shall mean Realini Bader Associates Limited, 72 Wellington Street,
Freetown, or such person or persons as they shall appoint for the purpose of the contract.
iii The “Main Contractor” shall mean as appointed by the Employer.
iv The “Sub-Contractor” shall mean the firm appointed to carry out the total contract between the
Main Contractor and Himself.
v The “Contract” shall mean the contract between the Main Contractor and the Sub-contractor, and
shall include the specification and drawings defined herein, the completed form of tender, the letter
of acceptance of the tender, together with any related correspondence mentioned in the letter of
acceptance of the tender.
vi “Approved” shall mean approved in writing by “The Project Architect”
vii “BS or BSS” – The letters BS or BSS shall mean the latest British Standard (BS5655) – including
any amendments in force at the time of tendering) where reasonably practical as defined by the
Engineer.
viii The expression “work” shall mean to include the whole of the installation and commissioning
necessary to conform to the provisions contained in the specification including buildings and
electrical works as detailed under Section 2.
1.2 Instructions for Tender
1.2.1 A tender is invited for the installation and maintenance of one (1) 8-passenger electric lift, as detailed
and described in this specification
1.2.2 This specification indicates generally the requirements of the installation. Where the sub-contractor’s
tender, for carrying out their work is based on any deviations from the specification, in respect of any
materials, method of installation, performance, Builders work or the like which is due solely to the sub-
contractor’s own standard design requirements, such deviations shall be clearly set out in a covering
letter of schedule to be submitted with this tender.
1.2.3 No alteration to the text of these contract tender documents will be permitted. Any unauthorised
alterations or qualifications will be disregarded and may result in disqualification of the tender. Any
qualifications that may be printed on the sub-contractor’s letter paper which may accompany the tender
will not be accepted unless these are agreed in writing by the Project Architect after consultation with
the Main Contractor.
1.2.4 The Main Contractor does not bind himself to accept either the lowest or any tender, nor to reimburse
the sub-contractor for any expenses he may incur in the preparation of such tender.
1.2.5 No guarantee can be made that the work will proceed as planned or that the project will not be
postponed or cancelled and the employer will not accept any claim from the contractor for expenses,
loss of profit, or other such considerations.
230
1.2.6 In the absence of such a covering letter or schedule it will be deemed that the price quoted by the sub-
contractor includes for the whole of the work to be carried out as specified herein and no such later
requests for deviation will be considered.
1.3 Form of Contract
1.3.1 The terms and conditions applicable to this contract shall be based on the terms and conditions issued
by the Project Quantity Surveyor (QS) with the tender documents.
1.4 Regulations and Quality of Work
1.4.1 The design, manufacture and installation of the one (1) 8-passenger electric lift and associated
components shall be to the satisfaction of the Project Architect (Manager) who reserves the right to
inspect any part of the lift installation whether on the site or at the sub-contractor works yard and to
call for samples of any materials it is proposed to use on this contract. The sub-contractor shall identify
which elements of this contract will be sub-let at the time of tendering.
1.4.2 The completed installation shall comply in all respects with the latest current editions of the following
British Standards where reasonably practical, except where modified by this specification and any other
related document in the invitation to tender. Where this specification differs from those Standards and
Codes, the provision of this specification shall prevail.
(a) British Standard 5655 Electric/Hydraulic Lifts – all relevant parts thereof.
(b) British Standard 5000, the Electrical performance of rotating machines.
(c) British Standard 329, Wire Ropes for lifts and hoists.
(d) British Standard 6977, Braided Travelling cables for electric and hydraulic lifts.
(e) British Standard Code of Practice BS5655 Part 6, 1985, Electric lifts for passenger, goods and
service.
1.4.3 Additionally, the lift installation shall comply with any other British Standard not mentioned above
together with the appropriate mandatory clauses of the Health and Safety at Work Act, 1994, Building
Industries National Code of Practice for Electric Passenger and Goods Lifts, the regulations for the
Electrical Equipment of Buildings (Latest Edition). The completed installation shall also comply with
any requirements and/or regulations of the Local Electricity Board, London Fire Brigade, principal Fire
Insurance Companies, and other authorities having jurisdiction. The electrical installation shall
conform to the 17th Edition of the IEE Wiring Regulations.
1.4.4 Any work required under this specification, the quality and/or method of installation of which has not
been specified shall conform to good practice for the type of work involved.
1.5 Drawing, Specification, Orders and Other Particulars
1.5.1 This specification shall be read in conjunction with schedules, specification, and general conditions of
contract and preliminaries being construed as a whole and the sub-contractor shall carry out such work
accordingly.
1.5.2 The sub-contractor will be held responsible for the works embodied therein and shall take all necessary
particulars and provide at his own expense all other necessary work and detailed drawings of equipment
specified or to be supplied herein, copies of which must first be submitted for approval by the Project
Architect before the work is put into hand. Other drawings to be provided by the sub-contractor are set
out in Section 4.6.
1.5.3 The sub-contractor shall be responsible for any drawings, specifications, orders or any other particulars
supplied by him and for any discrepancies, errors, or omissions in the same.
1.6 Equipment and Materials
1.6.1 This contract includes for the supply and installation of one (1) 8-passenger electric passenger lifts.
Materials to be manufactured, supplied and installed and the whole of the work necessary, commencing
from the electrical mains supply board, all in accordance with the sections of this specification whether
231
specifically mentioned, inferred, or otherwise together with the remedying of defects, periods as
provided herein.
1.6.2 The sub-contractor shall base his tender on the materials and manufacturers (where indicated) as
detailed in Section 4.6 of the specification. Where materials and manufacturers have not been specified
the materials shall be of the highest possible grades of their respective kinds and shall conform where
relevant to the British Standard for such materials.
1.6.3 The Project Architect will only consider all unspecified materials proposed for use by the sub-
contractor on this contract if in his opinion the material is acceptable and is equal in all respects and is
in no way inferior to that which manufacturer has specified. The decision as to whether any material is
“equal” or “approved” will be determined solely by the Project Architect whose decision in this respect
will be final.
1.6.4 All specified materials to be used under this contract shall be new, shall comply fully with the relevant
BSS and on delivery to site shall not be removed without the consent of the Project Architect. If any
material is considered by the Project Architect to be objectionable, unsuitable or inferior in quality,
damaged, or not of the required standard it shall be removed by the sub-contractor forthwith at his own
expense. Suitable material approved by the Project Architect shall be substituted for any rejected.
1.6.5 The sub-contractor shall remove from the site all his packing cases, rubbish and other debris and prevent
the accumulation of such materials. On completion all parts shall be left clear.
1.7 Technical and Construction Details of Equipment
1.7.1 The information to be supplied by the sub-contractor in section 5 of this specification shall be
completed by the sub-contractor and submitted by him at the time of his tender together with any
illustration or other details requested herein.
1.8 Site Inspection
1.8.1 The sub-contractor shall be deemed to have visited the site before submitting his tender and to have
satisfied himself as to the local conditions with regard to accessibility of the site, the full extent and
nature of the work, the supply of and conditions affecting labour, messing, toilets, carriage, cartage,
unloading, tools, accommodation, scaffolding, hoisting, craneage, ladders and anything which may
influence his tender for carrying out the total work to the true extent of this contract, whether the work
is definitely mentioned herein, shown on the drawings, or not, providing the same are reasonably and
obviously to be inferred therefore.
1.8.2 No subsequent claims for any extra costs incurred by the sub-contractor in carrying out works not
included for in this specification but the necessity for which could have been foreseen by the sub-
contractor by inspecting the site will be considered by an Project Architect.
1.8.3 Cost of Testing Materials
1.8.4 The Project Architect shall have the power to charge against and recover (by reduction or otherwise)
from the sub-contractor the cost of testing materials or articles which may have to be submitted to the
Project Architect for testing and which upon test are found to be faulty or not in accordance with the
requirements of this specification. The cost of such testing shall be added to the contract sum where
tests for the components comply with the requirements of this contract.
1.9 Protecting, Drying and Cleaning the Work.
1.9.1 The sub-contractor shall be responsible for the protection of his work during execution and for any
necessary casing and protection after the sub-contractors work has been executed.
232
1.9.2 At the expiration of the contract, the sub-contractor shall completely clean the lift car interior, landing
entrance, all signal and operating fixtures and leave in pristine condition to the approval of the Project
Architect and the employer (ADB).
1.9.3 Where installed work is considered to have been damaged by others, the evidence shall be immediately
brought to the attention of the Project Architect. Liability of any damage will be allocated together with
the responsibility for reimbursement of any expenses.
1.9.4 The Project Architect must be notified of the damaged work, which will be subject to inspection before
remedial work commences.
1.9.5 In the event of any conduit, cable run or other items of equipment being damaged after installation and
prior to the works being handed over, the sub-contractor will be responsible for ensuring that such items
are reinstated in a perfect condition.
1.9.6 The sub-contractor shall cover up and protect the work from rough treatment, dust, grit, frost or injury
from other causes.
1.9.7 The lift equipment shall be handed over to the main contractor at the completion date by the sub-
contractor perfectly clean of all surplus oil and grease and with all finishes unimpaired.
1.10 Defects Liability and Maintenance Period
1.11 The Contractor shall be responsible under the Contractor for addressing/correcting all of the
(Mechanical Engineering Services (MES) Contract Works defects occurring within a period of SIX
MONTHS, commencing from the date of the PRACTICAL COMPLETION CERTIFICATION.
During the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall provide prompt and effective “call back”
service to attend to any urgent faults which may develop and which would affect the day-to-day
function of the building complex.
The Contractor shall retain a written log on site recording the details of the defect – i: e, date
notified/date attended, fault identified, action taken, together with any ongoing investigations/remedial
work.
The sub-contractor shall include for giving full instructions as to the running and operation of the lift
to the employer’s appointed staff.
1.12 Assignments or Sub-Letting
1.12.1 The sub-contractor shall not without the written consent of the Main Contractor or the Project Architect
which consent may be given subject to such conditions, if any, as the employer may think fit to impose,
transfer, assign or sub-let, directly or indirectly, the contractor or any portion thereof for the benefit or
burdens thereof to any person, company or firm.
1.12.2 Provided that nothing in this condition shall operate to prevent the sub-contractor from sub-letting any
portion of the contract where such sub-letting is customary in the trade. The Project Architect will
require written details of the major sub-contractor including a schedule of information as requested in
item 1.4.1 before orders are placed.
1.12.3 Where sub-letting takes place the sub-contractor shall be responsible for the observance of these
conditions by the sub-contractor and shall be responsible to the employer in respect of any claim
resulting from his work.
233
1.12.4 Target Programme
The agreed programme for the completion of this contract is of the essence and the sub-contractor must
ensure that he has sufficient and adequate materials and labour to meet his commitment to this contract.
2.0 TERMS AND INFORMATION
2.1 Schedule of Builders and Electrical Works (To be Included as Part of the Contract)
2.1.1 Builders Work in Machine Room
The Main Contractor shall be responsible where applicable for the cutting and forming of holes as
marked out on site by the sub-contractor.
2.1.1 All holes, within the motor room floor shall be fitted with steel plates to reduce the apertures to the
operating minimum and provide a half hour fire resistance.
2.1.2 The hoist machinery shall be protected by a fixed handrail fitted around the designated area. The
standard size of the handrail should be 1200mm from finished floor level and have an intermediate rail
fitted at 600mm from floor level.
2.2 Builders Work in The Lift Well
2.2.1 Provides substantially constructed hoardings to protect the lift erector and lift equipment. It shall be
constructed with timber framing with plywood panels. The temporary protection shall be so designed
not to obstruct the means of access or escape and shall be securely fixed to the building fabric as
required. The access door to have displayed a notice stating “DANGER – MEN WORKING” with
minimum 2” characters.
2.2.2 Provide landing push station apertures to accommodate the combined push and indicator assemblies.
2.2.3 Provide general attendance on the lift engineers throughout the installation period.
2.2.4 Make good all adjacent walls, ceilings and floor finish should they be inadvertently damaged by the
sub-contractor and redecorate around the openings. The sub-contractor shall be responsible for ensuring
that all other finishes within the immediate landing area are suitably protected against damage by his
personnel or equipment as necessary.
2.2.5 Provide an enclosed lockable area adjacent to lift motor room at basement level to create a working
area.
2.2.6 All shaft division screens to be provided to a height of not less than 2.5m.
2.3 Electrical Works
2.3.1 A mains supply shall be installed by others for the lift and shall terminate in a Fuse Switch Disconnector
mounted in the lift motor room. The supply shall be suitably rated for one lift.
2.3.2 A lift ancillary’s distribution board installed by other shall provide supplies for car signals, car lighting,
emergency lighting and shaft lighting. The position of the distribution boards shall be directly above
the mains isolator adjacent to the machine room door.
2.3.3 Provide task lighting within the machine room and lift shaft throughout the course of the erection.
2.3.4 Provide in an agreed position in the machine room an auto-recharge unit for lift car emergency lighting
and alarm bell. The supply for this facility shall be from the lift ancillaries’ distribution board and the
sub-contractor shall install the necessary wiring from the secondary side of these devices. The device
shall be activated by the loss of the car light supply.
234
2.4 Sub-Contractor To Note
2.4.1 The sub-contractor shall install all the necessary wiring for lift and accessories as defined in this
specification, in accordance with the IEE regulations and the 17th Edition and current practices. All
electricians to be Electricity Distribution Services Authority (EDSA) approved sub-contractors.
2.4.2 The sub-contractor will be responsible for hoisting, craneage, handling and off-loading the lift
equipment and moving them into position into the machine room, control area and lift well.
2.4.3 The only storage available will be in the enclosed lockable areas adjacent to the motor room at
Basement Level.
2.4.4 The sub-contractor shall be in accordance with the Health and Safety at Work Act, be responsible for
ensuring that all landing entrances are properly protected whilst his engineers/technicians are carrying
out the works detailed in this specification.
2.4.5 Access for delivery of materials by arrangement.
3.0 SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT
3.1 8-Passenger Electric Lifts - 1
Electric Passenger Lift (Underslung)
Load 630Kg (8p)
Speed 1.6m / s (levelling + /-6mm)
Travel 12m
Stops/Openers 3 in line
Shaft 2.5m wide x 2.5m deep (for 1 lift)
Headroom 2.1m
Pit 1500 mm
Car 1270mm wide x 1400mm deep
Car doors 800mm x 2m centre opening
Landing doors 800mm x 2m centre opening
Position indicator in car and at ground floor
Hall lanterns All floors
NOTE:
Tenderer are requested to visit the site to confirm the dimensions of the existing lift facilities at the
Bank
4.0 MACHINES ROOM EQUIPMENT
4.1 Lift Machine (Electric Lift)
4.1.1 The lift machine shall comply with the following:
(1) The worm shaft and worm shall be machined from a single steel forging and the worm wheel rim shall
be centrifugally cast phosphor bronze hobbed to provide accurate alignment with the worm.
(2) The ratio of sheave diameter to worm wheel pitch circle diameter shall not be less than 1.75:1
(3) The winding machine, motor and divertor shall be mounted on a prefabricated steel raft. The sub-
contractor shall provide and install suitable density rubber sound absorbent isolation to prevent the
transmission of noise and vibration from the machine and steelworks to the building structure.
(4) The lift shall stop with + or –6mm of the selected floor.
235
4.1.2 Motor
The hoisting induction motor shall be suitable for the supply detailed in Section 3 hereof, and shall
have a speed not exceeding 1500rpm. It shall run at all loads without appreciable noise or hum and the
rotor shall be specially constructed for variable A.C operation. The motor will bear the motor makers
nameplate.
4.1.3 The hoisting motor shall have a duty cycle of not less than 240 starts per hour.
4.1.4 Traction and Divertor Sheaves
4.1.5 The traction sheave shall have a diameter of not less than 600mm. Means shall be provided to prevent
the suspension ropes leaving their grooves.
4.1.6 Hydraulic Lifts-Machinery and Pump Unit
This equipment shall be of compact design, of ample capacity for the duty, fitted with generous size
bearings. It shall be of a type designed for the particular purpose, properly aligned and balanced to
eliminate vibration.
The lift machinery shall in general be rated for running on lift duty and be of adequate size for operating
the lift at the contract speed when carrying the contract load.
The pump unit shall be complete with valve assembly incorporating control and emergency safety
features.
Hydraulic piping and fittings shall be designed for use on hydraulic systems and shall be of first class
quality.
Hose connections shall be reinforced with wire braid and oil resistant.
The ram shall be cylindrical with a smooth external surface.
Hydraulic oil of high quality shall be used and provided under the contract.
The oil tank shall be vented to atmosphere.
4.1.7 Power Control
The lift power control system shall be of variable speed AC type, utilising full voltage control or direct
current braking.
4.1.8 Control to the motor shall incorporate adequate means to smooth the transition from high to low speed;
alternatively, a suitable flywheel will be fitted to the motor.
4.1.9 The power system shall prevent the machine starting unless the car doors are in the closed position and
all landing doors in the close position.
4.1.10 Control System
A full collective control system shall be provided with the following features:
i. The control system shall be micro-processor based.
ii. Car and landings calls should be stored in the system after operation of the respective push.
iii. The car and landings calls will be cancelled marginally before or during the opening cycle at the
appropriate landing.
iv. Car calls should be answered in the order in which destinations are reached, irrespective of the
sequence in which they are registered.
v. The car will incorporate an automatic load weighing feature which will detect the 10% overload
situation, this shall prevent the door closing and the lift moving in addition to illuminating an
indicator and sounding a buzzer fitted in the car station
236
4.1.11 Controller
The control equipment shall be totally enclosed in a steel cabinet with louvered ventilation and a hinged
door to the front only shall be fitted for exposing all components for accessibility.
4.1.12 All components, relays, contactors, fuses, overloads, etc. shall be suitably identified and a nomenclature
listing the various functions shall be provided with the circuit diagrams.
4.1.13 The control circuit voltage shall be either AC or DC but whichever system is utilised, the secondary
side of any relay circuits shall be earthed via a common link/bar on the panel. All relays and contactors
shall fail-safe.
4.1.14 Any timing devices incorporated with the design must utilize capacitors, resistors, thyristors or other
similar devices. Mechanical or oil damped timing devices will not be accepted.
4.1.15 All hoist motor windings must be protected with thermistors/overloads that are fully adjustable to trip
approximately 20 seconds after a fault condition occurs.
4.1.16 A device shall be incorporated within the panel to detect a loss of one phase or a phase reversal. Where
the device detects one of the above conditions then a switch relay or contactor shall become open circuit
removing the supply to all contactors and control panel circuitry.
4.1.17 A test facility incorporating the direction buttons only as detailed in 4.2.13 shall be incorporated in the
control panel. This facility shall not override the car top control station.
4.1.18 Over speed Governor to Car
An over speed governor with governor rope and tension pulley frame hall be provided designed to meet
the respective tripping speed specified in the current edition of the BS5655.
4.1.19 Machine Location Switch
A “stop/run” switch is to be installed adjacent to the machine. This device shall be identical to the pit
isolation switch, which is to be fitted at a height to allow easy and safe operation. The device is to be
labelled as for the pit switch.
4.2 CAR ENCLOSURE FRAME
4.2.1 Car Frame
The car frame shall sustain a fully loaded car without permanent deformation fitted with oil retardant
car isolation rubbers of suitable resistance and density. Four self-adjustable sliding types guide shoes
fitted with renewable liners shall be used.
4.2.2 The “load weighing” switch shall be fixed to the underside of the car platform. Alternatively, an
electronic measuring device fitted to the crosshead will be acceptable. A data plate expressing the lift
details shall be fixed to the car crosshead.
4.2.3 Safety Gear
The safety gear fitted to the car frame shall be of the progressive type and operated by an over speed
governor designed such that the gear will release by lifting the car. The gear to be tested to BS5655 and
requisite certificate provided.
4.2.4 Car Enclosure
The enclosure shall be constructed in timber and /or steel which shall be treated with an anti-drumming
compound. For timber cars the external surfaces to be lined in 0.018swg sheet steel painted black,
alternatively, painted with an equivalent fire retardant paint.
237
4.2.5 Special consideration shall be given to transmission of vibration from the machinery and general shaft
noises. Therefore, where steel cars are installed, anti-drumming and noise absorption pads shall be
bonded to the car exterior.
4.2.6 Internal Finishes
Side walls and Rear Wall Laminated demountable panels to approved design.
Rear wall (passenger lift only)
A tinted safety mirror of the size up to the line of suspended ceiling frame and the full width of the rear
wall shall be fitted in 13mm linish stainless steel with mitred corners.
Handrail (pass. lifts only)
Stainless steel to side and rear walls
Ceiling Indirect lighting incorporating 3 hour maintained emergency car lighting through suspended
ceiling with stainless steel frame divided into two areas, each with egg crate diffusers.
Pass lifts. Timber bumper rail – hardwood on 3 sides.
Floor covering
Pass lifts. Carpet
Pass lifts. 6mm ribbed rubber – black.
Entrance Front 16 SWG patterned/coloured stainless steel
Telephone: A suitable stainless steel carpet shall be provided to accommodate an approved
instrument.
Ventilation: The roof of the enclosure above the suspended ceiling shall have concealed
apertures provided above the line of the side and rear wall finishes fitted with
metal cowls externally.
Drapes and hooks Provide suitable drapes and hooks.
4.2.7 Final Car Details will be Subject to Approval.
The car roof shall so be designed and constructed as to withstand without permanent deformation
personnel working thereon, with at least one clear area for standing of a minimum of 0.23 metres square,
with the lesser dimension a minimum of 0.25m. It shall be extended where required to prevent any void
being created to the rear of the car.
4.2.8 The car lights will be controlled from a switch in the machine room provided under the electrical
requirements of this contract.
4.2.9 Load Details
The load details shall be engraved in the car station panel. This together with the data plate on the car
crossheads shall be expressed in metric characters to BS5655 dimensions and filled with an epoxy resin.
4.2.10 Signal and Operating Devices
The car operating station shall be fitted within the car front return and the faceplate secured by non-
visible fixings. A key operated independent service switch, door open and alarm buttons shall be
provided in addition to the call pushes.
238
4.2.11 The push buttons shall be of a single column arrangement. The key switches, door open and alarm
button and the overload indicator shall all be of the same module. All faceplates shall be of stainless
steel.
4.2.12 A call registered illuminated signal shall be incorporated within the car and landing push buttons.
4.2.13 An alphanumeric digital car position indicator will be provided within the car station panel.
4.2.14 On the car a mechanic control station containing maintenance and testing switches, direction push
buttons and a 12-ampere BS 1363 socket outlet. A 40 watt, pearl lamp of the ‘rough service’ type
complete with substantial wire guard shall be fitted on the control station for the use of maintenance
engineer, the lamp being supplied by the sub-contractor.
4.2.15 Extra costs to be indicated in the offer for the supply of Braille markings on all operation faceplates
coupled with speech synthesisers in lift car.
4.3 CAR AND LANDING ENTRANCES EQUIPMENT
CAR AND LANDING DOOR ARRANGEMENT
4.3.1 The car and landing doors shall comply with the following.
(i) Be two centre stainless steel sliding doors, treated internally with anti-drumming compound.
(ii) Have a profiled section metal sensitive edge protection device fitted to the leading edge of the car
door only, details to be supplied in Section 5 of the specification.
(iii) Give a clear opening as indicated in Section 4.3.
(iv) Sills – aluminium.
(v) Fascia boards to the landing sills of steel construction of not less than 16swg the width of the
entrance and full height from the header of one floor to the sill of the floor above.
(vi) The cars shall be fitted with a toe-guard to the car sill of steel construction of not less than 16swg,
the width of the entrance painted as detailed in clauses 5.6.6 to maximum depth to suit the existing
pit dimensions. Modify the existing as required.
(vii) The horizontal distance between the car sill and each landing sill shall not exceed 30mm.
(viii) A single infrared pencil beam light ray shall be fitted to the leading door panel; the projection of
the beam shall be through the leading edge with the smallest practical aperture onto a reflector on
the slam side of the car. The reflector shall be fitted flush within the column. The height of the
beam shall be between 300 – 400mm high. Alternatively provide a Visolux Unit, projecting a
light beam onto a landing area.
(ix) Provide and fix full depth architraves in stainless steel.
4.3.2 Automatic Power Operation of Car Door
A GAL type or equivalent automatic door operator shall be of the highest quality and shall provide
smooth harmonic motion of the car and landing doors. A solid guard shall be fitted to the operator
driving mechanism. The following requirements shall also be maintained:
(i) It shall be driven by an electric motor in both opening and closing directions and tested for
compliance with BS5655 kinetic energy by using an approved device.
(ii) Car door shall only operate on normal service while the car is in the levelling zone of a particular
floor.
(iii) The lift shall normally ‘park’ with the doors closed, but with an option to park open.
(iv) The motor shall stop, reverse and fully re-open the car door in the event of the sensitive edge
protective device or light ray being obstructed or interrupted while closing.
(v) A ‘door open’ button shall be provided in the car and it shall be operative only while the car is
stationary with the car door coupled to a landing door.
239
4.3.3 Signal and Operating Fixtures
(i) All signal and operating boxes shall be fitted with faceplates Stainless steel.
(ii) The landing stations are to consist of single riser of pushes at each floor, of same design and
manufacture as the car pushes. Each shall include indication for call acceptance.
(ii) An alphanumeric digital indicator shall be installed at ground floor, within the landing station
apertures provided.
(iii) Hall lanterns shall be provided at all other floors.
4.3.4 Locking Devices and Switches for Car and Landing Entrances
4.3.4 Provisions shall be made for fully opening each door by an authorised person by the aid of a key to fit
an unlocking device in one door panel, irrespective of the position of the lift car.
4.3.5 The key shall be of steel section material and the access to each lock shall be restricted to this key. No
fixing screws shall be accessible from the landing. The force necessary to operate and release the door
will be such that unauthorised use of the release mechanism (by the use of screw driver, pliers, etc.)
will be more difficult.
4.4 Lift Shaft, Counterweight and Pit
4.4.1 Guides and Fixings
Car and counterweight guides of machined to be as detailed in 5
4.4.2 Buffers
Energy accumulation type buffers shall be installed under the car and counterweight and the sub-
contractor shall supply and install all necessary associated steelwork for the mounting and fixing of
these buffers. The steel buffer supports shall be of robust construction securely fixed between their
respective guides and be of sufficient height to maintain the necessary over travel of the lift, to comply
with BS5655: Part 1 latest edition as far as possible within the existing parameters. The sub-contractor
shall also provide the requisite test certificate for the buffers to comply with BS5644. Concrete
supporting piers will not be acceptable.
4.4.3 Suspension Ropes
The Requirements regarding suspension ropes are as follows:
(i) At least four suspension ropes shall be used. Their normal diameter shall be not less than 11mm.
(ii) They shall be attached to the top of the car frame and the top of the counterweight by means of
bulldog grips and thimbles used with eyebolts.
4.4.4 Counterweight and Screen
The counterweight is to balance the lift car to 45/50 % of the contract load.
4.4.5 A counterweight screen shall be provided to a height not less than 2.5m high.
4.4.6 Emergency Signal
An audible alarm signal shall be fixed in an approved position above the ground floor landing entrance
within the lift shaft, and on the roof of the lift car.
4.4.7 Limits and Switches
An ‘UP’ limit is to be incorporated in the control circuit so that when the test switch is in the ‘TEST’
position and ‘UP’ button depressed, the car shall stop high enough to facilitate inspection and
maintenance of any equipment at the top of the lift shaft but low enough to ensure that a 6ft. tall person
standing on top of the car shall be in no danger of coming into accidental contact with any overhead
equipment or structure.
240
4.4.8 A robust emergency stop facility to meet the requirements of BS5655 with ‘STOP’ and ‘RUN’ positions
clearly marked shall be supplied and installed in the lift pit, in the machine room adjacent to the
machine. When placed in the ‘STOP’ position, will cause the lift to stop and prevent it being started
until placed in the ‘RUN’ position. The switches to be suitably labelled ‘STOP’ and ‘RUN’.
4.4.9 The lift will have terminal slow down switch or shaft limits to slow down or stop the lift in a controlled
manner at each terminal floor, in the event of a circuitry or selector malfunction.
4.4.10 Any inductor (proximity switch) used on this system shall be identified in Section 5 of this specification
and their proposed operation shall be outlined in the tender documents.
4.5 Electrical Requirements
4.5.1 Main Switch and Wiring
A 3 phase HRC switch fuse shall be provided. The sub-contractor shall install all necessary wiring for
the lift from these units.
4.5.2 All cables, except travelling cables, in the lift shaft shall be enclosed throughout their length in heavy
gauge galvanised steel conduit or in galvanised steel trunking.
4.5.3 All trunking, conduit and associated fittings shall have a galvanised finish and made by a manufacturer
having a licence to use the British Standard Institution Mark. All trunking runs shall be at high level
and shall not run across the machine room floor.
4.5.4 All travelling cables shall run direct from the controller to the lift car termination box. Each flex shall
be looped over a timber collar or steel bar with adequate protection to the cable coverings, excessively
tight bends will not be acceptable.
4.5.5 P.V.C. coated kopex conduit shall be used only as approved by the engineer in cases where it is
necessary to provide for the adjustment or to reduce the transmission of noise and vibration and where
approval is given the conduit shall terminate in suitable couplings which shall positively grip the
flexible conduit, and an additional earth continuity conductor shall be run inside the conduit between
lengths.
4.5.6 All cables shall be manufactured by an approved maker and only one make of P.V.C. or travelling cable
which be used on this installation. All P.V.C. cables shall have a minimum area of not less than 0.35
mm sq.
4.5.7 P.V.C. insulated cable. These cables shall be 450 / 750 grade and insulated with high temperature grade
polyvinyl chloride and shall comply with BS6004 1969.
4.5.8 All travelling cables shall be terminated in the control panel. Where round flexes are fitted they shall
be hung down the lift shaft for at least 24 hours with their ends suitably weighted and free to rotate in
order to relieve these cables from any tendency to twist during service.
4.5.9 In addition to the half way anchorage point, clamps shall be fitted so that these shall be not more than
3m pitch between clamping points above the half-way point up to the machine room.
4.5.10 Test of cables – all cables and travelling cables shall be subjected at the maker’s works to be appropriate
voltage tests, tests for thickness of insulation,
Insulation resistance, fire resistance and flexibility as set out in the appropriate British Standard.
4.5.11 All wiring must comply with the 16th Edition of the IEE Regulations where applicable.
241
4.5.12 Earthing – a separate earth conductor shall be run in all conduit and trunking to every item of electrical
equipment from the earth termination in the control panel. This termination should in turn be connected,
by means of a suitable conductor, to the mains supply earth point.
4.5.13 A separate earth conductor in at least one trailing cable should connect the lift car equipment to the
control panel earth joint. Each section of trunking should be connected to the earth conductor by means
of brass screw, clamp washers, locking washer and nut.
4.6 Drawings, Notices, Paintings Etc.
Plans and Drawings
4.6.1 The sub-contractor must take all necessary dimensions on site during the progress of the works.
4.6.2 Before putting any work in hand the following working drawings shall be submitted for approval of the
engineer.
Item No. of Copies Description
(a) 3 General arrangement and builders work detail, shaft and
machine room
(b) 3 Car enclosure, car doors, landing entrance complete with
frame fixing details. (Where applicable)
(c) 3 Car design, perspective and manufacturing drawings.
4.6.3 After approval, items (a) and (b) five copies of each shall be submitted plus one further copy of each
printed on approved type plastic not less than 0.05mm thick shall be supplied.
4.6.4 On completion of the work, the sub-contractor shall provide and fix in the machine room a suitably
mounted “straight line” and “as wired” set of wiring diagrams of all electrical apparatus of the lift as
actually wired and fitted showing the arrangement and markings of all connections. These diagrams
shall be ozakerline or equivalent finish. A complete set of manuals shall be provided for the employers’
record purposes (2 sets)
NOTICES Etc.
4.6.5 All notices to be in white ivorine or equivalent laminate, with characters 13mm high in red. The word
“Danger” to be in red, 20mm high. The size of notice and wording to meet with the Project Architect
approval
The sub-contractor shall: -
1. Provide and fix on the machine access door the permanent notice required in BS5655: Part 15.4
2. Provide and fix an electric shock notice in the machine room.
3. Provide a rubber mat in front of the controller cabinet and to the rear where access is required.
4. Provide diagrammatic and worded hand winding instructions adjacent to the machine
approximately 450mm long x 300mm high.
5. The pit adjacent to the pit stop switch, a notice warning maintenance personnel of the restricted pit
depth.
6. On car top to warn maintenance personnel of the restricted headroom.
4.6.5 Painting
All equipment shall be suitably prepared, primed, undercoated and then painted with an approved
colour before shipment to site. All shaft steel work shall be painted two coats of black machine paint
after erection.
242
4.6.5 Any steelwork that will not be accessible after erection shall be painted with red oxide paint (paint of
similar protective quality) before installation.
4.6.6 Silent Operation
Every precaution shall be taken by the sub-contractor to ensure quiet operation of the new equipment.
Every precaution shall also be taken to prevent vibration being transmitted to the building structure.
The sub-contractor must indicate in Section 5 the proposed methods he will adopt to obtain quiet
operation.
4.6.7 For the guidance of his main contractor, the sub-contractor shall, during the progress of the work, mark
out the positions of all holes that are not shown on the builders work drawings approved by the engineer.
4.6.8 Entrance Barrier
A removable entrance protection barrier, for use during the maintenance of the lift, shall be provided
and kept on site in the machine room.
4.6.9 The barrier shall be collapsible of sound construction, painted safety yellow, and shall have suitable
worded “DANGER” notices fitted.
4.6.10 Radio and Television Suppression
All electrical equipment shall be provided, as necessary with suppressors to prevent interference to
radio and television equipment within the premises. Upon completion of the lift installation, the sub-
contractor shall notify the British Telecom engineers to test the installation to confirm compliance with
BS800 and shall provide written proof to this effect to the engineer.
4.7 Schedule of Testing and Finishing
4.7.1 Commissioning
The sub-contractor will be required to fully test the whole works to BS5655 after the completion of
installation and to provide all tests weights, thermometers, instruments and personnel to fully
commission the project to the satisfaction of the engineer. Commission should include trail operation
of all parts for fine adjustment, lubrication and the like by the sub-contractor to ensure that the works
are properly commissioned.
a) Specific requirements are as follows:-
(i) The sub-contractor shall, as soon as practicable after the installation is in a state of physical
completion commission and test the same in accordance with the requirements of the
specification. In this clause the term “installation” shall be read to include any completed sub-
contract works or any part (s) thereof, which it may be required to commission, test and/or operate
as separate entities. The sub-contractor shall agree a full commissioning and testing programme
with the engineer. The engineer shall be given 10 full working days notices of the intention to test
or commission any part or section of the works. Only when the sub-contractor has satisfied
himself that the system has been properly regulated and is operating correctly may he offer this
system for inspection. During inspection he will be requested to prove compliance with design
intent.
(ii) The sub-contractor shall make complete records of the tests as carried out and when the tests have
been successfully completed he shall provide the engineer with test records and reports in a
form to be agreed.
(b) Commissioning
The sub-contractor shall be responsible for all the tests to ensure the proper functions and
operations of the lifts under this contract.
243
Before the lifts are accepted and put into service the lifts shall, under the supervision of the
engineer pass all tests, detailed within this clause or as required by the engineer during
commissioning.
i. 10% overload test
ii. 60 minutes full load test
iii. Motor current and speed test
iv. Door inspection and tests
v. Electrical insulation resistance to earth test
vi Earth continuity resistance test
vii. Full operational safety-gear tests
viii. Buffer test full load and speed
ix. Overload test (electrical)
x. Brake test 25% overload
xi. Electrical protection device tests
xii. Levelling device tests
xiii. Car balance tests.
The sub-contractor shall also carry out any other tests required by the engineer in order to prove
that the equipment complies with the contract
Documents, codes and regulations covering equipment supplied under this sub-contract.
Generally the lift shall be made to run under various loading conditions from no load to 10%
overload in order to check its operation and floor levelling accuracy.
The 10 % overload test is to ensure that the equipment installed has ample safety margin above
the rated load incorporated in the design.
The lift shall also be subject to 60 minutes test with the car fully loaded during which it shall stop
at each floor in the up and down direction opening and closing its doors at each stop. The test
shall be continuous, the stops being 10 seconds maximum duration, with the door open. During
the test, the equipment shall not overheat, spark excessively, become noisy or operate in a faulty
manner.
All the tests shall be carried out in the presence of the engineer and the results shall be signed and
recorded in a tabulated form for easy checking and reference.
4.7.2 Finishes Schedule
(i) Car mirrors to be 6mm thick toughened and tinted safety mirror as supplied by Chealsen Artisans
or approval equivalent
4.8 Lift Maintenance
i The lift contractor shall carry out servicing on a lubricate clean and adjust basis, including all
attendances to breakdowns during normal hours of working. Attendance to breakdowns during
normal hours must not exceed 2 hours from the time the call is received by the company. No
attendance unless at the specific request of the employer. Any repairs that cannot readily be
completed during normal hours shall be attended to at immediate commencement of the next
normal working day.
ii If, during the defects liability period, any defect or faults develop which, in the opinion of the
engineer is due to faulty materials, workmanship or design of components, then the lift contractor
shall replace these at his own cost.
244
iii Following acceptance of the completed lift installation, regular maintenance shall be carried out
every month and shall include the cleaning, oiling, greasing, and adjusting of all parts of the lift
and accessories as necessary to ensure satisfactory operation if the lift including checking of
levelling and making any necessary adjustments for a period of 12 months from the date of
acceptance of the lift.
iv The lift contractor will not be permitted to store cleaning materials, grease or oil in the pit or motor
room, and those areas including the lift itself to be kept clean and free from rubbish.
v The sub-contractor shall immediately renew all lamps in and on the lift cars which may be found
at the time of inspection to be defective. Including all shaft lighting lamps
vi Whenever the lift is not available for service whilst the lift contractor is working on or inspecting
it, the lift contractor shall provide and display a suitable notice at each entrance of the lift under
inspection to indicate that the lift is not available for service.
vii Following each inspection a report is to be forwarded to the engineer within one calendar month.
All reports shall:
a) Relate to one inspection of the lift.
b) State clearly the work done and adjustments made and indicate which car and/or landing
indicator lamps if any were renewed at the time of inspection.
c) Certify that the lift is or is not in satisfactory or serviceable condition.
d) Give details of attendance to any breakdowns during the period since the date of the preceding
inspection report.
viii During the maintenance and defects liability period the sub-contractor shall provide all cleaning
materials and necessary lubricants. Throughout this period the sub-contractor must be prepared if
and whenever so required, to make visits during normal hours in case of emergency and
breakdowns and shall indicate in Section 7/C telephone number(s) to be used for such calls.
ix The sub-contractor shall include for giving full instructions as to the running and operation of the
lifts to the employer’s appointed staff.
4.9 Annual Maintenance Agreement
i The successful Tenderer will be required to undertake the annual maintenance of the completed lift
on a fully comprehensive contract for an agreed term, commencing at the expiration of the defects
liability period.
ii Tenderer are to submit a ‘specimen’ maintenance contract for the above lift to accompany their
tender for the said contract works.
iii The annual maintenance agreement will be subject to a separate defects liability period.
iv The maintenance contract shall be calculated on price fluctuations in accordance with N.A.L.M.
indices and shall be received by the engineer on or before the time and date stated in the invitation
to tender.
vi The acceptance of the tender for the new lifts does not bind the employer to accept the tender for
the lift maintenance contract following expiration of the defects liability period.
245
5 TECHNICAL AND CONSTRUCTION DETAILS OF EQUIPMENT
LIFT 1
The following information shall be supplied by the sub-contractor when submitting his tender:
Where items of equipment are being retained, then the relevant details shall be provided below:
GUIDES
Car guide size …………………………………….………………………..………
Maximum pitch of fixings…………………………………….……………………………
Counterweight guide size …………………………………….…………………………
Type of existing fixings …………………………………….…………………………
BUFFERS
Car – No. and type
Counterweight – No. and type……………………………………..…………………………
Rate of retardation – car and Counterweight …………………………………………………
CAR AND FRAME
Approx. weight of new car and sling ……………………………..……………………………
Dimensions of adjustable guide shoes. …………………….……………………………
Construction of guide shoes and type of their …………….……………………………
Type of overload sensing device ……………………………..……………………………
246
DETAILS OF ELECTRO-MECHANICAL LOCKS AND OTHER DOOR SECURING
DEVICES:-
INDUCTOR SWITCHES
Type …………………………………………………………………
Maker ………………………………………….………………………
Number used in this system ……………………………………………….…………………
TYPE OF DOOR SAFETY DEVICES
Type of lock on landings ………………………………………………….………………
Type of emergency release mechanism ………………………………………..…………
Type of door safety edge ……………………………………………………….…………
Type of car/landing door coupler …………………………………………………………
Door gear manufacturer and ty…………………………………………………………………
AUTO-RECHARGE UNIT
Type …………………………………………………………………………
Maker …………………………………….…………………….…………..…
Total power output …………………………………………..………………………………
Consumption of
- Emergency lighting …………………………………………..………………………………
- Alarm bells …………………………………………..…………………………….…
Capacity
(Emergency lighting only
LIFT MACHINE
Maker of main reduction gear ………………………………………………….………………
Pitch circle diameter of worm wheel Ratio……………………………………………………..
Effective diameter of traction sheave …………………………………………………….…….
Effective diameter of divering pulleys…………………………………………………………..
Hoisting motor rating ……………………………………………………………………………
Make of hoisting motor…………………………………………………………………..………
Type of bearing …………………………………………………….……………….……..
Hoisting motor (with full load)-starting ………………ampere
-running ………………ampere
247
MOTOR PROTECTION
Supply…………………………………………………………………………………………
Type……………………………………………………..…………….……………………….
Type for overload to tip on low speed stall ……………………….……………………………
Time for overload to trip on high speed stall…………………………………..…………………
BRAKE ASSEMBLY
Manufacturer ………………………………
Size of shoes …………………………….…
Coil Voltage …………………………….…
Amperage ……………………………….
SUPPLIER OF CAR ENCLOSURE…………………………………………………….
…………………………………………………………………………………………
CONTROLLER Maker of controller ……………………………………
Type ……………………………………
Control of voltage ……………………………………
Method of achieving lamp reliability ……………………………
REGULATOR
Manufacturer (not supplier) ………………….…………………
Type ……………………….……………
248
5.1 PROPOSED METHOD OF MACHINE ISOLATION AND SUPPLIER
NAME OF BUILDER AND ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR
TELEPHONE NUMBER(S) TO BE USED FOR EMERGENCY CALLS
NAMES AND ADDRESS OF PREMISES WHERE LIFT INSTALLATION SIMILAR TO THE
ONE BEING OFFERED MAY BE INSPECTED BY ENGINEER:
This Schedule must be completed in every particular, signed, dated and returned with the Tender and
full details of any deviations from the specification and any other required and necessary information
from the lift contractor to be clearly set out on a separate sheet as an additional schedule of particulars
to be submitted by the lift contractor with his tender.
NAME OR TRADING NAMES OF FIRM TENDERING ………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
ADDRESS……………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
DIRECTORS SIGNATURE…………………..…… DATE…………………...……
249
6.0 WORK PROGRAMME
6.1 LIFT PROGRAMME START ON SITE
1. Delivery date of equipment to site (from receipt of order) ………...weeks
2. Site installation for removable hoardings, builders and electrical
works before lift work commences ………………...weeks
3. Site installation of all lift works ………………...weeks
4. Total period for preparation of drawings, settlement of all details
ordering and delivery of materials and installation of equipment
from receipt of order …………………weeks
5. Lift tender open for acceptance from date of tender ………..………..weeks
We certificate that two electric passenger lifts all in accordance with the preceding specifications is (in
words and figures)
USD = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
NAME OR TRADING NAMES OF FIRM OF TENDERING ……………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………..
ADDRESS……………………………………………………………………………………...
………………………………….…………………………………………………..…………..
………………………………………………………………………………………………….
DIRECTORS SIGNATURE……………………. DATE…………………………
250
6.2 SUMMARY TENDER
OFFICE BUILDING AT REGENT ROAD, HILL STATION, FREETOWN FOR SIERRA
LEONE FIELD OFFICE AT THE AFRICAN DEVELOPMENT BANK (ADB)
LIFT INSTALLATION TENDER
For the whole of the works including the following:-
1. Supply and installation of One Electric Passenger lifts 1
2. Any other item not covered above please detail.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………..
……………………………………………………………………………………..……………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………..………………………
Sub-Total USD………………………………………………
Add 1/39th Main Contractor’s discount.USD........................................................................
Grand Total to be carried to Form of Tender. USD = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
Signature of Tenderer………………………………………….
Name and Address:……………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
Telephone no……………………………………… Date…………………….……….…
251
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF BOREHOLE WITH MAINS/SOLAR
POWERED PUMP COMPLETE WITH PIPE AND ACCESSORIES FOR OFFICE BUILDING AT
REGENT ROAD, HILL STATION, FREETOWN FOR SIERRA LEONE FIELD OFFICE OF THE
AFRICAN DEVELOPMENT BANK (ADB)
252
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONSTRUCTION OF BOREHOLES WITH MAINS/SOLAR
POWERED PUMPS)
[FOR THE BOREHOLE CONSTRUCTION, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REQUIRE THE SERVICES OF A SOUND AND
EXPERIENCE HYDROGEOLOGIST EQUIPPED WITH THE REQUIRED GADGETS TO ASCERTAIN THE PREFERRED
WELL LOCATION]
1. SUMMARY OF WORKS
1.1 PURPOSE
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) describes the process of Borehole-well construction for the
Office Building at Regent Road, Hill Station, Freetown for Sierra Leone Field Office at the African
Development Bank (ADB).
1.2 SCOPE
This SOP is a mandatory document and shall be implemented by the Contractor when constructing the
Solar Powered Borehole well for the ADB Project.
Note: Subcontractors performing work under the ADB Project shall follow this SOP for constructing
the well or may use their own procedure(s) as long as the substitute meets the requirements
prescribed by the ADB Project Quality Management Plan, and is approved by the Project
Architect before the commencement of the designated activities.
1.3 TRAINING
1.3.1 The Contractor’s personnel shall be trained by reading the procedure and the training shall be
documented in accordance with this specification for borehole construction.
1.3.2 The Contractor’s Field Team Leader (FTL) shall monitor the proper implementation of this procedure
and ensure that relevant team members have completed all applicable training assignments in
accordance with the specification.
1.4 SCOPE AND APPLICATIONS
The specifications in the Works under this Contract cover both general and particular technical
specifications with respect to civil and installation works for
(a) Drilling and testing of deep boreholes including installation of PVC casings and screens,
construction of platform for borehole. The borehole to be drilled shall be fitted with casing and
screens of internal diameter 6 inches (150mm). The borehole shall be drilled within the Sierra
Leone Field Office at the African Development Bank (ADB) where there is no existing borehole
for fitting with submersible pumps.
(b) Supplying of materials and installation of pipes and submersible pump. Armatures and fittings,
supply and installation of water distribution system components (e.g. tower/ water tanks, etc.)
and construction of and pump house for distribution networks will be undertaken by the Main
Contractor.
(c) Any other civil works involved
The quantities of works stated in the Bill of Quantities shall be considered as estimated, while the real
quantities will be the one executed, stated in measurements and approved by the Project Architect or
his representative. Payments will be made based upon measured and actually executed works.
The Contractor is obliged to perform all works in accordance with the technical specifications, the
indicated norms and standards or the instructions of the Employer or his representative.
253
1.5 CLAUSE NUMBERS
Unless otherwise stated, all clause numbers refer to the clauses in these Specifications.
1.6 DEFINITIONS
The below-stated terms used in Technical Specifications or BOQ shall be interpreted as following:
Project Architect: Supervising Officer as defined in the Contract (RBAL)
M&E Engineer Mechanical & Electrical Engineer (RBAL)
Building Contractor The Contractor employed by the Employer for the execution of
the Works as defined in the Contract or the Contractor separately
employed by the Employer to execute the builder’s work
associated with the Works as appropriate
Contractor The Contractor employed by the Employer or the Specialist Sub-
contractor employed by the building contractor or the Nominated
Subcontractor nominated by the Project Architect for the
execution of the Works as appropriate
Annular space or annulus The space between the borehole wall and the well casing, or the
space between a casing pipe and a liner pipe.
Annular seal The material, usually cement grout or bentonite, placed in the
space between the borehole wall and the well casing for zone
isolation, especially used to prevent surface contamination from
entering the borehole.
Bentonite/Bentonite annular seal A hydrous aluminium silicate (clay) in slurry, powder, granular,
or pellet form that, when hydrated, provides an impervious seal
between the well casing and the borehole wall. Bentonite may
also be used in a 2% to 5% mixture with Portland Type I, Type
II, or Type I/II cement to form a pumpable grout seal that expands
as the material hardens.
Filter pack Sand, gravel, or glass beads that are uniform, clean, and well-
rounded and generally siliceous that are placed in the annulus of
the well, between the borehole wall and the well intake in order
to prevent formation material from entering through the well.
Grout Cement or bentonite mixtures used in sealing boreholes and wells
and for zone isolation. Only Portland Type I, Type II, and Type
I/II cement is approved for use at investigative sites.
Monitoring well Any well or borehole constructed for the purpose of monitoring
fluctuations in groundwater levels, quality of groundwater, or the
concentration of contaminants in the vadose zone or
groundwater.
254
Silica Sand Washed and sieved sand of a specified size distribution or
gradation composed primarily of silica (e.g., quartz).
Site-Specific Health and Safety Plan A health and safety plan that is specific to a site or ER-(SSHASP)
related field activity that has been approved by an ER health and
safety representative. This document contains information
specific to the project including scope of work, relevant history,
descriptions of hazards by activity associated with the project
site(s), and techniques for exposure mitigation (e.g., personal
protective equipment [PPE]) and hazard mitigation.
Tremie pipe A small-diameter pipe used to carry sand pack, bentonite, or
grouting materials to the bottom of the borehole. Materials are
pumped under pressure or poured to the hole bottom through the
pipe. The pipe is retracted as the annulus is filled.
Turbidity (nephelometric) A measure of the intensity of light scattered by sample
particulates relative to a standard reference suspension. The range
of water turbidity is measured in nephelometric turbidity units
(NTU).
Vadose zone A zone between the ground surface and the water table that
contains water below atmospheric pressure and air or gasses at
atmospheric pressure. Also known as the zone of aeration or
unsaturated zone
Well casing A solid piece of pipe, typically steel, stainless steel or polyvinyl
chloride (PVC), used to keep a well open in either unconsolidated
materials or unstable rock and as a means to contain zone-
isolation materials such as cement grout or bentonite.
Well screen Perforated casing that allows fluids, while minimizing or
eliminating sediment into the well.
Humus (non-bearing surface layer) Layer of soil, which is to be removed because of the inappropriate
physical, mechanical and chemical characteristics
Lean concrete base Layer of lean concrete MB 10 of 10 cm thickness, laid in the
excavations before reinforcement and concreting of the
foundations – isolated footing, continuous footing and the slabs.
Refilling with soil Filling of loose material from the excavation (without humus and
large rocks) used for refilling and compacting to the necessary
degree of compaction
255
1.7 REQUIREMENTS OF SPECIFICATIONS, STANDARDS AND BRAND NAMES
The quality of works shall be in accordance with the Technical Specifications of International Standards
and Manuals of the Material / Equipment. Neither the following Clauses of this Specification, any
descriptions therein nor the quantities shall limit the obligations of the Contractor under the Conditions
of Contract. Where items are not included in the Bill of Quantities (BOQ) for any such requirements
or obligations, the cost of such requirements or obligations shall be deemed to have been spread over
all the items of the Bill of Quantities.
All references to specific standards and codes to be met by the goods, materials and work performed
or tested shall be to the latest edition or revision thereof unless otherwise stated
Where such standards and codes are national, or relate to a particular country or region, other
authoritative standards that ensure a substantially equal or higher quality than the standards and codes
specified will be accepted.
If the Contractor intends to use such alternative Standard, he shall notify the Project Architect/M&E
Engineer thereof, submitting with his notice two (2) copies (in English) of the proposed Standard, and
shall not order any material or perform any work unless and until he has obtained the Project Architect’s
approval of such Standard.
Brand names used in the Specification or on the drawings are only intended to define a standard of
quality and performance and the Contractor may use alternative products of at least equal quality and
capacity.
When the Contractor offers alternatives, the Contractor shall submit to the Project Architect for
approval a statement detailing the alternatives. The Contractor, shall include full technical descriptions,
drawings and specifications, and shall provide such full information as is required to demonstrate to
the Project Architect/M&E Engineer that the alternative is equivalent to the item specified. The
Contractor when called for shall produce any further information that the Project Architect may require.
1.8 RESTRICTIONS TO SPECIFICATION
The technical specifications are giving as a general guideline. Detailed notes and specifications as per
drawings and manufacturers specification as far as applicable will take preference over these technical
specifications and the Contractor shall pay close attention to these details.
The Project Architect on the advice of the M&E Engineer may adjust specifications and details of
drawings during the implementation where found necessary and applicable.
1.9 COORDINATION OF WORKS
The Contractor has to coordinate all works closely with the Main Contractor and the appointed
representative of Project Architect.
The Contractor shall not be entitled to claim any extra payment, time extension or compensation for
interference and delays caused by the adherence to the requirements of this Clause.
For the borehole drilling, the Sub-Contractor has to select the site and a respective form sheet has to be
signed by the Project Architect and the Main Contractor before drilling activities start. The Project
Architect and the Main Contractor shall also be consulted on alternate sitting in the event of an
unsuccessful borehole.
256
1.10 NOTICES, PERMITS
Well in advance of the programmed start of any work which may affect traffic or any existing utilities,
the Contractor shall give advance notice to the Project Architect and the Main Contractor indicating
the type, the exact location, the programmed starting time and the expected duration of the works and
shall provide whatever particulars may be required by the Project Architect and the Main Contractor to
issue any required permits and make all necessary arrangements. The Employer will provide whatever
assistance possible to the Contractor to facilitate the permit procedure which, however, will remain the
sole responsibility of the Contractor.
1.11 WITNESSING AND POST-CONSTRUCTION CLEARANCES
It is expected that the issue of these permits will be tied to the requirement that the work may only be
carried out in the presence of authorized inspectors from the authorities concerned i.e. Guma Water
Company (GUMA) and Electrical Distribution and Services Authority (EDSA). Their job will be to
witness and assess any damage or interference with their respective utility. Should such disturbances
occur it will be at their discretion to authorize either the Contractor to correct them or to arrange for
specialized repairs through their own personnel.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all costs whatever resulting from avoidable damages of or
interferences with other utilities.
As proof that the works in question have been completed to the satisfaction of the authorities concerned
the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer upon request official post-construction clearances issued
by the respective authorities.
257
2. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 SKILLED STAFF
The Contractor shall deploy skilled staff with knowledge relating to the Contract Requirements as
detailed and specified in the Contract Document.
The Project Architect reserves the right to have any person removed from the site if in his opinion the
quality of work executed is not satisfactory and the skill of that person are not appropriate.
2.2 ABBREVIATIONS
The following abbreviations shall be used and valid in these documents:
BoQ ........................Bill of Quantities
°C ...........................Centigrade degree
cm ...........................Centimeter
d .............................Depth
DN ..........................Nominal diameter
Hrs...........................Hours
HDPE .....................High Density Polyethylene
kg.............................kilogram
km............................Kilometer
l ...............................Liter
Ls ............................Lump sum
m .............................Linear meter
m².............................Square meter
m³.............................Cubic meter
mm...........................Millimeter
mm² .........................Square millimeter
No ............................Number
OD ..........................Outer diameter
pcs ............................Pieces
PN ...........................Nominal pressure
t ...............................Thickness
To ...........................Tone (1000 kg)
“ ..............................Inch
% .............................Per cent
Drawings in the document are an integral part of the technical specifications. The Contractor shall
revise all submitted drawings and compare with the methodology foreseen before starting the relevant
works.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the possible extra costs.
2.3 DRAWINGS
The Project Architect shall prepare design drawings of the water distribution system network and
submit it to Main Contractor
The Contractor shall prepare accurate as-built drawings and submit them prior to obtaining the
Certificate of Completion. The Contractor shall revise the drawings until approved by the Engineer.
258
The Contractor shall use commercially available PC compatible word processing and adequate graphic
software to produce its as-built deliverable documentation.
The final drawings shall be submitted as 4 hard copies (size as required by the Project Architect
authorized representative) and as electronic version on CD.
Before the Project Architect shall issue the Certificate of Completion, the Contractor shall return to the
Project Architect/M&E Engineer all Drawings, Specifications, Bill of Quantities and any other
document, which may have been supplied to the Contractor for the purpose of the work, if so requested.
2.4 POLLUTION OF POTABLE WATER
Special attention must be given to any aspects concerning a possible contamination of the potable water
caused by the works. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any pollution of the drinking water
facilities as a result of his work.
2.5 DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE CONTRACTOR
The Contractor will be held responsible for any damage to public or private property while carrying
out the work. It shall be his solitary responsibility to inform himself thoroughly enough to avoid any
damages to the existing buildings, structures and infrastructures.
2.6 WORK PROGRAM AND TIME SCHEDULE
The Contractor shall provide with his offer a work program according to the contract and bidding data,
including a time schedule to be approved by the Project Architect/M&E Engineer. Seasonal rainfall
and flow of surface water has to be taken into consideration. The program shall fully take into account
and allow, in a methodical manner, for the need to coordinate procedures with other contracts being
carried out on the site.
This approved work program shall not be changed without the written approval of the Project Architect.
In case delays, additional or unforeseen works are coming up the work program shall be updated by the
Contractor and submitted for approval to the Project Architect. A possible extension of the Contract
shall be negotiated with the Contractor.
Before commencement of work the Contractor shall submit a final work program and time schedule
for approval by the Project Architect. Changes may only be approved if they can be justified.
During execution of the works the Contractor shall submit a work program every 14 days containing
the progress, delays and the updated time schedule until the end of the Contract.
The program shall include a detailed time schedule showing the time the contractor has anticipated for
the work, whether works will be done in sequences or parallel, etc. until the completion and handing
over of the works.
All Work programs shall be submitted as hard and softcopy and are subject to written approval by the
Project Architect.
259
2.7 SITE PROTECTION & REGULATION
The contractor shall deliver, install, maintain and remove all required safety material as warning signs,
traffic signs etc. In addition to the site protection, the Contractor shall install protective guard posts in
areas where human traffic on site might pose a hazard.
The guard posts shown in Attachment E consist of steel posts that are at least 3’’ in diameter. Four
guard posts are radially located around the well vault and placed at least 2ft below the ground’s surface.
Each post will have a minimum of 4ft above the ground surface and, in cases where the borehole/well
is surrounded by high vegetation, will have a flag attached for greater visibility. Each post should be
cemented inside of a hole that has a minimum diameter of 6 in.
2.8 WORK IN VICINITY OF POWER LINES
Wherever the Works may cross an electrical power line right of way, the Contractor shall familiarize
himself with the requirements and regulations with regard to work carried out in the vicinity of power
lines. The Contractor shall comply with such requirements and regulations and obtain any permits
required.
Equipment shall not be operated where it is possible to bring such equipment or any part of the
equipment within three (3) meters of any energized electrical conductor unless the utility company has
been notified, and either the line has been de-energized, or effectively guarded against contact, or
displaced or re-routed from the work area. For high-voltage transmission lines, clearance shall be
requested from the Electricity Distribution Services Authority (EDSA) to temporary de-energized the
service line within the working area.
Where practical, metallic pipe sections shall not be stored under overhead high voltage power lines. If
pipe sections must be stored under power lines, the Contractor shall protect personnel from the effects
of induced currents by grounding pipe sections at two (2) locations with a 50mm2 copper ground
conductor and grounding rods.
2.9 CONTRACTOR’S SITE OFFICE AND CONSTRUCTION SITE MANAGEMENT
2.9.1 MOBILIZATION AND ARRANGEMENT OF SITES
The Contractor shall set up and maintain the site office, store and other constructions necessary for his
work. He shall be responsible for all the services in such constructions. Compliance with local
regulations shall be guaranteed in all aspects.
The protection and security of works and equipment of the Contractor shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor and he is responsible to the Employer for any loss or damage caused to third parties‟
property, within the site boundaries.
2.9.2 WATER SUPPLY
Water will be required for the purpose of construction of the works. The Contractor shall make his own
arrangements for obtaining supplies of water of approved quality, and shall erect and maintain all
required pumps, pipes, cocks, tanks, mobile tanks, hoses and other appliances required to distribute the
water as necessary to the various parts of the Works. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the
supply of all water required in the works for whatever purpose and no claim for extra payment or
extension of time based on the lack or insufficient or delayed supply of water will be considered or
entertained.
260
Where permitted to connect up to existing mains and pipelines for the purpose of obtaining water, the
Contractor shall comply with all regulations and requirements of the competent authority (GUMA).
The Contractor shall obtain all related permits and make all arrangements as may be required for the
performance of the connection. The cost of supplying water for all purposes shall be uniformly spread
over all items of the Bills of Quantities.
2.9.3 ELECTRIC POWER SUPPLY
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for all electric power supply, which will be needed
for the execution of the Works.
If necessary, the Contractor shall provide, erect, operate and maintain in good condition a diesel driven
electric generator, large enough to supply the contractual requirements. Sufficient standby is essential
to ensure the required electric power at all times. Mobile generator set with sufficient capacity for pump
testing is to be provided.
The Contractor shall also install, connect and maintain in good condition all cables, conductors and
other electrical plant and equipment required to perform his contractual obligations. All such plant and
installations as described above shall comply with the relevant requirements and regulations in Sierra
Leone. All the electrical facilities shall be erected and be maintained to the full satisfaction of the
Project Architect /M&E Engineer. The cost of providing electric power supply for all purposes shall
be uniformly spread over all items of the Bill of Quantities.
2.9.4 SITE CLEARING AND PREPARATION
The Works under this Clause include site clearance, leaving and erection of fencing that may be
required, protection of any existing structure of element that must remain intact, etc. Prior to
commencing the above Works the Contractor shall obtain all necessary licenses and permits required
for their performance.
The areas of all sites on which work is to be done shall be cleared of all standing or felled trees, stumps,
brush, logs, debris, rubbish and other objectionable matter. All trees outside the area to be cleared and
such other trees that are not to be removed shall be carefully protected from damage during the Works
operations, and no trees shall be removed without the prior consent of the Project Architect. The
Contractor shall not commence clearing any area and/or demolition without having received written
instruction to it from the Project Architect.
2.9.5 DISPOSAL OF TREES, ROOTS, ETC.
All materials required clearing shall be removed from the area during the work progress and on
completion of the Works, burned completely or disposed of in a manner satisfactory to the Project
Architect/M&E Engineer. All materials to be burnt shall be piled and all burning shall be so thorough
that the materials will be reduced to ashes. Piling for burning shall be done in such a manner and in
such locations as to cause the least fire hazard and nuisance to inhabitants of the area. The Contractor
shall have available at all time, for use in preventing and suppressing fires, apparatus and fire-fighting
equipment satisfactory to the Project Architect/M&E Engineer. When, in the opinion of the Project
Architect, the fire hazard is great, burning shall be deferred or additional fire-fighting equipment shall
be provided.
All materials not burned to ashes shall be disposed of by removal from the site of the Works, and upon
removal such materials shall become the property of the Contractor who shall dispose of them by burial
in locations and in a manner approved by the Project Architect. The Contractor shall adopt all measures
to ensure that soil erosion is avoided.
261
2.9.6 MAINTENANCE OF SITES
The Contractor shall maintain the site in clean and hygienic condition during the whole project period.
All staff and labour rooms shall be in suitable working conditions.
2.9.6.1 Release of Sites and Demobilization
Demobilization shall include the removal of all site facilities, temporary installations, equipment,
machinery and surplus materials from site and the reinstatement of all surfaces used, in at least in the
same condition as before its occupation, including all access roads. The site shall be left in a state that
does not negatively affect the environment or destroy the view.
2.9.6.2 Regulation on Safety and Public Health
The Contractor shall make sure that the places of work and the construction sites are maintained with
care and that they comply with safety and hygiene requirements. His equipment shall be cleaned
regularly. Necessary disposals shall be provided. The Contractor shall be responsible for any pollution
or sources of infection inside the area of his premises.
The Contractor must take all necessary measures to ensure that his activities, equipment, vehicles, staff,
etc., do not cause undue inconvenience, harassment nor safety or health risks to other workers. The
Contractor shall not cause any damage to agricultural crops or trees outside the site territory, nor shall
the work activities cause flooding or pollution of the environment.
a) First Aid
The Contractor shall provide and maintain on site first aid equipment consisting at least of the
following:
• A complete first aid kit with medicines, bandages, splints, etc.
• A motor car to be always available for emergency transportation
b) Fire Protection
No naked fire shall be used by the Contractor on or about the Site other than in the open air.
The term "naked fire" shall be deemed to include electric arcs and oxyacetylene or other flames
used in welding or cutting metals.
Suitable firefighting equipment shall be provided and maintained by the Contractor on site to deal
with any outbreak of fire. All possible precautions shall be taken to provide for the safe storage of
petroleum, explosives, gas bottles, and all other dangerous goods and items.
2.10 CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT
The Contractor's equipment used in the performance of the works shall be of such type, size and of
such method of working as the Project Architect approves. If for any reason whatsoever the Project
Architect shall be of the opinion that any equipment or appliance employed or proposed to be employed
by the Contractor for the purpose of the works shall not be used, or that any such machine or appliance
as aforesaid is unsuitable for use in the Works or any part of them, then such equipment shall be
immediately withdrawn from use. The Project Architect shall inspect and approve the Contractor's
equipment prior to commencement of drilling operations. If equipment is not satisfactory, the
Contractor shall provide such equipment that meets the Project Architect's approval.
Any change in the method of performing the Works as a consequence of such order shall be at the cost
of the Contractor who shall have no cause for claim against the Employer on account of having to carry
out the work by different methods, or for the idleness or removal of any construction plant.
262
The cost of providing constructional plant for all purpose shall be uniformly spread over all the items
of the Bill of Quantities.
2.10.1 Descriptions of commonly used pieces of equipment are listed below.
a) Well-Construction Supplies (Some of these items are suggestions only, and the list is not all-
inclusive)
Silica sand (i.e. 30/70, 20/40, and 8/12 grain size)
Cement—Portland Type I, Type II or Type I/II only
Approved water supply, preferably untreated
Well casing, screen, cap, and bottom plug well, as required
Mechanical casing centralizers, if required
Bentonite pellets, crushed bentonite, or bentonite grout
A 5-ft length of protective steel casing—black iron or galvanized— 6-, 8-, or 10-in. in
diameter, according to needs
Guard posts
Locking cap
Padlocks
b) Well-Construction Equipment
Drill rig and accompanying equipment (augers, drill rods, casing, samplers, etc.)
Tremie pipe
Grout-mixing and pressure-pumping unit
Support equipment for maintaining 24 hr./day operation
2.11 MATERIALS and EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED BY CONTRACTOR
2.11.1 Materials and Goods to be used for the Works
All materials for execution of Works as appropriate backfill material, concrete, reinforcement steel,
pipes, fittings, armatures, etc. shall be supplied by the Contractor.
All goods to be provided shall be new, unused, of the most recent manufacture and incorporate all
recent improvements in the design and material unless provided otherwise in the Contract.
The Contractor shall take all the measures for the selection, storage and handling of natural material in
conformity with the technical specification some time before this material is used, and inform the
Project Architect accordingly.
Prior to making any order to any private entity or factory for any element / material ordered by the
Employer, the Contractor shall submit to the Project Architect, costs, names of manufacturers and
suppliers for approval.
The Contractor shall also hand in the relevant technical specifications and parameter for any type of
material before procurement in order to allow the Project Architect to assess the quality of this material.
The Project Architect may ask for testing, which shall be on the expense of the Contractor.
Should the Project Architect/M&E Engineer at any time be dissatisfied with such materials or goods or
with the method or performance of such sub-contractor's work or place of business, the Project
Architect shall be empowered to cancel his previously given approval of such sub-contractor. The
Contractor shall then obtain the said services; materials or goods from such other sub-contractor as may
be approved by the Project Architect and shall bear any additional cost therefore.
263
If during the Contract, through any reason, a supplier should increase the cost of materials above that
of other equally reputable suppliers, the Project Architect may only authorize payment for materials at
the rates of other suppliers.
2.11.2 Samples
In addition to any special provisions herein from sampling and testing of materials, the Contractor shall
submit to the Project Architect as he may require samples of all materials and goods he proposes to use
or employ in or for the Works. The Project Architect, if approved, will retain such samples, and no
materials or goods of which samples have not been submitted shall be used on the permanent works
unless and until the Project Architect has approved such samples in writing. Notwithstanding the
Project Architect’s approval as provided for herein, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the
quantity of all materials and goods supplied unless specified otherwise.
The cost of supplying all such samples and of conveying the same to such place of inspection or testing
as the Project Architect may designate complying with the requirements of this Clause shall be deemed
to be included in the Bid rates and prices.
2.11.3 Test Certificates
Should the Project Architect not inspect any materials or goods at the place of manufacture, the
Contractor shall obtain certificates of tests performed on such materials or goods by an agency approved
by the Project Architect and shall certify that the materials or goods concerned have been tested in
accordance with the requirements of the Specification and shall give the results of all the tests carried
out. The Contractor shall provide adequate means of identifying the materials and goods delivered to
the site with the corresponding certificates.
2.11.4 Packing, Marking and Delivery
Prior to the dispatch from the factory or Contractor's works, equipment and materials shall be
thoroughly protected against corrosion and incidental damage, including the effects of vermin, rough
handling and bumpy land transportation, strong sunlight, rain, high temperature or humid atmosphere.
The equipment and materials shall be packed to withstand rough handling in transit, and packages shall
be suitable for export to and storage in the tropics, including possible delay on exposed quaysides and
field conditions. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the materials and equipment being packed
so that it reaches its destination intact and undamaged. The Contractor shall provide, and include in the
contract price the cost of all necessary packing cases and crates, properly strengthened by battens
(which shall be considered as non-returnable), hoop iron banding, and packing materials to include, but
not limited, to the use of polythene or similar waterproof wrapping, silica, etc. wherever necessary, and
required.
The Contractor shall prepare a list of all items which had been implemented during execution of the
Works. The list of materials implemented shall be handed over to the Project Architect after completion
of Works.
2.11.5 Required Documents to be submitted with Bid Documents
Each Bidder has to submit the following documents with his Bid:
Type / make of and specifications for
• Submersible pump
• Solar system for operating submersible pump
264
For the main items offered (submersible pump and solar system) the Bidder has to state the nearest
agent/ distributor of the type of service to be supplied and service and maintenance possibility in Sierra
Leone or neighbouring countries.
The information submitted with the Bid Documents is binding.
2.11.6 SUBMERSIBLE WATER PUMPS
2.11.6.1 Submersible Water Pump, suitable for solar energy.
The submersible pump should work with solar energy. The submersible pump should be supplied
with the following: 3”suction and 2’’ discharge submersible pump (suitable for 6”borehole) with all
safety devices (e.g. dry-run protection, electric protection to prevent power surge, non-return valve)
3”pump for high heads and moderate flows as shown above, suitable for 6” (150 mm ID) borehole
(explicitly confirmed in the bid). Water-tight flat cable connectors resistant to pressure equal to 2 or
more bars and water resistant flat cables have to be supplied
Pump must be equipped with over and under voltage protection, over temperature and effective dry
running protection.
• 75m rising pipes
• 100m drop cables
• Switch box
• A complete set of solar power generation system mounted on suitable support structure, including
all cables, accessories, etc.
The Contractor shall supply and install the solar powered submersible pump as specified to supply
enough power to operate the submersible pump for the Bank’s daily demand of water. The solar
panels must generate at least 50 % more Watt than the pump requires. Technical specifications for
the solar system components are given below.
• All connecting cabling and fittings, drop cable and module support structures with all necessary
components for a complete site installation shall be delivered.
• Including automatic on/off switch to stop pump when water tank is full
• Installation and maintenance manual in English for all components have to be included
• Appropriate documentation, such as technical and performance data for submersible pump and
motor, solar modules and module support structure shall be submitted with the Bid.
Submersible pump, riser pipe and fittings:
Solar powered Submersible pumps, including all equipment and accessories for solar energy supply
and energy supply to the pump, suitable for 6” (150mm) cased internal diameter boreholes
Supply shall include all materials for main pipe work from the well head to the tank and associated
valves and fittings, submersible cable, earth cables, slicing kit, earth rods and other accessories.
The details below are minimum the requirements of the submersible pump guidelines to be installed:
265
2.11.6.2 Technical Data 6” 50Hz Stainless Steel Submersible Pump for Deep Well
2.11.6.3 Material In Contact With the Liquid
DESCRIPTIONS MATERIAL
Type AISI DIN / EN
Discharge head and screws Stainless steel 304 1.4301
Valve Stainless steel 304 1.4301
O-ring Nitrile Rubber - -
Valve support Resin - -
Outer case Stainless steel 304 1.4301
Suction Strainer Stainless steel 304 1.4301
Cable guard and screws Stainless steel 304 1.4301
Motor adapter Stainless steel 304 1.4301
Pump shaft Stainless steel 304 1.4301
Coupling Stainless steel 304 1.4301
Upper journal sleeve Stainless steel 304 1.4301
Screw and washer Stainless steel 304 1.4301
Lower spacer Stainless steel 304 1.4301
Upper spacer Polycarbonate - -
Diffusers Techno-polymer - -
Secondary bearing bush Resin - -
Bearing bush Resin - -
Upper bearing guide Resin - -
Stage housing Stainless steel 304 1.4301
Impeller Polycarbonate - -
2.11.6.4 Applications:
� Water supply from well
� Municipal water works
� Water distribution and pressure boosting
� Irrigation and sprinkler systems, water treatment plants, filtration and reverse osmosis
266
� Industrial cooling and processing
� Mining industry, drainage and dewatering
� Fire-fighting equipment
� Lifting and distribution of a wide range of liquids
� Autoclave and cistern charge and discharge
� Greenhouses and nurseries
� Residential wells and drainage
� Food industry
� General industry
2.11.6.5 Features:
� Compact, reliable and suited to operate in vertical position
� Built-in check valve to protect the pump against water hammer risk
� Floating impellers to grant a better performance and longer life for the pump against abrasion
� Hydraulic design is such to enhance the overall efficiency thus reducing energy consumption and
making the pumping systems more cost effective
2.11.6.6 Specifications:
� Capacities up to 24m³/h at 50Hz
� Pumped liquid: chemically and mechanically non aggressive
� Water temperature range: from 0°C to 40°C
� Maximum allowable amount of sand 25gr/m³, solid dimension max 2mm
� Maximum pump diameter (including cable guard): 95mm
� Outlet diameter: 2"
� Rotation: counter clockwise when looking into the discharge
� Motor adapter in compliance with NEMA standard
� Pump can work continuously in vertical position
� Motors: see section Submersible Motors Product Overview
(i) Pumps with Encapsulated Motor
Pump
Model Type
Motor Dimensions [mm] Weight [Kg]
Type kW HP Lt L2
L1 Motor Pump Total
3~ 3~ 3~ 3~
VS 6/26 E4 3 4 1424,5 393,5 1031 15,0 8,7 23,7
The hydraulic characteristics shall be guaranteed, according to ISO standard 9906:2012, grade 3B
(ii) Hydraulic Performances at 50Hz.
Pump
Type
Rated Power Q = Delivery
m³/h 0 2,7 3,0 3,3
[kW] [HP] l/sec 0 0,75 0,83 0,92
H = Total Head Meters Column Of Water [m]
VS 6/26 3 4 150 143 141 139
(iii) Overview - Submersible Motor
6" Encapsulated Motor
6" Super Stainless 3 Phase SUBMERSIBLE MOTOR
The 6" encapsulated three phase motor, manufactured in ISO 9001 certified facilities, are built
for dependable operation in 4" diameter or larger Boreholes. The motor shall offer a
maintenance free long life submersible pump application.
The motor shall be filled with a special FES93 fluid, providing frost protection for lower
temperature. A special diaphragm shall ensure pressure compensation inside the motor.
267
(iv) Features:
� Hermetically sealed stator. Anti-track, self-healing stator resin prevents motor burn out
� High efficiency electrical design (low operation cost, cooler winding temperature)
� Removable “Water Bloc™” lead connector
� Cable material according to drinking water regulations (KTW approved)
� Water lubricated radial and thrust bearings
� Motor prefilled and 100% tested.
Non contaminating, FES93- filled design
(v) Specifications
� 3kW
� 4" NEMA flange
� Degree of protection: IP68
� Insulation: Cl. B
� Rated ambient temp: 30°C
� Cooling flow: Motor 2.2 kW and larger: min. 8 cm/s
� Starts/h: 20
� Mounting: Vertical
� Voltage tolerance: 380-415V/50Hz; -10% / +6% UN
[380-415V = (380-10%) – (415+6%)]
� Motor protection: Select thermal overloads according to EN 60947-4-1,
Trip time <10s at 5 x IN
� Motor complete in AISI 316SS with SiC seal
E
(vi) Performance at ~2850 rpm (Three-Phase 4" Encapsulated Motors 400V)
Pump
model
type
PN Thrust nN IN IA η cos
φ
TN TA L Weight
[kW] [HP] F [N] [min-1] [A] [A] [%] [%] [Nm] [Nm] [mm] [kg]
VS 6/26 3.0 4 6500* 2845 7,5 42,0 76 0,77 10,06 31,93 477,2 17,0
* High Thrust Version
(vii) Accessories
a) Motor Control:
Sub Monitor Motor Protection
The Sub Monitor is designed to protect 3-phase pumps with horsepower ratings between 3 - 15Hp.
Current, voltage and motor temperature are monitored using three integrated current transformers.
A digital display provides current and voltage readings for all three legs and allows the user to set
up the Sub Monitor quickly and easily. The Sub Monitor is the latest innovation in 3-phase pump
protection from Franklin Electric.
Using state-of-the-art technology, the Sub Monitor provides the ultimate protection for a pump
and motor. There is simply no better way to protect a large 3-phase submersible pump investment
than with a Sub Monitor. It‘s the protection device that can sense overheating straight from the
motor windings! And it is made by the world leader in submersible motors - Franklin Electric.
b) Features
� Quick setup to monitor a motor, simply enter the Line Frequency (Hz), Line Voltage (volts),
and Motor Service Factor Amp rating
� Digital display indicates voltage and current on all three legs at the same time, and fault
messages are in easily understandable text
� Monitors - Under/Overload; Under/Overvoltage; Current Unbalance; Overheated Moto;
Start (Chattering); Phase Reversal
268
� For motors with service factor amp ratings between 3 and 100 amps
� The unit covers the entire range from 230 to 415 Volts
� No need to make additional turns around the CT or add external CTs
� Password Protection Option
� DIN Rail Mounting Option
� Stores fault, setting changes, and pump run-time, that can be accessed through the display
� Detachable NEMA 3R display unit can be mounted on panel door
� UL 508 Listed
c) Model number
Premium Package: 586 000 5100
Input Voltage: 400VAC
Frequency: 50Hz
Motor Service Factor Amps: 3 to 100A
d) Maximum Conductor Size through Sensors
Max. Diameter: 0.920 in. (23 mm)
e) Trip Response
Motor
Under / Overload
Under / Overvoltage 3 seconds
Overheat
Unbalance
f) Control Circuit Rating : 1.5 Amp AC, up to 600 volts
g) Signal Circuit Rating: 1 Amp AC, up to 250 volts
(Incandescent: 100 watts max.)
h) Wiring Terminals
Wire Gauge: #12 to #18 AWG
Tighten to: 4.5 in-lbs
i) Weight (Sub Monitor) 3.3 lbs/7,3 kg
j) Termination Kit 6"
This proven, sturdy solution shall be the Contractor’s choice of cable joining in temporary pump
applications or when re-usage if the drop cable is desired as the flexibility and safety it provides
for under field service conditions makes it the preferred choice over conventional, not breakable
splicing kits.
k) Double Plug Lead for Termination Kit
� 3-wire
� 2,5m Lead length
� With Strain relief
� Max. Current 16 Amps
� KTW approved
269
l) Corrosion Protection 6"
Application:
The sacrificial anode attaches to the bottom end bell of Franklin Electric 6" Super Stainless
submersible motors. Since cast iron is more chemically active than the metals that make up the
motor and pump, it is the cast iron that reacts to the corrosive elements in the water. This results
in longer motor and pump life in aggressive/corrosive water conditions.
m) Motor Filling Kit
This kit offers all tools for control the level of the engine filling liquid and to fill up if necessary!
n) Surge Arrestor
Application:
These surge arrestors or their equivalents are highly recommended for protecting submersible
motors from a variety of commonly occurring high voltage spikes which can damage the motor
insulation system and cause motor winding failure. These arrestors will not, as is true of any surge
protection equipment, protect the motor from a direct lightning strike.
o) Riser pipe, fittings
Rising pipe connection: not less than 1”
Riser pipe must have facility for cabling attachments
Stainless steel security cable and fittings have to be supplied
Centralizers have to be supplied and installed at every 6 m of the riser pipe
2.12 Solar modules:
The Solar modules shall be designed for optimal efficiency operation with the pump system:
- The solar modules must generate at least 50 % more Watt than the pump requires.
- Mono- or Poly-crystalline with certified performance and lifespan values;
- Nominal power rating between 85 – 340 Wp per module
- Aluminium or stainless steel frame in weather proof glass enclosure. Must accommodate anti-theft
fittings
- Modules should be dust protected
- Weather-proofed connection boxes with watertight cable entry glands, diode protection and clearly
marked polarity terminals
- Minimum markings must indicate:
• Name or trade mark of manufacturer
• Number or reference of module
• Serial number
• Rated power (Wp)
• Rated Current IMPP
- The documentation submitted with the bid shall include following information:
Country of manufacture and nearest agent / distributor and maintenance possibility
2.12.1 Modules support structure
- Solid, hot-dipped galvanized support structure consisting of on-site assembled prefabricated
components;
- Must withstand wind speeds of up to 150km/h with modules attached
270
- All connecting and holding-down bolts and other materials to be galvanized or of other suitable,
durable and non-corrosive material;
- The modules are to be mounted with an inclination of 15% in true south direction, or as otherwise
recommended by the supplier with recommended modifications for the conditions in South Sudan;
- All connecting cables should be weather resistant, rubber sheathed; rubber insulated and should
have flexible stranded round conductors;
- The modules shall be fixed to the support structure by means of anti-theft screws, bolts or nuts.
The tenderer is free to offer alternative solutions to enhance security.
- The support structure shall be designed in a manner that will allow an average size local person to
easily clean the modules with a minimum need for arm-extending tools. If necessary, it shall include
steps and safety devices at the higher parts of the structure;
- The modules shall be mounted preferably on top of the water tank.
2.11.3 Accessories:
All connecting cabling and fittings, drop cable and module support structures with all necessary
components for a complete site installation shall be delivered.
3.0 BACKGROUND AND PRECAUTIONS
Note: This SOP is to be used in conjunction with an approved SSHASP. Also, consult the SSHASP
for information on and use of all PPE.
3.1 A properly constructed well allows access to formation fluids or gases for the collection of samples and
for determining in situ characteristics. Ideally, the well should not alter the medium that is being
sampled.
3.2 The following is a partial list of critical issues involved in well planning, design, and construction:
Preventing the spread of possible contamination;
Selecting soil-boring or rock-coring technique and hole sizes;
Selecting casing and screen materials, including composition and dimensions;
Determining screen-slot size, screen type, and screen interval;
determining filter pack composition, gradation, and dimensions; and
Choosing a grouting plan.
Refer to the site-specific documents for the location and specifications of the well to be installed. Wells
are generally installed as components of monitoring systems in accordance with Hazardous and Solid
Waste
Amendments (HSWA) and Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) guidance (EPA 1991).Well
construction, development of the wells, collection and measurement of samples, and the documentation
of data must be performed as described in this SOP.
The following steps are primarily directed at deep and intermediate depth wells (generally greater than
70m in depth) and are not necessarily requirements for hand borings or shallow boreholes.
271
3.2.1 Perform a site hydrogeological examination to estimate key parameters (for example, anticipated
aquifer depth and thickness, types of contaminants, geology and grain-size distribution).
3.2.2 Coordinate schedules/actions with the Project Architect (Consultants) Technical Representative (CTR)
and/or Project Leader and appropriate technical team.
3.2.3 The source(s) of any water used on site must be pre-approved by the CTR and/or Project Leader
before field operations begin. A potable, non-chlorinated source is preferred, and the source is to be
documented in the daily logs. At his discretion, the CTR may require analytical samples be collected
of the water source.
3.2.4 Any use of solvents, glues, or cleaners is prohibited unless approved in writing by the CTR and/or
Project Leader. If official permission is granted for their use, describe the material and include the
manufacturer and type (specification) (MSDS sheet must also be included). The on-site use of non-
environmentally safe and/or unapproved pipe-dope, grease, soap, or oil is also prohibited for any
purpose with the exception of machinery fuel and lubricants.
3.2.4 Monitor the borehole opening and the breathing zone as necessary according to the appropriate ER
SOPs and SSHASP. Perform readings as often as necessary to ensure the safety of workers, and record
all measurements on the appropriate data-collection forms.
4.0 RESPONSIBLE PERSONNEL
The following personnel are responsible for activities identified in this procedure.
4.1 Consultant Technical Representative (CTR)
4.2 Driller
4.3 Field Team Leader
4.4 Site Geologist
4.5 Contractor’s Representative
5.0 EQUIPMENT
Descriptions of commonly used pieces of equipment are listed below.
5.1 Well-Construction Supplies (Some of these items are suggestions only, and the list is not all-inclusive)
Silica sand (i.e. 30/70, 20/40, and 8/12 grain size)
Cement—Portland Type I, Type II or Type I/II only
Approved water supply, preferably untreated
Well casing, screen, cap, and bottom plug for each well, as required
Mechanical casing centralizers, if required
Bentonite pellets, crushed bentonite, or bentonite grout
A 5-ft length of protective steel casing—black iron or galvanized— 6-, 8-, or 10-in. in
diameter, according to needs
Guard posts
Locking cap
Padlocks
5.2 Well-Construction Equipment
Drill rig and accompanying equipment (augers, drill rods, casing, samplers, etc.)
Tremie pipe
Grout-mixing and pressure-pumping unit
Support equipment for maintaining 24 hr./day operation
272
6.0 PROCEDURE
Note: The Contractor’s Project personnel shall be responsibility to ensure that they are trained to and
utilizing the current version of this procedure. The Engineer may be contacted if text is unclear.
Note: Deviations from SOPs are made in accordance with Standard Operating Procedure
Development and documented in accordance with QP- 5.7, Notebook Documentation for
Environmental Restoration Technical Activities.
6.1 General Well Installation Record Keeping
6.1.1 Record all fields measurements and comments on the Borehole/Well Completion Information form
(Attachment A) or the Borehole/Well Construction Field Data Log form (Attachment B). Fill out the
forms as described in the completion instructions included with each form. A Fact Summary Sheet
(Attachment C) should also be completed.
6.1.1.1 The Field Team Leader (FTL) shall consult with the UTR and/or Project Leader before modifying an
existing well design.
Any modification must be recorded in the Borehole/Well Construction Field Data Log form
(Attachment B), the Fact Summary Sheet (Attachment C) and the Daily Activity Log form (Attachment
E in ER-SOP-1.04), or a field notebook.
6.1.2 Record pertinent information on the Borehole/Well Completion Information form (Attachment A) and
the Fact Summary Sheet (Attachment C). At a minimum, record boring/well identification number,
location of boring (coordinates if available), nominal hole diameter and depth at which diameter
changes, screen location, backfill, seals, grout, cave -in, centralizers, and the height of the riser above
the ground surface. Record the actual composition of the grout, seals, and backfill on each
Borehole/Well Construction Field Data Log form (Attachment B). Include the screen slot size (in
inches), slot configuration, and screen manufacturer. Include the protective casing detail on all well
sketches.
Typical well construction features for single screen and multi-screen completions are shown in
Attachments D and E. When installed as a piezometer, well point (for water levels only), or gas-vapour
monitor, the well configuration may vary significantly from these drawings.
After well development is complete, indicate the static water level on the well-construction diagram.
6.2 Sand Pack
A sand pack helps ensure continuous flow capability from the natural formation to the well bore. The
following is a list of instructions for using a sand pack, if required.
6.2.1 The minimum annular distance between well screen and the borehole wall is 2 inches for the ADB
Project well.
6.2.2 The specifications of the proposed sand-pack material should be approved by the FTL before use. Use
well-sorted (poorly graded) and rounded sand that is clean, inert, and siliceous and compatible with the
screen slot size in-use.
6.2.3 The average grain size of the sand is based on the grain-size distribution of the medium being monitored
in the screened formation. Use sand that has a gradation that will allow less than 10% of filter pack
material to pass through the screen slots (insert Reference).
6.2.4 Record the filter-pack size, the company from which it was purchased, and the lot number (if available)
for each installation. Be prepared to take an airtight pint size sample of filter pack material and furnished
to the UTR upon request to serve as a quality control.
273
6.2.5 Fill the annulus between the well screen and borehole wall with silica sand to a height 5ft above the
screened interval and 5ft below the screen if above a bentonite seal or as specified in applicable
Title I or II drawings if required. For wells greater than 30ft in depth, a tremied pipe will be used to
place the materials.
6.2.6 Ascertain the depth of the top of the sand with a measuring device with accuracy within 0.5ft and verify
the thickness of the sand pack. Measurements must be repeatable. If necessary, add more sand to bring
the top of the sand pack to the proper elevation.
6.2.7 Under no circumstances should the sand pack extend into any aquifer other than the one to be
monitored. In most cases, the well design can be modified to allow for a sufficient sand pack without
the threat of cross flow between producing zones.
6.2.8 If specified in the project documents, partial development of the sand pack may be required (to help
settle sand pack) before installation of bentonite seal and grout.
6.2.9 In the event that a predominantly fine-grained, water-bearing unit is encountered, it may be desirable
to construct a monitor well that uses a factory-manufactured screen and filter prepacks assembly.
Various sand-pack gradations are available. The prepacked screen subassembly is attached to the solid
well casing (riser) in the same manner as a conventional screen. The fine-grained formation materials
are allowed to collapse against the prepacked well screen.
Prepacked well screens have larger OD’s which must be considered when calculating backfill.
6.2.10 Centralizers will be placed above and below each screen or as specified in Title I design documents.
Generally, no less than one every 50ft for the uniform and complete annular filling by granular backfill,
seal, and grout materials. Centralizers may be required at 10ft intervals or less when installing angle
holes. In some cases, such as very shallow wells and where tremie-pipe placement of materials is done
through pipes or augers, the spacing of centralizers can be expanded or eliminated entirely. Fasten
centralizers to the well casing and radially space them at 120° or 90° intervals.
6.3 INTERMEDIATE BENTONITE SEAL
The following steps outline the use of an intermediate bentonite seal from the top of the sand pack to
2ft above.
6.3.1 Before placing the bentonite seal, be sure the filter pack has settled by measuring the depth of the top
of the sand with the tremie pipe or a measuring device with accuracy within 0.5ft. The sand pack should
rise to a depth of 5ft above the top of the screen.
6.3.2 In media that will not maintain an open hole, leave the casing or the hollow-stem augers in the hole
during filter-pack placement and bentonite-seal placement to the extent practical. Maintain the
bentonite in the casing/auger a small distance (1 to 2ft) above the bottom of the casing/auger for even
placement, as the casing/augers are removed. Special attention should be given to the amount of fill
material if this procedure is followed due to the risk of bridging in saturated conditions.
6.3.3 Visually check the condition of the bentonite backfill material before pumping it into the hole by
pumping a sample into a bucket. Retract the tremie pipe 3ft from the top of the sand pack and begin
pumping.
6.3.4 Place a bentonite-chip or -pellet seal above the sand pack and below the annular well seal to prevent
infiltration of cement into the filter pack and the well. Hydrate the bentonite seal and wait a minimum
of 4 hrs. before adding a slurry grout.
274
Note: Use bentonite chips, bentonite pellets, or crushed, granular bentonite. The pellets should have
a minimum purity of 90% montmorillonite clay and a minimum dry bulk density of 75lb/ft3.
No bentonite will be placed into the well bore—place a cap over the top of the well casing
before pouring the bentonite pellets.
6.3.5 In special circumstances, an open borehole may be drilled to a depth below where the screen is set. If
grout is used to seal off a lower aquifer or as backfill up to the proper level, place a bentonite seal above
the grout and hydrate for 4 hrs. before the casing, screen, and sand pack are introduced. Allow the grout
to set up for a minimum of 24 hrs. before placing the bentonite seal. Place 5ft of sand pack between
this grout and the well screen. Place the bentonite seal in the borehole as described below. The
minimum width for the annular well seal (between casing and borehole) is
2in. for the ADB Project well
6.3.6 For wells that are 30ft. or less in depth:
6.3.6.1 Pour the bentonite directly down the annulus. Pour the pellets from different points around the casing
to ensure even application. A tremie pipe may be used to redistribute and level the top of the seal.
6.3.6.2 Fill the annulus between the well casing and borehole above the filter pack with a bentonite seal at
least 2ft thick (vertically); hydrate and wait 12 hrs.
6.3.7 For wells deeper than 30ft:
The bentonite backfill material can be pumped or poured through a tremie pipe. The FTL shall
determine the method after evaluating the condition of the borehole walls. If there are no centralizers
in the upper portions of the casing, manipulate the casing to prevent pellets from hanging up in the
narrow annulus and to allow them to settle to the bottom as rapidly as possible.
6.3.8 Measure the distance to the top of the seal with an acceptable measuring device to verify that the proper
thickness of seal has been placed in the annulus.
6.3.9 Until the proper thickness of bentonite has been placed in the well annulus, repeat the application and
verification.
6.4 ANNULAR WELL SEAL
6.4.1 For placement of dry product annular backfill materials in intermediate and deep wells, refer to to
complete backfilling procedures.
6.4.2 If a cement-grout annular seal is to be installed, use only Portland Type I, Type II or Type I/II cement.
The grout must be mixed thoroughly with 2% to 5% bentonite powder to produce a non-shrinking seal.
The cement must be mechanically mixed thoroughly before it is pumped into the borehole.
6.4.3 If slurry of bentonite is used as an annular seal, prepare the slurry by mixing powdered or granular
bentonite with pre-approved potable water according to manufacturer specifications. The slurry should
be of sufficiently high specific gravity and viscosity to prevent movement of the overlying grout into
the saturated zone. Pellets may be added to solidify the surface of the bentonite slurry in order to prevent
cement intrusion.
6.4.4 In some cases a dry mixture of fine sand, silica flour, and bentonite powder or a mixture of cuttings,
sandy clay, or tight soil may be used where the fill material will have less permeability than the
formation. In general the cuttings cannot be easily emplaced because of screening and/or compacting
problems. Cuttings mixed with dry bentonite can be used for abandonment purposes.
275
6.5 SURFACE WELL SEALS MINIMUM DEPTH AND WIDTH:
The minimum depth of an annular well seal above the fill is 10ft. The minimum width of the annular
seal is 2inches. Allow a minimum of 12hrs. (HSWA requirement) after a bentonite-slurry seal has been
placed, then place cement grout from the top of the bentonite seal to the surface. Use grouts as specified
in project documents. Place grout in the annulus of the wells as described below.
6.5.1 Fill the annulus between the well casing and borehole wall with cement grout.
6.5.2 On all wells 30ft deep or deeper, pump the cement grout through the tremie pipe to the bottom of the
open annulus until undiluted grout flows from the annulus at the ground surface.
Note: The cement grout should consist of a mix of cement (Portland Type I, Type II, or Type I/II) and
2% to 5% bentonite mix. Use only grout mixed with pre-approved water.
6.5.3 When drilling in materials that will not maintain an open hole, leave the hollow-stem auger or
temporary casing in the hole during grouting to the extent practical. Remove them as the level of the
grout rises above the bottom of the auger.
6.5.4 If necessary, add more grout to compensate for the removed casing or auger and tremie pipe and to
ensure that the top of the grout is at or above the ground surface.
6.5.5 The protective casing should now be placed over the well casing.
6.5.6 After the grout has set (about 24 hrs.), fill any depression in the grout caused by settlement with a grout
mix similar to that previously described.
6.6 PLACEMENT OF DRY PRODUCT ANNULAR BACKFILL MATERIALS (INTERMEDIATE
AND DEEP WELLS)
6.6.1 The driller shall place all annular fill materials (dry products only) through a tremie pipe maintaining
a 10ft minimum buffer between the targeted backfill depth and the bottom of the tremie pipe.
6.6.2 Both the driller and the site geologist shall in accordance with QP- 5.7, Notebook Documentation for
Environmental Restoration Technical Activities, record in logbook accurate tallies of tremie pipe and
drill casing to ensure that the exact depths are known at all times.
6.6.3 Both the driller and the site geologist shall, on a scheduled basis, compare their tremie pipe and drill
casing tallies to ensure they are in agreement. In the event they are not in agreement, backfilling
activities will be suspended until an acceptable resolution is attained and the depths can be verified to
the satisfaction of both parties.
6.6.4 The driller shall use potable water (municipal supply) as a transport fluid to carry dry materials such
as bentonite pellets and silica sand down the tremie to the desired depth. A polymer such as EZ-MUD,
approved by the CTR, may be added to the transport fluid to delay hydration of bentonite chips or
pellets in deeper applications. This will reduce the potential for swelling within the tremie pipe which
commonly results in plugging.
6.6.5 If a polymer solution is used, the driller must flush the tremie with one volume of the tremie rod with
clear water prior to filter pack sand emplacement
6.6.6 The driller shall record in a field notebook the quantities of water and additives used during the
placement of annular backfill material.
6.6.7 The driller shall use silica sand that meets the specifications in the Title II design drawing (typically
fine-grained 30/70 and 20/40 grade) for filter packs and transition zones between filter packs and
bentonite seals.
276
6.6.8 Fine-grained sands (30/70, 20/40 grade) shall be allowed to settle for 15 to 30 minutes after the pour is
completed before sounding the depth.
6.6.9 If the sand level is low, the driller shall allow an additional 15 to 30 minutes for the sand to settle and
then re-sound the sand level.
Note: Sands with grades greater than 20/40 can be expected to settle more rapidly and typically can
be measured immediately after emplacement.
6.7 DRILL CASING RETRACTION DURING BACKFILL OPERATIONS (FOR
INTERMEDIATE AND DEEP WELLS)
6.7.1 The driller shall retract the drill casing in stages as backfill materials are emplaced to avoid borehole
collapse in potentially unstable formations.
6.7.2 The driller shall maintain a 10ft minimum buffer between the targeted backfill depth and the bottom
of the drill casing to prevent backfill from getting between well casing and drill casing. This may result
in sand locking the casings or smearing bentonite across well screens
6.7.3 The driller shall determine the length of drill casing to be retracted between pours based on borehole
stability, the size of the batch to be poured, and casing stickup in the rig table. The site geologist shall
provide borehole stability information to the driller based on site stratigraphic, geophysical logging
data, and video logs if available.
For large intervals of backfill in stable formations, it may be acceptable to pull 100 or more feet of
casing followed by one large or several small batches of backfill. In unstable formations, casing should
be retracted at shorter intervals of 20 to 40ft, followed by small batches of backfill, to minimize
borehole caving into the annular space. Cave-ins may result in damage to the well casing and screens,
displacement of annular fill materials, and may compromise the integrity of annular seals.
6.8 VOLUME CALCULATIONS
6.8.1 Both the driller and the site geologist shall make volume calculations of all materials introduced into
the borehole prior to emplacement. Backfilling should not proceed until the calculated volumes are in
agreement.
6.8.2 Both the driller and the site geologist shall ensure that the calculated volume for the interval to be
filled is not exceeded regardless of the character of the formation.
6.8.3 The driller shall take extreme care when backfilling with bentonite below a screened section of the
well casing to prevent impact to the screen.
6.8.4 The driller shall ensure the target depth for standard batches of bentonite are at a minimum 20ft below
the bottom of the screen. The driller shall ensure that the remainder of the bentonite interval below the
screen is poured in small batches calculated to raise the level in the annulus by 2 to 3ft per batch.
6.8.5 The driller shall sound (measure) the bentonite after each batch until the desired depth is reached. The
bentonite shall be allowed to hydrate for a minimum of 30 minutes before installing silica sand.
Note: The volume of the annular space can be determined by subtracting the volume displaced by the
well casing (outside diameter) from the total borehole volume. The borehole volume and casing
displacement is determined using drilling reference tables or the formula for the volume of a
cylinder (V= r2h). Annular space volume (Va) is determined using
Va = Vt-Vc; where a = annulus, t = total, and c = casing.
277
6.8.6 The driller or the site geologist shall perform calculations for each batch. All calculations shall be
recorded in the field logbook.
6.9 SOUNDING BACKFILL DEPTHS (FOR INTERMEDIATE AND DEEP WELLS)
6.9.1 The driller shall sound the depth to the top of the fill material using a mechanical (weighted tape/wire
line) or electronic sounding device. The site geologist shall oversee and concur with each measurement
before recording the depth in the logbook and Title II drawing. The sounding line shall be run through
a sheave suspended over the borehole and lowered through the tremie pipe. Care should be taken to
avoid entanglement of the sounding line in the well casing centralizers. The driller and site geologist
shall maintain cognizance of centralizer locations relative to the tremie pipe at all times.
6.9.2 If a mechanical sounding line is used (weighted tape or wire line), the driller will carefully monitor the
tension on the wire or tape as the weight nears the depth where the fill is calculated to be. When an
electronic sounder is used, the driller shall carefully monitor the cable-counter and slow the sounder
winch as it approaches the calculated depth of the fill.
6.9.3 Once the sounding device tags bottom, the driller will verify the measurement by repeating the
measurement process two times with the same result, or within five tenths of a foot (+/-0.5ft). The site
geologist shall then record the confirmed measurement in the field logbook to the nearest tenth of a
foot (0.1ft).
Note: Measurements read from a cable counter or graduated tape must be adjusted to account for the
length of the weight on the end of the wire or tape. The height of the tremie pipe stickup (above
ground level) must be subtracted from the each measurement when referencing depths below
ground level.
6.9.4 In the event that the calculated depth and the measured depth are significantly different, the driller and
site geologist shall evaluate the difference and resolve any non-conformance(s). The driller and site
geologist shall review the casing and centralizer configuration in the Title II well design drawing to
ensure that a well-casing centralizer is not inadvertently being tagged. If the fill is lower than expected,
the geophysical logs, the video logs, and the drillers’ logs shall be reviewed to determine if voids or
fractures are present in the subject interval.
6.9.4.1 If the non-conformance renders the condition of the well unacceptable or indeterminate, the
Non-conformance shall be resolved in accordance with QP-3.4, Managing Non-conformance’s,
Deficiencies and Corrective Actions before continuing backfill operations.
7.10 INSTALLING PROTECTIVE CASING AROUND MONITOR WELL THE MINIMUM
ELEMENTS IN THE PROTECTION DESIGN INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:
7.10.1 The protective steel casing and locking cap should be weatherproof. The locking cap should be secured
to the casing by padlocks.
7.10.2 Set the protective casing (5ft minimum length) so that the top of the pipe is about 1.5 to 3ft above the
ground surface and grout it in place as shown in Attachments D and E.
6.10.3 Use 8-in.-diameter pipe for 4-in. well, 6-in.-diameter pipe for 2-in. well and 10-in diameter pipe for 5-
in. well (depending on approved borehole size). A drain hole near ground level that is 0.5-in. in diameter
is permitted.
7.10.4 Mark the location ID on the inside and outside of the cover with indelible ink, metal punch lettering
kit, or by writing with an arc welding machine/rod.
7.10.5 Form and pour the concrete protective pad around the protective steel casing. Pad dimensions will not
be less than 2ft × 2ft × 0.5ft.
278
The concrete pad should be sloped away from the casing for positive drainage. The standard regional
well pad configuration and design is shown in Attachment E. The brass monument shall be placed into
the concrete in the northwest corner of the pad, approximately 12 inches from the edges of the concrete.
Location and elevation coordinates and the FIMAD location I.D. number shall be clearly imprinted in
the monument.
7.11 RECORDING WELL CONSTRUCTION DETAILS
7.11.1 The driller and site geologist shall keep an accurate record of all well construction materials in the site
logbook. The records shall include at minimum the following:
Type of material,
Manufacturer name and address,
Batch or control number,
Calculations showing estimated volume of material placed during each lift
Number of packages of each product used in each interval/lift,
Size of individual packages,
Volume and composition of transport fluids,
Condition of materials and packaging; and
Any other potentially valuable information.
7.11.2 After completing a unit of backfill (i.e. filter pack interval), the site geologist shall make and record a
comparison between the calculated and actual volumes of material required in the field logbook.
Methods of installation shall also be described and recorded in the field logbook.
7.12 DOCUMENTING THE FINAL WELL CONFIGURATION
7.12.1 The site geologist shall record the final measured depth of each complete unit of annular fill on the
most recently approved Title II well design drawing and in the field logbook.
7.12.2 The site geologist shall record all observations made during backfilling and depth sounding in the field
logbook.
7.12.3 Observations should include at a minimum the following:
Differences in the design-specified and as-built fill levels of each unit of annular fill,
Anomalous depth measurements,
An evaluation of any problems encountered and the final resolutions, and
Any other information or observations that may be useful in assessing the quality of the
installation.
8. WORKS
8.1. Concrete Works
8.1.1 Materials
Materials for construction works has to comply with following specifications:
Cement: Portland cement to British Standard BS 12
Reinforcement: Bars, Plain - Reference R. to British Standard BS 4449,
Deformed, Reference T to British Standard BS 4449, Fabric to BS 4443
Sand, coarse: Clean, free from lime, clay and any organic substance, less than 5 mm
Coarse aggregate: Clean, free from lime, clay and any organic substance, passing 20 mm sieve
279
The quantity of all materials required has to be included by the Contractor in the respective items of
the Bill of Quantity.
8.1.1.1 Cement
The cement to be used shall be normal Portland cement which conforms to British Standard BS 12 or
equivalent.
The Contractor shall keep the cement in a dry place above the ground. The Engineer shall be able to
enter into the cement store of the Contractor and check the cement storage conditions. Any deteriorated
cement sacks, shall be removed and the expenses therefore shall be covered by the Contractor.
8.1.1.2 Aggregates
The aggregates to be used for concrete shall comply with the relevant British Standards.
Fine fractions shall be used from natural sand. It shall be clean and with diameter less than 5 mm,
uniformly distributed. The addition of sand produced by crushing to natural sand shall be allowed only
with the permission of the Engineer, when he considers this addition as necessary for the improvement
of granular size. The maximum content of clays, silts and powders shall not exceed 3 % of the weight
Large fractions shall not be larger than 20 mm.
8.1.1.3 Water
Water used in the work shall be from a source approved by the Engineer or his representative. It shall
be free from oil, acid, alkali and any vegetable or organic matter which is harmful to any material with
which it is used. Where available, a drinking water supply shall be used.
Additive to Concrete
The concrete used in the work shall be a homogeneous mixture of Portland cement, coarse sand, coarse
aggregate and water.
If any additive is included in the concrete mixture, they shall comply with the following requirements:
a) No reduction of the concrete strength;
b) No change of the proportion of cement with fillers
c) No corrosion of the steel bars
d) Not causing the reaction of ”alkaline-fillers”
e) The dosage has to comply with the technical specification of the additive.
280
The class of concrete to be used in each structure or part thereof shall be as detailed on the drawings or
as instructed by the Engineer. The constituents of 1 m3 of each class of concrete shall be:
Class A Class B Class C
Weight of cement (s) kg 250 300 350
Weight of sand, coarse (s): kg 760 700 650
Weight of coarse aggregate (a): kg 1150 1170 1180
Water approximate: kg 175 175 175
Crushing strength, 28 days N/mm2 10 20 25
Nominal volumetric proportion: c:s:a 1:2:5:5 1:2:4:1 1:6:3:2
Only sufficient water shall be added during mixing of the constituents to form concrete having
sufficient workability to enable it to be well consolidated to be worked into the corners of the formwork
to give the specified surface finish and specified strength.
8.1.2 TRIAL MIX AND TESTING OF CONCRETE
The Contractor shall not start preparation of concrete, without first testing a sample of concrete in
advance according to the mix design for the type of concrete desired.
The Contractor shall prepare all samples for any type of concrete with the same equipment and with
the same materials that he uses for preparation of the production concrete. He shall inform the Engineer
24 hours in advance of these tests so that he may participate in taking the samples
Every batch of concrete shall be tested for slump at the place of deposit in the presence of the Engineer
or his representative. The contractor shall provide slump cones at every place of mixing and deposit.
The maximum allowable slump shall be 15 mm. The contractor shall include the costs in his rates.
8.1.3 STEEL FOR REINFORCEMENT
Diameter, shape, strength properties and identification of the steel (ribbed steel min. 420/500 N/mm²)
should be according to BS4483.
If requested the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the certificate of the factory, which has supplied
the steel.
All for the installation of the whole construction necessary reinforcement works incl. delivery, cutting,
buckling, laying and the necessary connections to reinforcement have to be included in the BoQ as well
as cutting losses, reinforcement spacer, S-hooks etc.
The connections between construction walls, ceilings and intermediate floor have to be executed in a
way, that they are permanently waterproof and the conditions for the crack width control can be kept.
8.1.3.1 Steel Bar Bending
The steel shall be cut and bent in accordance with drawings and tables to be delivered by the contractor
approved by the Engineer. It shall be bent in a cool state and with the suitable equipment.
281
8.1.3.2 Placing of Steel Reinforcement for Concrete
Before application, the steel has to be released from constituents, which can affect the composite, e. g.
dirt, grease, ice and loose rust.
The steel to be placed in concrete shall be clean, not damaged, not corroded and without other matter
which prevent its connection to the concrete. The steel bars shall be connected with one another with
the required overlapping to be proved by the contractor. The steel shall be placed in conformity with
the design, and shall not be moved during the concrete placement. The welding, of spacers or
connections shall be approved by the Engineer. Spacers shall be of the same quality as those of the
completed concrete. The steel bars need to be covered with concrete at minimum 3 cm.
The Constructor has to co-ordinate the reinforcement approval with the local site management.
The approval of the reinforcement works is absolutely necessary before concrete placement and shall
be carried out by the Engineer.
8.1.4 TRANSPORTING, PLACING AND COMPACTING OF CONCRETE
The contractor shall notify the Engineer when concreting is about to start on each section of the work.
No concrete shall be placed until the Engineer has approved the formwork.
Concrete shall be so handled that at the point of deposition it is of the specified quality and approved
consistency, nothing having been added to it or lost from it since leaving the mixer.
Concreting shall be carried out continuously to the positions of joints prepared prior to starting.
The compression of concrete shall be done by mechanical vibrators of the type approved by the
Engineer and the contractor has to be sure that enough vibration equipment is on site.
The Contractor shall have spare vibrators in case of failure or defects of any of them.
Shuttering shall be such as to guarantee the profile and surface required by the concrete works and such
as to preserve the rigidity during the casting of concrete. They shall comply with direction, form and
size of concrete according to the design or to the instruction of the Engineer For major works, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the drawing of the shuttering.
The joints of the shuttering are to be such as not to weaken the mark of concrete, not to prevent its
vibration, when they are removed, nor to damage the concrete or its outer appearance. The shuttering
shall be very clean. The plastering of defective surfaces of concrete is not allowed.
Before beginning with the assembling the shuttering are checked and cleaned carefully. All the surfaces
of the shuttering, which are in contact with the concrete shall be painted with a solution approved by a
laboratory accepted by the Employer to avoid the sticking of concrete. This solution shall be carefully
used, to avoid the pollution of iron bars and previous concrete. The shuttering shall be removed only
as ordered by the Engineer and their removal shall be carried out by a competent specialist in order not
to damage the concrete. The cost for shuttering shall be included in the concrete price.
282
8.1.5 CURING AND MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE
As long as the concrete is not hardened, it shall be protected from the damaging effects of wind, sun,
rain, high temperatures, or aggressive water. The concrete shall be cured by keeping it in humid
conditions. The exposed sides shall be covered and kept wet by means approved by the Project
Architect
8.1.6 Repair to Concrete
The Contractor shall make available to the Engineer all the means to inspect the works during the
execution or after the completion and to make quality tests according to the standards or specifications.
The concrete shall be repaired using a method approved by the Engineer or removed completely when
he considers it necessary. The repairs shall not be considered as a justification for the extension of
working time.
Any material resulting as waste from the repairs shall be removed from the site at the expense of the
Contractor.
8.1.7 Concreting in unfavourable weather
The contractor shall not place concrete in permanent work:
(a) During heavy rains or dust storms
(b) When the air temperature is more than 30°C.
When the air temperature exceeds 30°C, the contractor shall not place concrete in the permanent work
without taking such precautions as may be required to keep the temperature of the concrete during
mixing and setting below 38°C (e.g. keeping the concrete materials and formwork shaded from the sun,
and the aggregate and formwork sprayed with water)
Concrete shall not be poured against formwork which is hotter than 30°C without the approval of the
Project Architect
9.0 BOREHOLE DRILLING
9.1 Drilling of boreholes includes following works:
• Survey of location
• Drilling of borehole, including development of borehole, pump and water quality test
• Proper sealing of borehole in case of dry boreholes
• Mobilization and demobilization
Successfully drilled boreholes have to be equipped with submersible pump.
A concrete platform has to be constructed and the borehole has to be fenced. For some locations cattle
troughs for combined systems (for human beings and cattle) have to be constructed, if instructed by the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide all labor, transport, plant, tools, equipment and materials and
appurtenances, and shall perform all Works necessary to satisfactorily locate sites for drilling, construct
and complete successfully drilled boreholes including lowering of borehole assembly with PVC casing
and Screen and end cap, gravel pack at appropriate intervals and back fill, close near surface water table
aquifer, cleaning and development of said boreholes, pump test for 6 hours, chlorinate borehole,
construct a platform and drainage, fence the borehole area.
283
The Contractor shall employ only competent workmen for the execution of the Works, and all such
Works shall be performed under direct supervision of an expert driller/site supervisor.
9.2 Drilling Team
9.2.1 Inventory of Drilling Equipment and Materials
The Contractor shall specify in the Schedule of Drilling Equipment, borehole development and other
accessory equipment, its type and capacity that is to be used to undertake this work. Its capacity shall
be sufficient to cope with the Works as stated in the Contract. It shall at all times be kept in full working
order and good repair.
Prior to the commencement of the work the Employer or his representative shall have the right to
inspect the drilling and the pumping test units of the contractor. The Employer or his representative
shall also have the right to carry out a detail inventory of the materials to be supplied by the contractor
(equipment, materials, drilling tools, compressor, welding plant, casing and screens, pumps, generators,
etc.)
If the Employer considers that the drilling equipment or any accessories in use on the site of the Works
is in any way unsuitable, inefficient or inadequate in capacity, the Employer shall have the right to call
upon the Contractor to put such equipment in good order within fourteen days or alternatively to remove
such plant and replace it with additional plant or equipment which the Employer considers necessary
to meet the requirements of the Contract. In the event that this requirement of the Contract is not
satisfied, the Client reserves the right to terminate the Contract immediately.
No extra payment shall be made for the Contractor's change of drilling equipment, labor or other
equipment required to complete the Works specified, nor for any incidentals thereto, the cost being
deemed to be included in the schedule of rates.
9.2.2 Drilling Unit
The drilling unit has to comprise of the following:
• Qualified drilling crew, including a Chief Driller and Chief Mechanic
• A standard rotary drilling rig for shallow and deep well drilling
• Drilling tools accessories and relevant equipment
• A compressor
• A welding plant
• Supply truck and light vehicle
• Water tank
• Necessary casings, screens, and other construction materials.
9.2.3 Pumping Test Unit
The pump test unit has to comprise of the following:
• Experienced pumping test crew
• For deep boreholes, submersible pump which can deliver 40-100 liters per second at a 100 meter
head.
• Diesel powered generator of appropriate capacity that can run the pump.
• All the necessary equipment, tools and accessories which are necessary to carry out pumping test
operation.
284
9.2.4 Identification number
The contractor will receive identification number by the Engineer for the boreholes contracted. The
identification number of the borehole should be punched on the pump body and on the pump platform
9.2.5 Site Selection
After contract signing the Contractor will receive approval from the Project Architect to commence
work.
The Contractor shall be responsible to carry out a survey (either by geophysical / geological or
hydrogeological methods) to confirm the technical feasibility of drilling a successful borehole(s).
Special care must be taken to ensure that the sites chosen are at least 50 meters away from toilet pits or
any other sources of pollution such as garbage pits, sewerage tanks or spills / over flow from pipes.
9.3 DRILLING RECORDS
9.3.1 WORK-ON-SITE JOURNAL
The Contractor shall maintain a work-on-site journal in which all the information concerning the works
is recorded, a copy of which shall be delivered to the Engineer or his representative. The information
to be recorded by the drilling unit includes:
Well Log of Drilling Unit
Drilling cuttings from the borehole shall be collected and handled in a manner that they can easily be
identified. Samples shall be taken at 2 meter intervals. The samples shall be placed in sample bags or
boxes.
The driller shall log the samples and keeps a record on a daily log sheet including:
• Lithology
• Degree of consolidation or hardness
• If unconsolidated, nature of ground material, i.e. subjective description of grain size, degree of
rounding, clay content, colour.
In addition the Contractor shall prepare a representative sample of every distinct horizon or change of
rock type.
Daily Record of Pumping Test Unit
• Site name (name of village)
• Site location - GPS coordinates (± 20m)
• Borehole identification number
• Name of all crew members
• make, model, capacity of the test pump and generator
• Types of work performed and the duration for each type of work
• The static water level
• Pump position during testing
• Total time of the pumping test
• Total stand-by time
• Total shutdown time
• Total time on site
• Problems encountered and other noteworthy information.
285
9.3.2 FINAL REPORT (Well Completion Report)
After completing construction and pumping testing, the Contractor shall prepare a final technical report
for each well, in English, which must be submitted with the Contractor’s fee claim. The report should
include the following information:
• Site name
• Site location - GPS coordinates (± 20m)
• Borehole identification number
• Make, model, type and size of the rig
• Time and date of arrival and departure of the rig
• Number of kilometers indicated on the rig’s odometer at arrival and departure
• Time and date of the start and stop of drilling
• Compressor time for drilling, pump testing, and development
• Total shut down time (hours) due to breakdowns
• Total standby time (hours)
• Total drilling time (hours)
• Total development time (hours)
• Total time (days) rig on site
• Summary of logging results showing geologic strata and aquifer
• Static and dynamic water table
• Drilling diameter, depth, and position of casing, screens and grout
• Equipment and instruments used for the pumping test
• Data collection sheets of the pumping test and remarks about data acquisition
• The plotted graphs of the pumping test
• Summary of the analytical methods, calculations, and interpretation of the pumping test.
• Proposed pump placement
• Summary of observations, problems encountered, and recommendations
• Digital photos from the borehole site have to be taken and attached to the final report (photos must
indicate date and time):
(i) One taken before start of construction activities and
(ii) another one after completion of works (showing the borehole and punched borehole
identification number)
9.3.3 HYDRO GEOLOGICAL CONDITIONS
Hydro geological information can be obtained from the ‘Technical Guidelines and Manual for Borehole
with a Hand pump’ (UNICEF / MWR).
It should be clear that this information does not hold the Employer responsible for any locally different
conditions at the specific drilling site or for the particular problems the contractor may face while
executing his work.
The contractor will be responsible for carrying out hydro geological investigations at the sites selected
for SWDS.
9.3.4 BOREHOLE CONSTRUCTION
9.3.4.1 Borehole Design
General consideration in borehole designs can be obtained from the ‘Technical Guidelines and Manual
for Borehole with a Hand pump’ (UNICEF / MWR)
286
In addition the following considerations should be looked at when designing a borehole with a
submersible pump:
• The expected depth of the well shall be determined according to the hydrogeological structure of
the area where the well is needed to be drilled. Therefore the drilling method to be employed should
be identified and decided in order to achieve the required depth of the well.
• An apron/platform should be cast around the top of the lining (at least 1 m radius).
• Submersible pump specifications should be suitable to fit to the quality of water in the borehole.
• The screen should be properly positioned as per the attached designs in the Drawings.
• Disinfection of the borehole is required prior to commissioning of the water supply system.
Communities need to be informed about this as there might be unsubstantiated flow of information
in regard to disinfections (chlorination of water).
• Surface water diversion ditches should be provided to protect against inundation.
9.3.4.2 Drilling Rigs
In general drilling of a borehole can be executed by Rotary Drilling.
Rigs shall have air and water/mud flush facilities for drilling through the over burden and down the
hole hammer facilities for drilling in hard rock. The rig shall have sufficient working casings to drill
through the various rock types, and accessories needed for reaming, fishing, well development, pump
testing, etc.
Rigs shall be able to drill up to 150 meters deep.
The flushing medium shall be air, water or stable foam. If, at any stage mud is necessary either as a
primary fluid or as an additive to create “stiff foam”, only degradable high quality polymer will be
acceptable. Bentonites are specifically prohibited.
9.3.4.3 Drilling Diameter
A minimum diameter of 8” (inches) at the completion of the borehole and installed with 6” casings and
screens is required above and below the water-conducting layer in order to install a submersible pump
with a diameter of 3 inches.
The Engineer or his representative shall determine the final drilling depth, based on the desired yield
and site specific geological and hydrogeological conditions. The Contractor shall require the Engineer’s
approval to abandon unsuccessful boreholes and initiate drilling at an alternate location.
The Employer will not be responsible for any loss of temporary casing which the contractor is unable
to pull out or lost due to snapping or breaking from the completed boreholes.
9.3.4.4 Soil Definition
Soft soil refers to soil of poor volume stability and low strength and may be composed of loose sands
and silts, wet clays, organic soils, or combination of these materials.
Hard rock refers to soil what must be crushed or hammered using specialized mechanical equipment.
For the purpose of these tender invitation formations which can be drilled using the conventional
drilling methods such as driving, jetting auger drilling, kludging rotary drilling techniques such as direct
287
or reverse fluid circulation rotary drilling, air circulation rotary drilling or such other techniques shall
not be considered as hard rock.
The contractor shall notify the Engineer or his representative whenever he encounters drilling formation
which in his opinion may be classified as hard rock. The Engineer’s decision on the classification of
formation drilled material shall be final.
9.3.4.5 Borehole construction
The final borehole shall be of the following type, depending on the lithology and formations:
Type A - open hole in stable rock or formation, unscreened with plain casing through the overburden
only
1) Percussion, air rotary or mud rotary through overburden (alluvial, laterite, weathered or soft
bedrock), minimum final drilling diameter is 8" in overburden.
2) Percussion or rotary/percussion ("down the hole hammer"), using stabilizers (foam) where
necessary, in consolidated hard rock, minimum final diameter is 6"
3) Boreholes should be drilled at least 6 meters below any water bearing fractures to allow sufficient
space for a sedimentation sump.
4) Fractured bedrock considered not collapsing and left open
5) Installation of casing for overburden: minimum diameter 6”, sealing of casing with grouting, back-
filling, cementation of top 5 meters.
Type B - protected borehole in collapsing rocks in fractured or broken bedrock encountered in
otherwise stable formations, as above with slotted casing for formation support and plain casing
extended to the bottom.
1) Percussion, air rotary or mud rotary through overburden (alluvial, laterite, weathered or soft
bedrock), minimum final drilling diameter is 8" in overburden.
2) Down the hole hammer in consolidated hard rock, minimum final diameter is 6"
3) Fractured bedrock - water-bearing - considered to be collapsing and needs to be protected with
casing/screen (minimum inner diameter 6"
4) If necessary to prevent collapsing of overburden, installation of casing minimum diameter 6",
sealing of casing with grouting, backfilling, cementation of top 5 meters.
5) Installation of casing for overburden: minimum diameter 6", sealing of casing with grouting, back-
filling, cementation of top 5 meters.
Type C – Screened boreholes
In unconsolidated sediments, soft or very broken bedrock, supported by casing and screen, installed
with filter pack: C1 = formation filter, C2 = artificial gravel pack (sieved)
Type C1 - Screened borehole with formation filter
If a formation is not uniform and well sorted, a screen with a properly chosen slot size will result in a
natural development of a formation filter, close to the screen. This technique should be avoided because
of some required conditions not met in the context of South Sudan: a) a wide range of slots or screens
is not available to the contractors, b) sieve analyses of aquifers cannot be carried out at the moment.
Type C2 - Screened borehole with artificial gravel pack
1) Percussion, air rotary or mud rotary through alluvial or unconsolidated rocks, minimum final
drilling diameter is 8".
288
2) A minimum annular space of 1-2" between casing and borehole walls is required for gravel pack
installation.
3) Installation of screen or slotted casing with minimum inner diameter 6"
4) Installations of gravel pack at least 3 meters above the top of the first screen, topped with a one
meter clay seal, with backfilling material and cementation of the top 5 meters.
9.3.4.6 Bottom of the borehole
Boreholes should be drilled at least 6 meters below any water bearing layers or fractures to allow
sufficient space for sump. As far as possible, boreholes shall be drilled into the underlying bedrock or,
if the depth to the bedrock is too deep, drilling should stop in an impervious formation underlying the
aquifer - a clay layer for example.
The bottom of the hole acts as a sedimentation sump and a support for the casing and screen. The sump
shall be a bottom plain casing of at least 1.5 meter length - 3 meters recommended - with the same
diameter as the screen, and with its underside sealed with a bottom plug (wooden or PVC).
9.3.4.7 Casing Pipe and Sand Trap:
The boreholes shall be fully cased up to bottom of the borehole. The threads both male and female shall
be properly cleaned with a brush and cloth before they are joined. If the pipes used are with bell and
socket, these shall be cleaned using fluids and cemented with recommended solvent cement by the
manufacturers of the casing pipes and screen. Before lowering into the borehole the recommended time
for the joint set firmly has to be taken into consideration.
All necessary precautions during the transportation and storage of casing pipes to the drilling site have
to be taken to prevent distortions, bending or deformation of the pipe that could result in eccentricity
along the length of the pipe.
Pipes and screens must be stored on a proper location and should be kept away from prolonged sunlight
exposure
9.3.4.8 Screen
Screen design shall be determined in order to avoid drawdown of the water level into the screened
section of the well or below the first water strike in the water-bearing layers.
The screen should normally be installed within the coarsest section provided that the calculated
pumping drawdown does not reach below the top of the screen or below the main water strike.
Screening design
Notwithstanding the above, normally only the lowest 2/3 of the saturated strata (or parts thereof) should
be screened.
The length and position of the screened section affects the yield of the borehole. When the nature of
the aquifer is well identified, the screened section shall be designed conformably to the nature and
hydrostatic pressure in the aquifer.
A first minor water strike shall be sealed off with plain casing if it can be estimated that pumping will
lead to dewatering of the water strike.
Casings and screens shall have the same inner diameter and wall thickness.
289
The quality and standard of the casing and screens shall be in accordance with the standards set by the
American Petroleum Institute or the American Soil Testing and Materials Association or any other
international acceptable Institute.
Screen shall have a slot size of 0.75 mm to 2 mm depending on the aquifer material, as determined by
the Engineer. The open area of the screens shall be at least 30% of the surface area of the pipe, and
maximum entry velocity shall not exceed 0.03 m/sec.
Slots, which are prepared by using hacksaw, welding or oxy-acetylene, are not allowed.
Damaged and deformed casings and screens will not be accepted for installation.
Centralizers of suitable size (certified by the Engineer) shall be fitted to both casings and screens at 6m
intervals.
A 1-inch ID galvanized observation pipe shall be installed on the outside of the casing and screen before
the gravel pack is applied. Six to twelve meters of the observation pipe, as determined by the Engineer,
shall be slotted.
9.3.4.9 Filter pack
Artificial gravel pack (filter pack) is required to prevent particles entering the well and to improve
hydraulic properties in and around the catchment section of the borehole.
Gravel pack shall consist of siliceous material with rounded, smooth and uniform particles. Unstable
minerals such as feldspars, calcite (limestone), laterite, etc. will easily decompose and change the
properties of gravel pack. Flaky particles such as schist and micas will clog the screens.
Gravel pack should be clean and well-sorted, i.e. there must be no particles of clay or silt adhering to
the individual sand or gravel grains of the packs. Filter material should be treated with care to avoid
any kind of contamination.
The gravel shall be of appropriate size for the openings of the screen and type of geological formation.
The Engineer shall approve samples prior to placing. To avoid bridging of the gravel must be filled-in
by hand slowly and carefully. Mechanized equipment may not be used to fill-in the gravel. The correct
placing of gravel shall be controlled by continuous recording of the volume of gravel consumed and by
repeated measurement of the achieved level of packing.
The artificial gravel pack is combined with a suitable screen. Installation of gravel pack in the annular
space between screens and borehole walls, plus 3 meters above the top of the first screen. Gravel pack
shall be topped with a one-meter clay seal.
9.3.4.10 Grouting
Grouting is a standard practice for all public water supply boreholes. Typically, boreholes should be
grouted from the surface down to a depth of at least 5 meters to prevent leakage and percolation of
contaminants from the surface. Because of logistics constraints, grouting of the top 1.5 meter can be
admitted.
Following practices are optional in the existing context of South Sudan:
• Boreholes drilled in rocks that are overlain by thin overburden shall be grouted from the surface to
the rock.
• Boreholes drilled in sandy aquifer overlain by an impervious overburden shall be grouted from the
surface to the aquifer.
290
• in some formations where poor-quality aquifers are interspersed with high-quality water zones, the
poor-quality aquifers shall be completely sealed off in order to keep the water from the aquifer to
remain free from harmful bacteria or other contaminating factors.
• the minimum thickness for satisfying grouting or clay seal is 0.5 m, but a thickness of 1 m should
be used whenever possible to minimize contamination risks.
• Clay and backfilling material must be thoroughly compacted in order to avoid cracks between the
slab and the concrete cover afterwards.
9.3.4.11 Head of the borehole
The top casing and observation pipe shall come out between 55 cm and 60 cm above of the ground
level. It will be correctly cemented in the ground. If a submersible pump is not installed immediately,
then the top of the borehole must be sealed adequately to prevent the entrance of foreign materials.
9.3.4.12Borehole verticality
Installed casing shall be round and straight. Straightness and plumpness should be tested at the end of
the casing screen installation. The minimum standard of quality can be controlled by lowering down
a standard hand pump cylinder to the final depth of the borehole without opposing any resistance.
Any delays encountered in running casing and screen considered to be due to poor whole alignment
shall be at the Contractor's expense.
9.3.4.13 Soil sampling
During drilling, formation should be sampled at least every 2 m or less depending on the changes of
geological formation. Aquifer formation should be logged on the borehole completion form.
For collection, the Contractor shall cease drilling, circulate all cuttings to the surface, resume drilling
and collect the cuttings then brought to the surface. The Contractor shall take every possible precaution
to guard against sample contamination due to poor circulation, borehole erosion, or caving. Cutting
samples shall be bagged, labeled with borehole depth at time of collection, and stored in a position
where they will not be contaminated by site conditions or drilling operations. The Contractor shall
supply strong, transparent sample bags and labels as required. The driller in-charge shall also record
the drill time logs/penetration rate of each rod or at every three-meter interval
9.3.4.14 Interim Yield Tests
Interim yield tests shall be carried out at the first strike of water and at each stage during drilling when
the flow of water increases. The depths of measurement and the yield of water shall be recorded on
the daily log sheet. Interim yield tests should be carried out for at least 30 minutes to establish the
sustained yield at that depth of drilling.
9.4 BOREHOLE DEVELOPMENT
9.4.1 Borehole development
Borehole development improves the borehole performance and the quality of water. All boreholes must
be developed to the satisfaction of the Engineer or his representative on completion of drilling and after
casing, screen, grouting and filter pack are installed. The minimum requirement is the "air-lift" method
until the ground water runs clean and turbidity free, but in any case for a minimum of 3 hours. If this
condition is not achieved after 6 hours, air-lift will be carried-out until the water becomes limpid, but
up to a maximum of 12 hours with any extra hours on top of 6 hours to be invoiced accordingly if
approved by the Engineer.
291
Surging and jetting are acceptable standard methods in borehole development. Boreholes drilled in hard
rock formations shall be developed using compressed air after well completion until such time as clean
water without drill cutting or clay is obtained.
Routine evaluation of the borehole yields should be limited to the air-lift capacity test after development
of the well.
9.4.2 Pumping Test
The client or his representative shall decide the discharge rates at which pumping tests shall be carried
out. An electric water level indictor shall be used for the measurements of the water level.
Discharge measurements could be done either by standard v-notch, calibrated water meter, or by simple
container of known volume. Measurements by water meter are preferred.
Interruption caused by the negligence or technical defects of the pump, generator, or water level
indicator and other pertinent measuring equipment may cause repetition of the test at the expense of
the contractor.
No bulk spilling of water is allowed to re-infiltrate in the vicinity of the well. The discharged water has
to be carried away by means of discharge pipe towards a natural drain.
After completing the development, a pump should be installed inside the well at a depth above the well
screen. Some measurements should be taken before and after starting the pump and these include static
water level before pumping, the rate of discharge, dynamic water levels at various intervals during the
pumping period, time of starting the pump, time of any change in the discharge rate and time of stopping
the pump.
Following measurement should be recorded:
• Measuring pump rates: Control of the pumping rate during the testing by a suitable and accurate
device for measuring the discharge rate of the pump, e.g. by a valve in the discharge pipe. The size
of the discharge pipe and the valve should be such that the valve will form one half to three fourths
open when pumping at the desired rate.
• Step Draw Down Test (Water level measurement): The depth to water shall be measured several
times during the course of pumping test. The depth shall be measured during the course of Step
Draw Down Test lasting 30 minutes each.
• Constant Rate Test shall be carried out for a minimum of 12 continuous hours and recovery
measurement taken. Readings shall be taken at close intervals during the first two hours of the test
with the time between readings being gradually as the test continues. Measurement should be made
every ½ minute during the first five minutes after starting the pump, then every 5 minutes for an
hour, then every 20 minutes for about 2 hours. From this point on, reading taken at hourly intervals
are sufficient until the borehole reaches the state of equilibrium i.e. no changes in drawdown.
292
9.4.3 Water Quality Test
A sample of water from each borehole shall be taken at the end of the constant rate test for both
chemical and bacteriological analyses.
The sample container shall be clean and clearly marked showing
• The name of the community,
• Number of the borehole, and
• Date of sampling.
The chemical analysis shall determine the following:
• pH
• Fluoride
• Arsenic
• Temperature
• Manganese
• Total iron
• Colour
• Lead
• Total hardness
• Chloride
• Zinc
• Total dissolved solids
• Total nitrates
• Copper
• Total suspended solids
• Sulphate
The bacteriological analysis shall determine
• Total coliform and
• Total fecal coliform.
Temperature and pH shall be measured when samples are taken.
Chemical tests shall be done at a recognized laboratory or with a recognized portable testing kit
previously approved by the client. Results of chemical water tests shall form part of borehole
completion reports and shall be on the headed paper of the laboratory signed by the chief chemist with
the stamp of the laboratory.
9.4.4 Borehole Disinfection
All successful boreholes shall be disinfected after completion. This can be achieved by placing a
chlorine solution into the well so that a concentration of at least 50 mg/l (0.005%) of active chlorine
exists in all parts of the well at static conditions. All borehole parts above the water level should be
completely flushed with the solution. The solution shall remain in the well for a minimum of 4 hours
at the specified concentration before pumping the well to waste.
9.4.5 Successful / Unsuccessful Borehole
Unless in very specific geological context (highly confined aquifers) or preliminary agreed between
the parties (installation of electric/mechanic pumps for example), the maximum drilling depth shall be
150 meters below the ground level.
293
A borehole is considered productive, positive or successful if a minimum yield of 3-6m3 (3000-6000
litres per hour) is measured at the end of the development process. If a pump cannot be used, then the
"air-lift" discharge shall be at least 800 litters per hour. Boreholes with capacity less than 3-6 m3/hour
shall not be fitted with a submersible pump.
A successful borehole must be plumbed and vertical to be considered successful.
A borehole is considered unsuccessful
• If the drilling depth has reached 150 m and the yield of the borehole is less than the quantity stated
above or
• if for any reasons due to drilling problems, collapsing conditions, breakdown of the machine or any
other reasons the borehole cannot be completed.
In that case another drilling attempt has to be made. Payment is done for the successful borehole only.
In case that both drilling attempts are unsuccessful only 50% of actual costs done for the second
borehole will be paid.
Back Filling Unsuccessful Boreholes
All unsuccessful boreholes shall be filled with drill cuttings or other suitable material to 1m below
ground surface and a 1m grout seal placed on top to properly cover the hole.
294
SPECIFICATION FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF
COLD WATER AND FIRE HYDRANT PLUMBING SERVICES ENGINEERING FOR OFFICE
BUILDING AT REGENT ROAD, HILL STATION, FREETOWN FOR SIERRA LEONE FIELD
OFFICE AT THE AFRICAN DEVELOPMENT BANK (ADB)
295
AFRICAN DEVELOPMENT BANK (ADB) – PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION
CONTENTS PAGE:
PART 1.0: Tender Conditions
PART 2.0: Design Criteria
PART 3.0: Mechanical Engineering Services Installation (Plumbing)
PART 4.0: Tender Drawings
PART 5.0: Tender Declaration
PART 6.0: Tender Schedule of Rates
PART 7.0: Tender Breakdown
296
2.0 TENDER CONDITIONS
1.1 Introduction
The purpose of this document and supporting drawings/data is to illustrate and describe the Contract
Works associated with the Building Engineering Services (BES) Systems + Applications.
The information contained in the Technical Specification and depicted on the Drawings is for the
purpose of obtaining a competitive Tender for the Mechanical Engineering Services (MES) Contract
Works
The Contractor must allow for liaising with other trades to ensure that the MES Installation is properly
coordinated / integrated into the Contract Works / Building Complex as a whole.
It is recommended that the Contractor visits the site in order to acquaint himself with the existing site
conditions, (access, existing site infrastructure services etc.), that might affect his Tender.
No claim arising out of any misunderstanding or neglect shall be considered.
1.12 Extent of the Contract Works
The MES Contract Works shall include all the necessary labour and materials and all
construction/building works, together with such tests, adjustments and commissioning of the
mechanical and electrical engineering services systems and applications as are required to form a
“complete installation”.
The MES Contract Works “Complete Installation” shall mean not only the major items of plant and
equipment detailed in this Document, but all of the incidentals/sundry components required for the
complete execution of the Contract Works.
1.13 Contract Works:
Design Development
The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out the design development work in connection with
the BES Contract Works; this is in addition to that of the fundamental design of the mechanical and
electrical engineering services systems and applications specified within this Document and supporting
drawings/data.
The Contractor shall allow, within his Tender, for the following particular design development
calculations:
Cold Water Plumbing
To determine the required lengths of Cold Water Pipes, Control devices and Valves sizes, based upon
the completed plumbing installation drawings developed.
Sanitary Fixtures
To determine the required lengths of Soil Pipes and Control devices based the completed Soil Pipes
installation drawings developed.
1.14 Contract Works:
Regulations and Standards
The MES Installation shall comply with the Technical Specification (s) set out within this Document
with all relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice and with all other relevant Statutory
Instruments and Regulations current at the time of Tender.
297
1.15 Contract Works:
Materials and Workmanship
All materials must be suitable for their intended use/application and must comply with the relevant
Standards and be installed in accordance with the Codes of Practice and Manufacturer’s
recommendations.
All site operatives must be suitable qualified and experienced for the work that they are assigned to
carry out. All workmanship must be of a good standard.
The Project Architect/M&E Engineer shall reject poor materials and workmanship and it shall be the
contractor’s responsibility to put right such rejected Contract Works at his own expense.
1.16 Contract Works:
Programme
The Contractor shall allow adequate time within his overall Contract Works Programme for presenting
and receiving comments to / from the Project Architect / M&E Engineer with respect to:
(i) Design Development Information
(ii) Installation Drawings
(iii) Testing and Commissioning Procedures
1.17 Supervision of the Contract Works
The Contractor shall employ a competent, qualified and experienced Principal Resident Site Engineer,
who shall be in charge of the Contract Works during all working hours and in attendance until the
whole of the Contract Works has been completed and accepted on behalf of the Employer.
The Contractor’s appointed representative shall attend meetings on site and be empowered to answer
on behalf of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall appoint a Deputy Site Engineer to cover for periods of absence of the Principal
Residence Site Engineer.
1.18 Coordination of the Contract Works
The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of the mechanical engineering services
systems, (Plumbing) such that each may be installed in a manner which ensures the correct performance
of the system and avoids conflict in the positioning of the various BES elements.
The Contractor shall include within his Tender for the detailed development of his Installation
Drawings to contribute to a fully coordinated and integrated BES Installation.
1.19 Contract Works:
Installation Drawings
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Project Architect/ M&E Engineer, Installation Drawings
for all of the MES systems to be installed under the Contract Works, together with such schedules, data,
calculations, systems schematics and other supplementary details necessary to execute the Contract
Works.
The Installation Drawings shall be fully detailed, depicting the positions and physical dimensions of all
of the MES Systems (Plumbing) Components.
The minimum scale for the production of the coordinated Installation Drawings shall be:
Plant locations + Switch rooms: 1: 20
Floor Plans 1: 50
Site Services 1: 200
298
The Contractor SHALL MAKE due allowance for the preparation of the MES Installation Drawings
within his Tender and within his Overall Contract Works Programme
1.20 Contract Works:
Fixing of the Services Installation
The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for the sizing, supply and installation of all supports/fixings
for the mechanical engineering services.
1.21 Contract Works:
Builders Work
Builders Work in connection with (BWIC) the MES Contract Works, such as duct, holes, basses,
chasses etc. shall be detailed by the Contractor as separated drawings.
The Contractor shall inform the Project Architect/M&E Engineer of any BWIC that may affect the
building structure and/or envelope.
The Contractor shall make due allowance for the detailing of the BWIC requirements within his Tender
and within his overall Contract Works Programme
1.22 Contract Works:
Testing and Commissioning
The Contractor shall ensure that suitably qualified and experienced personnel, together with the
necessary instrumentation, are available at the time required to set to work, test and commission the
mechanical and electrical engineering services systems.
The format of the testing and commissioning procedure, together with the details to be entered on the
test sheets, shall be agreed with the Project Architect/M&E Engineer.
The Contractor shall agree with the Project Architect/M&E Engineer a Programme for the testing and
commissioning of the various Plumbing Systems.
The M&E Engineer shall retain a detailed record of all the testing and commissioning procedures on
site for examination.
The testing and commissioning shall demonstrate, amongst other things, that:-
(i) All Plumbing and Sanitary Installations are properly install and physically protected.
1.23 Contract Works:
Record Documentation
The Contractor shall supply to the Project Architect/M&E Engineer, as a prerequisite to the Practical
Completion of the Contract Works, a comprehensive record of the completed mechanical and electrical
engineering services installation. This shall take the form of:-
(i) AutoCAD based disk detailing all INSTALLATION DRAWINGS.
(ii) 4 No. Dyeline prints of all INSTALLATION DRAWINGS.
(iii) 4 No. Bound A4 copies of the OPERATING + MAINTENANCE MANUALS, to include:
d) Copies of all testing and commissioning certificates.
e) Manufacturers/Suppliers technical data for the maintenance and operation of all plant and
equipment, together with a schedule of spares provided.
f) Schedule recording all installation drawings.
The Contractor shall maintain accurate records of all testing and commissioning procedures throughout
the course of the Contract Works for incorporation into the O + M Manuals.
The Contractor shall have available a DRAFT COPY of the Record Documentation for inspection by
the Project Architect/M&E Engineer prior to Practical Completion of the Contract Works.
299
1.24 Contract Works:
Variations
All instructions, variations, additions to the Contract Works are only valid when agreed to/signed for
by the Project Architect (Manager).
Should the Contractor receive, during the progress of the Contract Works, any instruction for additional
work, Which he considers may affect the completion of the Contract Works within the prescribed
Contract Period, he shall be required to formally notify the Project Manager in writing within four (4)
days of the receipt of such and instruction.
1.25 Contract Works:
Practical Completion
The Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting the MES Installation (Plumbing) and shall have
prepared his own defects inspection list and shall duly attend to the same, prior to offering the
completed MES Installation to the Project Manager for inspection and acceptance on behalf of the
Employer.
The Project Architect/M&E Engineers’ inspection shall be one of formality and should not be
considered as and inspection for the purposes of forming the Contractor’s final list scheduling the
Outstanding Works.
The Contractor shall agree with the Project Architect/M&E Engineer, a suitable date for the FINAL
INSPECTION.
1.16 Maintenance of Services
Any works necessitating interruption or termination of any services required to be maintained or
serving areas outside of the designated works area shall be thoroughly coordinated and not be initiated
until a Programme of works indicating disruption time scales and/or temporary arrangements has been
submitted and agreed fully by all concerned.
1.26 Contract Works:
Defects Liability Period
The Contractor shall be responsible under the Contract for addressing/correcting all of the Plumbing
Contract Works defects occurring within a period of TWELVE MONTHS, commencing from the date
of the PRACTICAL COMPLETION CERTIFICATION.
During the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall provide prompt and effective “call back”
service to attend to any urgent faults which may develop and which would affect the day-to-day
function of the building complex.
The Contractor shall retain a written log on site recording the details of the defect – i: e, date
notified/date attended, fault identified, action taken, together with any ongoing investigations/remedial
work.
1.27 Contract Works:
Provisional Sums
Provisional Sums have been entered on the Mechanical Engineering Services Installation – Tender
Breakdown – Form of Tender Document.
These Provisional Sums provide for Works of Costs, which cannot be foreseen, defined or detailed at
the time of preparing the MES (Plumbing) Contract Works Tender Documentation.
The Provisional Sums include for the Contractor’s overheads and profit and therefore are to be included
in the Tender Breakdown as net sums without any further additions.
300
Instructions as to the deduction of expenditure in whole or in part of the Provisional Sums shall be
instructed by the Project Manager during the course of the Contract Works, as found necessary.
1.28 Contract Works:
Spares
The Contractor shall include within his Tender, recorded as separately identified costs, the supply of
spares for the:
I. Plumbing installation works
II. Sanitary Fixtures
1.29 Contract Works:
Schedule of Rates
The Contractor shall submit within his Tender, a priced copy of the Schedule Rates.
Each of the elemental rates shall include for all necessary labour and materials, together with overheads
and profit.
The declared Tender rates shall be used to evaluate all Works added, deleted and/ or amended against
the Contract Works Tender.
The Project Manager reserves the right to reject any tender which does not include the completed
Schedule of Rates, returned with the Tender Submission.
1.30 Contract Works:
Tender Breakdown
The Contractor shall, when submitting his Tender for the Contract Works, enter on the Tender
Breakdown – Form of Tender Document, Lump Sum Costs for each of the Mechanical and Electrical
Engineering Services elements as prescribed.
The Project Architect reserves the right to reject any Tender, which does not include the completed
Tender Breakdown.
3.0 Cold Water Service
2.1 System Description
The Bank building complex to be served with a potable cold water supply service drawn from the main
GUMA and dedicated Solar Powered Borehole water supply distribution pipework.
An incoming GUMA valves mains cold water connection to be installed within the secured perimeter
fenced Bank building as shown on the drawings.
A cold water supply connection to be made to this point to supply the 10m3 MDPE Water Tanks located
on a 9m high Water Tower to service the sanitary appliances and kitchen fixtures as set out in the
Architectural Drawings
(Refer to Architect’s Drawing for details of sanitary fittings).
75mm dia. Cold water supply connection to be made to the 10m3 MDPE Water Tanks connecting the
Fire Hydrant Booster Pumps and 50mm dia. MDPE pipe and associated fittings further reduced to
32mm MDPE pipe and associated fittings connected as shown on the pipework drawings to be installed
to the pressurized water purification system supplying cold treated water to the building.
301
2.3 System Equipment + Materials
(a) Pipework
Heavy duty polyethylene (HDPE) pipework to BS6572, BS6570, WIS4.32.03 @12 bar
(120metres), (174psi) with screwed joints, hydraulic pressure tested.
(b) Valves
(i) Main Isolation
Loose jumper isolating stopcocks to be installed on all cold water service principal distribution
points.
(ii) Local Isolation
Screw operated ball valves to be installed on cold water service to Individual / groups of sanitary
fittings and cold water service to stand pumps.
(c) Thermal Insulation
All internal cold water service pipework to be thermally insulated and vapour sealed by the
application of 38mm minimum thickness of pre-formed rigid CFC free phenolic foam sectional
pipework insulation with aluminum foil outer covering, having a thermal conductivity of 0.02
W/moC
2.4 General Standard of Pipework and Fittings
(a) Pipework Generally
All pipework shall be run at least 10” from any electrical conduit or lighting and power cables. Pipes
shall be spaced in ducts, ceilings and voids, trenches and below floors in a manner that permits
subsequent access to any pipe for maintenance or removal without disturbance to the remaining
pipework.
Branches from mains in horizontal ducts shall be kept clear of vertical ducts.
Pipes shall not be solidly built into walls or plaster and joints shall not be positioned within the thickness
of walls, floors or in any other inaccessible position. Pipes shall be fixed with a minimum clearance of
1” and a maximum of 1½” between the surface of pipe or covering and the finished surface of walls
and a minimum clearance of 4“ from finished surface of floor or ceiling at the lowest or highest points,
within a building.
Gradients on all pipes shall not be less than 1” in 20’0” in the case of domestic hot water service, except
where otherwise specified or detailed on the drawings or with the written approval of the Project
Architect/Engineer. All mains shall be laid to the gradients to ensure venting and drainage of the
service. All screwed joints shall be clean threaded and the bore carefully reamed to ensure the pipe is
free from burns or obstructions.
b) CAULKING OF JOINTS WILL NOT BE ALLOWED
All cold water rising mains into the building for sanitary and kitchen use shall be treated and disinfected
as shown in the drawings by the Sub-Contractor after completion of the installation and testing and
prior to handover.
The treatment and disinfection process shall be in accordance with the World Health Organization
(WHO) recommendations and the Sub-Contractor shall obtain from the Sierra Leone Guma Water
Company a written statement certifying that the treatment and disinfection has been satisfactorily
undertaken.
The Sub-Contractor shall include in his Tender for all labour and material costs associated with the
treatment and disinfection including any costs incurred by the Sierra Leone Guma Water Company
particularly with regards to an analysis of a water sample.
302
Efficient plugs shall be inserted in all open ends during the progress of the work. Plugs of wood, paper
or rag etc., shall NOT be used.
The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the location and removal of any stoppage due to foreign
matter or air lock which is found to impede the flow of fluid after the systems are put into use, including
the cost of making good all pipework, insulation, building decorations or other damage caused in
locating and making good these defects.
All pipework shall be run in accordance with the working drawings and shall be run clear of other
services, only where it is unavoidable shall the Sub-Contractor be allowed to neatly set round to avoid
ventilation trunking, cable trunking, drainage and other services, structural beams and other
obstructions.
Long sweep bends shall be used in preference to round elbows. Square elbows shall NOT be used. All
made or set bends shall have as large a radius as possible and shall be free from deformation of the bore
and the tube or any undue thinning of the wall of the tube.
All bends and sets shall be pulled cold on pipework up to 2” nominal bore, using a bending machine
with the correct formers for the size of pipe used.
Where the Project Architect/Engineer has given permission for fire pulled bends or sets these shall be
carried out using a forge and the whole length of the bend or set shall be heated and formed in one
operation. Any bend or set found to have been burnt or overheated shall be removed and replaced.
Tees shall be of the easy or twin elbow pattern except where square tees are installed to facilitate venting
and drainage.
Where a gradual reduction or increase in pipe diameter is required, i.e. pump connections, reducing
valve assemblies, etc., this shall be done by means of tapered pieces at least 6” long.
Reduction in pipe size shall be by reducing sockets, tees or taper pieces. These shall be of the eccentric
pattern to ensure proper drainage and the elimination of air pockets. Pipes shall be erected and provided
with flanges or unions as specified in in the document.
Flanges or unions shall be provided in runs of pipework at intervals of 12m and at all changes of
direction to facilitate maintenance. Flanges or unions shall be provided in plant rooms to enable any
items of plant or run of pipework to be dismantled. Mating flanges shall be mild steel on black ferrous
pipework and non-dezincification type gunmetal on copper pipework.
All pipework shall be in accordance with the BS given, in random lengths unless otherwise called for,
straight and free from blemish and damage. Ends shall be screwed to the correct length to the BS where
screwed pipe is called for and the ends shall be protected from damage by means of half sockets firmly
screwed on.
All black steel tubing shall receive one coat of primer protecting paint before leaving the works.
Water seals to be provided on drains from cooler condensate trays and any other items where the drains
are subject to pressure differentials.
Note that in all cases, the drains from pumps and cooling coils will not be less than ¾ “ size, with ample
rodding points suitable for maintenance.
303
(c) Pipework and Fittings
SERVICE PIPING FITTING
Mains cold water supply
/ cold water
MDPE (PE 80) to BS6572,
BS6570, WIS4.32.03 @12
bar (120metres), (174psi)
MDPE (PE 80) to BS6572, BS6570,
WIS4.32.03 @12 bar (120metres),
(174psi
Drain pipework all other
vents and exhaust piping
UPVC – BS 4514 As for cold water mains/cold water down
service/hot water service supply
Hose reel installation dry
riser
Galvanized steel tube to BS
1387 heavyweight quality
Screwed galvanized malleable iron
fitting up to and including 2” diameter.
Flanged 2½” diameter and above.
Note: The mechanical Sub-Contractor shall ensure that there is no contact between ferrous and non-
ferrous materials.
If through any accident, defect or burst, pipes become fractured the Sub-Contractor shall replace the
same, free of charge to the Client.
All drains, and overflow pipework etc., from the cooler batteries, pumps, etc., shall be provided and
taken to the nearest gulley.
(d) Screwed and Flanged Joints
Screwed joints shall be used on pipework up to 2” diameter.
Flanged joints shall be used on pipework 2½” and above, except where exposed to view in corridors or
rooms when pipework up to and including 3” diameter shall be fitted with unions in lieu of flanges.
Flanged or union joints shall be fitted to all pipework 64mm diameter and above, except where exposed
to view in corridors or rooms when pipework up to and including 3” diameter shall be fitted with unions
in lieu of flanges.
Flanged or union jointed shall be fitted to all pipework at interval not exceeding 40’0” and at all changes
of direction, to facilitate erection and dismantling pipework.
All flanges on steel pipe shall be wrought iron of mild steel machines on face and edge with dimensions
and bolt holes drilling as follows to BS No. 10 Table ‘E’.
All flanges shall be truly parallel on face and bolts proved free in holes before pulling up.
Flanged joints shall be made with Taylor’s copper corrugated rings or Klingerite joints of the full face
pattern 2mm thick. Flanges shall be bolted together with hexagonal bolts and nuts to BS 916 of the
same material and finish as the flanges. Each bolt shall have washers and when pulled up the bolts shall
NOT protrude more than one thread through the nut.
Flanges on copper pipework shall be Admiralty quality gunmetal.
All joints on mild steel pipework in tank rooms and plants rooms shall be flanged. On cooper pipework
in tank rooms and plants rooms’ flanges shall be provided on all items of plant.
Silver alloy welding will only be permitted in special circumstances and must be agreed with the M&E
Engineer, prior to use.
304
(e) Unions
Unions shall be generally of malleable iron with two bronze seats as the Navy Pattern for service 2”
and under and below 50psi
Unions shall be fitted on the outlet of each screwed valve where installed, except in the case of draw –
off points and on pipework connections to items of plant.
The use of connectors or long screws and back nuts will not be permitted under any circumstances.
(f) Valves and Cocks
Valves and cocks shall be provided where called for on the drawings and as specified.
All valves and cocks in tanks and plants shall be flanged with the exception of drip point assemblies.
All valves and cocks on all services 2½” and above shall be flanged with the exception of drip point
assemblies.
Flanges shall be dimensioned and drilled in accordance with the details in the document.
Valves and cocks installed in normally visible positions in rooms and corridors shall be chromium
planted.
All chromium plated valves shall be of the easy clean type with composition disc hand wheels,
elsewhere hand wheels shall be of malleable iron.
All valves and cocks shall be fitted in such a manner that they are readily accessible for operation and
maintenance.
Stopcocks shall be provided for isolating individual sanitary fittings, and shall be chromium plated
screw down easy clean type with lock-shield and dust caps.
Washers suitable for the duty they shall be fitted. All stopcocks shall be in accordance with BS 1010
manufactured from Admiralty quality gunmetal.
The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that valves listed in the following schedules comply with the Water
Authority’s requirements and shall include the cost of all stamping necessary.
Service Hattersley Fig No. 0r Equal
Low Pressure Cold and Hot Water 33 X
Services up to and including 2” 35 F-D
Low Pressure Cold and Hot water
Services 2½” and above 599/1E-D
Cold Water Rising Main Internal to 33
Buildings up to and including 2” 35 F-D
Cold Water Rising Main Internal to 599/1E-D
Buildings 2½” and above
Pressured Tapped Measuring Orifice Valves 1432
Ball Valves
Ball valves shall be of the equilibrium type with cast iron bodies, copper ball float mild steel lever and
gunmetal working parts as Glenfield and Kennedy Ltd.
305
Non-Return Valves
Non – Return valves shall be of the swinging flap type gunmetal bodies with screwed or flanged ends,
Hattersley Fig. No. 47 or equal and approved.
Non – return valves on hot water supply mains between the section and delivery of the circulating
pumps shall be of cast iron with flanged connections and gunmetal (Admiralty quality). The valve shall
be so designed that its action is sensitive to the slightest pressure difference Holden and Brooke
‘Senflux’ pattern.
Emptying Cocks
Emptying cocks shall be provided at all low points and on the dead side of all main section isolating
valves as Hattersley.
Emptying cocks shall be fitted to all items of plant and shall be lubricated plug type with cast iron
bodies and flanged connections Audco Fig. No. 62.
The outlets of these cocks shall be extended and hose unions with caps shall be fitted.
Three Way Cocks
Three way cocks fitted as escape taps on calorifier vent pipes shall be Hattersley.
(g) Strainers
Strainers where indicated on the drawings or specified to be fitted into pipework runs shall be of the
‘Y’ type in all cases and shall be of Hattersley manufactured in bronze to 2” diameter. Above 2”
diameter strainers shall be manufactured in cast iron by Hattersley.
Cast steel strainers shall be suitable for pressures up to 125 psi.
All strainers except where otherwise stated shall be flanged.
Where strainers are used to protect reducing valves they shall be provided with mesh gauze of the size
recommended by the manufacturers of the equipment they are to protect.
(h) Pressure and Altitude Gauges
Pressure and altitude gauges shall be provided where indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
Gauges shall be provided on the suction and discharge connections of each pump.
Gauges shall be mounted between the pumps and the pump isolating valves.
Pressure gauges shall be of the Bourden tube type 6” diameter brass cased. The gauges shall conform
to the relevant BS and shall be calibrated from zero to twice the working head in meters. The gauges
shall be complete with and adjustable red pointer and a bronze cock.
Gauges shall be installed such that they can be readily removed and such that they can be easily read.
Altitude gauges shall be fitted where shown on the drawings.
Pressure and altitude gauges shall be as manufactured by Sir W H Bailey, Hopkinson or Dewrance.
(i) Thermometers
Indicating thermometers shall be of the mercury in rigid stem type having 6” dial with needle pointer.
They shall be calibrated 500 F to 2480 F for hot water services. Where fitted on cold water mains they
shall be calibrated 500 F to 1040 F.
306
All thermometers shall have suitable oil filled well to enable them to be removed from pipework or
plant without draining down. Where such wells are installed in pipework the free cross-sectional area
of the pipe the flow should not be unduly restricted. This may necessitate a larger section of pipe to
take the well. This also applies to any other items taper pieces shall be provided at any pipe diameter
change.
All thermometers shall be tested to read alike, between 1000 F and 2000 F in the case of hot water
thermometers, when bulbs are immersed in water and the discrepancy between the highest and lowest
reading shall be not more than 120 F.
Thermometers shall be installed such that they can be readily removed and such that they can easily be
read. Thermometers shall be installed on all main hot water service flow and returns on each hot water
service calorifier.
(j) Air Eliminators and Air Cocks
The Sub-Contractor shall provide and fix where indicated on the drawings and at all high points in the
pipework that require venting, automatic air vents of the Chas. Winn & Co. Ltd. Manufacture type ‘A’
with type outlet 2 or type ‘B’ with lockshield cut –off valve. Eliminators shall be complete with air
bottles, isolating valves and discharge pipes.
(k) Expansion
All pipework shall be arranged so that expansion may be readily taken up by bends or changes in
direction. Where expansion cannot be accommodated in this manner and where indicated on the
drawings then expansion joints with flanged ends shall be used.
Where expansion joints are called for and fitted these shall be capable of the full expansion of the pipe
and shall be able to withstand both axial and transverse stresses when in operation and shall be installed
strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Expansion joints shall be fitted in accordance with the drawings and in other positions where in the
Sub-Contractor’s opinion the use of an expansion joint will obviate undue stress being set up in the
pipelines.
The pipework shall be stressed initially when cold by leaving gaps at the appropriate points equal to
50% of the total expansion calculated for that section. This cold draw shall be taken up only after all
anchor points and brackets are grouted in and are rigidly fixed and proved firm by the Engineer or his
Representative.
Before the final pull up is made the amount of cold draw allowed shall be checked by the Engineer and
proved correct.
All pipes shall be fixed with sufficient clearance from walls, joints, floors or other obstructions capable
of resisting lengthwise expansion and special care shall be taken to avoid pipe fixings or supports near
junction with main pipe runs preventing movements of branches.
Connections of branch mains wherever possible shall be taken as near to anchor points as is practicable
to avoid undue movement or stress in the branch connection.
Where such connections are impracticable the branches shall be pre-stressed by cold drawing and due
allowance made for movement of the main pipe at that point.
Approved guides as required by the manufacturer of the expansion devices shall be provided to ensure
that the pipe expands co-axially with the pipe run and that the expansion joint takes up the full
expansion of the pipe without any undue bowing of the pipe. Expansion joints shall be fitted in the
horizontal plane unless otherwise specified. Positions of the guides shall be approved by the Engineer.
307
Expansion bellows shall be of suitable thickness for the pipe to which they are fixed and where fitted
to hot water services shall be manufactured from stainless steel.
Each expansion joint shall be flanged either side to the appropriate BS Flange Table, or as detailed in
Claus 2.1.03 of this Specification.
Anchors shall be provided as shown on the drawings and as necessary for any additional changes in
direction or additional expansion joints authorized by the Engineer.
Anchors shall be positioned such, that the pipe expansion is controlled in the direction intended.
Anchors shall be either forged steel clamps of adequate cross sectional area, bolted to a sole plate, or
formed of MS sections welded to the pipe and bolted to a sole plate.
The sole plate in each case shall be rigidly fixed to the building structure, subway or duct wall by means
of raw bolts or rag bolts firmly grouted in.
Anchors shall NOT be fixed to structural steelwork unless the written approval of the Engineer is
obtained.
Wherever possible the forces on any anchor shall be equal in both directions, but in any case the out of
balance thrust shall not exceed 20 KN.
(l) Pipe Supports
The Sub-Contractor shall provide for all pipe supports on all runs of pipework. Supports shall be pipe
hangers and rods, clips, rollers and chairs etc., as required for the particular duty and for stable and
efficient support. The supports shall be chosen for the particular duty they are to perform and shall
allow free movement and expansion of the pipework. All supports shall be grade to the required levels
for air elimination and drainage.
Pipe fixings and supports shall be arranged at intervals not greater than the following distances apart:
Pipe Size Horizontal Vertical
Pipework Inches Runs Feet Runs Feet
Mild Steel ½” 6’6” 6’6”
¾” 7’9” 9’9”
1” 8’9” 9’9”
1¼” 8’9” 9’9”
1½” 9’9” 11’6”
2” 11’0” 11’6”
2½” 12’0” 14’6”
and above
Vertical pipes shall be stayed from the wall with a minimum of two clips spaced equally between floors
and ceiling.
Flanges, sockets and unions where installed shall coincide with support positions as far as is practicable.
Where vertical takeoff from horizontal pipes and mains occur, the horizontal main shall have a support
positioned at this point.
308
Supports shall be positioned adjacent to all valves and other special components to be removed for
maintenance leaving the pipework adequately supported at the free ends.
Pipework installed in the main vertical ducts and false ceiling areas shall be supported from channel
iron supports provided by the Sub-Contractor firmly bolted to the structural tabs. The Sub-Contractor
shall also include in his Tender for providing and installing all necessary nuts and bolts and for drilling
the flanges of channel iron as necessary for fixing all supports. The Sub-Contractor shall provide all
hanger rods, clips, ‘U’ bolts, roller and chairs etc.
The design and manufacture of supports shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before they are
manufactured or installed.
Pipes fixed both horizontally and vertically to walls in rooms shall be supported by malleable iron
schoolboard pattern brackets with split pipe holders into walls or with drilled back plates where they
are to be screwed to wood or ironwork.
For copper pipework, pipe holders or supports shall be of gunmetal or brass or prefabricated mild steel
brackets or clips which shall be lined with brass or copper strip where contact is made with the pipe.
Where pipework is covered with non-conducting covering, supports shall be as described above, except
that the design shall be such that the face of the covering shall be supported at least 1” clear of the
building structure.
All brackets, hanger rods, clips and roller and chairs shall be arranged to give ample movement for
expansion of the pipework.
All necessary ‘U’ bolt or other guides shall be provided to counteract side or vertical movement of
piping due to expansion.
The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for position and alignment of all built in brackets and supports
before concreting by the Main Contractor commences and the positions are maintained until the
concrete is set.
(m) Pipe Sleeves and Floor Plates
Sleeves must be fitted to pipes at all points where the pipes pass, through walls floors and ceilings.
Sleeves shall be of the “Armac” or other approved telescopic type for all ferrous pipework.
Sleeves for cooper, brass or gunmetal. Ferrous sleeves shall NOT be used.
All sleeves through floors shall project ¼” above finished floor surface except to the kitchen area where
the projection shall be 1¼” unless otherwise instructed and shall be fitted with split hinged floor plates
chromium plated finish. The Sub-Contractor shall arrange for the Main Contractor to haunch the
grouting or floor finish to support this projection.
The Sub-Contractor shall provide and fix chromium plates split hinged wall plates where pipes pass
through walls and are visible from within the room (s).
The Weight of the pipes shall not be borne by the sleeves and all sleeves shall be set concentric with
the pipes. Clearance all round shall be left to allow for free movement.
Sleeves passing through external walls and roofs to outside must be watertight and weatherproof using
asbestos yarn and lead wool caulked between the pipe and the sleeve, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
309
The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that no pipes are bedded in the sleeves so as to
restrict movement, by any making good by the Main Contractor or others, or by any cause whatsoever.
The Sub-Contractor shall also be responsible for the accuracy and correct alignment and levels of all
holes required to be left or cut for the fitting of sleeves.
All sleeves required to be built into or embedded in structural concrete shall be placed in position by
the Sub-Contract before the concrete is placed. The proper care shall be taken by the Sub-Contractor
to check and ensure that the sleeves remain in the correct; position whilst concreting takes place and
until the concrete is set.
(n) Painting and Labeling
(i) Painting
The painting of all insulated and uninsulated pipework, steelwork used for supports, hangers and
brackets where exposed in rooms and corridors, other than in the tank room and main vertical duct,
shall be carried out by others to match the decorations, but the Sub-Contractor shall supply and apply
one primer coat other than that provided by the manufacturers, ready for receiving the finishes.
Where ferrous pipework is to be insulated the Sub-Contractor shall first paint the pipework with one
coat of red –oxide paint prior to the application of the insulation.
The Sub-Contractor shall paint, all uninsulated ferrous pipework, steelwork, used for supports, hangers
and brackets in the tank room, duct, false ceilings with one coat of red – oxide paint.
The Sub-Contractor shall thoroughly clean down, wire brush and paint with one coat of red – oxide
followed by one coat of black bituminous paint al external steel work erected under this Contract.
The Sub-Contractor shall include in his Tender for making good any paintwork damaged before
handover.
(ii) Labeling
Valves with metal hand wheels:
The Sub-Contractor shall provide a black ivorine label for each with the duty and identification of the
valve shown in white letters. This information shall be repeated as in the valve charts. The labels shall
be secured within the hand wheels by the spindle nut.
Valves and composition handwheels and cocks with fixed operating Keys shall be provided with and
ivorine label for each valve or cock engraved with duty of the valve or cock and secure by means of a
brass ring loosely fitted around the spindle and retained by the valve hand wheel or cock key.
The brass ring and label shall be such that they cannot interfere with the correct operation of the valve
or cock, and the label shall be clearly seen when in position.
All labels shall be of black ivorine with white lettering.
Exceptions to above:
The following valves and cocks shall not have labels fitted:
(a) Valves on branch circuits in rooms
(b) DHWS and CW service stopcocks to draw-offs.
The Sub-Contractor shall not remove, cover paint over, deface or alter any labels fixed to items of plant
or equipment by the manufacturer.
The Sub-Contractor shall provide on all insulated and uninsulated pipes, except in occupied rooms
identification colour bands, at not more than ½” intervals on long straight runs of piping, near to all
valves, at all inlets and exits of trenches, ducts and building at all tees and unions.
310
Pipelines in plant rooms, ducts, voids, false ceilings etc., shall have detailed identification in accordance
with the latest British Standard and including arrows indicating the direction of flow, contents of pipe
and the pipe bore.
All identification bands shall consist of painted non-ferrous metal bands clipped securely to the pipe or
pipe insulation.
(o) Washing Out
Before being put into regular service, all installations shall be blown through and washed out to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and the Sub-Contractor shall include for all the necessary disconnections
and reconnections of pipework and plant to enable this to be done.
(p) Spares
The Sub-Contractor shall supply, in suitable containers, sufficient lubricating motor oil and lubricating
grease, together with all filling can and grease guns, suitable for all plant and equipment supplied under
the Sub-Contract to last over a period of six months from the date of handing over. In addition to the
aforementioned items the Sub-Contractor shall supply the following spares at the time of handover:
3 Air Cock Keys
3 Keys for Lock shield Valves
6 Valve Packings for each type of Valve installed
1 Gland packing for each Pump
3 Sets of Joint Rings for each size of Flange installed
1 Set of Spanners to fit all Nuts on Plant and Pipework
1 Set of Spare fuses for all Control Equipment
1 Complete set of Replacements for all Filters including Grease Filters.
2.5 Plant and Pipework Services
(a) General Description of Installation
The Pipework Services and Associated Plant Installation shall comprise the following:
i Boosted Cold Water Mains and Firemain Service to Hose reels via Pressure Booster Pumps Sets.
The Cold Water Mains Pump located within the Water Treatment and Disinfection containment at
the basement level of the Water Tower and the Firemain Service Pumps located on concrete plinth
by the Water Tower and protected by secured metal fencing and covering from inclement weather.
ii Dry Riser Installation complete with individual inlets and inlet Breechings on each floor level
piped from rising mains water service.
iii Cold Water Down Service to all Sanitary Fixtures, Sinks in kitchenette and Standpipes from the
Cold Water Mains Pump
iv HVAC Air Handling unit condense lines piped to drain.
v Firemain Service to Hose reels for Firefighting including pipework and accessories from Firemain
Service Pumps
(b) Boosted Cold Water Mains (CWM) and Firemain Service (FMS)
The combined cold water/fire mains services shall be provided by 2 x 5m3 MDPE Cold Water Service
Tanks located at the top of the Water Tower.
The combine water tanks shall supply cold water to the Water Treatment and Disinfection containment
(Water Purification Unit) located at the basement level of the Water Tower supplying treated cold water
through a package pressure boosting pump set to all sanitary facilities and kitchenettes on ground and
first levels, Security post and Standpipes located within the secured perimeter fenced and cold water
Firemain Service via Pressure Booster Pumps to Hose reels as shown on the drawings
311
The cold water storage tanks located at top of the Water Tower is also supplied with incoming Guma
Valley Water Company (GUMA) mains water to ball valves and from the incoming Borehole mains
water to ball valves via Borehole Submersible Pump as shown in the drawings.
Pressure reducing valves shall be installed as shown on the drawings to balance the pressure required
at the various outlets on the booster pump systems.
(c) Cold Water Mains (CWM) Package Boosting Pump Unit
(i) BS MXV Fixed Speed Vertical Multi-Stage Pressure Boosting Pump Unit.
The Cold Water Mains (CWM) Package Booster Pump Unit shall be type BS1F 1MXV 25-210/C
Model as manufactured by CALPEDA or similar, the duty as specified below:
Voltage: 400V
Phase: 3~
kW: 1.5
Hp: 2
Suction (DN1): 37mm
Discharge (DN2): 37mm
This unit shall be complete with all necessary valves and interlocking controls to provide automatic
operation.
(d) Firemain Service (FMS)
(i) BS2F-2NMD 32/210C/A Fixed speed Horizontal Centrifugal Pressure Boosting Pump Unit
The Firemain Service (FMS) Package Booster Pump Unit shall be type BS2F-2NMD 32/210C/, Model
as manufactured by CALPEDA or similar, the duty as specified below:
Voltage: 400V
Phase: 3~
kW: 5.5
Hp: 7.5
Suction (DN1): 75mm
Discharge (DN2): 50mm
The unit will incorporate duplicate pumps for run and standby operation.
All interconnecting pipework within unit is shall be in 50mm galvanized steel tube to BS 1387: 1985
heavy weight quality.
(e) Pressure Reducing Valves
All pipework from booster pump unit to fixtures within the building shall be run in a medium density
polyethylene (MDPE) pipes for the Cold Water Mains (CWM) supplies and galvanized steel pipes to
BS 1387: 1985 heavy weight quality for the Firemain Service supplies.
Pressure reducing valves shall be installed in the branch connection to the drinking water coolers on
each floor level. The pressure reducing valves are to be type LRV 151 as manufactured by Spirax.
All valves to be selected by manufacturer to obtain a maximum outlet pressure at the water cooler of
60 psi
(e) Drinking Water Coolers
Package drinking water coolers will be supplied and installed in the positions shown on the drawings
type SF 200 as manufactured by Acro-Kool Limited.
312
Units to be provided with PRV and isolating stopcock on each branch connection thereto.
(f) Local Water
The Sub-Contractor shall make himself fully conversant with the Local Water Authority Bye-Laws and
it is the responsibility of the Sub-Contractor to inform the Water Authorities when work commences.
(g) Incoming CWM Supply
The Sub-Contractor shall commence the installation after the Water Board’s stopcock at basement level
as shown on the drawings.
(h) Final Connections
Taps and sanitary fittings shall be supplied and fixed under the Main Contract, but all final connections
to sanitary fixtures shall be carried out by the Sub-Contractor.
2.6 Cold Water down Service
(a) General Description
The cold water storage tanks located at the top of the Water Tower on a purpose made tank area
supplying cold raw water to the Water Treatment and Disinfection containment (Water Purification
Unit) located at the basement level of the Water Tower and supplying cold raw water to the Firemain
Service (FMS) Package Booster Pump Unit.
The Booster CWM connects to the tank via a delayed action Ball Valve. The cold water down service
distributes to all sanitary fixtures within the building via the floor areas and service riser ducts.
(b) Cold Water Storage Tank
The tank shall be of supplied and installed on pre-formed concrete floor on the top of the Water Tower
as shown on the drawings.
The tank shall be MDPE pressed construction as manufactured by Millar Tanks & sons Ltd, Kissy
Dockyard, Freetown or similar. Size 2M long x 1M wide x 1M deep and nominal capacity 5000 and
2000 liters respectively as shown for the cold raw water tank and the Water Treatment and Disinfection
tanks.
The tank is to be supplied with all necessary components for erection on site and shall be complete with
cover and access manhole and cowl ventilator.
The Sub-Contractor is to allow for all necessary pipe connection to all tanks including draincock,
CWM, CWDS headers, vent cowl, overflow and warning pipe, as shown on the drawings.
The Sub-Contractor shall check all builders work in connection with the tank installations to ensure
compatibility and ensure acceptance of same.
(c) Final Connections
Taps and sanitary fittings will be supplied and fixed under the Main Contract, but all final connections
to sanitary fixtures shall be carried out by the Sub-Contract.
2.7 First Aid Fire Fighting Equipment
(a) General Description
First aid firefighting Extinguishers are to be provided on each floor level including the electrical switch
room area at the basement level where portable C02 fire extinguishers will be provided under the
contract.
A dry riser installation will be provided within the compound in protected areas for use by the Fire
Brigade.
313
(b) Hose reels Installation
Hose reels will be supplied and installed on each floor level of the automatic recessed swinging reel
pattern type FM as manufactured by Kidde Thorn.
Each hose reel to be complete with isolating stop valve with adequate labels identifying same.
(c) Dry Riser Installation
A 2” diameter dry riser will be supplied and installed as shown on the drawings complete with 1½”
diameter landing outlet valves, 1½” diameter double inlet breaching at ground level and all necessary
drain points etc. All dry riser equipment shall be as manufactured by Kidde Thorn with the dry riser
pipe in galvanized steel tube to BS 1387 heavy weight quality. All pipe joints to be in accordance with
the Standard Pipework Specifications.
All landing boxes for outlet valves and box for inlet breaching shall be as manufactured by Kidde
Thorn, as shown on the drawings.
(d) Portable Extinguishers and Fire Blanket
Portable C02 fire extinguishers will be supplied and installed as indicated on the floor drawings, in the
kitchen and adjacent the electrical switch room areas at basement level of the types and sizes as shown
on the drawings.
2.8 OVERFLOWS AND CONDENSE DRAIN LINES
(a) AHU Condense Drains
Condense lines from the cooling coil trays within each air handling unit shall be run in ¾” galvanized
pipe to BS 1387.
The condense line shall incorporate an anti-siphon loop and dirt pocket plug etc., as shown on the
drawings. The condense line shall run to a PVC pipes connecting to a central drain riser in 2” galvanized
tube to BS 1387, as shown on the Drawings. The condense drain riser shall connect to the drainage
system at basement level. The Sub-Contractor is to allow for all connectors to drain condense from the
AHU’s.
3.0 WATER PURIFICATION (optional item)
3.1 Basic System Design:
Water Treatment processes vary from relatively simple treatment methods to complex and sophisticated
processes.
This system below provides general design and requirements for the construction of a safe water
purification system for the Sierra Leone Field Office at The African Development Bank (ADB) to
remove chemical contaminants by using simple, inexpensive and locally abundant materials. The
system also incorporates ultraviolet disinfection to neutralize biological contaminants.
3.2 Biological Decontamination:
Contaminants that compromise the safety of water are both biological and chemical and different
strategies are required for their neutralization or removal. Strategies for removing biological
contaminants include filtration with ceramic filters, chemical treatment (e.g. with chlorine or iodine),
and exposure to ultraviolet (UV) radiation.
UV water treatment and water disinfection is environmentally-friendly and energy-saving water
treatment and water disinfection process for water and drinking water. Water treatment and water
disinfection with high-energy UV radiation is an environmentally-friendly method established for more
than 100 years. It uses no chemicals, with no added chlorine or ozone.
Special UV lamps destroy microorganisms such as bacteria, viruses and parasites and help decompose
chemicals harmful to health.
Neither smell nor taste of the water is impaired.
This UV solution is used e.g. for process and drinking water.
314
3.3 Advantages with UV light
No impairment of taste and smell
No added chemicals
No environmental pollution
Short exposure time
Effective against chlorine-resistant pathogens
Simple handling
Low-maintenance method
Very low operating costs
UV radiation is the surest method for biological decontamination, though until recent years it has been
too delicate, expensive, complicated and resource intensive for use at the household or community scale
in developing societies.
3.4 Chemical Decontamination
Biological contamination of water is only part of the problem, especially when considering
contaminants and other agricultural runoff. Filtration with ceramics, chemical treatment and UV
radiation will not remove contaminants from water.
Charcoal (graphite carbon) is an inexpensive material that has been manufactured worldwide for
millennia, and because of its electrochemical surface properties has great potential for effectively
removing agrichemical contaminants from water. Charcoal water filtration is in fact an ancient
technique, and today is employed at the municipal scale for water treatment. The charcoal that is used
in water treatment plants, however, is a high-grade material produced using an industrial process to
increase its reactivity and enhance its capacity as a filtration medium (often called “granular activated
carbon,” or GAC).
The World Health Organization and numerous academic studies identify granular activated carbon
(GAC) as the best available technology for the control of many agrichemicals and synthetic organic
chemicals in water for drinking or otherwise.
The charcoal filtration system design proposed utilizes basic, garden-variety charcoal that can be
purchased in local markets here in Freetown.
This material performs nearly as good as industrial GAC as a filtration medium. For example, studies
have shown low-grade char from the burning of crop residues to be about one-third as efficient for
adsorbing dissolved contaminants when compared with industrial-grade GAC.
Since the wheat straw was exposed to air during the charring process, it is likely that proper charcoal
manufactured in an earthen kiln or brick oven is of appreciably higher quality than wheat straw char
and exhibits a significantly larger capacity for adsorption of water contaminants.
3.5 Treatment System Design
The amount charcoal necessary to treat a given volume of drinking water depends on the concentration
of contaminants in the water as well as the chemical adsorption capacity of the pulverized charcoal.
The water filtration system described here is designed around a general set of parameters, making
conservative estimates regarding its capacity for contaminant adsorption. In place of experimental data
using specific agrichemical contaminants, we regard dissolved organic carbon (DOC) as our general
contaminant and design the system around its removal. Several studies have shown that DOC
adsorption by granular carbon can block or displace other adsorbed organics such as contaminants.
Therefore, the estimated capacity of charcoal to absorb DOC in general, assuming a modest propensity
for absorption on the part of the charcoal and a generous concentration of DOC in the local water supply
315
Conservatively assuming 10 mg DOC/g charcoal as the absorption capacity of charcoal and 50 mg
DOC/L as the DOC concentration in natural surface waters, we estimate that 5 grams of charcoal are
needed to sufficiently purify 1 liter of water: With this ratio, and assuming the EPA recommended daily
water intake of 30 liters per person per day, roughly 54 kilograms of charcoal are required to supply
drinking water to one person for one year.
Cartoon illustration of the treatment system design
Design for a gravity-fed system will employ a sand pre-filter followed by pulverized charcoal filter medium supported on a
bed of gravel. Exposure to UV radiation after filtration will neutralize biological contaminants. A photovoltaic panel can
provide electricity for the UV lamp.
Conservative estimates suggest that the sand layer should be about 50 centimeters thick. The sand acts
both as a pre-filter to remove particulates and to precipitate aqueous iron complexes, which can
interfere with UV disinfection.
A diffuser plate is placed over the sand to reduce the turbulence of the influent and prevent channels
forming through the sand. The thickness of the charcoal layer will depend upon how many people are
using the system as well as its desired lifetime (i.e. the time until the charcoal has to be replaced). The
purpose of the gravel layer is to prevent clogging of the perforated pipe by carbon granules – this layer
need only be about 20 centimeters in thickness.
3.6 BS MXV Vertical Multi-Stage Pressure Boosting Pump with 1 Fixed Speed
3.6.1 Construction
The Pressure Boosting Pump with automatic operation shall consisting of 1 Vertical Multi-Stage
Pressure Boosting Pump with 1 Fixed speed on a common baseplate, with suction and delivery
manifolds, gate and non-return valves, pressure switches, pressure gauge, control panel and 200 liters
diaphragm tank.
3.6.2 Operation
The control panel, with electronic card, manages the pump operation, the changeover of pump starting
sequence and it stops the system when there is no air in the tank (patented system).
Pumps starting in a cascade sequence, with a signal from the pressure switches.
3.6.3 Electrical control panels for fixed speed pump units.
Electrical control panels for pressurization units, all with electronic card with microprocessors, for
managing pump operation.
316
The microprocessor carries out continuous secure checks during all the various work phases of the
pumps and incorporates all necessary functions, thus reducing electrical and electronic components
inside the panel.
3.6.4 Maximum clarity for all signals
The status of the unit shall be easily identified on the front of the electronic card with the following
signals:
- Power on led.
- No water led.
- Failure led.
- Pump running led
- Pump automatic operation led
- Pump stop led
3.6.5 Maximum simplicity of control
The front of the electronic card shall feature the following signals and controls:
- AUT-STOP push-button (1 for each pump)
- MAN push-button (1 for each pump)
- RESET push-button.
3.6.6 Performance - Fixed speed Pressure boosting set with 1 Vertical Multi-Stage Pump
Fixed speed pump
Mains: 400V 3~
Motor: 400V 3~
Motor Pres. switch 1
bar
Maximum capacity* Membrane
litre
Vessel
litre
kW HP min max Q l/min H m
BS1F 1MXV 25-210/C 1.5 2 6,5 8.5 60 66 100 200
3.6.7 Dimensions - Fixed speed Pressure boosting set with 1 Vertical Multi-Stage Pump
Fixed speed pump
TYPE Connection mm Weight
kg
DN 1 DN 2 Hf Hv h1 L1 m1 BS1F 1MXV 25-210/C 37mm 37mm 1065 1345 120 625 410
Dimensions not binding to be verified when ordering
3.6.8 The Fixed speed Vertical Multi-Stage Pressure boosting pump furnished for water supply service to the
building shall be supplied with the specified drivers, controls and pump accessory items by the pump
manufacturer. The pump, driver and control shall be:
� Guaranty by manufacturer against any defects
� Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FM) Approved
� Listed for water supply service.
4.0 SCOPE OF WORK
4.1 The Water Purification System at the Sierra Leone Field Office at the African Development Bank
(ADB) shall include treatment and disinfection. The system to be installed shall comprised of 2 x
2000Liter MDPE Cold Water Tanks, The first tank shall be design for a gravity-fed system and will
employ a sand pre-filter followed by pulverized charcoal filter medium supported on a bed of gravel.
Exposure to UV radiation after filtration will neutralize biological contaminants. Power from the
Bank’s photovoltaic panel can provide electricity for the UV lamp. The treated and disinfected water
will be stored in the second MDPE Cold Water Tank and ready to be pumped to the building with a
1.5kW (2HP) Fixed speed Vertical Multi-Stage Pressure Boosting Pump.
317
The pressure boosting pump sets model BS1F 1MXV 25-210/C shall be furnished with driver,
controllers and accessories as detailed in this specification. Pump manufacturer shall have unit
responsibility for the proper operation of the complete unit assembly as indicated by field acceptance
tests.
4.2 Supply and installation, erection, testing and commissioning of the Sierra Leone Field Office at the
African Development Bank (ADB) Water Purification System with mechanical and electrical
equipment, instrumentation, pipes, valves, fittings, supports, cables etc. complete in all respects, and
preparation & submission of drawings/other documents to the Project Architect & obtaining interim &
final Approval/Sanction/NOC (No Objection Certificates), during and after execution of work as
required.
4.3 Field Acceptance Test:
A field acceptance performance test shall be conducted upon completion of pump installation.
The test shall be made by flowing water through calibrated nozzles; approved flow meters or other such
accurate devices as may be selected by the Project Architect. Test shall be carried out in the presence
of:
� The installing contractor
� The Project Architect/M&E Engineer
� The owner's representative
TENDER DRAWINGS/FIGURE NOS - Mechanical Engineering Services Installation
The Contractor’s attention is drawn to Tender Conditions, Clause 1.4. Contract Works: Named
Plant, Equipment + Materials.
The Contractor shall enter below the names of the Manufacturers / Suppliers of the Plant, Equipment
and Materials included within his Tender Price, either by confirming his use of the ‘As Named’
Manufacturer/Supplier or by defining his proposed alternative.
Plant, Equipment, Materials As Named Manufacturer/Supplier
in this Document
Proposed Alternative
Manufacturer/Supplier
(Country of Origin)
1.Drinking water coolers – Acro – Kool
Model:SF200
Acro – Kool Limited
2.Cold water storage tank- 5000Ltr. Millar or Shankerdas & Sons Limited
3.Pressure reducing valves Type LRV
151 (CWDS and boosted CWM)
Spirax Sarco Limited
4.Valves / Strainers Hattersley Newman Hender Limited
5 Boosted cold water packaged pump
unit model BS1F 1MXV 25-210/C
CALPEDA - BS1F 1MXV 25-210/C
6 Hose reels Type: FM
Dry riser equipment
Kidde Thorn Fire Protection Ltd
To form a complementary part of the Tender Submission
Signed: ………………………………….. Date: …………………………………
For:………………………………………..
Position: …………………………………..
318
SCHEDULE OF RATES - Mechanical Engineering Services Installation
To Supply, install, set to work, test and commission the complete systems
Clause System US $ Lump Sum Cost
1.0
a)
b)
c)
2.0
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
3.0
a)
4.0
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
5.0
a)
6.0
7.0
Cold Water Service:
To include:
Cold Water Pipework, valves + fittings & Accessories
2 x 5,000 liters Cold water storage tanks + fittings & Accessories
Drinking water coolers Acro-Kool Model: SF200
Water Purification:
To include:
UV radiation
Photovoltaic panel to provide electricity for the UV lamp.
Pre-filter sand
Pulverized charcoal filter medium
Bed of gravel.
Insulated pipework, valves + fittings
2 x 2,000 liters Cold water storage tanks + fittings & Accessories
Waste Water Pipes:
To include:
100mm Waste (Soil) Pipes + fittings & Accessories
Hydrant Firefighting Services
To include:
pipework, valves + fittings
Boosted cold water packaged pump unit model Hydropak
Hose reels Type: FM, Dry riser equipment
Pressure reducing valves Type LRV 151 (CWDS and boosted CWM
Valves/Strainers
CO2 Fire Extinguishers
To include:
9kg Portable CO2 Fire Extinguishers
Testing + Commissioning
To undertake setting to work, testing and commissioning of the complete
Mechanical Engineering Services Installation, as described and detailed in
the Specifications.
Record Documentation
To prepare ‘As Installed’ Record Drawings together with Operating and
Maintenance Manuals and Tender Conditions
TOTAL LUMP SUM TENDER PRICE: US$
CARRY TO FORM OF TENDER
Signed:…………………………………. Date:
For:……………………………………
Position:……………………………….
319
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND
COMMISSIONING OF 2 X FIXED SPEED HORIZONTAL PRESSURE BOOSTING FIRE
HYDRANT PUMPS FOR OFFICE BUILDING AT REGENT ROAD, HILL STATION,
FREETOWN FOR SIERRA LEONE FIELD OFFICE OF THE AFRICAN DEVELOPMENT
BANK (ADB)
320
SPECIFICATIONS FOR HORIZONTAL FIRE HYDRANT PUMPS
1.0 GENERAL
This document shall be read in conjunction with all relevant commercial documents. In case of
contradiction between technical specification and other documents, data in technical specifications
shall prevail.
1.1 All work under this contract shall be carried out in accordance with the Technical Specification and the
latest revisions of International Standards & Codes, the Sierra Leone Fire Force Services and Norms,
the Electrical Distribution and Supply Authority (EDSA) Rules and Regulations.
BS 2F - 2 Fixed speed pressure boosting pump sets for civil use with 2 MXH
1.2 Construction
The Pressure Boosting Sets with automatic operation shall consisting of 2 (N+1) pumps on a common
baseplate, with suction and delivery manifolds, gate and non-return valves, pressure switches, pressure
gauge, control panel and 800 litres diaphragm tank.
1.3 Operation
The control panel, with electronic card, manages the pump operation, the changeover of pump starting
sequence and it stops the system when there is no air in the tank (patented system).
Pumps starting in a cascade sequence, with a signal from the pressure switches.
1.4 Electrical control panels for fixed speed pump units.
Electrical control panels for pressurization units, all with electronic card with microprocessors, for
managing pump operation.
The microprocessor carries out continuous secure checks during all the various work phases of the
pumps and incorporates all necessary functions, thus reducing electrical and electronic components
inside the panel.
321
In particular:
- Pumps starting in a cascade sequence according to water demand
- Changeover of pump starting sequence.
- Delay start-up of the 2nd pump in case of breakdown of pressure switch 1 or after a power cut
- Avoid pump starting in case of water hammering.
- Activate the alarm when pressure 1 fails.
- Activate the alarm when air cushion in the vessel drops.
- Stop the pump when air cushion is over*.
* Patent pending
1.4 Maximum clarity for all signals
The status of the unit shall be easily identified on the front of the electronic card with the following
signals:
- Power on led.
- No water led.
- Failure led.
- Pump running led (1 for each pump).
- Thermal block led (1 for each pump).
- Pump automatic operation led (1 for each pump).
- Pump stop led (1 for each pump).
1.5 Maximum simplicity of control
The front of the electronic card shall feature the following signals and controls:
- AUT-STOP push-button (1 for each pump)
- MAN push-button (1 for each pump)
- RESET push-button.
1.6 Performance - Fixed speed Pressure boosting sets with 2 Horizontal Centrifugal Pumps
Fixed speed pump Mains: 400V 3~
Motor: 400V 3~
Motor Pres. switch 1 bar Pres. switch 2 bar Maximum
capacity*
Membrane
litre
Vessel
litre
kW HP min max min max Q l/min H m
BS2F-2NMD
32/210C/A
5.5 x 2 7.5 x 2 6 8 5,5 7.5 500 56 500 800
* Maximum pumps flow at minimum setting pressure of 2nd pressure switch.
1.7 Dimensions - Fixed speed Pressure boosting sets with 2 Horizontal Centrifugal Pumps
Fixed speed pump TYPE Connection mm Weight
kg
DN 1 DN 2 Hf Hv h1 h2 L1 L2 m1 B B2
BS2-2NMD
32/210C/A
G 3 G 21/2 890 1370 272 380 460 440 550 700 800 -
Dimensions not binding to be verified when ordering
1.8 The Fixed speed pumps furnished for fire protection service shall be supplied with the specified drivers,
controls and pump accessory items by the pump manufacturer. The pump, driver and control shall be:
� Guaranty by manufacturer against any defects
� Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FM) Approved
� Listed for firefighting and protection service.
322
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK
2.1 The pumping equipment shall be installed at the Sierra Leone Field Office at the African Development
Bank (ADB) as recommended in the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Sierra Leone Fire
Force Services Standard for the Installation of Horizontal Centrifugal Fire Pumps. The fire pump shall
be designed to deliver 500 litres per minute.
The fire pump shall also be capable of delivering not less than 150% of rated flow at not less than
65% rated head.
The pressure boosting pump sets model BS2-2NMD 32/210C/A shall be furnished with driver,
controllers and accessories as detailed in this specification. Pump manufacturer shall have unit
responsibility for the proper operation of the complete unit assembly as indicated by field acceptance
tests.
2.1.1 Preparation of firefighting scheme drawings and submission to the Project Architect and M&E
Engineer for their approval prior to execution of work.
2.1.2 Supply and installation, erection, testing and commissioning of the Sierra Leone Field Office at the
African Development Bank (ADB) Fire Hydrant System with mechanical and electrical equipment,
instrumentation, pipes, valves, fittings, supports, cables etc. complete in all respects, and preparation
& submission of drawings/other documents to the Project Architect, concerned authority the Sierra
Leone Fire Force Services & obtaining interim & final Approval/Sanction/NOC (No Objection
Certificates), during and after execution of work as required.
2.2 Manufacturer's Factory Tests:
Each individual pump shall be hydrostatically tested and run tested prior to shipment. The pump shall
be hydrostatically tested at a pressure of not less than one and one-half times the no flow (shut off)
head of the pump's maximum diameter impeller plus the maximum allowable suction head but in no
case less than 250 psig.
2.3 Field Acceptance Test:
A field acceptance performance test shall be conducted upon completion of pump installation.
The test shall be made by flowing water through calibrated nozzles, approved flow meters or other such
accurate devices as may be selected by the Project Architect and the Sierra Leone Fire Force Services
authority having jurisdiction. The test shall be conducted as recommended in NFPA Pamphlet 20 by
� The installing contractor
� The Project Architect/M&E Engineer
� The owner's representative
� Concerned authority the (Sierra Leone Fire Force Services) having jurisdiction and with that
authority's final approval and acceptance.
Failure to submit documentation of factory and field tests will be just cause for equipment
rejection.
3.0 HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS:
The fire booster pumps shall be of horizontal centrifugal fixed speed (single stage) construction
specifically labelled for fire service and shall be an approved Fire Pump Model
The pumps shall be connected to an underground 75mm fire main system. The suction supply for the
fire pump shall be from an elevated 10m3 storage tanks at a maximum pressure of pounds per square
inch (psig) and a minimum pressure of psig. The pump casing shall be cast iron with inch 125 pound
ANSI rated suction and inch (125), (250) pound ANSI rated discharge flanges machined to
International/National Standards dimensions.
323
4.0 ELECTRIC MOTORS:
The pump driver shall be horizontal foot mounted ball bearing induction motor rated horsepower, 3-
phase, 50Hertz with open drip-proof NEMA enclosure for operation on volt phase service. The motor
locked rotor current shall not exceed the values stated in NFPA Pamphlet 20. The motor shall be
mounted on a steel base common to the pump and shall be connected to the pump with a flexible
coupling protected by a suitable guard. The fire pump manufacturer shall accurately align the pump
and motor shafts prior to shipment. After field installation but prior to grouting the base, a millwright
or similarly qualified person shall check and verify or correct the shaft alignment.
5.0 ELECTRIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS:
The automatic electric motor controller shall be (UL listed), (FM approved) specifically for fire pump
service. The controller shall be designed for
� Full voltage
� Part winding
� Primary resistance reduced voltage
� wye-delta open transition
� wye-delta closed transition
� Auto-transformer
� Solid state (soft start) type starting
The controller shall be rated for the horsepower specified in this specification’s electric motors
section. The controller shall be capable of interrupting a short circuit current at least equal to the
available short circuit current in the controller supply circuit. This fire pump controller installation
requires to withstand ratings of not less than amps RMS symmetrical at an operating voltage of
volts.
The controller shall be:
� Floor or wall mounted for electrical connection to the motor by the equipment installer.
� Mounted on a common base with the fire pump and wired to the motor by the pump manufacturer.
6.0 FITTINGS:
The pump manufacturer shall furnish piping accessory items for the pump installation which will adapt
the pump connections to the fire protection system and test connection as follows.
Fittings subjected to pump discharge pressure shall be ANSI (125), (250) pound rating. Fittings
subjected to suction pressure shall be ANSI 125 pound rating.
� Eccentric tapered suction reducer
� Concentric tapered discharge increaser
� Hose valve test header
� Hose valves with caps and chains
� pump casing relief valve
� Automatic air release valve
� Hose valve head drain valve
� Suction and discharge pressure gauges
7.0 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS
7.1 Brief Description of Fire Hydrant System
7.1.1 Full Scheme (For general information of the tenderer)
2 No. Fire Hydrants Pumps (each electric motor driven) shall be installed in the pump chamber below
ground, pumping water from the 10m3 MDPE above ground water tank. The common outlets of fire
pump delivery system shall cater to the following:
i) Internal First Aid Hose Reels in each floor.
ii) External Fire Hydrants.
324
At the top of each Wet Riser an Air Vessel assembly with Air Relief Valve, a Drain-valve, pressure
gauge etc. shall be provided to take care of pressure surges and also for letting out entrapped air in the
system.
7.2 Operation
Fire Hydrant System & Sprinkler System
Water supply header and main pipe up to hydrant valve/landing valves shall be kept pressurized by the
jockey pump which shall start automatically on receiving the impulse from the pressure switch in case
of any pressure drop in the header. It shall stop at a pre-set pressure as soon as pressure builds up in the
header.
For smaller fires, first aid hose reel would be used; while hydrant valve would be used for bigger fires.
In the event of fire outbreak, opening of hydrant valve/hose reel will result in fall of pressure in the
header and electric motor driven fire pump shall come into operation automatically through the impulse
from the pressure switch. The fire pump shall be stopped manually only.
The setting of the pressure switches shall be done keeping the above sequence in consideration.
a) End suction type, horizontally mounted centrifugal pump, TAC approved, capable to deliver 500
litres per minute (lpm) of clear water at minimum 70 M TDH, coupled to a suitably electric motor
mounted on a common base frame and anti-vibration pads coupling, coupling guard and fixing
bolts etc. Motor HP shall be suitably selected to suit minimum discharge and residual head at the
top most hydrants. The characteristic curve should have a large range of discharge points for
different heads.
7.3 C I Sluice Valve
C I components of the sluice valve shall be of Grey cast iron. The valves shall be flanged having solid
wedge gate valve, inside screw, gate valve with open-close indications etc. all conforming to
International/National but of nominal pressure rating of PN 1.6 as per TAC norms.
Test Pressure at manufacturer’s works
Flange drillings shall normally be as per pump manufacturer standards. However, if the manufacturer
drills the flanges to other standard specifications, the valves shall be supplied with a pair of matching
flanges, nuts, bolts, washers; rubber insertion etc. and such flanges shall have inside threads to suit
pipes of same nominal size as that of the valve.
The quoted price of the valves shall also include cost of arrangement for securing the valves in `open'
or `closed' positions by padlock/rivetted strap, where required per TAC norms.
7.4 G M Valves
Gun metal components of the peets valves i.e. Gate Valves, Check Valves i.e. non-return valves, and
Globe valves etc. shall be of Gun Metal conforming to Grade 2. The valves shall be having flanged or
screwed ends, gate valves with open-close indications etc. all conforming to ASTM and the Sierra
Leone Fire Services Codes.
325
7.5 C I non return valves
C I reflux valves, i.e. swing check type non-return valves, shall be conforming to manufacturer
standards. Test pressures shall be same as per CI sluice valves.
7.6 M S Pipes and Fittings
All M S pipes shall be heavy/medium quality as mentioned in the schedule of items up to 150 mm N
B, (minimum 6 mm thick) construction approved by Fire Standard.
All pipes outside the building shall be laid underground at a depth of 0.6m (approx.) and laying shall
be as per layout drawing, excavation, back filling of earth, cutting holes in existing structure where
necessary, providing puddle collars/pipes as required & making good the damages including making
the concerned portion of the structure water tight.
Erection of over-ground piping shall be complete with necessary pipe supports hangers with MS
angles/plate/nut bolts/clamps etc. with fabrication as required including providing MS puddle
pipes/collars as required for punctures through walls/slabs etc.
Erection of pipe lines shall also include chipping of wall; making holes inside RCC or brick walls, slabs
and necessary civil works for restoration of the surface after completion of erection. The quoted tender
rate shall include all the above works, as well as the cost of route markers for underground pipe lines
as per following specifications.
Route marker with cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm
nominal size) of size 600mm x 600mm at bottoms and 500mm x 500mm at the top with a thickness of
100mm including inscription duly engraved as required (spacing approx. 15m or as directed at site).
No extra payment will be made on this account.
7.7 Gauges/ Switches
a) Pressure Gauges
Pressure gauges with controlling cocks etc. shall be of approved make having pressure range, bourdon
material and dial size as specified in schedule of items.
b) Pressure Switches
Pressure switches with accessories shall be of approved make and design and shall actuate (cut-off'
and/or `make contact' as required) at pre-set pressures.
7.8 Landing Valves (Hydrant Valve)
Gun metal landing valve (Internal/External Fire Hydrants) with oblique type single outlet as per
schedule of quantities complete with hose coupling adaptor of 63mm size, instantaneous spring lock
arrangement and blank cap with chain conforming to International & National Standards. External Fire-
Hydrants to be provided with stand posts as specified in schedule of quantities. Orifice plates may be
provided where inlet pressure is required to be reduced as per WBFS requirement.
7.9 Branch Pipe
Gun metal, short type, instantaneous pattern branch pipe to suit fire hose delivery coupling of 63mm
size complete with G M nozzle of 20mm nominal size conforming to International & National
Standards
326
7.10 Hose with Coupling
63mm nominal internal dia. hose, rubber lined wooven-jacketted coupling with Type-II (Reinforced
Rubber lined type), firefighting delivery hose 25M long each, fitted with gun metal coupling of 63mm
size with multi serrated tail and double instantaneous spring lock arrangement comprising of male half
at one end and female half at other end complete with rubber cup washer and conforming to
International & National Standards.
7.11 Hose Reel
Swinging hose reel conforming to IS 884 & comprising of 3 ply rubber hose of length specified in
schedule of items, 20mm (3/4") nominal bore (25kg/cm2/350psi bursting pressure), mild steel pressed
reel with 170 degree swinging, nozzle of G M chromium plated, with non-jamming controlling handle
which shall stay at the `ON' `OFF' position as set, wall brackets with `U' shaped reel carrier made of C
I complete with 25mm NB G M valve at the inlet, and orifice plates (if necessary for reducing pressure).
7.12 Air Vessel
Mild steel air vessel adequate size to take care of pressure surges during operation of the system and
venting of entrapped air in the system shall be complete with air relief valve, pressure gauge, drain
valve and shut-off valve at the inlet.
7.13 Valve Chamber
Valve chamber of adequate size to accommodate external valves shall be constructed as directed per
site condition.
7.14 Fire-Brigade Connections
Fire-Brigade connections (inlets) to Riser and Above Ground Storage Tanks shall be with one number
of 63mm instantaneous inlets. Other aspects of the connection shall be as the Sierra Leone Firefighting
Codes.
7.15 Painting
All external steel surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove rust, scale etc. before applying the
primer.
a) All underground piping shall be provided protective wrappings as per TAC norms.
b) All over ground piping/hose boxes/landing valves/hose reel, M S frames etc shall be painted with
two (2) coats of RED LEAD primer or equivalent followed by two coats of Post Office Red
coloured Synthetic enamel finish paint.
c) All other equipment shall be given a red oxide/zinc chromate primer and two (2) coats of synthetic
enamel.
8.0 SPECIFICATION (ELECTRICS)
8.1 Controls
i) Electric Motor driven fire & jockey pumps & diesel engine driven fire pump shall start
automatically through pre-set pressure switches in proper sequence as elucidated in Cl. 4.2
above.
ii) Stopping of all fire pumps shall be manual only.
iii) Audio visual alarm shall be sounded when fire pumps start/starts.
iv) Power supply 'ON' indication shall be provided in the Fire Pump Control Panel.
327
8.2 Electric Motors:
The pump driver shall be horizontal foot mounted ball bearing induction motor rated 7.5.horsepower,
3-phase, 50Hz with open drip-proof NEMA enclosure for operation on 400 volt phase service. The
motor locked rotor current shall not exceed the values stated in NFPA Pamphlet 20.
The motor shall be mounted on a steel base common to the pump and shall be connected to the pump
with a flexible coupling protected by a suitable guard. The fire pump manufacturer shall accurately
align the pump and motor shafts prior to shipment. After field installation but prior to grouting the base,
a millwright or similarly qualified person shall check and verify or correct the shaft alignment.
The A C motor shall be approved type & totally enclosed fan cooled and shall have Class B insulation
with degree of protection IP55 conforming to manufacturer’s standards and frame.
The motor shall be suitable for both DOL and STAR/DELTA starting, as required. The motor terminal
box shall be suitable for receiving aluminium/copper cables and suitable for positioning on the motor
body at intervals 90 degree as required for the particular application. The motor shall have also two
distinct terminals for earthing. The motor shall be suitable for 415V (- 15% to + 5% variation) 3-phase
50HZ plus/minus 3% AC supply.
8.3 Motor Control Centre (MCC)
The MCC shall be made of sheet steel of thickness not less than 2mm, totally enclosed, self-supporting,
floor or wall mounted dust and vermin proof cubicle type construction with multitier compartmental
arrangement with degree of protection IP54.
It shall have a panel of uniform height placed with front access for operation as well as cabling. MCC
panel shall be completely front wired type having all device/termination etc., approachable from front
without any requirement of back access for maintenance repairs and cabling. Provision of cable entry
shall be from the top or bottom to match with cable layout of the pump room.
Main fire pump motor shall have star/delta or DOL starting as per TAC requirement. The motor control
circuit shall be provided with test facilities so that it is possible to test the control circuit with the main
motor circuit disconnected. Control voltage shall be 240 V, A C single phase derived from an isolating
MCCB.
The main busbar of the MCC shall be of electrical grade copper and shall have continuous current
rating as required but in no case less than the current rating of incoming switch fuse unit. The busbar
shall be easily accessible from the front of the cubicle and shall be colour coded for phase identification.
A copper earth busbar of adequate cross sectional area shall be provided in the bottom or top part of
the cubicle and shall run for the entire length of the MCC.
Start/stop push button, auto/manual selector switch and indication shall be provided and the MCC for
control of the motor.
Incomer cubicle shall incorporate voltmeter, ammeter with respective selector switches, power factor
meter and phase indication lamps.
Each outgoing cubicles shall have ammeter with selector switch and on/off, trip indication lamps.
Ammeters for incoming/outgoing cubicles, for motor it shall be suppressed scale type beyond full load
rating up to 8 times of full load current for taking care of starting current kicks.
328
8.4 Cables
All power cable types shall be certified and marked in accordance with the British Approvals Services
for Electrical Cables (BASEC) or equivalent. Cables shall be segregated from other services and shall
comply with IEE Specification 034.
All power cables shall be 4-core, XLPE/PVC/SWA/PVC armoured power cable rated for 0.6/1kV with
copper or aluminium conductor cables manufactured and tested as per BS 6724.
8.5 Installation accessories and earthing materials
One lot of installation accessories and earthing material shall be installed for equipment and cables and
earthing of equipment.
8.6 Power supply
For MCC one 415 V, A C 3-Phase and neutral 50HZ feeder of adequate capacity shall be made available
at the MCC incomer.
If the equipment is required to operate at any other voltage, necessary transformers & converters shall
be included in the scope of the tenderer.
329
Item Materials Name of Brand
1. Electrical Motor Driven Fire Pump
a) Pump BS2-2NMD 32/210C/A or Equal approve
b) Motor CROMPTON or Equal approve
2. Anti-vibration Pads Approved quality and make.
3. C I Valves Approved quality and make.
4. G M Valves Leader/Kitz or Equal approve
5. Hydrant valves, Fire Brigade connections, GM
branch pipes, couplings etc.
Minimax/Fireshield or any good brand with
Approved
Certification
6. Fire Hoses Approved make with ISI mark.
7. Hose Cabinet Good quality fabricated as per specification (sample
cabinet to be approved).
8. First Aid rubber hose (for swinging hose reel) Approved quality and make.
9. Power/Control Cables Havell’s or Equal approve
10. Push buttons Siemens/Schneider or Equal approve
11. Pressure Gauge H Guru/Fiebig.
12. Pressure Switches Fiebig.
13. Auto Transfer Switch Havell’s/GE/Emerson.
14. Indicators Lamps Essen/L & T/Siemens or Equal approve
15. Ammeters and Voltmeters Automatic Electric/IMP or Equal approve
16. Portable Extinguishers Approved make bearing relevant BS EN marking on
body as well as the 1st charge of chemicals/gases.
17. Star Delta/DOL Starter Siemens/Schneider/ABB
18. Contractors (Main and Auxiliary) Siemens/Schneider/ABB
19a) Bimetal O/L Relay with single phasing
preventor, combined unit
Siemens/Schneider/ABB
b) Single phasing preventor (Negative sequence
current sensing type)
Schneider/ABB/Siemens
20. XLPE/PVC/SWA/PVC armoured power cable
rated for 0.6/1kV with copper or aluminium
conductor cables manufactured and tested as
per BS 6724 and flexible cables
All cable types shall be certified and marked in
accordance with the British Approvals Services for
Electrical Cables (BASEC) or equivalent.
21. Voltmeter, Ammeter Selector Switch Kaycee or Equal approve
22. Steel Conduits (conforming to IS in all respects
a) Galvanized BEC/NIC/AKG.
b) Black Enamelled BEC/NIC/AKG.
23. MCCB and Accessories Schneider (Compact NSX)/ ABB (T-Max) /Siemens
(3 VL)
24. C T Kappa/Matrix or Equal approve
25. MCB DB, MCB ABB/Schneider/Siemens
All the materials shall be BS/EN/ NFPA marked wherever available from the list of manufacturer given above,
wherever the BS/EN/ NFPA marked materials are not available, the materials shall be from the best quality
available in the market, subject to submission of satisfactory test report with prior approval from the Project
Architect.
330
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF
FM200 GAS FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM FOR OFFICE BUILDING AT REGENT ROAD, HILL
STATION, FREETOWN FOR SIERRA LEONE FIELD OFFICE OF THE AFRICAN
DEVELOPMENT BANK (ADB)
331
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS:
FM200 GAS FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM (Optional item)
Product Description:
HFC-227 finds use in fire suppression systems in data processing and telecommunication facilities, and
in protection of many flammable liquids and gases. HFC-227 falls in the category of Clean Agents and
is governed by NFPA 2001 - Standard for Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems. Effective fire
suppression requires introducing a concentration of the HFC-227 agent between 6.25% and 9%
depending on the hazard being protected. Its NOAEL level for cardiac sensitization is 9%.
Environmental Protection Agency allows concentration of 9% volume in occupied spaces without
mandated egress time, or up to 10.5% for a limited time. Most fire suppression systems are designed to
provide concentration of 6.25-9%.
FM-200 Storage Components - Storage components consist of the cylinder assembly(s), which contains
the FM-200 chemical agent, and the cylinder bracket(s), which holds the cylinder assembly securely in
place.
FM-200 Distribution Components - Distribution components consist of the discharge nozzles used to
introduce the FM-200 into a protected hazard along with the associated piping system used to connect
the nozzles to the cylinder assembly.
Trim Components - Trim components complete the installation of the FM-200 system and consist of
connection fittings, pressure gauge, low-pressure supervisory switch, electric valve actuator, and
manual valve actuator.
Slave Arrangement Components - Slave arrangement components consist of the pneumatic valve
actuator(s), actuation check valve, vent check, actuation hose, and fittings required for a multiple
cylinder (slave) arrangement.
332
Supplemental Components - Supplemental components include the discharge pressure switch and
manifold check valve. They supplement the core equipment or complete a specific multi-cylinder
configuration.
Control Panel - This device monitors the condition of the electric actuator, detectors, warning devices,
cylinder pressure, and any manual release and abort stations. All electric or electronic devices must
connect to the control panel in order to function.
Early Warning Detection and Alarm Devices - Early warning detection devices coupled with manual
release and abort stations maximize system efficiency while audible and visual alarm devices alert staff
of alarm conditions.
FIRE DETECTS AND ALARMS
Fire control panel +smoke and heat detectors
Fire alarm bell +manual button,
Light warning gas discharging
Working pressure 4.2 Mpa or 2.5Mpa
Discharge time ≤ 10s
Filling density: ≤ 950kg/m3
System working power: AC 220V DC 24V 1A
System working pressure: 10c~55C
Working method Manual, auto, and electrical
Product Details (Basic Info.)
Model No: ZF-150
Agent: Hfc-277ea
Type: Transportable Fire Extinguisher
Size: 70kg
Power Source: Pressure Fire Extinguisher
Retirement Life: 10 Years
Portable Extinguisher: Hfc-277ea
Effective Range: 5m
Certification: CE
Dry Powder Type: Ordinary Dry Powder
Object: Class A Fires
Colour: Red
Fire Extinguishing Means: 5.3MPa ~ 5.4MPa
Design Pressure of the Nozzle: Normal 0.7MPa, Min.0.40MPa
Working Temperature: -10 to +60
Discharging Time: Less 10s
Gas Filling Rate (Density): Less 1.15kg/L
Power Supply: DCV 24, 0.5A
Max Protected Area: Max 800m², Max Volume 3600m³
Polit Valve Powder Supply: 6.0± 1.0 Mpa (20c)
System Working Pressure: -10c~55c
333
Installation:
A clean power line directly from Generator Room / Public Power source will feed a control panel in
dedicated room housing UPS system
Power system will include multiple 3-phase online backup units in a redundant parallel configuration
UPS output will be feed to a distribution panel located in the UPS room from where power will be
cabled to servers, lighting, switches, controllers and accessories
Low power overhead lighting will be located in UPS rooms, server rooms and adjacent corridors, all
of which will be powered by UPS
Heat, optical, ionization and carbon monoxide alarms will be installed in server rooms, UPS rooms and
adjacent corridors, and connected to ports on the NetCommander central monitoring system
Automatic Inert Gas Fire extinguishers will be installed in server rooms and UPS rooms in addition to
manual fire extinguishers. Manual fire extinguishers will be installed in corridors
Server rooms will be fitted with a fireproof, fire sealed doors. Windows and other unsealed openings
will also be fire sealed. Seals will be rated for up to 60 minutes. This will allow any gas discharged
from automatic extinguishers in the event of a fire emergency while the room is unoccupied to be
retained within the discharged area long enough to permeate racks and equipment cases where fires
may have started. Poorly sealed rooms incapable of retaining gases long enough and in sufficient
concentrations may render automatic inert gas fire extinguishers less effective.
Multiple IP Cameras will be installed in server rooms, UPS rooms and adjacent corridors. They will
connected to the network and configured to be monitored directly from any authorized computer on the
LAN or across the Internet
At least one IP Camera focused on the entry door will be configured to work with NetCommander to
send a photo alert to designated email accounts every time the door is opened.
Infrared Motion Detectors configured to work with NetCommander will send similar email alerts every
time someone enters the server room.
334
INFORMATION & COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY (ICT) SYSTEM INSTALLATION
335
SPECIFICATION FOR THE SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF
INFORMATION & COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY (ICT) SYSTEM INSTALLATION FOR
OFFICE BUILDING AT REGENT ROAD, HILL STATION, FREETOWN FOR SIERRA LEONE
FIELD OFFICE OF THE AFRICAN DEVELOPMENT BANK (ADB)
336
ICT Terms of Reference
1) WAN Connectivity
The Bank has two type of WAN and Internet connectivity at the current site of Serra Leone Field Office.
VSAT connectivity
Internet Connectivity through local Provider.
The Bank has a contract agreement with the different connectivity providers. The move or transfer of
the VSAT and Internet links will be handled separately by the BANK and the existing connectivity
providers.
2) Network Active Devices
The current network actives devices such as Routers, Switches, Firewalls, Access Points, and servers,
others IT equipment’s and Racks will be transferred from the current site to the new location.
In addition to the existing equipment, the Bank will provide required complementary network
equipment for the new building. When the construction of the building will be on progress, in line with
the Global framework agreement with CISCO and partners to order directly from Cisco the required
network active devices.
The procurement of additional network active device will be handled directly by the BANK.
3) Unified Communication (UC) equipment’s (Voice & Video)
The existing Unified Communication equipment for Voice and Video at the current location will be
transferred to the new location.
In addition to the existing equipment, the Bank will provide required complementary UC equipment
for the new building. When the construction of the building will be on progress, in line with the Global
framework agreement with POLYCOM - MICROSOFT, and partners, The BANK will handle directly
the procurement from POLYCOM - MICROSOFT the required additional UC equipment.
4) Local Area Network Data & Voice Cabling infrastructure standards
To streamline the cabling the Bank has adopted the followings as reference standards among others:
1. ISO/IEC 24764 (Generic cabling for data centers)
2. ISO/IEC 11801:2002 A1 & A2 (Generic cabling for customer premises)
3. and the CENELEC EN 50173-5 (Cabling for data centers)
4. TIA 606-A (Labeling Standard For Networks)
337
Section Cabling system
structure
information
Spécifications Commets G
ener
al
Support Voice, Video and Data
Standard (response
to proposal and
installations will be
tested against the
standard)
Cat 6A, 7, 7A ( cat 7 preferred)
(ISO/IEC 11801:2002 category 7/class F)
Require data sheet from the
service provide.
Installation
requirement
Trucking shall follow the approved color
codes
Trucking facility to allow for
future demands, the cabling
system must be easy to
expand and maintain.
Passive
Components
All proposed components including the
patch cords have to be produced by the same
manufacturer:
The number of passive end
points shall be determined by
the possible number of staff
to be accommodated in any
given area + an increase of 30
%.
Hori
zon
tal
Cab
lin
g
Minimum cabling
type
The horizontal 4 pair cable shall be Category
7 UTP to meet the quality and performance
criteria necessary to ensure correct operation
of the installation for frequencies to 500
MHz and to ensure the compliance with the
warranty. The same standard shall be applied
to patch cords.
The installation design and
routing of all cables shall take
account of the manufacturer
limits as specified in the data
sheet.
Category 7 cable (CAT7), (
are specified in ISO/IEC
11801:2002 category 7/class
F), It is a cable standard for
Ethernet and other
interconnect technologies
that can be made to be
backwards compatible with
traditional CAT5 and CAT6
Ethernet cable.
Network Outlets
(TO)
The RJ45 connector shall be screened to
ensure protection against EMI and for Alien
cross-talk compliance
cabling should take into account the esthetic
and should have a minimum distance of
90cm to 1m between the cables and energy
sources that can cause electromagnetic
disturbances such as energy transformers,
air conditioners
The horizontal cable length
shall not exceed 100 m
copper
300+ m for fiber
Network Outlets
Copper Patch
Panels (RJ45)
Each connector shall provide both T568A
and T568B color code identification for the
pins at the rear of the connector. The punch
down is to be in accordance with the T568B
color code. Reassignment of pairs shall not
be accepted
The number of network
outlets shall be dependent on
the number of staff per given
area.
To avoid installation errors, the wire
organizer of the snap-in connector must be
identified by the same standard color coding
as the wires.
338
All network outlets shall be provided with
labeling and identification. A transparent
window shall protect the labeling tag.
Cable labeling matrix shall be
part of the infrastructure
acceptance test
Patch panels must have 19” equipment
practice dimensions to permit mounting in
standard cabinets, racks or bays
Copper Patch
Panels (RJ45)
Patch Cords
All patch panels must be equipped with a
cable management mechanism that provides
strain relief, earthling and grounding features
The presentation of the Patch Panel must
provide for sliding mechanism for proper
labeling.
In the rack, the Patch Panels shall be
separated by metallic patch-guides that have
a closed front to protect the patch cords. The
height of these guides will be 1U or 2U
depending on the layout of the rack.
The Patch Panel shall provide an automatic
contact with the metal frame of the cabinet in
order to ensure grounding.
To achieve a Class EA Channel
performance all Patch Cords shall be
minimum of Category 7.
Uplinks
All uplinks must be color coded in RED
AND BLUE to differentiate the links to the
core ( backbone)
The uplink connects the core
(backbone in the server
Room) to the Floor
Distribution switches for the
Voice, data video services.
Back
bon
e C
ab
lin
g
All up links shall be with multimodal optical
fiber
The service provider shall provide the choice
between the 2 different types of fibers
described below:
.The Enhanced OM2 or OM3 fibers
providing warranted extended distance for
the transmission of high rate data, voice and
video signals and which shall be available to
avoid limitations due to bottlenecks in the
longest building and campus backbone links.
The choice of fiber will be made according
to the present and future bandwidth needs for
the longest OF backbone links
For interconnecting
buildings, exterior cabling,
single mode fiber should be
used.
The OM3 or OM3 enhanced fibers shall be
used to ensure the transmission of the signal
over 300 (or 450 m) meters at 850nm. Please
refer the table for the fiber below.
This is to allow for distances
between buildings.
Optical fiber Patch Panels shall be mounted
in 19” frames of the cabinets. The patch
panels shall be supplied with adaptors fitted
and equipped with a mechanism that ensures
the retention and support of incoming cables.
339
Direct Termination of the connectors (LC) on
to the fibers as well as splicing of pigtails
(LC) should be possible
Active equipment
& panels
connections
In order to trace patching between the active
equipment ports and the cabling termination
patch panels, the ports of the active
equipment should be properly documented
and labelled. Fixed permanent label are
required
Identification/labeling
scheme should be in line with
TIA-606-A
All equipment room cabinet shall be in 42U
cabinet
For an orderly cord storage and easy to
management of cable installation, the
following accessories may be used:
Closed 1 or 2 HU patch guides between the
patch panels;
Lateral cable rings installed at both sides of
the frames. The patch rings should be easily
removable by rotation and have to be located
on the front rails of the 19” frames in the
cabinets.
The cabinets shall be able to
host all standard types of
active and passive
equipment and provide
facilities for extension to
form a suite of cabinets with
no modification to the
structure.
All equipment room cabinet
shall be 42U
(600x800mm)minimum
340
Cab
inet
an
d R
ack
s in
stall
ati
on
Cabinet
arrangement
sample as shown in
the diagram below.
Please the arrangement of the cabinets
should ensure that:
1. Front rails of cabinets must be recessed
to provide adequate room for patch
cables and Wire management
accessories.
2. Adequate space for cable management
3. Arrange switches and minimize patching
between cabinets & racks
4. Perforated tiles at front cabinets
5. One edge of cabinets placed at edge of
tile
W
irel
ess
Wi-Fi survey to be
undertaken for the
locations. Cabling
should however be
internal as
standard
The Wireless access points should be
installed based on Wi-Fi survey and should
meet 801.1n standard
Sp
ace
im
pact
of
cab
lin
g s
yst
ems
1. Allocate adequate space and careful plan
location of network areas (MDA HDAs,
Entrance Rooms, Telecom
2. Provide adequate space and coordinate
location of cabling pathways.
3. Space in server cabinets for patch panel
and cable management
En
ergy E
ffic
ien
cy –
Path
ways
Overhead cabling
as standard.
Overhead cabling requirement should be
considered in the design of the Ceiling
heights to permit rails.
The overhead cabling will
reduce losses due to airflow
obstruction and turbulence.
For old Data centers where
overhead cabling was not
part the requirement, all
improvement work must
ensure that :
all cabling under floor use
smaller diameter cable
conduits or alternative
network architectures to
reduce cabling volumes
• the cabling network must
avoid blocking airflow
to/from cabinets,
ventilated tiles, A/C, IT, and
telecom equip
En
ergy
Eff
icie
ncy
–
Tem
per
atu
re
& H
um
idit
y DC Rooms, Equipment Rooms,
– Temperature: 18 – 27 °C (64 – 81 °F)
– Max Relative Humidity: 60%
– Max dew point: 15 °C (59 °F)
– Min dew point: 5.5 °C (42 °F) to control
ESD
341
Ele
ctri
cal
cab
lin
g s
ecuri
ty
The electrical cabling used to power
Network and the telecommunications
infrastructure should comply with industry
best practices. Especially the following
must be observed:
-Electrical cabling will be run separately
from data cabling
-There should be a telecommunication
earthing different from the building general
earthing.
-All the active devices should be connected
to the earthing
-All the telecommunications cabinets,
closets
should be connected to the earthing
-All the telecommunications devices should
be powered though double conversion UPS
system.
There should be lightening arrestor to
Protect the building and surge protection to
Protect the Infrastructure. Especially, there
should be a surge protector on all PSTN
lines.
342
Docu
men
tati
on
The provider
should provide
documentation in
soft and hard copies
The physical installations of network passive
and active devices must have detailed
documentation that include information:
All products used
The entire system as implemented and
based on the validated initial design
A diagram of each type of distribution
points relative to MDA
A comprehensive overview of the
installation.
A ground plane locating each sub-system
installation.
The plans of the different levels of the
building with the location and
designation endpoint relative to HDA
The installation shall be subjected to test on
completion:
The set of tests that may be conducted may
include:
The connectivity test of the copper
The test made fiber ( end-to-end)
The type and serial number of the testing
devices used must be specified.
The name of the operators ( Service provider
Engineers and approving officer)
Cabling should be certified against category
6A or 7 specifications and full tests This
certification will provide the length of each
cable, the rate of packet loss, the resistance,
impedance result made available in
electronic format
343
5) IT CABLING - REQUIREMENTS
A. Cabling base principles:
1. The trucking shall be made of 3 compartments inside.
2. Each network position workstation has one cable that extends to the equipment room. This
cable, known as the cables UTP category 7 will be used for horizontal cabling requirements.
3. Each uplink will operate at 1000 Mbps. The Uplinks will connect the different switches from
the floors to the servers Rooms. The uplink is multimodal optical fiber.
4. All the network points and cables from each floor will be connected to the patch panel located
in a VDI room at the same floor. The DVI room will be connected by fiber to the server room
located at the ground floor.
5. Total Positions shall be based on the design (site drawing) and number of staff regarding offices
allocation.
I. IT NETWORK CABLING
Required functions
Minimal
technical
compliance
Quantity Unit
Price
Total
price
Country
of origin
Identification
Supply, installation and
commissioning of all the cabling,
trucking and outlets for a
1000Base T network.
UTP Cat 7
A - Each Office will be equipped with positions configured as follows
PS PSLT LT
Each Network position is composed
of:
2 RJ-45 Outlets (LAN and Phone)
2 Regulated Power Supply(UPS)
outlets
01 normal power outlet ( not on
UPS )
Number of Network positions per office according to Staff allocation
Office for 1 person 2
Office for 2 persons 3
Office for 3 persons 4
Videoconference / Meeting Room
according to the number of sets. 8- 10
344
i. List of the equipment for the ground Floor
Designation Unit Quantity Unit
Price
Total
Price
Country
Origin
Supply and installation of a 19-inch rack 42U,
800 x 800 with integrated 4 PDU of 6 power
Socket for each PDU.
Unit 1
Supply and installation of Cat 7 UTP Cable for
cabling
ML
Supply and installation of RJ45 data port Cat 7
UTP for each position
Unit
Supply and installation of Regulated Power
and normal power cable and outlets for each
position
Unit
Supply and installation of trucking 180x50
with 3 compartments
ML
Supply and installation of connection cable for
workstations 3m UTP RJ45 Cat 7
Unit
Supply and installation of patch cord 1m UTP
RJ45 Cat 7
Unit
Supply and installation of RJ45 and ripple
curent support
Unit
Supply and installation of patch panel 24 port
RJ45 UTP Cat 7
Unit
Supply and installation of ferrules, elbows, tea Ens 1
Provision of labeling, certification and wiring
diagrams
Ens 1
Grounding of all equipment and connect all
ground together to main grounding.
Ens 1
Network point for Wireless Access points. will
be fixed at the walk or under the ceiling for
the ground Floor
Unit 2
Server Room cabling Ens
Supply and installation of optical fiber patch
panel LC/LC with integrated connector 24
ports
Supply and installation of optical fiber patch
cable LC/LC connector 05 m
Unit 12
IP TV (walk mounted) Network position at the
ground floor for information display
Unit 02
Total for all Items i
NB: refer to the design (plan & drawing) and site visit to confirm the required quantities.
345
ii. Dedicated UPS for IT equipment
Basic Features
Quantity
Unit
Price Total price
Country
Origin
Identification
10 kVA UPS, furniture, installation, and maintenance.
UPS will be switched to the regulated power coming from
the main Regulated Power Supply equipment. Online
Technology double convection; should be racked in the
Server room (Ground Floor). Input/output 3 phase/3
phase; 380 volt. Management RJ45 port with SNMP
capability
1
Services
Installation Lumpsum
Warranty period 2 years
Maintenance cost per year after Warranty Lumpsum
Sub-total ii
iii. List of the equipment for First Floor
Designation Unit Quantity Unit
Price
Total
Price
Country
Origin
Supply and installation of a 19-inch rack 12U, 600 x
600 with integrated 2 PDU of 6 power Socket for each
PDU.
Unit 1
Supply and installation of Cat 7 UTP Cable for cabling ML
Supply and installation of RJ45 data port Cat 7 UTP
for each position
Unit
Supply and installation of Regulated Power and
normal power cable and outlets for each position
Unit
Supply and installation of trucking 180x50 with 3
compartments and accessories
ML
Supply and installation of connection cable for
workstations 3m UTP RJ45 Cat 7
Unit
Supply and installation of patch cord 1m UTP RJ45
Cat 7
Unit
Supply and installation of RJ45 and ripple current
support
Unit
Supply and installation of patch panel 48 port RJ45
UTP Cat 7
Unit 02
Provision of labeling, certification and wiring
diagrams
Ens
Grounding of all equipment at First Floor and connect
to the main grounding.
Ens
Network point for Wireless Access points. will be
fixed at the walk or under the ceiling for the Ground
Floor
Unit 3
Supply and installation of optical fiber patch panel
LC/LC with integrated 12connectors
Unit 01
Supply and installation of multimodal optical fiber
patch cable LC/LC connector 05 m
Unit 3
Supply and installation of multimodal optical fiber
Cable with 06 optical fiber strands connecting First
Floor to Server room at Ground floor
ML
346
IP TV (walk mounted) Network position at the First
floor for information display
Unit 02
Total for all Items iii
NB: refer to the design (plan & drawing) and site visit to confirm the required quantities.
iv. List of the equipment for Second Floor
Designation Unit Quantity Unit
Price
Total
Price
Country
Origin
Supply and installation of a 19-inch rack 12U,
600 x 600 with integrated 2 PDU of 6 power
Socket for each PDU.
Unit 1
Supply and installation of Cat 7 UTP Cable for
cabling
ML
Supply and installation of RJ45 data port Cat 7
UTP for each position
Unit
Supply and installation of Regulated Power
and normal power cable and outlets for each
position
Unit
Supply and installation of trucking 180x50
with 3 compartments and accessories
ML
Supply and installation of connection cable for
workstations 3m UTP RJ45 Cat 7
Unit
Supply and installation of patch cord 1m UTP
RJ45 Cat 7
Unit
Supply and installation of RJ45 and ripple
current support
Unit
Supply and installation of patch panel 48 port
RJ45 UTP Cat 7
Unit 02
Provision of labeling, certification and wiring
diagrams
Ens
Grounding of all equipment at First Floor and
connect to the main grounding.
Ens
Network point for Wireless Access points. will
be fixed at the walk or under the ceiling for
the Ground floor
Unit 3
Supply and installation of optical fiber patch
panel LC/LC with integrated 12 connectors
Unit 1
Supply and installation of multimodal optical
fiber patch cable LC/LC connector 05 m
Unit 3
Supply and installation of multimodal optical
fiber Cable with 06 optical fiber strands
connecting second floor to Server room at
Ground floor
ML
IP TV (walk mounted) Network position at the
Second floor for information display
Unit 02
Total for all Items iv
NB: refer to the design (plan & drawing) and site visit to confirm the required quantities.
347
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS:
Raised Server Room Floor:
A raised floor is provided for in the equipment room. Raised floors in equipment rooms usually serve
the following purposes:
A distribution system for conditioned cold air
Tracks, conduits, and/or supports for data cabling
Conduits for power cabling
A copper ground grid for grounding of equipment
For this option to be warranted, an equipment room at least four times the size of the current extended
space combined with space utilization at least ten times the present level will be required. Even if an
equipment room of the present size reached its equipment saturation point, the number of racks in a
row will be limited by the maximum width of the room to no more than three deep. At that depth cold
air blowing across the room will still be adequate for cooling. Only racks in the middle of the room will
benefit from under floor cabling, which can be achieved as easily from overhead, through the ceiling
and via overhead trays.
The proposed optional raised floor will consist of:
600 sq. mm modules constructed with a high density
particle board core enclosed by four pieces of PVC
strips and galvanized steel sheets on top and bottom
Top finish in anti-static HPL, fire retardant material
Pedestal mount with locator pad and stringer with
fasteners
Designed to provide electrical continuity, excellent rigidity, durability, and acoustic
performances